Today's Hours: 8:00am - 6:00pm

Books

  • Digital
    Felmet Gernot.
    Summary: This book describes all aspects of a purely biological approach to knee ligament reconstruction that entirely avoids the use of foreign materials in a manner analogous to the use of dowels in carpentry. The technique, referred to as Ball-press-fit reconstruction was developed by the author in 1995 for anterior cruciate ligament (ACL) reconstruction and has since been further developed so that it is now applicable to all knee ligaments and also osteochondral autologous transplantation surgery. It has the advantages of maintenance of individual biological resources (no bone loss), rapid rehabilitation, and excellent clinical outcomes in terms of stability and anchoring. This book explores subtle clinical and technical diagnostics and provides step-by-step descriptions of the various surgical techniques used by the author. Readers will also learn about the history of ACL reconstruction and the results achieved to date, sources of graft for ACL replacement, the surgical instrumentation required for press-fit fixation, the healing response, and procedures for revision of re-rupture. In addition, rehabilitation and prevention programs are fully described for every level of athletic activity. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Overview Anatomy
    Use and overuse of the knee
    Diagnostic
    History of ACL reconstruction
    History of material free ACL-Reconstruction
    Press fit fixation
    Surgical techniques
    Healing response
    Revision of Re-Rupture
    OATS / Mega OATS
    Rehabilitation
    Return to sports & competition.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    David R. Thomas, Gregory A. Compton, editors.
    Summary: Pressure Ulcers in the Aging Population: A Guide for Clinicians is a resource primarily aimed at physicians interested in the fundamentals of wound care. This book is written for geriatricians, internists, general practitioners, residents and fellows who treat older patients. Unlike other wound texts on the market, the book addresses the specific issues of wound prevention and management in older individuals.The text emphasizes proper documentation and elements of the team care process. There is up to date information on skin changes at the end of life and the concept of unavoidability.Chapters are written by experts in their fields and include such evolving topics as deep tissue injury and the newer support surface technologies.

    Contents:
    1.The Biology of Wound Healing / David R. Thomas
    2.Incidence and Prevalence of Pressure Ulcers / Dan Berlowitz
    3.Prevention of Pressure Ulcers / Theodore M. Johnson
    4.Assessment and Documentation of Pressure Ulcers / Kathrin Raeder
    5.General Principles of Pressure Ulcer Management / David R. Thomas
    6.Local Wound Treatment in Pressure Ulcer Management / David R. Thomas
    7.Surgical Management of Pressure Ulcers / Dean P. Kane
    8.The Role of Nutrition in the Management and Prevention of Pressure Ulcers / David R. Thomas
    9.Assessment and Management of Wound Colonization and Infection in Pressure Ulcers / Gregory A. Compton
    10.Palliative Wound Care and Treatment at End of Life / R. Gary Sibbald
    11.Quality of Care / Janet Cheng
    12.Legal Aspects of Pressure Ulcer Care / Gregory A. Compton
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Hiroshi Sameshima, editor.
    Summary: This splendid volume presents numerous aspects of preterm labor and delivery, from its fundamental mechanism to clinically focused approaches. The incidence of preterm delivery is 6-7% in Japan, while globally up to 10% of pregnancies with preterm labor result in premature delivery. The rates of overall survival and intact survival of the premature infants are also excellent in Japan. Thus Japans approach to preterm labor and delivery has long attracted attention. In each chapter, experts describe specific issues unique to conditions in Japan, including diagnosis, tocolytic agents, definition of clinical chorioamnionitis, treatment of bacterial vaginosis, role of amniocentesis, management of preterm premature membrane rupture and also placental pathology, presenting definitive evidence of the reduced incidence of preterm delivery in Japan. This book benefits not only obstetricians, pediatricians and gynecologist, but also midwives, nurse practitioners, and medical and associated staffs in the field of obstetrics, pediatrics, as well as neonatal and perinatal medicine who are involved in delivery.

    Contents:
    Part I. Preterm labor: A challenge 1. Preterm labor: impacts on perinatal ecology
    2. Definition and diagnosis of preterm labor
    3. Epidemiology and incidence of preterm delivery
    Part II. Preterm labor and intrauterine infection and inflammation 4. Subclinical intrauterine infection
    5. Clinical and subclinical intrauterine infection/inflammation
    6. Cervical changes 1: morphological and biochemical changes
    7. Cervical changes 2 : USG findings
    Part III. Other mechanisms related to preterm labor 8. Multiple mechanisms of preterm labor other than intrauterine infection
    9. Abruption and preterm labor
    Part IV. Prevention, Treatment, and Management 10. Prevention and Tocolytic agents 1
    11. Prevention and Tocolytic agents 2
    12. Tocolytic agent 3
    13. Antibiotics for preterm labor
    14. Probiotics for preterm labor
    15. Progesterone
    16. Cerclage 1: general
    17. Cerclage 2: abdominal vs vaginal
    18. Bacterial vaginosis
    19. Antenatal corticosteroid
    20. Mode of delivery of premature infants
    21. Management of pPROM in general
    22. Prevention of PTB: meta-analysis
    Part V. Preterm Newborn 23. The preterm newborn: Morbidity and Mortality
    Part VI. Placental Pathology 24. Placental pathology
    Part VII. Research Frontier 25. Research frontier.-.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jami F. Young, Laura Mufson, Christie M. Schueler.
    Contents:
    Importance of depression prevention
    IPT-AST overview
    Selecting adolescents to participate in IPT-AST
    IPT-AST individual pre-group sessions
    IPT-AST initial phase
    IPT-AST middle phase
    IPT-AST mid-group session
    IPT-AST termination phase
    IPT-AST booster sessions
    Conducting IPT-AST in schools
    IPT-AST with adolescents at varying levels of risk and in diverse settings
    Common clinical issues
    Review of empirical evidence for IPT-AST.
    Digital Access Oxford [2016]
  • Digital
    developed by American Academy of Pediatrics, American Public Health Association, National Resource Center for Health and Safety in Child Care and Early Education.
    Summary: Help prevent childhood obesity with the latest national standards describing evidence-based best practices in nutrition, physical activity, and screen time for early care and education programs.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital/Print
    A Prüss-Ustün, J Wolf, C Corvalán, R Bos and M Neira.
    Contents:
    Acronyms and abbreviations
    Preface
    Executive summary
    1. Introduction
    2. Methods: Estimating the environmental burden of disease
    The environment: A contextual determinant of health
    The link with social determinants of health
    What is meant by the population attributable fraction of a risk factor?
    Estimating the population attributable fraction
    Comparative risk assessment
    Calculations based on limited epidemiological data
    Disease transmission pathway
    Expert survey
    Combining risk factors for individual diseases
    Estimating the burden of disease attributable to the environment
    Estimating uncertainties
    3. Results: A systematic analysis of fractions attributable to the environment, by disease Infectious and parasitic diseases
    Infectious and parasitic diseases
    Respiratory infections
    Diarrhoeal diseases
    Intestinal nematode infections
    Malaria
    Trachoma
    Schistosomiasis
    Chagas disease
    Lymphatic filariasis
    Onchocerciasis
    Leishmaniasis
    Dengue
    Japanese encephalitis
    HIV/AIDS
    Sexually transmitted diseases
    Hepatitis B and C
    Tuberculosis
    Other infectious and parasitic diseases
    Neonatal and nutritional conditions
    Neonatal conditions
    Protein-energy malnutrition
    Noncommunicable diseases
    Cancers
    Mental, behavioural and neurological disorders
    Cataracts
    Hearing loss
    Ischaemic heart disease
    Stroke
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Asthma
    Musculoskeletal diseases
    Congenital anomalies
    Other noncommunicable diseases
    Risks factors for noncommunicable diseases from other areas but related to the environment
    Overweight and obesity
    Physical inactivity
    Unintentional injuries
    Road traffic accidents
    Unintentional poisonings
    Falls
    Fires, heat and hot substances
    Drownings
    Other unintentional injuries
    Intentional injuries
    Self-harm
    Interpersonal violence
    The link between the environment and demographics
    Global results of the analysis by disease and population subgroups
    Disease specific results
    Age differences
    Gender differences
    Regional and country differences
    Trends
    4. Discussion: Leveraging environment-health links
    Environment, health and the Sustainable Development Goals
    Strengths and weaknesses of the analysis
    5. Conclusion: Towards healthy environments
    Key findings
    Reducing the burden of unhealthy environments
    Annexes
    Annex 1. WHO Member States and country groupings by income region
    Annex 2. Results tables
    Annex 3:. Technical annex on methods
    Annex 3.1. Calculation of population attributable fractions
    Annex 3.2. Combination of risk factors for one disease: Additional information
    Annex 3.3. Additional information on estimation of PAFs for selected diseases
    References
    Acknowledgements
    Photo credits.
    Digital Access WHO 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA565 .P78 2016
    1
  • Digital/Print
    World Health Organization.
    Summary: "Far too many people around the world know the pain of losing a loved one to drowning. Each year almost 360 000 people die from drowning--over 90% of them in low- and middle income countries. More than half of these deaths are among those younger than 25, with children aged under 5 facing the greatest risk. Drowning is the third leading cause of death worldwide for those aged from 5 to 14. Despite these tragic facts, drowning prevention gets relatively little attention and few resources. There is far more we can do to prevent drowning. Global commitments made as part of the Sustainable Development Goals, for example, cannot be met as long as this preventable cause of death is left largely unchecked. All of us--policymakers, parents, non-profit organizations, businesses and concerned citizens--can help prevent drowning. Explaining how is the goal of this guide. Building on the World Health Organization's 2014 Global report on drowning, the following pages provide practical, step-by-step guidance on how to implement 10 effective measures to prevent drowning. They range from community-based solutions, such as day care for children and barriers controlling access to water, to effective national policies and legislation around water safety, including setting and enforcing boating, shipping and ferry regulations. Data show that all of these solutions can help save lives. The more we work together to implement the measures outlined in this guide, the more lives can be saved. We urge all concerned to adopt as many of the interventions and strategies as their resources will allow, and to protect those most vulnerable without delay."--Page iv.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Situational assessment for drowning prevention interventions and strategies
    Section 2. Interventions to prevent drowning
    Provide safe places away from water for pre-school children
    Install barriers controlling access to water
    Teach school-age children (aged over 6 years) swimming and water safety skills
    Build resilience and manage flood risks and other hazards
    Train bystanders in safe rescue and resuscitation
    Set and enforce safe boating, shipping and ferry regulations
    Section 3. Strategies to support drowning prevention interventions
    Promote multisectoral collaboration
    Strengthen public awareness of drowning through strategic communications
    Establish a national water safety plan
    Research: advance drowning prevention through data collection and well-designed studies
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access WHO 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA1076 .P748 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Kim Maryniak, Robbie Garrett.
    Summary: This book informs nurses about the most common and the more serious errors made in caring for patients with infectious diseases. It provides learnings about a variety of infectious diseases, including COVID-19, methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA), Vancomycin-resistant Enterococcus (VRE), Clostridium difficile (C-diff.), and tuberculosis (TB), amongst others. Factors that are predisposing and contributing factors for nursing errors are reviewed. The types of errors, consequences, detection, and monitoring for nursing errors are included. This book examines how errors can be avoided with necessary precautions, and managed appropriately based on current evidence-based practice. Recommendations for further study are also provided. This book is a useful tool for nurse educators/ leaders/mentors to educate and guide their students and professional nurses.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Predisposing and contributing factors for nursing errors
    Chapter 3. Types of errors
    Chapter 4. Consequences of nursing errors
    Chapter 5. Monitoring for and detecting nursing errors
    Chapter 6. Best practices to prevent nursing errors
    Chapter 7. Recommendations for further study
    Chapter 8. Summary and Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Amber Hogan Mitchell.
    Summary: This book is a practical guide for preventing occupational exposures to bloodborne and infectious disease in health care. It is a timely and essential resource given that people working in healthcare settings sustain a higher incidence of occupational illness than any other industry sector, and at the time of publication of this book we are in the midst of a global pandemic of COVID-19. While the guide is focused on health care primarily, it would be useful for preventing exposures to essential workers in many other industries as well. The guide offers easy-to-follow instruction, all in one place, for creating, implementing, and evaluating occupational health and safety programs. Readers have practical information that they can use now to either build a new program or expand an existing one that protects workers from occupationally associated illness and infection. With a focus on the public health significance of building better, safer programs in health care, the book provides not just the evidence-based or data-driven reasoning behind building successful programs, but also includes sample programs, plans, checklists, campaigns, and record-keeping and surveillance tools. Topics explored among the chapters include: • Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulatory Compliance • Other Regulatory Requirements, National Standards, and Accreditation • Performing a Hazard Assessment and Building an Exposure Control Plan • Engineering Controls and Safer Medical Devices • Personal Protective Equipment Placement and Use • Facing a Modern Pandemic Preventing Occupational Exposures to Infectious Disease in Health Care is a comprehensive resource for both seasoned and novice professionals with primary, secondary, or ancillary responsibility for occupational or employee health and safety, infection prevention, risk management, or environmental health and safety in a variety of healthcare or patient care settings. It also would appeal to those working in public health, nursing, medical, or clinical technical trades with an interest in infection prevention and control and/or occupational health and infectious disease.

    Contents:
    1. IntroductionThe introduction to the guide describes why it serves as a resource to be used by those with the greatest responsibility of all The concepts of the industrial hygiene hierarchy of controls are introduced. The hierarchy is an evidence-based method to help readers build, design, and evaluate preventive strategies that provide the highest and most productive levels of protection. It also provides information on workers' rights, whistleblowing, and personnel-based opportunities for change. 4. Microbiology
    Chapter 4 provides a background on the most epidemiologically important microbes likely to be an occupational exposure risk Serving as a Microbiology 101 for non-microbiologists. It can be incorporated into new employee onboarding or annual refresher training. It describes how microorganisms propagate and transmit and why some microorganisms cause disease (are pathogenic). It provides control strategies to mitigate exposure risk for personnel, leadership, and the communities they serve. It also highlights the critical elements of Post-Exposure Prophylaxis and Antimicrobial Stewardship Plans. 5. Regulatory Compliance; OSHA StandardsThere are surprisingly few regulatory standards or laws that apply to occupational infection prevention and control. The bulk of the standards are promulgated by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). This chapter provides in-depth information on the elements of OSHA Standards applicable to infectious disease in health care, including the Bloodborne Pathogens, Respiratory Protection, and Personal Protective Equipment Standards.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    John Henden.
    Contents:
    About the author
    Foreword
    Acknowledgments
    How to use this book
    The book?s : style and purpose
    Defining suicide and self-harm
    Current service provision : risk assessment, management and medication
    Other approaches to helping the suicidal
    What is solution focused brief therapy?
    Suicide encounters : the crucial first ten minutes
    The solution focused approach in working with the suicidal
    Case study : reg and "the demons calling from the deep"
    Some more case vignettes
    Connecting with people and the shift towards suicide mitigation
    Working on the phone with the suicidal person
    Blaming those who take their lives
    International solution focused applications to suicide prevention
    Zero suicides : should this be our goal?
    Where do we go from here?
    Appendix 1 flow diagram for an episode of treatment
    Appendix 2: specialist solution focused training workshops
    References
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: "Suicides are preventable. Even so, every 40 seconds a person dies by suicide somewhere in the world and many more attempt suicide. Suicides occur in all regions of the world and throughout the lifespan. Notably, among young people 15-29 years of age, suicide is the second leading cause of death globally. Suicide impacts on the most vulnerable of the world's populations and is highly prevalent in already marginalized and discriminated groups of society. It is not just a serious public health problem in developed countries; in fact, most suicides occur in low- and middle-income countries where resources and services, if they do exist, are often scarce and limited for early identification, treatment and support of people in need. These striking facts and the lack of implemented timely interventions make suicide a global public health problem that needs to be tackled imperatively. This report is the first WHO publication of its kind and brings together what is known in a convenient form so that immediate actions can be taken. The report aims to increase the awareness of the public health significance of suicide and suicide attempts and to make suicide prevention a higher priority on the global public health agenda. It aims to encourage and support countries to develop or strengthen comprehensive suicide prevention strategies in a multisectoral public health approach. For a national suicide prevention strategy, it is essential that governments assume their role of leadership, as they can bring together a multitude of stakeholders who may not otherwise collaborate. Governments are also in a unique position to develop and strengthen surveillance and to provide and disseminate data that are necessary to inform action. This report proposes practical guidance on strategic actions that governments can take on the basis of their resources and existing suicide prevention activities. In particular, there are evidence-based and low-cost interventions that are effective, even in resource-poor settings. This publication would not have been possible without the significant contributions of experts and partners from all over the world. We would like to thank them for their important work and support. The report is intended to be a resource that will allow policy-makers and other stakeholders to make suicide prevention an imperative. Only then can countries develop a timely and effective national response and, thus, lift the burden of suffering caused by suicide and suicide attempts from individuals, families, communities and society as a whole."--Preface, page 03.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowlegements
    Executive summary
    Introduction
    Global epidemiology of suicide and suicide attempts
    Suicide mortality
    Suicide attempts
    Risk and protective factors, and related interventions
    Health system and societal risk factors
    Community and relationship risk factors
    Individual risk factors
    What protects people from the risks of suicide?
    The current situation in suicide prevention
    What is known and what has been achieved
    What are countries doing about suicide prevention now?
    Current legal status of suicide around the world and perspectives for change
    Working towards a comprehensive national response for suicide prevention
    How can countries create a comprehensive national strategy and why is it useful?
    How can progress be tracked when evaluating a national suicide prevention strategy?
    The cost and cost-effectiveness of suicide prevention efforts
    The way forward for suicide prevention
    What can be done and who needs to be involved?
    Forging a way forward
    What does success look like?
    Key messages
    References
    Annexes
    Annex 1. Estimated numbers and rates of suicide by sex and age, 2000 and 2012
    Annex 2. WHO Member States grouped by WHO Region and average income per capita.
    Digital Access WHO 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC569 .P725 2014
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Amy A. Eyler, Jamie F. Chriqui, Sarah Moreland-Russell, and Ross C. Brownson.
    Contents:
    Policy and prevention / Amy A. Eyler and Ross C. Brownson
    Policy explained / Shelley Golden and Sarah Moreland-Russell
    Policy theory / Sarah Moreland-Russell and Marissa Zwald
    Policy analysis / Jamie F. Chriqui and Sabrina K. Young
    Social determinants / Jason Q. Purnell, Sarah Simon, Emily B. Zimmerman, Gabriela J. Camberos, and Robert Fields
    Tobacco / Sarah Moreland-Russell and Shelley Golden
    Obesity and food policy / Jamie F. Chriqui and Christina N. Sansone
    Physical activity / Amy A. Eyler and Marissa Zwald
    Alcohol policy / Richard A. Grucza and Andrew D. Plunk
    Infectious disease / William G. Powderly
    Injury prevention / David A. Sleet and Frederic E. Shaw
    Violence / Melissa Jonson-Reid, Janet L. Lauritsen, Tonya Edmond, and F. David Schneider
    Sexual behavior / Bradley Stoner
    Illicit drug use / Duane C. McBride, Yvonne M. Terry-McElrath, and Curtis W. VanderWaal
    Tracking and surveillance / Jamie F. Chriqui and Amy Eyler
    Communication / Harry T. Kwon and David E. Nelson
    Advocacy / Roberta R. Friedman and Marlene B. Schwartz
    Next steps / Ross C. Brownson and Amy A. Eyler.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Raja A. S. Mukherjee, Neil Aiton, editors.
    Summary: This book presents clinical assessment and management solutions for those people who are exposed to Alcohol in Pregnancy. Over the last few decades we have begun to understand the enduring effects of prenatal alcohol exposure on the developing fetus. The consequence of prenatal alcohol exposure - Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorders is a lifelong disorder and affects children and adults. It is a condition which is significantly under-recognised for many reasons. Assessment and diagnosis requires the input of multiple different professionals, and referral pathways are often poorly developed or non-existent. Information to support and guide these professionals in practical ways, what to do and how to help, remains limited. This book seeks to fill some of that gap by offering professionals, clear and useable research-based information and guidance that will help in their practice whilst also being a useful resource for anyone new to this increasingly recognised area of work. The book is divided into four broad areas bringing together chapters authored by experts in their field including those with lived experiences. Part one focuses on presenting an overview of the condition, and approaching women about their alcohol use and risk followed by part two focusing more around diagnostic issues. Part three follows with management advice, and part four revolves around policy and health prevention in general. Each chapter is designed to offer insight but also practical tips and support in an accessible manner. The book offers an essential guide for a broad range of health and social care professionals working with this condition.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Overview FASD
    Alcohol and pregnancy: why is the evidence so confusing
    Pathology of FASD: a brief overview
    Knowledge and prevalence of FASD in communities
    Ethics of consuming alcohol in pregnancy
    Part 2 Prevention
    Public health strategies and FASD
    Alcohol related harm and recognition
    Brief interventions for alcohol using women
    Midwifery approaches to recognising drinking in pregnant women
    Social care issues in manging high risk families
    Part 3 Recognition
    Physical stigmata in FASD
    Ruling out other disorders related to FASD: a diagnosis of exclusion
    Growth problems in FASD
    Psychometric testing and FASD
    Communication assessments used in FASD
    Sensory processing in FASD
    Overlapping diagnoses in FASD
    Recognising a FASD child in the classroom
    Attachment and FASD
    Changing pattern of presentation in people with FASD with age
    Psychiatric difficulties in people with FASD
    Multidisciplinary approaches to FASD
    Part 4 Management
    Managing withdrawal in babies born to mothers abusing
    Development of commissioning awareness
    Clinical pathways for accessing care: including the role of the advocate
    Medication use in people with FASD
    Psychological therapies for FASD
    Educational strategies for people with FASD
    Social care needs for people and families with FASD
    Envornmental modifications and management of sensory issues for people with FASD
    Family support needs and the role of support groups.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bjørg Marit Andersen.
    Summary: This volume offers extensive information on preventive and infection surveillance procedures, routines and policies adapted to the optimal infection control level needed to tackle today’s microbes in hospital practice. It especially focuses on preventive measures for serious hospital infections. Each chapter includes a practical section that addresses the main aspects of procedures and treatment, and a theoretical section that contains updated documentation that can be used for further study, or to help select infection control measures. Infection control concerns all healthcare professional working directly or indirectly with patients; in diagnosis, treatment, isolation measures, operations, equipment, drugs, cleaning, textiles, transport, porter service, food and water, building and maintenance, etc. Hygiene and environmental control is central to infection prevention for patients, visitors and staff alike. Good hygienic practices, individual infection control, well implemented and frequent environmental cleaning, and a high professional standard of hygiene in the treatment and care of patients, are essential to patient safety and a safe working environment. Addressing this essential topic, this book is intended for doctors, nurses and other healthcare workers, students in health-related subjects, hospital managers and health bureaucrats, as well as patients and their families.

    Contents:
    Healthcare Associated Infections (HAI), registering and prevalence
    Microbes and ways of transmission
    Antimicrobials and resistance
    Tracing and prevention of infections
    Prevention of infections in Healthcare workers (HCW)
    Hand hygiene and the use of gloves
    Protection of Airways
    Isolation to protect against microbial transmission
    Care of patients; patient hygiene, mouth hygiene, treatment of wounds etc.
    Protection against airborne infections; ventilator equipments: use, cleaning and disinfection; ventilator associated pneumonia (VAP) etc.
    Prevention of postoperative wound infections
    Surgical hand disinfection
    Operation department- prevention of infections
    Treatment of operation wounds and drains
    Peritoneal dialysis
    Hemodialysis
    Catheter-associated, bloodborne infections
    Prevention of urinary tract infections
    Protection of premature and newborne against infections
    Intensive patient treatment
    prevention of infections
    ^Cystic fibrosis
    infections and preventive measures
    Important patient information before admission
    Import infections, unknown infection – preventive measures
    HCW exposed for infections
    Preventing transmission in healthcare institutions
    Disinfection of instruments and equipment
    Disinfection of endoscopes and other special equipment
    Sterilization
    Medicine room; hygiene and infection control
    Cleaning of patient rooms and departments
    Disinfection of rooms and areas
    Textiles; wash, control, transport and store
    Patient beds; wash, control, transport and store
    Human-biological waste; treatment, storing cleaning, control
    Ambulances in acute medicine and other transport of patients
    Food and other nourishment; service, dishwashing and control of hygiene
    Water and water systems in hospitals
    Technical and medical-technical equipment – infection control
    Laboratory medicine – infection control
    ^Building, arrange and establish on wards/departments
    Intern hygiene control – check list
    Dangerous microbes – preparedness in hospitals
    Resources for infection control work in hospitals.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Weizhong Yang, editor.
    Summary: This book systematically assesses the risk of 21 major infectious diseases threatening BRI countries. It consists of 14 chapters. Chapter 1 is an overview. Chapter 2 introduces the history of health cooperation between China and other BRI countries. Chapters 3-14 introduce the prevalence of major infectious diseases threatening BRI countries such as cholera, vaccine preventable diseases (polio, measles, meningitis, Japanese encephalitis, diphtheria, hepatitis A), tuberculosis, influenza, and insect-borne diseases (Dengue fever, Zika virus disease, yellow fever, Chikungunya, Rift Valley fever), plague, malaria, Ebola virus disease, MERS, schistosomiasis, COVID-19 and AIDS, and risk factors, principles and cases of their prevention and control. It is a useful reference book in the research of infectious disease control and prevention, and provides historical experience and lessons learned. It also provides decision support for international cooperation among BRI countries in the field of epidemic prevention and control in the future.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    2 Health Cooperation between China and Other Belt and Road Countries
    3 Cholera Risk Assessment, Control and Prevention
    4 Risk Assessment and Control on Vaccine-Preventable Diseases
    5 Risks of Tuberculosis Prevention and Control
    6 The Risk and Prevention and Control of Influenza
    7 The Risk, Prevention, and Control of Arthropod-borne Infectious Diseases
    8 Plague Risk and Prevention
    9 Malaria Risk and Control
    10 Ebola Virus Disease Risk and Control
    11 Risk and Prevention of Middle East Respiratory Syndrome (MERS)
    12 Schistosomiasis Risk and Prevention
    13 COVID-19 Risk and Control
    14 Risk of AIDS and Its Prevention and Control.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    comp. by Professional Service Dept., Frederick Stearns & Company Division.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F551 .S79 1944
    1
  • Digital
    Kristian Thorborg, David Opar, Anthony Shield, editors ; foreword by Michael Kjær.
    Summary: This innovative book presents the latest insights into hamstring strain injuries (HSI), one of the most common problems in elite and recreational sport, with a unique focus on prevention and rehabilitation. The research within this area has evolved rapidly over the past 10 years and this text offers a comprehensive overview of the recent and most relevant advances. It fills a gap in the literature, since other books focus on muscle injuries in general and their surgical treatment. Structured around the current evidence in the field, it includes sections on functional anatomy and biomechanics; basic muscle physiology in relation to injury and repair; assessment of risk factors; and factors associated with hamstring strains. It also discusses considerations in relation to acute and chronic injuries and hamstring injury prevention, including pre-season and in-season interventions, as well as management strategies and rehabilitation protocols. The final chapter is devoted to additional interventions when conservative rehabilitation and injury prevention fail. Written by renowned experts in the field, this book will be of great interest to sports physiotherapists, sports physicians, physical trainers and coaches.

    Contents:
    1 Functional anatomy and biomechanics
    2 Basic muscle physiology in relation to hamstring injury and repair
    3 Assessment of risk factors and factors associated with hamstring injury
    4 Diagnosis considerations in relation to acute and chronic hamstring injuries, including imaging, and muscle injury classification systems
    5 Hamstring injury prevention including both pre-season and in-season interventions and management strategies
    6 Rehabilitation of hamstring injuries, both acute and chronic
    7 Rehabilitation of hamstring ruptures
    8 Return to sport after hamstring injuries
    9 Optimising hamstring muscle strength and function for performance
    10 When conservative rehabilitation and injury prevention fails. (This will include injections, surgery etc.).
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Michael J. Wilkinson, Michael S. Garshick, Pam R. Taub, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses all aspects of non-pharmacologic approaches to primary and secondary CVD prevention. It highlights the strength of evidence for particular diet styles in CVD prevention, including plant-based diets, the Mediterranean diet, the DASH diet, and low-carbohydrate diets. Chapters present evidence and future directions for diet and nutrition in diseases related to CVD, such as dyslipidemia, cardiometabolic disease (pre-diabetes, the metabolic syndrome, type-2 diabetes mellitus), and obesity. Finally, the book reviews novel and emerging aspects of dietary intervention in CVD prevention, such as dietary approaches to inflammation and the role of the microbiome in CVD. Up-to-date, evidence-based, and clinically oriented, Prevention and Treatment of Cardiovascular Disease: Nutritional and Dietary Approaches is an essential resource for physicians, residents, fellows, and medical students in cardiology, clinical nutrition, family medicine, endocrinology, and lipidology.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Role of Dietary Nutrition, Vitamins, Nutrients and Supplements in Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 2. Impact of Nutrition on Biomarkers of Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 3. The Mediterranean Dietary Pattern
    Chapter 4. Dietary Approaches to Hypertension: Dietary Sodium and the DASH Diet for Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 5. The Impact of Carbohydrate Restriction and Nutritional Ketosis on Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 6. Plant Based Diets in the Prevention and Treatment of Cardiovascular Disease
    Chapter 7. Plant-Based Oils
    Chapter 8. Prevention and Treatment of Obesity for Cardiovascular Risk Mitigation: Dietary and Pharmacologic Approaches
    Chapter 9. Fasting for Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 10. Optimal dietary approaches for those living with metabolic syndrome to prevent progression to diabetes and reduce the risk of cardiovascular disease
    Chapter 11. Optimal diet for diabetes: Glucose control, Hemoglobin A1c reduction, and CV risk
    Chapter 12. Dietary and Lifestyle Cardiometabolic Risk Reduction Strategies in Pro-inflammatory Diseases
    Chapter 13. Dietary approaches to lowering LDL-C
    Chapter 14. Lifestyle approaches to lowering triglycerides
    Chapter 15. Role of the Microbiome in Cardiovascular Disease
    Chapter 16. Dietary and nutritional recommendations for the prevention and treatment of heart failure
    Chapter 17. Dietary Considerations for the Prevention and Treatment of Arrhythmia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Marco Colizzi, Mirella Ruggeri, editors.
    Summary: The book brings together into a single text the interrelated but different research efforts to translate the current evidence on risk and outcome of severe mental disorders into a preventive perspective. The book also introduces a holistic approach to prevention in mental health, by combining biological, psychological and environmental evidence that attempts to blunt the risk and reduce the number of individuals with mental health vulnerabilities who eventually progress to the manifestation of a severe mental disorder. Finally, the book wants also to highlight the possibility to overcome the single disorder-oriented preventive approach in an attempt to intercept a wider at-risk youth population and explore clinical research areas underperformed where future efforts will have to concentrate. Mental health problems have their peak of incidence during the transition from childhood to young adulthood, interesting up to 20% adolescents. Half of those eventually developing such difficulties experience clinically relevant mental distress by the age of 14. Even more importantly, the symptomatic onset is generally anticipated by non-specific warning signs of psychosocial impairment potentially evolving in any severe mental disorder. This is of crucial importance, as almost one in two health problems contributing to the global disease burden across the 0-25 age span is a mental disorder. The search for preventive strategies among youth has developed over the past 2-3 decades, invigorated by a rethinking of mental disorders' ineluctable prodromal phase into a period where the trajectory of illness can be slowed down, blunted, or even halted. The paradigms for implementing preventing approaches in mental health have often developed independent of each other. This book aims at summarizing the available evidence and make a step towards a more mature vision of the potentialities of promotion and prevention in mental health.

    Contents:
    Part 1. General aspects and paradigms
    1. Gender and mental health prevention: when differences matter
    2. Clinical staging of psychiatric disorders: its utility in mental health prevention
    3. The Role of Psychopharmacology in Mental Health Prevention
    Part 2. Areas for intervention and improvement
    4. Postpartum (Puerperal) Psychosis: Risk factors, Diagnosis, Management and Treatment
    5. Childhood trauma and mental health: never too early to intervene
    6. Promoting positive parenting to prevent mental health problems
    7. Neurodevelopmental Disorders and Psychosocial Issues Later in Life
    8. Migration and mental health: from vulnerability to resilience
    9. Tackling Urbanicity and Pollution in Mental Health Prevention Strategies
    10. Is there room for anti-stigma interventions in mental health preventive programs?
    11. Combined prevention for substance use and mental health problems in youth: A glance at two conditions at high-risk for addiction
    12. Enhancing cognition in people with mental health vulnerabilities
    13. Targeting metabolic abnormalities in mental health prevention strategies
    14. Imaging in Psychiatry: a reappraisal of preventative potential
    15. Functional neurological symptoms: a potential sentinel of neurological and mental health disorders
    Part 3. Future perspectives
    16. Unmet therapeutic needs in psychotic illness: the gut-microbiome-endocannabinoid axis as a target for the development of new preventative strategies
    17. Prodromal dementias with Lewy bodies: a paradigm for identifying people at ultra-high risk
    18. Neglected vulnerabilities in mental health: where do we need to do more.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Almudena Sánchez-Vellegas, Ana Sánchez-Tainta.
    Summary: The Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease through the Mediterranean Diet presents dietary habits that will have maximum impact on cardiovascular health and other major chronic diseases. Data collected through the results of large clinical trials, such as PREDIMED, one of the longest trials ever conducted, has allowed researchers to conclude that the Mediterranean Diet provides the best evidence for health benefits. Studies have shown that the Mediterranean Diet is able to reduce the risk of cardiovascular hard clinical events by 30%. This book explores the components of this diet, including the consumption of extra virgin olive oil, nuts, fresh fruits and vegetables, fatty fish, poultry and red wine for optimal health benefits. Analyzes the results of clinical trials that show that a healthy dietary pattern can prevent cardiovascular and other major chronic diseases. Explores the components of The Mediterranean Diet in detail, allowing practitioners to pass this understanding on to patients for optimal health benefits. Contains recipes, including modified versions for special populations or different cultures.

    Contents:
    A healthy-eating model called mediterranean diet / Almudena, Sánchez-Villegas and Itziar Zazpe
    Epidemiological and nutritional methods / Estefanía Toledo
    Not all fats are unhealthy / Ligia J. Dominguez and Mario Barbagallo
    Virign olive oil / Almudena Sánchez-Villegas and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    A small handful of mixed nuts / Maira Bes-Rastrollo and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    Fruits and vegetables / Angeliki Papadaki and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    Cereals and legumes / Karen J. Murphy, Iva Marques-Lopes and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    More fish, less meat / Mary K. Downer and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    Red wine moderate consumption and at mealtimes / Alfredo Gea and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    The mediterranean lifestyle / Ignacio Ara
    A healthy diet for your heart and brain / Almudena Sánchez-Villegas and Elena H. Martínez-Lapiscina
    The mediterranean cook / María Soledad Hershey and Ana Sánchez-Tainta.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Jadelson P. Andrade, Fausto J. Pinto, Donna K. Arnett, editors.
    Contents:
    Global burden of non-transmissible chronic diseases.- A global perspective about cardiovascular diseases.- Value of primary prevention for cardiovascular diseases.- How to estimate cardiovascular risk.- Tobacco and alcohol control
    preventable risk factors.- Physical inactivity: preventable risk factor for cardiovascular diseases.- Diet and cardiovascular health: global challenges and opportunities.- Raised blood cholesterol: preventable risk factor for cardiovascular diseases.- Hypertension: primary health care approach.- Diabetes: a primary health care approach
    Risk factors in childhood and youth.- Other determinants in cardiovascular diseases: social impact, globalization and urbanization.- Genetics of cardiovascular diseases.- Cardiovascular diseases in women: an update
    Rheumatic heart disease: a neglected condition.- Chagas disease.- Prevention and control of cardiovascular: policies, strategies and prevention.- Prevention and control of cardiovascular in low income countries.- Prevention and Control of cardiovascular: What Works?.- Prevention and control of cardiovascular: integrated and complementary strategies.- Post-traumatic stress disorders and cardiovascular diseases.- Individual interventions for prevention and control of cardiovascular diseases.- Social mobilization on prevention and control of cardiovascular diseases.- Frugal Innovation: Solutions for Sustainable Global Cardiovascular Health.- Atrial fibrillation and stroke prevention.- A global alliance for cardiovascular diseases prevention in clinical practice.- Priority areas for cardiovascular research.- Evidence for preventing cardiovascular diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ruth Solomon, John Solomon, Lyle J. Micheli, editors.
    Summary: Focusing exclusively on injury treatment and prevention in the young dancer, this comprehensive text addresses the unique needs of these athletes and stresses how their bodies differ in significant ways from adults', requiring that their training and clinical management be overseen by specialized personnel. The book opens with a discussion of the epidemiology of injury in the young dancer, followed by a description of screening procedures and a sample screening program. Physical therapy and resistance training are then covered, along with common conditions and injuries at the spine, hip, knee, and foot and ankle complex. Additional chapters discuss the use of diagnostic and interventional ultrasound, nutrition and bone health, psychological issues such as anxiety, eating disorders and peer relationships, and lastly the prevention of degenerative hip injuries. Prevention of Injuries in the Young Dancer is an essential resource with regard to the physical and psychological challenges facing young performers. It is relevant reading for dance medicine, sports medicine, and orthopedic professionals, as well as dancers, their parents, and especially those persons who promote their careers.

    Contents:
    Machine-generated contents note: 1. Epidemiology of Injury in the Young Dancer / Amy X. Yin
    2. Screening the Young Dancer: Summarizing Thirty Years of Screening / Itzhak Siev-Ner
    3. A Screening Program for the Young Dancer: Perspectives on What and Why to Include in a Screen / Maribeth Crupi
    4. Physical Therapy Rehabilitation for the Young Dancer / Maribeth Crupi
    5. Resistance Training for Pediatric Female Dancers / Avery D. Faigenbaum
    6. Spine Conditions in the Young Dancer / Joana L. Fraser
    7. Hip Injuries in the Young Dancer / Mininder S. Kocher
    8. Knee Problems in the Young Dancer / Marina G. Gearhart
    9. Foot and Ankle Injuries in the Adolescent Dancer / Nancy J. Kadel
    10. The Use of Diagnostic and Interventional Ultrasound in Treating and Preventing Injuries in the Young Dancer / Pierre d'Hemecourt
    11. Nutrition, Bone Health, and the Young Dancer / Derrick D. Brown
    12. Psychological Issues Facing the Injured Adolescent Dancer / Katherine L. Wilson
    13. Preventing Degenerative Hip Injuries from a Dance Technique Perspective / Ruth Solomon, Professor Emerita.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Olivia I. Okereke, editor.
    Contents:
    Prevention of Major Depression: A Global Priority
    The Framework for Prevention
    Social and Behavioral Risk Factors for Late-life Depression
    Prevention of Depression in Medical Conditions
    Vascular Depression and the Role of Neuroimaging and Biomarkers
    Measurement and Assessment in Late-life Depression
    Applications I: Indicated Prevention
    Applications II: Selective and Universal Prevention of Late-life Depression
    Health Policy and Economic Aspects of Late-life Depression Prevention
    Depression among Blacks during Late Life: Examining Within Group Variations
    Global Priorities and Possibilities.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Zili Sloboda, Hanno Petras, Elizabeth Robertson, Ralph Hingson, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides a serious examination of substance use prevention research and practice as components of the continuum from health promotion through to prevention and health care in sub-groups and in the general population. Extensive background chapters provide portals into the evolution of the field and the cutting edge research being conducted on the etiology, epidemiology, and genetics of substance use and abuse. The global nature and health burden of substance use and abuse incorporates assessments of the serious problems related to the prevention of legal substance use (i.e., alcohol and tobacco) and how lessons learned in those arenas may apply to the prevention of illicit substance use. Research and practice chapters detail a range of effective evidence-based programs, policies and practices and emerging prevention interventions from the literatures on the family and school contexts in addition to innovations involving mindfulness and the social media. Continued advancements in substance use prevention research, practice, training, and policy are projected. Included among topics addressed are: Progression of substance use to abuse and substance use disorders The tobacco prevention experience: a model for substance use prevention? Policy interventions: intended and unintended influences on substance use Qualitative methods in the study of psychoactive substance use Use of media and social media in the prevention of substance use Supporting prevention science and prevention research internationally The array of research accomplishments and real-world methods presented in Prevention of Substance Use merits the attention of a variety of researchers and practitioners, including public health professionals, health psychologists, and epidemiologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Kris Bosworth, editor.
    Summary: This straightforward volume makes a strong, practical, research-based case for integrating prevention programs into middle and high schools. Written by experts in prevention science and education, it examines educational goals and prevention of risky behaviors as parallel and complementary processes and provides evidence for health-promoting schools as a critical forum for student development. Chapters show the benefits of this collaboration, as instructors engage with prevention content, prevention scientists study schools and create interventions, and counselors develop and implement activities, resulting in improved academic, social, and health outcomes. Examples of successful prevention strategies address personal and public health issues as varied as substance abuse, dating violence, dropping out, and suicide. Among the topics covered: Engaging school leaders in prevention Developing school-based prevention curricula Scaling up evidence-based prevention interventions and practices Conducting prevention research and evaluation in schools Promoting a positive school climate and culture Reducing disruptive behavior, violence, and bullying Child and school psychologists, administrators, teachers, school counselors, and prevention specialists will find significant common ground in Prevention Science in School Settings. The breadth and depth of coverage point to new, multidisciplinary directions in health education, school climate/culture, and positive youth development.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Section 1: How Schools Work.- The American Education System 1970-Present
    Leadership in American Schools
    Counselors' Impact on Schools
    Teachers on the Frontline of Prevention Science
    Health Education and Health Services
    Section 2: Prevention Science
    Prevention Science: From Birth of the Field in 1970 to the Present
    Curriculum Development
    Scaling Up
    Section 3: Research in and with Schools
    Schools as Venues for Prevention Programming
    Evaluating and Researching School-Based Prevention
    School as a Unit of Analysis
    Section 4: Parallels between Education and Prevention Science
    Culture and Climate
    Social-Emotional Learning (SEL)
    Behavior and Discipline (Including Violence and Bullying)
    Suicide
    Dropout Prevention
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Godrey Grech, Iris Grossman, editors
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Preventive and predictive genetics: a perspective
    Roadmap to drug development enabled by pharmacogenetics
    Pharmacogenetics, statistical considerations
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacogenetics: bringing the magic bullet closer to reality
    Pharmacogenetics of adverse drug reactions
    Pharmacogenomics for haemoglobinopathies therapeutics
    Pharmacogenetics of neurodegenerative disorders
    Pharmacogenetics of asthma
    Pharmacogenetics and antineoplastic therapies
    Pharmacogenetics of coumarin anticoagulant therapy
    Implementation of genomic medicine: tools and challenges
    Ethical considerations in the genomic era
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Mary S. Fewtrell, Ferdinand Haschke, Susan L. Prescott.
    Contents:
    Early nutrition as a major determinant of 'immune health' : implications for allergy, obesity and other noncommunicable diseases / Prescott, S.L. (Australia)
    The future of infant and young children's food : food supply/manufacturing and human health challenges in the 21st century / Venter, C.; Maslin, K. (UK)
    Infant feeding : foods, nutrients and dietary strategies to prevent allergy / Beyer, K. (Germany)
    Using food and nutritional strategies to induce tolerance in food-allergic children / Nowak-Wȩgrzyn, A. (USA)
    Summary on allergy / Prescott, S.L. (Australia)
    Interrupting intergenerational cycles of maternal obesity / Gillman, M.W. (USA)
    Development, epigenetics and metabolic programming / Godfrey, K.M., Costello, P., Lillycrop K. (UK)
    Endocrine and metabolic biomarkers predicting early childhood obesity risk / Socha, P. (Poland), Hellmuth, C. (Germany), Gruszfeld, D. (Poland), Demmelmair, H., Rzehak, P., Grote, V., Weber, M. (Germany), Escribano, J., Closa-Monasterolo, R. (Spain), Dain, E., Langhendries, J.-P. (Belgium), Riva, E., Verduci, E. (Italy), Koletzko, B. (Germany), for the European Childhood Obesity Trial Study Group
    Effects of early nutrition on the infant metabolome / Hellmuth, C., Uhl, O., Kirchberg, F.F., Grote, V., Weber, M., Rzehak, P. (Germany), Carlier, C. (Belgium), Ferre, N. (Spain), Verduci, E. (Italy), Gruszfeld, D., Socha, P. (Poland), Koletzko, B. (Germany), for the European Childhood Obesity Trial Study Group
    Postnatal high protein intake can contribute to accelerated weight gain of infants and increased obesity risk / Haschke, F. (Austria), Grathwohl, D., Detzel, P., Steenhout, P., Wagemans, N. (Switzerland)
    Summary on obesity prevention / Haschke, F. (Austria)
    Complementary feeding : taste, eating behavior and later health
    Can optimal complementary feeding improve later health and development? / Fewtrell, M.S. (UK)
    Learning to eat : behavioral and psychological aspects / Birch, L.L., Flatt, W.P. (USA)
    The development of flavor perception and acceptance : the roles of nature and nurture / Forestell, C.A. (USA)
    Dietary patterns during complementary feeding and later outcomes / Emmett, P.M. (UK)
    Nature and nurture in early feeding behavior / Cooke, L. (UK)
    Summary on complementary feeding : taste, eating behavior and later health / Fewtrell, M.S. (UK).
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Sumita Mehta, Anshuja Singla, editor.
    Summary: This book explores all aspects of preventive oncology of the female genital tract and provides readers with detailed insights on the topic. Preventive oncology has long been recognized as a pressing need, though formally few steps have been taken to actively promote it. The book's respective chapters holistically cover the concept of cancer prevention for the female genital tract & breast. In addition, it explains the evidence-based value of each screening modality, and the rationale behind the recommended screening guidelines. In closing, the book highlights a wealth of recent evidence-based literature, making it a highly informative resource that will significantly broaden readers' understanding of preventive oncology.

    Contents:
    HPV epidemiology in prevention of cervical cancer
    Cytology versus HPV testing for primary prevention
    Methods of HPV testing: clinical implications
    Novel biomarkers for HPV detection
    Colposcopic principles & tissue basis
    Colposcopic features of cervical intraepithelial lesions
    HPV vaccines
    Cervical cancer screening in pregnancy
    Cervical cancer screening in low resource settings
    Ablative methods for treatment of intraepithelial lesions
    CIN 2 lesions: management dilemmas
    Follow up after treatment of CIN
    Epidemiology/Risk factors of endometrial cancers
    Role of cytology
    Hysteroscopy and cancer prevention
    Premalignant lesions of endometrium? Endometrial hyperplasia
    Hereditary endometrial cancers & prevention
    Chemoprevention of endometrial cancers
    Ovarian malignancy: risk factors
    Role of tumor markers
    Sonographic screening
    Role of prophylactic surgery/oophorectomy
    Risk factors for breast malignancy
    Role of breast examination/CBE
    Facts about mammography
    Cancer risk & genetic testing
    What's new in breast screening
    Classification of vulval lesions
    Vulvoscopy: the way forward
    Vulval intraepithelial lesions(VIN): diagnosis & management
    Vaginal intraepithelial lesions(VAIN)
    Screening guidelines for cervical cancer
    Screening guidelines for endometrial cancer
    Recommendations for ovarian cancer screening
    Breast cancer screening strategies
    Case discussions on various scenarios of different premalignant conditions of cervix, endometrium, breast & ovary.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ed Schoonveld.
    Contents:
    Pt. A. Drug market access and pricing basics
    pt. B. Structured market access and pricing approaches
    pt. C. Developing an integrated global strategy
    pt. D. Market access and pricing strategy implementation
    pt. E. Key healthcare systems.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Marty Makary, MD.
    Digital Access OverDrive 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA410.53 .M336 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Guido Gasparri, Michele Camandona, Nicola Palestini, editors ; foreword by Francesco Corcione.
    Contents:
    1 History of parathyroids
    2 Surgical anatomy of the parathyroid glands
    3 Parathyroid hormone secretion and action
    4 Etiology and pathogenesis of Primary hyperparathyroidism
    5 Clinical manifestations of Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    6 Diagnosis and differential diagnosis of Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    7 Management of Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    8 Preoperative localization for parathyroid surgery in Primary and Secondary Hyperparathyroidism
    9 Pathology of the parathyroid glands
    10 Parathyroid exploration for Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    11 Minimally invasive parathyroid surgery (MIP)
    12 Surgical technique in reoperations
    13 Genetic syndromes associated with primary hyperparathyroidism
    14 Parathyroid carcinoma
    15 Hypocalcemia after parathyroidectomy
    16 Secondary hyperparathyroidism in adult predialysis and dialysis patients
    17 Indications for parathyroidectomy in end-stage renal disease and after renal transplantation
    18 Patient information in Primary and Secondary Hyperparathyroidism.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Kenneth Cardona, Shishir K. Maithel.
    Summary: The incidence of primary and metastatic liver tumors is rising and the therapeutic armamentarium for these tumors is expanding at a rapid pace. As surgery remains the primary treatment modality for these tumors, this book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the art review of the current state of surgical, locoregional and systemic therapy options for malignant liver tumors. It serves as a valuable resource not only for surgeons, oncologists, and clinicians but also for researchers with an interest in malignant liver tumors. Chapters focus on the therapeutic approach to primary and metastatic tumors, providing an up-to-date review on surgical approach, new imaging techniques, patient selection, and technical considerations for liver resection and transplantation. In addition, the text provides new insight into novel and evolving therapies in the areas of advanced surgical techniques and liver-directed arterial based and ablative therapies. Written by experts in their fields, new and evolving approaches in diagnosis and treatment are described and lend insight into contemporary knowledge. Primary and Metastatic Liver Tumors: Treatment Strategy and Evolving Therapies serves as a useful resource for clinicians and researchers managing and treating patients with these challenging malignancies, and provides a concise yet comprehensive summary of the current status of the field that guides patient management and stimulate investigative efforts.

    Contents:
    Liver Resection and Liver-directed Therapies for Non-colorectal, Non-neuroendocrine Liver Metastases
    Radiographic Assessment for Liver Tumors
    Liver Transplantation for Hepatocellular Carcinoma: The Challenge of Organ Availability
    Surgical Approach in Hepatocellular Carcinoma: Resection Versus Transplantation
    Locoregional Therapies in the Management of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma: Role of Radiation Therapy
    Medical Therapy Options for Advanced Disease
    Guidelines for Resection of Intra-Hepatic Cholangiocarcinoma
    Regional Liver Directed Therapies for Intrahepatic Cholangiocarcinoma
    Role of Radiation Therapy for Intrahepatic Cholangiocarcinoma
    Current and Emerging Medical Therapies for Advanced Disease
    Pathological Classification and Surgical Approach to Hepatic Adenomas
    Regional Therapies for Hepatic Adenoma
    Preinvasive Cystic Neoplasms of the Intra- and Extrahepatic Bile Ducts
    Pre-malignant Cystic Neoplasms of the Bile Duct
    Colorectal Liver Metastases: Patient Selection and Surgical Approach
    Ablative Techniques for Colorectal Liver Metastases
    Hepatic Arterial Therapy for Colorectal Liver Metastases
    Hepatic Artery Infusion Therapy for Colorectal Cancer Liver Metastases
    Neuroendocrine Tumor Liver Metastases: Selection and Surgical Approach
    Liver-directed Therapies for Neuroendocrine Metastases
    Systemic Therapy for the Management Of Neuroendocrine Tumor Liver Metastases
    Patient Selection Guidelines for Resection and Liver-Directed Therapies: Non-colorectal, Non-neuroendocrine Liver Metastases
    Liver transplantation for Other Cancers
    Radiation Therapy for Liver Metastases
    MRI-guided Laser Ablation of Liver Tumors
    Hepatic Artery Infusion Therapy for Primary Liver Tumors
    Two-staged Approach to Liver Resection.
    Digital Access Springer 201220
  • Digital
    Thomas S. Roukis, Christopher Bibbo, Murray J. Penner, Mark A. Prissel, Gregory C. Berlet, Christopher F. Hyer, Markus Wunschel, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Part I: Introduction
    History of total ankle replacement in North America.- Survivorship of First, Second, and Third Generation Total Ankle Replacement Systems.- Fixed versus Mobile Bearings in Total Ankle Arthroplasty.- Total Ankle Replacement Based on Worldwide Registry Data Trends.- Total Ankle Replacement versus Ankle Arthrodesis.- Current Indications and Contraindications for Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    Part II: Primary Total Ankle Replacement.- Primary INBONE Total Ankle Systems.- INFINITY® Total Ankle System.- Prophecy: Preoperative Navigation Alignment Guides.- Primary Salto Talaris Total Ankle Prosthesis.- STAR Technique.- Primary Zimmer Trabecular Metal Total Ankle Replacement
    Part III: Secondary Procedures with Total Ankle Replacement.- Managing Wound Healing Complications after Total Ankle Replacement.- Managing Varus and Valgus Mal-alignment during Total Ankle Replacement.- Managing soft-tissue ankle equinus and anterior/posterior translation of the talus during total ankle replacement.- The science behind peri-prosthetic aseptic osteolysis in toal ankle replacement.- Management of Periprosthetic Cystic Changes after Total Ankle Replacement.- Arthroscopic débridement for soft-tissue impingement after total ankle replacement.- Managing heterotopic ossification after total ankle replacement.- Management of painful malleolar gutters after total ankle replacement.- Managing varus and valgus mal-alignment after total ankle replacement.- The Role of Peri-Articular Osteotomies in Total Ankle Replacement
    Part IV: Revision Total Ankle Replacement.- Failure and Success of Current Total Ankle Replacements Used in the United States.- Revision of aseptic osteolysis with and without component subsidence after total ankle replacement.- Management of the Infected Total Ankle Replacement.- Primary and revision total ankle arthroplasty in Japan.- Alternate Incision Approaches to Revision Total Ankle Replacement.- The Learning Curve Associated with Revision Total Ankle Replacement.- Revision of Failed Primary Agility and Agility LP Total Ankle Replacements.- Revision of the Failed INBONE Total Ankle Systems.- The Salto Talaris XT revision total ankle replacement system.- Revision of the failed STAR total ankle replacement.- Ankle and tibio-talo-calcaneal arthrodesis after failed total ankle replacement.- Ankle Arthrodesis and Malunion Takedown to Total Ankle Replacement.- Limb Salvage Techniques Following Failed Total Ankle Replacement. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Thomas S. Roukis, Christopher F. Hyer, Gregory C. Berlet, Christopher Bibbo, Murray J. Penner, editors.
    Summary: Now in a fully revised and updated second edition, this definitive text provides comprehensive coverage of all aspects of total ankle replacement (TAR), written by authors who are recognized experts in the field. Though the main focus is on total ankle replacement prostheses available for use in North America, the lessons learned and presented here are applicable to the growing volume of cases worldwide. Divided into five thematic sections, each chapter is a purposeful mix of theory, data, and tips/pearls with detailed illustrations, tables, and references. Appropriately evidence-based, they include bullet points for quick reference and rely heavily on step-by-step intraoperative photographs and radiology. Part I presents the history of TAR, implant considerations (mobile-bearing vs. fixed-bearing), and indications/contraindications for the procedure. The subsequent three sections discuss all aspects of primary TAR, procedures secondary to primary TAR, and revision TAR, respectively, bringing together the most recent evidence, implant options and surgical techniques. The final section covers topics related to limb salvage after failed TAR, including preventive measures, wound healing, and infection management. Generously illustrated and well-referenced, Primary and Revision Total Ankle Replacement remains the gold standard text on this topic for orthopedic surgeons, podiatrists and foot and ankle clinicians at all levels.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    History of Total Ankle Replacement in North America
    Total Ankle Replacement Based on Worldwide Registry Data Trends
    Mobile-Bearing versus Fixed-Bearing Total Ankle Replacement
    Total Ankle Replacement versus Ankle Arthrodesis
    Current Indications and Contraindications for Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    A Guide to Surgical Consent for Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    Risk Factors for Failure of Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    Cemented, Biocemented, and Cementless Total Ankle Replacement Fixation Methods
    3D Orthopedic Pre-operative Surgical Planning for Total Ankle Replacement
    Part II: Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    Cadence Total Ankle Arthroplasty
    INBONE 2 Total Ankle Replacement System Including Prophecy Specific Alignment Guides
    INFINITY® Total Ankle Replacement Including PROPHECY® Patient Specific Alignment Guides
    Vantage Total Ankle Replacement
    Hintermann Series H2 Fixed and H3 Mobile Bearing Total Ankle Replacement Systems
    Salto Talaris Total Ankle System and Salto Talaris XT Primary and Revision Total Ankle System
    STAR Total Ankle Replacement
    The Quantum Total Ankle Prosthesis
    Alignment/Rebalancing Procedures for Total Ankle Replacement
    Ankle Arthrodesis and Malunion Takedown to Total Ankle Replacement
    Part III: Secondary Procedures with Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Adjacent Joint Arthritis: Indications and Techniques for Concomitant or Staged Fusions of the Hindfoot and Midfoot
    Managing Significant Varus and Valgus Malalignment during Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Soft-Tissue Ankle Equinus and Anterior/Posterior Translation of the Talus During Total Ankle Replacement
    The Science Behind Periprosthetic Aseptic Osteolysis in Total Ankle Replacement
    Management of Periprosthetic Cystic Changes after Total Ankle Replacement
    Arthroscopic Debridement for Soft-Tissue Impingement after Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Heterotopic Ossification after Total Ankle Replacement
    Management of Painful Malleolar Gutters after Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Varus and Valgus Malalignment after Total Ankle Replacement
    The Role of Periarticular Osteotomies in Total Ankle Replacement
    Part IV: Revision Total Ankle Replacement
    Revision of Aseptic Osteolysis with and without Component Subsidence after Total Ankle Replacement
    Revision Total Ankle Arthroplasty
    The Salto Talaris XT Revision Total Ankle Replacement System
    Custom Metallic Prostheses after Failed Total Ankle Replacement
    Tibio-talo-calcaneal Arthrodesis after Failed Total Ankle Replacement: Autograft and Bulk Structural Allograft Techniques
    Tibio-talo-calcaneal Arthrodesis after Failed Total Ankle Replacement: Metallic 3D Printed Custom Cages
    Part V: Limb Salvage of Failed Total Ankle Replacement
    Preventative Measures against Wound Healing Complications after Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Wound-Healing Complications after Total Ankle Replacement
    Alternate Incision Approaches to Revision Total Ankle Replacement
    Management of the Infected Total Ankle Replacement
    Permanent Polymethylmethacrylate Antibiotic Spacer for Definitive Management of Failed Total Ankle Replacements.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jonathan A. Bernstein, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a broad clinical overview of primary and secondary immunodeficiencies nested in clinical cases that will help the reader understand the approach to evaluation, diagnosis, and management of these challenging cases. Chapters begin with a comprehensive overview of immunodeficiencies to ground the reader in practical knowledge of the field and these complex conditions. Chapters cover B lymphocyte immunodeficiency, T cell immunodeficiency, immune dysregulation syndromes, and innate immune defects. They discuss a range of treatment options including gene therapy or bone marrow transplant. The book continues with a discussion on secondary immunodeficiencies and their treatment. Each chapter was written by authors with expertise related to different immunodeficiency disorders and provide a succinct overview of pathomechanisms, diagnosis, and treatment of a specific condition. Primary and Secondary Immunodeficiency will be an excellent resource for practicing allergists, hematologists, clinical immunologists, fellows, residents, and other clinicians who work with immunodeficiency patients.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Overview of Immunodeficiency
    Part I. B-Lymphocyte Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 2. Common Variable Immunodeficiency, Hypogammaglobulinemia, and Specific Antibody Deficiency
    Chapter 3. Agammaglobulinemia
    Chapter 4. Class Switch Defects
    Chapter 5. Transient Immunodeficiency of Infancy
    Chapter 6. Selective Isotype Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 7. Common Variable Immunodeficiency Disorders-like Disorders
    Part II. T-Cell Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 8. Severe Combined Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 9. Idiopathic CD4 Lymphopenia
    Chapter 10. Hyper IgE Syndrome
    Chapter 11. Genetic Syndromes with Associated Immunodeficiencies
    Part III. Immune Dysregulation Syndromes
    Chapter 12. Autoimmune Lymphoproliferative Syndrome
    Chapter 13. Auto-inflammatory Syndromes
    Chapter 14. Immune Dysregulation Leading to Autoimmunity
    Chapter 15. Dendritic Cells in Primary Immunodeficiency
    Part IV. Innate Immune Defects
    Chapter 16. Congenital Neutropenia and Migration Defects
    Chapter 17. Chronic Granulomatous Disease
    Chapter 18. Primary Immunodeficiencies of Complement
    Chapter 19. Natural Killer Cell Defects
    Chapter 20. Mucocutaneous Candidiasis
    Part V. Secondary Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 21. Immunodeficiency Secondary to Malignancies and Biologics
    Chapter 22. Immunodeficiency Secondary to Prematurity, Pregnancy, and Aging
    Chapter 23. Vaccinations in Primary and Secondary Immunodeficiencies Including Asplenia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Timothy J Watson, Paul JL Ong, James E Tcheng, editors.
    Summary: This book is open access under a CC BY 4.0 license. This quick-reference handbook offers a concise and practical review of key aspects of the treatment of ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction (STEMI) in the era of primary percutaneous coronary intervention (PPCI). In the context of STEMI, PPCI is the preferred mode of emergency revascularization. Access to PPCI is rapidly increasing and is now routinely practiced in both general and specialist hospitals and there has been a recent emphasis on developing STEMI networks to enhance and expedite the referral pathway. This coupled with concurrent developments to enhance the safety and efficacy of the PPCI procedure has heralded an era where STEMI interventions are increasingly considered an important subspecialty within interventional cardiology. Written by leading cardiologists who have been instrumental in the adoption of PPCI in their respective institutions, the book provides junior and senior cardiologists alike with insightful and thought-provoking tips and tricks to enhance the success of PPCI procedures, which may in turn translate into direct improvements in outcomes. The book is also relevant for healthcare providers and emergency department physicians.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Historical perspectives on management of acute myocardial infarction
    Pre-hospital diagnosis and management of acute myocardial infarction
    STEMI network and logistics - rural vs. urban
    Cath lab design, staffing, training
    Patient preparation and vascular access for primary PCI
    Management of intra-coronary thrombus
    Culprit only artery versus multi-vessel disease
    Pharmacologic therapies in primary PCI - antiplatelet agents
    Pharmacologic therapies in primary PCI - glycoproteins, heparins, bivalirudins, etc
    Pharmacologic therapies in primary PCI - inotropes, etc
    Drug-eluting stents vs. bare-metal stents in Primary PCI
    Is there still a debate?
    Drug-eluting balloons in primary PCI
    High bleeding risk scenarios in primary PCI
    Mechanical complications of myocardial infarction - free-wall rupture, VSD, acute MR
    The role of mechanical circulatory support in primary PCI - IABP, ECMO, IMPELLA, LUCAS?
    Methods of reducing infarct size and reperfusion injury in primary PCI
    Time to reperfusion, door to balloon times, and how to reduce them
    Utilization of facilitated and rescue angioplasty in primary PCI
    Primary angioplasty: the economics
    Role of bypass surgery in acute myocardial infarction: indications, timing, outcome
    Role of intravascular imaging in emergency PCI
    Patients ineligible for primary PCI .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Clement C.Y. Tham, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to provide the readers with an up-to-date and evidence-based management approach for primary angle closure glaucoma (PACG), which makes effective and safe use of all the interventions currently available. The book presents to the glaucoma subspecialists and the general ophthalmologists a clear and concise introduction to the latest advances in the management of primary angle closure glaucoma (PACG), from the latest imaging technologies to objectively quantify the drainage angle closure and structural glaucomatous progression, to an up-to-date review of the laser and surgical options for treating PACG. The laser and surgical interventions include laser peripheral iridotomy, laser peripheral iridoplasty, lens extraction alone or in combination with other glaucoma surgery, filtration surgery (including minimally-invasive and non-penetrating variants), goniosynechialysis (GSL), glaucoma drainage device implantation, and cyclodestructive procedures. This informative book, written based on the authors' vast clinical, teaching, and research experience in this field, will offer the readers in-depth and useful resources on PACG.

    Contents:
    1 Primary Angle Closure Glaucoma (PACG) - A Logical Approach Base on Angle Closures Types and Mechanism
    2 Intraocular Pressure Fluctuation in Angle Closure Glaucoma
    3 Objective Quantitative Evaluation of Angle Closure
    4 Medical Therapy in Angle Closure Glaucoma
    5 Laser Peripheral Iridotomy
    6 Laser Peripheral Iridoplasty
    7 The role of selective laser trabeculoplasty in primary angle closure glaucoma
    8 Lens extraction in PACG
    9 Goniosynechialysis For Synechial Angle Closure
    10 Filtration Surgery and Glaucoma Drainage Devices in PACG
    11 Cyclodestructive Procedures
    12 Trabecular, Canal and Suprachoroidal Surgery in Primary Angle Closure
    13 Malignant glaucoma and choroidal detachment after drainage surgery and its management
    14 Management of acute primary angle closure
    15 Recent Advances in our Understanding of the Genetic Basis of Primary Angle-closure Glaucoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Alain Dabdoub, Bernd Fritzsch, Arthur N. Popper and Richard R. Fay, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Connecting the inner ear to the central auditory system: molecular development and characteristics of the primary auditory neurons and their network
    2. Early development of the spiral ganglion
    3. Neurotrophic factor function during ear development: expression changes define critical phases for neuronal viability
    4. The electrophysiological signature of spiral ganglion neurons
    5. The ribbon synapse between type I spiral ganglion neurons and inner hair cells
    6. Central projections of spiral ganglion neurons
    7. The spiral ganglion in an out-of-body experience: a brief history of in vitro studies of the spiral ganglion
    8. Loss, degeneration, and preservation fo the spiral ganglion neurons and their processes
    9. Stem cells for the replacement of auditory neurons.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey Nursing
    ClinicalKey
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    98
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    41
  • Digital
    editors, Robert F. Kushner, Daniel H. Bessesen, Adam H. Gilden
    Summary: "Written by and for primary care professionals, this unique title presents step-by-step, evidence-based information for the assessment and treatment of patients who present with overweight or obesity. Highly practical and easy to use, Primary Care: Obesity helps you develop and hone the specific knowledge, skills, and clinical practices necessary to provide effective care to this highly prevalent and at-risk patient population. This comprehensive guide is an essential resource for today's internal medicine and family medicine physicians, pediatricians, nurse practitioners, physician assistants, and other healthcare professionals who practice outpatient primary care"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Obesity as a disease / David R. Saxon, Daniel H. Bessesen
    The obesity encounter / Robert F. Kushner
    Assessment and staging : identification and evaluation of the high-risk patient / W. Timothy Garvey
    Comanagement of obesity-related comorbidities : assessment, treatment, and monitoring / Sharon J. Herring, Keerthana Kesavarapu, Jessica Briscoe
    Dietary treatment / Maria L. Collazo-Clavell
    Physical activity treatment / Seth A. Creasy, Danielle Marie Ostendorf, Victoria A. Catenacci
    Behavioral treatment / Ariana M. Chao, Kerry M. Quigley, Thomas A. Wadden
    Obesity pharmacotherapy / Donna H. Ryan, Rekha Kumar
    Metabolic and bariatric surgery / Wayne J. English, Vance L. Albaugh
    Care of the post-bariatric surgery patient / Christopher D. Still, Peter N. Benotti, Shannon Marie McShea, Fahad Zubair
    Pediatric and adolescent obesity / Edmond Pryce Wickham III, Melanie K. Bean
    Practice management / Ethan A. Lazarus, Adam H. Gilden
    Team care, referrals, and practice resources / Deborah Bade Horn
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Terry Mahan Buttaro, JoAnn Trybulski, Paticia Polgar-Bailey, Joanne Sandberg-Cook.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2020
  • Digital
    Bobby Desai, Alpa Desai, editors.
    Summary: This book is written for physicians who work within an emergency department or urgent care setting to provide them with a treatment plan for those patients who are deemed not to have an emergency medical situation and can be safely treated as an outpatient. Emergency physicians (EPs) see a wide variety of patients and ostensibly for emergency reasons. However, many patients present to the emergency department for primary care-related reasons due to multiple factors or are diagnosed with potentially chronic problems that require a primary care intervention. Examples include a new diagnosis of hypertension (without hypertensive emergency) or diabetes. Thus, it is prudent for the EP to learn about basic primary care management of these conditions. Unfortunately, the training of EPs does not include these conditions, and they are left to guess appropriate treatment or to start a new medication that may not be appropriate. This book aims to fill this gap by educating the EP on basic primary care interventions for specific conditions.

    Contents:
    Headache
    Eye Issues (Stye, etc) + The Red Eye
    Ear Pain + Cerumen Impaction
    Oral Issues (Sore throat, etc) + Dental Pain
    Cough, Cold & Congestion
    Allergies (Allergic rhinitis, etc) Sinonasal Disease
    Neck Pain Dysphagia + Odynophagia
    Noncardiac chest pain, including chest wall pain
    Hypertension
    GERD/Heartburn
    Dyspnea
    Hemoptysis
    Abdominal pain
    Irritable bowel syndrome
    Bloating
    Constipation
    Diarrhea
    Hemorrhoids
    Vaginal problems
    Dysmenorrhea
    Diabetes Mellitus
    Back pain including Sciatica
    Skin problems (including scabies)
    Insomnia
    Anxiety
    Depression.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Allan H. Goroll, Albert G. Mulley, Jr.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Emergency)
    LWW Health Library (Internal Medicine)
    LWW Health Library (PA Rotations)
    LWW Health Library (PA Rotations)
  • Digital
    [edited by] Allan H. Goroll, Albert G. Mulley Jr.
    Contents:
    Principles of primary care
    Systemic problems
    Cardiovascular problems
    Respiratory problems
    Gastrointestinal problems
    Hematologic and oncologic problems
    Endocrinologic problems
    Gynecologic problems
    Genitourinary problems
    Musculoskeletal problems
    Neurologic problems
    Dermatologic problems
    Ophthalmologic problems
    Ear, nose and throat problems
    Psychiatric and behavioral problems
    Multidisciplinary and allied fields.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Internal Medicine)
    LWW Health Library (PA Rotations)
    LWW Health Library (Emergency)
  • Digital
    edited by Linda Gask, University of Manchester, Tony Kendrick, University of Southhampton, Robert Peveler, University of Southhampton, Carolyn A. Chew-Graham, Keele University.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Carlos Augusto de Mendonça Lima, Gabriel Ivbijaro, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    David Heber, Zhaoping Li.
    Contents:
    Incorporating nutrition into primary care practice
    Personalization of nutrition advice
    Nutrition and immune system
    Nutrition and gastrointestinal disorders
    Approach to the overweight and obese patient
    Evolution of type 2 diabetes mellitus
    Managing diabetes without weight gain
    Fatty liver
    Lipid disorders and management
    Nutrition and coronary artery disease
    Hypertension and obesity
    Nutrition and renal failure
    Nutrition and heart failure
    Pulmonary function, asthma, and obesity
    Frailty nutrition and elderly
    Nutrition and neurodenerative disorders
    Gene-nutrient interactions
    Nutrition and risks of common forms of cancer
    Nutrition and the cancer patient
    Writing a personal nutrition prescription.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Christopher J. Wong, editor.
    Summary: Solid organ transplantation offers a new chance at life to those suffering from failing organs. With these successes, however, comes the everyday management that is required to maintain health. The field of solid organ transplantation has become a part of medicine that generalists should be familiar with, as recipients are living longer and frequently returning to primary care for management. While specialists will still need to be involved with the care of solid organ transplant recipients on a life-long basis, many conditions will still need initial and often ongoing care by generalists, including infections, metabolic conditions, psychiatric illnesses, and malignancy. This book focuses on the care of adult solid organ transplant recipients, and is targeted at the level of the primary care provider. It begins with an introduction and overviews of solid organ transplantation and anti-rejection medications. It then delves into organ-specific chapters that provide the primary care provider with an overview of how to take care of patients with the most commonly-transplanted solid organs: kidney, kidney-pancreas, liver, heart, and lung. The final section focuses on specific complications that arise from transplantation including cancer, metabolic conditions, infections, and common presenting syndromes. Preventative health is also discussed, and the book concludes with a chapter on palliative care. Primary Care of the Solid Organ Transplant Recipient is a unique text that provides the reader with organ and complication-specific sections that can be independently read as they relate to the individual physicians and their patients. Written by experts in the field, this text is a valuable resource for primary care providers, medical students, residents and anyone involved in the care of solid organ transplant recipients.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Overview of adult solid organ transplantation for primary care providers
    Anti-rejection medication therapy in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Primary care of the adult kidney transplant and kidney-pancreas transplant recipient
    Primary care of the adult liver transplant recipient
    Primary care of the adult heart transplant recipient
    Primary care of the adult lung transplant recipient
    Infections in the adult-solid organ transplant recipient
    Common syndromes in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Cancer risk in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Metabolic complications in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Preventive health in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Palliative care in the adult solid organ transplant recipient.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Charles De Mesa, Samir J. Sheth, Craig Keenan, Robert M. McCarron, Joslyn John.
    Summary: "Authored by experts in pain medicine and internal medicine at the University of California, Davis School of Medicine, Primary Care Pain Management delivers just the right amount of clinically relevant information for primary care physicians, nurse practitioners, and physician assistants. Addressing safe and effective pain management in the primary care setting, it follows a user-friendly, high-yield format for quick reference at the point of care, helping you understand the full range of options for treating patients with chronic and acute pain"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    Cathryn B. Heath, Sandra M. Sulik, editors.
    Summary: There are many reasons for primary care providers to offer women's health procedures in an office setting, from the values patients place on continuity of care to the lack of access to specialty care tha patients may experience in rural areas. This book introduces simple office procedures to clinicians, as well as office staff who must familiarize themselves with new equipment and billing and coding information.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Introduction: The Case for Procedures in Primary Care
    Case Studies
    Location of Practice
    Continuity of Care: "The Medical Home"
    Procedure Training
    Insurance Coverage
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Coding, Billing, and Reimbursement for Procedures
    Introduction
    Procedure Coding
    Documentation of Procedures
    Insurance Company Coverage
    Durable Medical Goods
    Charity Care Procedures
    Cosmetic Surgery Billing
    Summary
    References
    Additional Resource
    Websites Chapter 3: Legal Aspects of Office-Based Women's Health Procedures
    Introduction
    Office Physical Plant Concerns
    O.S.H.A. Concerns
    Promotion of Services
    Credentialing Concerns
    Informed Consent
    Rights of Minors
    Use of Chaperones
    Patient Preprocedure Preparation Concerns
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Cervical Cytology and Pap Smears
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Pessary
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Contraceptives
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Diaphragms Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Long-Acting Reversible Contraception (LARC), IUDs and Implants
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Colposcopy and Loop Electrocautery Excision Procedure (LEEP)
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Endometrial Biopsy
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Elective Termination of Pregnancy in the United States
    References
    Chapter 4: Population Health in Women's Healthcare
    Introduction
    Health Outcomes
    Policies and Interventions
    Patterns of Social Determinants
    Summary
    References
    Additional Resources Chapter 5: Empathic Pelvic Examination
    Introduction
    Case Study
    Diagnosis (Algorithm 5.1)
    Indications (Algorithm 5.1)
    Contraindications
    Equipment (Fig. 5.1)
    Procedure
    Complications and Risks
    Tricks and Helpful Hints
    Procedure Note
    Coding
    Postprocedure Patient Instructions
    Case Study Outcome
    Postprocedure Patient Handout
    References
    Additional Resources
    Articles
    Websites
    Videos
    Chapter 6: Difficult Exams: Cystocele, Rectocele, Stenotic Cervix/Cervical Dilatation, Nonsexually Active Women, and Elderly Women
    Introduction
    Case Study Diagnosis (Algorithms 6.1 and 6.2)
    Differential Diagnosis (Algorithms 6.1 and 6.2)
    Indications (Algorithms 6.1 and 6.2)
    Contraindications
    Equipment (Fig. 6.1)
    Procedure
    Complications and Risks
    Tricks and Helpful Hints
    Procedure Note
    Coding
    Postprocedure Patient Instructions
    Case Study Outcomes
    Postprocedure Patient Handout
    References
    Chapter 7: Sexual Assault Victim Examination
    Introduction
    Case Study
    Indications (Algorithm 7.1)
    Contraindications
    Equipment
    Optional Equipment
    Procedure (Algorithm 7.1)
    Tricks and Helpful Hints
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Ovid
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert M. McCarron, Glen L. Xiong, Shannon Suo, Paul Summergrad, Philip R. Muskin, Sarah Rivelli ; assistant editors, Matthew Reed, Shawn Hersevoort.
    Summary: "Publisher's Note: Products purchased from 3rd Party sellers are not guaranteed by the Publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product. Perfect for primary care physicians, nurse practitioners, and PAs, who are routinely confronted with behavioral health disorders among patients in a primary care setting, the second edition of this unique multimedia handbook--now affiliated with the Association of Medicine and Psychiatry--sits at the intersection of primary care and psychiatry. You'll find much that is new: updated fundamentals on depression, anxiety, psychosis, substance, and eating disorders, as well as overviews on CBT, motivational therapy, and common pharmacological therapies. With contributors from the worlds of both psychiatry and primary care, you have a perfect package on how to integrate the two in order to deliver better mental health care for your patients. Ebook now features 30-minute educational videos, instructional PowerPoint slides, and a 15-question multiple-choice assessment for every chapter. Includes tips on navigating the psychiatric interview and updated DSM-5 diagnostic criteria. Disorder-specific chapters follow a handy templated format: clinical highlights, diagnosis, treatment, medications, practice tips, and more. True-to-life case studies and patient scenarios illuminate key concepts in psychiatry. Guidance on navigating the Collaborative Care Model and applying the primary care psychiatry assessment. Packed with easy-to-read figures and tables that helps make information easy to digest and implement. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience with Enhanced Video, Audio and Interactive Capabilities! Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. Adapt for unique reading needs, supporting learning disabilities, visual/auditory impairments, second-language or literacy challenges, and more."--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    Ben Yuk Fai Fong, Vincent Tin Sing Law, Albert Lee, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    About the Book
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    Part I: Principles of Primary Care and Systems
    Chapter 1: Renewal of Primary Care
    Primary Health Care: Roles and Challenges
    Health for All: Declaration of Alma-Ata
    Development of Primary Care
    History of Primary Health Care
    Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion in 1986
    The New Public Health
    The Bangkok Charter for Health Promotion in a Globalized World (2005) The World Health Report 2008: Primary Health Care - Now More Than Ever
    Shanghai Declaration on Promoting Health in the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development (2016)
    Primary Health Care Revisited
    The World Perspectives
    Cases of Developed Countries
    Cases of Developing Countries
    Priority Setting in Primary Health Care
    Evidence-Based Primary Care
    The Way Forward
    References
    Chapter 2: Philosophy of Primary Health Care
    Philosophy of Primary Health Care Needs Urgent Revisitation
    What Actually Contribute to Health Improvement? Failing to Meet the Challenges of Health-Care Provision
    Ecology of Health Care
    Management of Chronic Illnesses by Primary Health Care Versus Various Hospital Specialities
    Some Other Important Key Features of Primary Health Care
    Case Scenario Demonstration of the Key Features of Primary Care (Lee 2019)
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Fiscal Sustainability Challenge and the Importance of Primary Healthcare
    Introduction
    Health Financing Models
    The Beveridge Model
    The Bismarck Model
    The Mandatory Savings Model
    The Private Health Insurance Model The Out-of-Pocket Model
    Major Challenges Facing the Current Healthcare Systems
    The Economic Benefits of Primary Healthcare
    Creating a Better Balance Between Tertiary and Primary Care
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Sustainable Healthcare Systems
    Introduction
    Healthcare in Australia
    Medicare
    Overview of the Australian Healthcare System
    Primary Healthcare
    Access to Health Facilities and Services
    Tax-Funded Public Insurance and Lifetime Health Cover
    Shortage of Manpower
    Healthcare in the United Kingdom
    Role of NHS Overview of the UK Healthcare System
    Primary Healthcare
    UK Healthcare System Challenges
    Healthcare in Canada
    Strengths of the Canadian System
    Access to Healthcare
    Primary Care in Canada
    Drawbacks of the Canadian System
    Preference for Private Service
    Waiting Time
    Canada Health Act
    Elderly Care in Canada
    Healthcare in Hong Kong
    Key Initiatives
    Public-Private Partnership
    Primary Care Office
    Delivery of Quality Service
    Electronic Health Record
    Major Concerns
    Public Services Are Hospital-Oriented
    Challenges Practical and Sustainable Healthcare Systems
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    James F. Pagel, S.R. Pandi-Perumal, editors.
    Summary: Diagnosing and treating sleep disorders have been added to the primary care physician's list of ever-growing responsibilities. This added expectation presents many risks since sleep medicine is rarely included in the curricula of medical schools or in non-sleep medicine residency training. The second edition to Primary Care Sleep Medicine fulfills the need of a comprehensive text assisting the physician with up-to-date information on the sleep medicine field. This updated volume represents the cutting edge of knowledge for the field, with summaries of the latest research on new diagnostic tests, medications and therapies; useful for any physician considering specialization in the field. Chapters are authored by leaders in the field of sleep medicine with an understanding of the primary care environment. Practical and comprehensive, this text is an invaluable resource for physicians and allied health professionals.

    Contents:
    Sleep Disorders in Primary Care: Evidence-Based Clinical Practice
    Epidemiology of Sleep
    Assessment of Insomnia
    Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy Approaches for Insomnia
    Pharmacological Treatment of Insomnia
    Determinants and Measurements of Daytime Sleepiness
    Central Sleep Apnea: Implications for the Failing Heart
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea: Clinical Presentation
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea/Hypopnea Syndrome: Epidemiology and Pathogenesis
    Evidence and Mechanisms Linking Obstructive Sleep Apnea to Cardiovascular Disease
    Treatment for Obstructive Sleep Apnea: Surgical and Alternative Treatments
    Positive Airway Pressure Therapy for Obstructive Sleep Apnea/Hypopnea Syndrome
    Oral Appliances for the Treatment of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Medicolegal Aspects of Obstructive Sleep Apnea/Hypopnea Syndrome
    Overview of the Treatment of Obesity
    Sleep in Patients With Pulmonary Disease
    Pediatric Sleep I: Normal Sleep and Nonrespiratory Sleep Complaints: Infancy Through Adolescence
    Pediatric Sleep II: Pediatric Sleep-Disordered Breathing
    Sleep and Sleep Disorders in Women
    Parasomnia in Adults
    Clinical Features, Diagnosis and Treatment of Narcolepsy
    Mental Disorders Associated With Disturbed Sleep
    Sleep and the Esophagus
    Circadian Rhythm Disorders
    Bruxism
    Restless Legs Syndrome and Periodic Limb Movements
    Introduction to Polysomnography
    Portable Monitoring
    Correct CPT Coding, Billing, and Documentation in Sleep Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editor, Jong-Soo Lee.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive, in-depth, and up-to-date resource on eye examination that will be of great practical value for ophthalmologists and optometrists. The aim is to guide the practitioner through the diagnostic process and the implications for management of the ocular patient, and in so doing to demonstrate that it is possible to reach appropriate decisions on the basis of eye examination. Every year, existing ocular equipment is being upgraded and new diagnostic equipment is appearing on the market. This book reflects recent progress in upgrading by providing information and guidance on the latest innovations in ocular examination and eye testing while also highlighting the continuing important role of the traditional eye test. The coverage accordingly ranges from such long-established techniques as ophthalmoscopy, tonometry, and slit lamp examination through to the latest advances in OCT technologies, digital fundus photography, confocal scanning laser ophthalmoscopy, ocular ultrasound, and angiography. The authors hope that the book will assist all practitioners who perform ophthalmologic examinations. .

    Contents:
    1. Eye Examination Sequence.- 2. Visual Acuity Test.- 3. Refraction & Glasses Exam.- 4. Contact Lens.- 5. Accommodation & Convergence.- 6. Color Vision Test.- 7. Dark Adaptation.- 8. Ocular alignment & Movement Exam
    9. Binocular Vision Exam.- 10. Slit lamp Exam.- 11. Conjunctiva & Cornea Exam.- 12. Pupil Exam.- 13. Tonometry.- 14. Anterior Chamber Angle Exam.- 15. Optic nerve & Retinal nerve fiber Exam.- 16. Visual Field Exam.- 17. Fundus Exam
    18. Fluorescein & Indocyanine Green Angiography.- 19. Ultrasound Exam.- 20. Optical Coherence Tomography.- 21. Electrophysiologic Test.- 22. Preoperative exam.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nima Rezaei, Asghar Aghamohammadi, Luigi D. Notarangelo, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to primary immunodeficiency diseases
    2. Combined T- and B-cell immunodeficiences
    3. Predominantly antibody deficiences
    4. Phagocytes defects
    5. Genetic disorders of immune regulation
    6. Defects in intrinsic and innate immunity: receptors and signaling components
    7. Autoinflammatory disorders
    8. Complement deficiences
    9. Other well-defined immunodeficiencies
    10. Syndromic immunodeficiencies
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Daniele Bissacco, Alberto M. Settembrini, Andrea Mazzari, editors.
    Summary: "Thinking as a specialist, acting as an ER doctor." The emergency setting remains one of the most important parts of daily clinical practice for surgeons. Moreover, the triage surgeon may be faced with complicated patients, who are often suffering from a wide range of diseases and emerging conditions. To this end, the emergency surgeon must know how to interpret the symptoms/signs of each condition and initiate appropriate management before directing the patient to the most correct path and specialist. Although several books have been published concerning a specific surgical field (e.g. emergencies in vascular, thoracic or general surgery), this book provides a concise and quick point of view describing the clinical and instrumental surgical pictures in all vascular, thoracic, and general surgical emergencies. This approach can be useful in gaining a practical understanding of different clinical scenarios in order to adopt a correct management and treatment. It offers a simple guide to discriminating between urgent and non-urgent conditions, avoiding unnecessary diagnostic and interventional workup. This book would like to be a practical help also for general practitioners and emergency physicians to learn more about primary management of life threatening pathologies.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1: Historical Overview
    1.1 New Science
    1.2 Young People in Science
    Part I: Surgical Instruments and Materials
    2: Surgical Instruments and Materials in General Surgery
    2.1 Cut and Dissect Instruments
    2.1.1 Monopolar Electrosurgery
    2.1.2 Bipolar Electrosurgery
    2.1.3 Ultrasonic Energy
    2.1.4 Radiofrequency Energy
    2.2 Grasp and Hold Instruments
    2.3 Clamp Instruments
    2.4 Suture Instruments
    2.5 Suction Instruments
    2.6 Surgical Staplers and Clips
    2.7 Retractors
    2.8 Laparoscopic Surgery
    References 3: Surgical Instruments and Materials in Thoracic Surgery
    3.1 Thoracentesis
    3.2 Tube Thoracostomy
    3.3 Thoracotomy
    3.4 Video-assisted Thoracic Surgery (VATS)
    Further Reading
    4: Surgical Instruments and Materials in Vascular Surgery
    4.1 Introduction
    4.1.1 Open Surgery
    4.1.2 Endovascular Surgery
    4.1.3 Hybrid Surgery
    References
    Part II: Neck
    5: Supra-aortic Trunks Emergency Conditions
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Anatomy of Supra-aortic Trunks
    5.3 Stroke
    5.4 Internal Carotid Artery Stenosis
    5.4.1 Etiology 5.4.2 Asymptomatic and Symptomatic Patients
    5.4.3 Clinical Presentation
    5.4.4 Diagnosis
    5.4.5 Treatment
    5.4.5.1 Complication Following Carotid Intervention
    5.5 Carotid Artery Dissection
    5.5.1 Etiology
    5.5.2 Clinical Presentation
    5.5.3 Diagnosis
    5.5.4 Treatment
    5.6 Vertebral Artery Disease
    5.6.1 Etiology
    5.6.2 Clinical Presentation
    5.6.3 Diagnosis
    5.6.4 Treatment
    5.7 Vascular Injuries to the Cervical Vessels
    5.7.1 Etiology
    5.7.2 Clinical Presentation
    5.7.3 Diagnosis
    5.7.4 Treatment
    References 6: Upper Airways Tract in Emergency Settings
    6.1 Hemoptysis
    6.1.1 Etiology
    6.1.2 Clinical Presentation
    6.1.3 Diagnosis
    6.1.4 Treatment
    6.2 Airway Obstruction
    6.2.1 Etiology
    6.2.2 Clinical Presentation
    6.2.3 Diagnosis
    6.2.4 Treatment
    6.2.5 Main Causes of Airway Obstruction
    6.2.5.1 Foreign Bodies' Inhalation
    6.2.5.2 Tracheal Stenosis
    6.2.5.3 Malignant Airway Obstruction
    6.3 Tracheobronchial Injuries
    6.3.1 Etiology
    6.3.2 Clinical Presentation
    6.3.3 Diagnosis
    6.3.4 Management
    6.4 Pneumomediastinum
    6.4.1 Etiology 6.4.2 Clinical Presentation
    6.4.3 Diagnosis
    6.4.4 Management
    References
    7: Multidisciplinary Surgical Consensus on Neck Emergencies
    7.1 General Approach to Neck Emergencies
    7.1.1 Airway Patency Assessment
    7.1.2 Evaluation of Bleeding
    7.1.3 Evaluation of a Possible Involvement of the Surrounding Tissues
    7.2 Etiologies of Neck Emergencies
    7.2.1 Traumatic Neck Emergencies
    7.2.2 Remember
    7.2.2.1 Extrinsic Forces
    7.2.2.2 Intrinsic Forces
    Foreign Bodies
    7.2.2.3 Caustics
    7.2.2.4 Non-traumatic Neck Emergencies
    7.2.3 Infections
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Suk-Kyung Hong, Dong Kwan Kim, Sang Ryong Jeon, editors.
    Summary: This well-illustrated book describes a practical approach to the primary management of patients who have multiple injuries, or polytrauma, with the aim of providing medical and paramedical personnel with the knowledge required in order to achieve optimal clinical outcomes. The opening chapters explain initial assessment and management and the early diagnosis and treatment of shock. The primary management of injuries to the head, spine, chest, abdomen, musculoskeletal system, and soft tissues is then discussed in detail. The role played by diagnostic and interventional radiology in trauma management is explained, and an individual chapter is devoted to care of the pediatric patient. The book emphasizes the need for systematic assessment of multiple injuries from head to toe and the fact that the mechanisms and severity of injury and the anatomic disruption will differ in each patient. Taking these factors into account, readers will be able to identify and initiate treatment of those injuries likely to cause most harm to the individual patient.

    Contents:
    1. Initial Assessment and management
    2. Shock management
    3. Head Injury
    4. Spinal Injury
    5. Thoracic Injury
    6. Abdominal Injury
    7. Musculoskeletal Injury
    8. Soft Tissue Injury
    9. Pediatric Injury
    10. Radiology in Trauma (intervention) 11. Radiology in Trauma
    12. Interhospital transfer.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nanette F. Santoro, Amber R. Cooper, editors.
    Summary: Presenting the most current and relevant information on the diagnosis and management of primary ovarian insufficiency, also known as premature ovarian failure (POI/POF), this book presents two equally important voices. The first is the scientific, evidence-based voice discussing the latest information on POI/POF in a concise and logical fashion: etiologies, symptoms, genetics, mechanisms, associated conditions, as well as psychological and lifestyle considerations. The second voice presents the first-person stories of affected women, who are often faced with a diagnosis of irreversible infertility at a very young age and who somehow learn to live with great uncertainty about their ability to create a family - a core identity issue for many women. It is thus not simply a clinical, case-based presentation, but a more collaborative effort between clinicians who are well-versed in the field and women who have POI/POF. Primary Ovarian Insufficiency: A Clinical Guide to Early Menopause will therefore be an excellent practical yet personal reference for OB/GYNs, reproductive medicine specialists, and any clinician, nurse or health care worker treating women living with POI/POF.

    Contents:
    Defining Menopause: What Is Early, What Is Late
    Etiologies of Premature Ovarian Insufficiency
    Signs and Symptoms of Premature Ovarian Insufficiency
    Diagnosis of Premature Ovarian Insufficiency
    Mechanisms for Infertility Associated with Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Non-Reproductive Associations with Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Non-Invasive Methods for Enhancing Ovarian Function
    IVF and Egg Donation in Women with Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Treatment-Independent Conception in Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Mood Matters in Women with Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Future Shock: Can the Ovary Replenish Its Egg Supply?- When Pregnancy Is Not the Issue: Hormone Therapy and Long-Term Health Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Lisa M. Forman, editor.
    Summary: This text provides a state-of-the art review of primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC). The volume focuses on new data about the risk factors for PSC, its natural history of the disease, and the epidemiology and genetics of PSC, while providing a comprehensive overview on current and future therapies for PSC, management of cholangiocarcinoma, and other hepatobiliary malignancies. It also touches upon up-to-date surgical and endoscopic management, including liver transplantation-both deceased donor and living related liver transplantation. Written by experts in the field, Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis: Current Understanding, Management, and Future Developments is a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons and researchers with an interest in biliary liver disease, inflammatory bowel disease, and liver transplantation.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and Natural History of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Malignancy and Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis: Cholangiocarcinoma, Hepatocellular Carcinoma and Gallbladder Carcinoma
    Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis-Associated Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Overlap Syndromes of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    IgG4-Related Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Pediatric Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Cholangiocyte Biology
    Genetics of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Immunology of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Pruritus in Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis: New Insights into Cause and Treatment
    Ursodeoxycholic Acid Treatment in Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Future Therapies for Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Noninvasive Imaging of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis: A Radiologic Perspective
    Endoscopic Evaluation and Management of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Percutaneous Biliary Intervention in Patients with Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Liver Transplantation for Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Recurrent Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis after Liver Transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Deborah Kramer.
    Summary: This book offers solutions on how to enhance the normal development of the well child incorporating complementary medicine. The primary care provider is the only healthcare professional to see every child (0-18) and their parent, and can assess the child's health and advise parents on how to provide a healthy environment and important practices to nurture healthy children. The book provides realistic scenarios encountered by new nurse practitioners in their clinical training. It is structured in a question and answer framework to help practitioners critically think through the best practices to be implemented during the well child visit and develop a plan of action for the family. This book provides assessment and diagnostic criteria and tools and presents common developmental and behavioral issues for each age group. The book promotes the role of professional as advocate by making recommendations for broad social policies to help all children succeed. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Steven P. Shelov, MD, MS, FAAP, editor jefe ; Juan C. Kupferman, MD, MPH, FAAP, revisor médico.
    Summary: Provides advice on all aspects of infant care from the members of the American Academy of Pediatrics, discussing such topics as behavior, growth, immunizations, and safety. Traducción al español del resumen en inglés: Brinda asesoramiento sobre todos los aspectos del cuidado infantil a los miembros de la Academia Estadounidense de Pediatría, y analiza temas como el comportamiento, el crecimiento, las inmunizaciones y la seguridad.

    Contents:
    Preparación para recibir un nuevo bebé
    El parto y los primeros momentos después
    Cuidado básico del bebé
    Alimentación de su bebé
    Los primeros días de su bebé
    El primer mes
    Desde el mes hasta los 3 meses de edad
    De los 4 a los 7 meses de edad
    De los 8 a los 12 meses de edad
    Educatión temprana y guarderías
    Cómo mantener seguro a su hijo
    Abdomen y tracto gastrointentinal
    Alergias
    Conducta
    Pecho y pulmones
    Afecciones y enfermedades crónicas
    Discapacidades del desarrollo
    Oídos, nariz y garganta
    Emergencias
    Salud ambiental
    Ojos
    Problemas familiares
    Fiebre
    Sistemas genital y urinario
    Cabeza, cuello y sistema nervioso
    Corazón
    Vacunas
    Problemas musculoesqueléticos
    Piel
    El sueño de su hijo.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2017
  • Digital
    Mukesh G. Harisinghani, John W. Chen, Ralph Weissleder.
    Contents:
    1. Chest imaging
    2. Cardiac imaging
    3. Gastrointestinal imaging
    4. Genitourinary imaging
    5. Musculoskeletal imaging
    6. Neurologic imaging
    7. Head and neck imaging
    8. Vascular imaging
    9. Breast imaging
    10. Obstetric imaging
    11. Pediatric imaging
    12. Nuclear imaging
    13. Contrast agents
    14. Imaging physics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Louis R. Caplan, José Biller, Megan C. Leary, Eng H. Lo, Ajith J. Thomas, Midori Yenari, John H. Zhang.
    Summary: "Since its publication in 1997, the Primer on Cerebrovascular Diseases has been an authoritative reference source for students, scientists, and clinicians needing rigorous summaries of molecular mechanisms, physiology, pathophysiology, and medical issues related to brain vasculature. In the Second Edition, Dr. Louis Caplan leads a new team of editors to completely revise and update this classic text. The new edition reflects wide-ranging advances made over the last two decades, and provides the mechanistic underpinnings for molecular understanding as well as clinical diagnosis and treatment of cerebrovascular disease. Key features: concise chapters written in an accessible format, authored by international authorities on cerebrovascular physiology and pathophysiology, new and expanded topics including cell signaling in the neurovascular unit, angiogenesis and stroke recovery, proteomics, molecular imaging, carotid stenting, effects of risk factors, and iatrogenic causes of stroke" -- Back cover.

    Contents:
    Basic sciences. Anatomy and physiology
    Pathophysiology
    Neuroprotection
    Molecular mechanism
    Models and methods
    Clinical chapters. Clinical aspects : medical and surgical
    Medical conditions and stroke
    Diagnostic testing
    Management.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    edited by Mark Harber.
    Summary: This new edition provides readers with a practice-based approach to all aspects of clinical nephrology. Extensively updated, it offers invaluable practical advice on how to manage specific illnesses and, uniquely, the importance of establishing systems and processes to improve patient safety, enhance the patient pathway and guidance on how to systematically improve clinical governance. A unique feature of this book are the tips and tricks and, suggestions for avoiding common errors based on the vast experience of the authors. In addition, the Editor has collated a list of links to international registries and guidelines as well as selected disease specific organisations, providing both clinicians and patients with access to helpful and recommended resources. Designed and written in a user-friendly fashion, Primer in Nephrology continues to be the definitive reference for practising nephrologists, trainees and non-nephrologist who encounter renal patients in their daily practice.

    Contents:
    Assessment of the Renal Patient
    Urine Analysis - Scott R Henderson and Mark Harber
    Imaging in Nephrology
    Kidney Biopsy
    Acute Kidney Injury: Epidemiology and Assessment
    Acute Kidney Injury: Management and Prevention
    Acute renal replacement therapy
    Hepatorenal syndrome
    Common Electrolyte Disorders
    Acid Base Disorders
    Diagnosis and Investigation of the hypertensive patient
    Management of high blood pressure
    Podocytopathies
    Management of the Nephrotic Patient: The overall approach to the patient with Nephrotic Syndrome (NS)
    Management of the Nephrotic Patient: Treatment of ECF volume expansion due to nephrotic syndrome in adults
    Minimal Change Disease and Focal Segmental Glomerulosclerosis
    Membranous Nephropathy
    Membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis and C3 glomerulopathy
    IgA nephropathy and Henoch-Schonleinpurpura
    Systemic Small Vessel Vasculitis
    Goodpastures or Anti-glomerular basement membrane (GBM) disease
    Systemic lupus erythematosus, antiphospholipid syndrome & the kidney
    Practical immunosuppression guidelines for patients with glomerulonephritis
    Infectious disease and the kidney
    Blood-borne viruses and the Kidney
    Tubulo-Interstitial Nephritis
    Rheumatological conditions and the Kidney
    Multiple myeloma and the kidney
    Amyloidosis
    Thrombotic Microangiopathies
    Sickle cell disease and other haematological disorders involving the Kidney
    Diabetes and the Kidney
    Pregnancy and the Kidney
    Disease of the Renal Vessels
    Urinary tract infection
    Renal Stone Disease
    Congenital anomalies of the kidneys and urinary tract
    Acquired Urinary Tract Obstruction
    Kidney Cancer
    Inherited Renal Tumour Syndromes
    Polycystic kidney disease
    Other Cystic Kidney Diseases
    Genetic disorders of the glomerular basement membrane
    Anderson-Fabry disease and other inherited lipid disorders of the kidney
    Inherited Metabolic Disease
    Dermatology In Kidney Disease
    Chronic kidney disease: Epidemiology and causes
    Chronic kidney disease: management
    Transition
    Anaemia Management in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Chronic Kidney Disease: Mineral and Bone Disorder (CKD-MBD)
    Chronic Kidney Disease: Cardiovascular Complications
    Coagulation in Kidney Disease
    Symptom control and palliative care in advanced CKD
    Nutrition and Kidney Disease
    Pharmacology and the Kidney
    Prevention of Infection in Kidney Patients
    Setting up and running a Haemodialysis Service
    Vascular access- dialysis lines
    Vascular Access- fistulae and grafts
    Complications of maintenance haemodialysis and how to avoid them
    Providing a peritoneal dialysis service
    Peritoneal Dialysis Prescription
    Complications of peritoneal dialysis and how to avoid them
    Assessment of the potential transplant donor
    Assessment of the Potential Transplant Recipient
    Tissue-typing, crossmatch and antibody incompatibility in kidney transplantation
    Surgical aspects of kidney and pancreas transplantation
    Management of the Acute Transplant
    Immunosuppression for Kidney Transplantation
    Infectious complications of transplantation
    Long Term Management of Kidney Transplant Recipients (KTRs)
    International health partnerships
    Appendix. Resources for Patients and Carers and, Physicians
    Videos.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Vasileios Fotopoulos, editors.
    Summary: This book introduces readers to both seed treatment and seedling pretreatments, taking into account various factors such as plant age, growing conditions and climate. Reflecting recent advances in seed priming and pretreatment techniques, it demonstrates how these approaches can be used to improve stress tolerance and enhance crop productivity. Covering the basic phenomena involved, mechanisms and recent innovations, the book offers a comprehensive guide for students, researchers and scientists alike, particularly Plant Physiologists, Agronomists, Environmental Scientists, Biotechnologists, and Botanists, who will find essential information on physiology and stress tolerance. The book also provides a valuable source of information for professionals at seed companies, seed technologists, food scientists, policymakers, and agricultural development officers around the world.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Methods of Seed Priming; 1 Introduction; 2 Hydropriming; 3 Halopriming; 4 Osmopriming; 5 Solid Matrix Priming; 6 Biopriming; 7 Nutripriming; 8 Seed Priming with Plant Growth Regulators, Hormones, and Other Organic Sources; References; Advances in the Concept and Methods of Seed Priming; 1 Introduction; 2 History of Seed Priming; 3 Phenomenon of Seed Priming; 4 Methods of Seed Priming; 4.1 Conventional Seed Priming Methods; 4.1.1 Hydro-priming; 4.1.2 Osmo-priming; 4.1.3 Nutrient Priming; 4.1.4 Chemical Priming; 4.1.5 Bio-priming 2.1 Initial Fast Imbibition2.2 Starting of Metabolic Processes in the Seed (Lag Phase); 2.3 Subsequent Radicle Emergence and Resumption of Growth; 3 The Benefits of Seed Priming; 4 Mechanism of Seed Priming; 5 Factors Affecting Seed Priming; 5.1 Kind of Priming; 5.2 Temperature; 5.3 Oxygen Availability; 5.4 Osmotic Potential and Solution Concentration; 5.5 Duration of Treatment; 5.6 Seed Quality; 5.7 Light; 5.8 Dehydration after Priming; 5.9 Storage Condition; 6 Physiological, Biochemical, and Molecular Responses to Seed Priming; 7 Stresses-Induced Metabolic Changes in Germinating Seeds 2.2 Better Imbibition and Vigorous Seedling Growth2.3 Osmotic Adjustment; 2.4 Membrane Properties; 2.5 Antioxidant Defense System; 2.6 Changes in Metabolic Events; 2.7 Hormonal Balance and Regulation; 2.8 Aquaporins and Tonoplast Intrinsic Proteins; 2.9 Dehydrins (Late Embryogenesis Abundant Proteins); 2.10 Reactive Oxygen Species: Key Signaling Molecules in Priming; 2.11 Activation of DNA Repair Pathways; 3 Seed Priming and Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Plants; 4 Conclusion; References; Fundamental Processes Involved in Seed Priming; 1 Introduction; 2 The Physiology of Seed Germination 4.1.6 Priming with Plant Growth Regulators (PGR)4.1.7 Priming with Plant Extract; 4.2 Advanced Methods of Seed Priming; 4.2.1 Seed Priming Through Nanoparticles; 4.2.2 Seed Priming Through Physical Agents; 5 Factors Affecting Seed Priming; 6 Seed Priming: Physiological Basis and Plant Response; 6.1 Occurrence of Seed Germination and Seedling Growth; 6.2 Crop Nutrition and Yield; 6.3 Seed Priming for Stress Management; 7 Assessment of Priming Effects on Plant Growth and Development; 7.1 Seed Priming Using Compost Extract for Improving Germination Parameters 7.2 Preparation and Characteristics of Compost Tea7.3 Seed Priming and Experimental Setup; 7.4 Effects on Germination Parameters; 7.4.1 Germination Rate and Germination Index (GI); 7.4.2 Mean Germination Time (MGT) and Seed Vigor Index (SVI); 7.4.3 Effects on Root and Shoot Length; 8 Limitations and Perspective in Seed Priming Technology; 9 Conclusions; References; Physiological, Biochemical, and Molecular Aspects of Seed Priming; 1 Introduction; 2 Physiological, Biochemical, and Molecular Aspects of Seed Priming; 2.1 Pregerminative Metabolism
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Roya Kelishadi, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents;
    1: Life-Cycle Approach for Prevention of Non Communicable Disease; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Behavioral Risk Factors; 1.2.1 Tobacco Use; 1.2.2 Physical Inactivity; 1.2.3 Unhealthy Dietary Habits; 1.2.4 Exposure to Environmental Chemicals; 1.2.5 Socio Demographic Influences; 1.3 Conclusion; References;
    2: Epigenetics and Common Non Communicable Disease; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 The Role of DNA Methylation and Chromatin Modifications in Developing Cancer, Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus and Schizophrenia; 2.2.1 Cancer; 2.2.1.1 DNA Methylation 2.2.1.2 Chromatin Modifications2.2.2 Diabetes Mellitus; 2.2.3 Schizophrenia; 2.3 The Importance of ncRNAs as Epigenetic Mechanisms; 2.3.1 Types of ncRNA and Their Functions; 2.3.2 ncRNAs as Biomarkers in Cancer; 2.3.2.1 Cancer Diagnosis; 2.3.2.2 Tumor Classification; 2.3.2.3 Cancer Prognosis; 2.3.2.4 Prediction of Therapeutic Responses; 2.3.3 Diabetes Mellitus and ncRNAs; 2.3.4 Schizophrenia and ncRNAs; 2.4 Future Perspectives; References;
    3: The Role of Environmental Disruptor Chemicals in the Development of Non Communicable Disease; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Overview of EDCs 3.2.1 EDC Categories3.2.1.1 Phthalates; 3.2.1.2 Bisphenols; 3.2.1.3 Polychlorinated Biphenyls; 3.2.1.4 Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons; 3.2.1.5 Pesticides; 3.2.2 Sources and Pathways of Exposure to EDCs; 3.3 EDCs Contributions to Major NCDs; 3.3.1 EDCs and Metabolic Diseases; 3.3.1.1 Obesity; 3.3.1.2 Diabetes; 3.3.1.3 Metabolic Syndrome; 3.3.2 Effects on the Reproductive Health; 3.3.3 EDCs and Cancer; 3.3.4 EDCs and Respiratory Diseases; 3.4 Endocrine Disrupting Mechanism of Action; 3.5 Conclusions; References;
    4: Early Life Nutrition and Non Communicable Disease 4.1 Introduction4.2 Nutrition In Utero and Risk of NCDs in Later Life; 4.3 Maternal Macronutrient Intake and Its Influence on Appetite and Food Preferences in the Offspring; 4.4 Early Life Nutrition and Allergic Disease; 4.5 Nutrition in Early Life and Diabetes; 4.6 Nutrition in Early Life and Non-alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD); 4.7 Early-Life Nutritional Status and Metabolic Syndrome; 4.8 Early Life Nutrition and Cancer Risk; References;
    5: Family Based Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease Risk Factors in Children by Lifestyle Change: The PEP Family Heart Study 5.1 Introduction5.2 Subjects and Methods; 5.3 Results; 5.3.1 Cardiovascular Risk Factors; 5.3.1.1 Family Screening; 5.3.1.2 Adolescents; 5.3.1.3 Percentage Body Fat; 5.3.1.4 Metabolic Syndrome; 5.3.1.5 Elevated Blood Pressure; 5.3.1.6 Dyslipidemia; 5.3.1.7 Overweight and obesity; 5.3.1.8 Smoking; 5.3.1.9 Low Birth Weight; 5.3.1.10 Migrants; 5.3.2 Lifestyle Change; 5.3.2.1 Healthy Nutrition; 5.3.2.2 Leisure Time Physical Activity; 5.4 Discussion; 5.4.1 International Comparisons in youths; 5.4.1.1 Children; 5.4.1.2 Adolescents; 5.4.1.3 Adults; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Françoise Charnay-Sonnek, Anne E. Murphy, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a unique overview of oncology nursing care in a new health environment, one in which oncology nurses play an increasingly important role. In this regard, it addresses not only the biomedical aspects of new drugs but also the challenges they pose in day-to-day nursing practice. It also highlights the new skills that oncology nurses will need to develop in light of the changing care setting. Drawing on evidence-based practice in Europe and around the globe, the book offers a holistic approach to nursing for adult and pediatric patients. Written by respected professionals in the field, it provides nurses interested in oncology with clear and comprehensive information on the specific abilities required, with a focus on therapeutic education, supportive care, genetic counseling and e-health. In addition, it addresses the new role of patients as decision makers and full partners throughout their treatment cycle.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. Basis of carcinogenesis
    Chapter 2. Epidemiology and prevention
    Chapter 3: Basic and new treatments
    Chapter 4: Targeted therapies
    Chapter 5 : Immunotherapies
    Chapter 6 : Robotic surgery
    Chapter 7 : Forming and maintaining interpersonal relationships, communication skills
    Chapter 8: Nursing diagnosis specific to oncology
    Chapter 9: Nursing counseling after announcement of the diagnosis, coordination of the patient pathway
    Chapter 10: Therapeutic education
    Chapter 11: Specificity of breast cancer
    Chapter 12: Gynaecology cancers
    Chapter 13: Prostate cancer
    Chapter 14: Bladder and renal cancers
    Chapter 15: Melanoma cancer
    Chapter 16: Lung cancer
    Chapter 17: GI cancer
    Chapter 18: Pancreas cancer
    Chapter 19: Haematology
    Chapter 20: How to progress in your specialty
    Chapter 21: North American models
    Chapter 22: European Model
    Chapter 23: Added Value of the associative networking in oncology
    Chapter 24: Children
    Chapter 25 : Teenager and Young Adults
    Chapter 26 : Elderlies
    Chapter 27: Rare diseases
    Chapter 28: Supportive care
    Chapter 29: Genetic counselling
    Chapter 30: Oncology nursing in the primary care
    Chapter 31 : Ehealth
    Chapter 32: Patient as actor of his treatment, shared decision making.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Bernhard Gleich.
    Summary: Bernhard Gleich introduces Magnetic Particle Imaging (MPI) including all aspects that are necessary for a complete understanding. MPI is a new imaging modality invented by Bernhard Gleich and Jrgen Weizenecker. The method is capable of imaging the distribution of superparamagnetic iron oxide particles (SPIOs) with high sensitivity, high spatial resolution, and high imaging speed. The author summarizes the results of a number of original papers and countless innovations he has elaborated in the young discipline of magnetic particle imaging.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Medical imaging methods
    3. Basic idea of magnetic particle imaging
    4. Magnetic particle properties
    5. The focus field
    6. Resolution, sensitivity and speed
    7. Experimental and simulation results on MPI
    8. Potential applications of MPI
    9. Potential further developments and applications
    10. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ruifu Yang, editor.
    Summary: This book presents an overview of up-concerting phosphor (UCP), including UCP preparation, development of the rapid detection strips and UCP industrialization. It also discusses the wide clinical applications of this technology, such as in food poisoning, infectious diseases, drug-abuse and disaster rescue, where rapid point-of-care testing is often critical. Conventional testing methods are mainly based on gold immunochromatography, which relies heavily on results being read with the naked eye. However, up-converting phosphor technology (UPT) employs UCP particles as labels for rapid target detection. Unlike other conventional fluorescence techniques, UCP is excited by infrared light and emitted visible light. This anti-stokes phenomenon provides this special label with significant advantages, including zero background detection, high resistance to environmental influences (e.g. pH, salts, sample contamination), high sensitivity and quantitative detection. Systematically summarizing UCP technology and its wide applications, this book is a valuable resource for researchers and technicians in the field.

    Contents:
    Upconversion luminescent materials: properties and luminescence mechanisms
    Synthesis and preparation of upconverting phosphor particles
    Modification and Functionalization of Up-Converting Phosphor Particles
    Upconvertion nanoparticles-based point-of-care testing technology
    Up-converting phosphor technology-based biosensing technology
    Industrialization of up-converting phosphor diagnostic products
    The application of UPT-POCT in emergency medicine
    The application of UPT-POCT in internal medicine
    The application of UPT-POCT in combat-related traumatic infection
    Application of UPT-POCT for medical relief in disasters
    Application of UPT-POCT for detection of foodborne pathogens
    Applications of UCNPs in the detection of food safety related mycotoxins
    The application of UPT-POCT in public health emergencies
    Applications of UPT-POCT in Import and Export Quarantine
    Application of UPT-POCT in detection of drugs
    Applications of UPT-POCT in anti-bioterrorism and biosecurity
    Applications of UCNPs in bio-imaging and treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jae Dong Lee, Jong Kook Lee, Min Jin Maya Oh.
    Summary: This book describes the principles of laser treatment in dermatology and, taking into account these principles, provides clinicans with clear, up-to-date guidance on choice of the appropriate laser and parameters for different skin conditions. The aim is to provide a gold standard laser reference book that will meet the needs of those who are already performing laser surgery as well as novices to the field. Readers will find readily understandable coverage of both basic and advanced laser theory. Based on this theory, the authors proceed to explain all the considerations that need to be taken into account when choosing laser systems and parameters for a variety of indications, including all relevant vascular and pigmented lesions and the removal of hair, scars, and tattoos. Close attention is paid to the skin characteristics of Asians and the impacts of these characteristics on parameter selection. In addition, a separate chapter is devoted to the efficacy and safety of laser treatment of melasma, a common disease in Asians. .

    Contents:
    1. Laser principles
    2. Laser-induced tissue reactions
    3. Important laser principles
    4. Etiology and treatments of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation
    5. Skin of Asian and a kinds of laser in dermatology
    6. Vascular lasers and treatment of erythema
    7. Lasers in the treatment of pigmented lesions
    8. Laser hair removal
    9. Non-ablative lasers
    10. Ablative lasers and fractional lasers
    11. Various treatments of scar
    12. Causes and treatments of melasma.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editor, Peter Slinger.
    Summary: This book covers recent advances in anesthesia for thoracic surgery, including advances in management of one-lung anesthesia, lung isolation, and lung transplantation. It includes clinical case discussions and tables of detailed anesthetic management.

    Contents:
    pt. 1. Preoperative evaluation
    pt. 2. Thoracic anatomy, physiology, and pharmacology
    pt. 3. Diagnostic and therapeutic procedures of the trachea and airways
    pt. 4. Diagnostic and therapeutic procedures of the mediastinum
    pt. 5. Anesthetic management for intra-thoracic surgery
    pt. 6. Specific patient considerations
    pt. 7. Complex thoracic surgical procedures
    pt. 8. Anesthetic management of uncommon pulmonary procedures
    pt. 9. Anesthesia for surgical procedures for end-stage lung diseases
    pt. 10. Anesthesia for pediatric thoracic surgical procedures
    pt. 11. Trauma
    pt. 12. Post-operative management.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Steven Piantadosi, Curtis L. Meinert, editors.
    Summary: This is a comprehensive major reference work for our SpringerReference program covering clinical trials. Although the core of the Work will focus on the design, analysis, and interpretation of scientific data from clinical trials, a broad spectrum of clinical trial application areas will be covered in detail. This is an important time to develop such a Work, as drug safety and efficacy emphasizes the Clinical Trials process. Because of an immense and growing international disease burden, pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies continue to develop new drugs. Clinical trials have also become extremely globalized in the past 15 years, with over 225,000 international trials ongoing at this point in time. Principles in Practice of Clinical Trials is truly an interdisciplinary that will be divided into the following areas: 1) Clinical Trials Basic Perspectives 2) Regulation and Oversight 3) Basic Trial Designs 4) Advanced Trial Designs 5) Analysis 6) Trial Publication 7) Topics Related Specific Populations and Legal Aspects of Clinical Trials The Work is designed to be comprised of 175 chapters and approximately 2500 pages. The Work will be oriented like many of our SpringerReference Handbooks, presenting detailed and comprehensive expository chapters on broad subjects. The Editors are major figures in the field of clinical trials, and both have written textbooks on the topic. There will also be a slate of 7-8 renowned associate editors that will edit individual sections of the Reference.

    Contents:
    Intro
    A Foreword to the Principles and Practice of Clinical Trials
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Editors
    About the Section Editors
    Contributors
    Part I: Perspectives on Clinical Trials
    1 Social and Scientific History of Randomized Controlled Trials
    Introduction
    Early History of Clinical Trials
    Refining Trial Methods in the Early Twentieth Century
    The Role of Governments in the Institutionalization of Randomized Controlled Trials
    Historical Trial Ethics
    RCTs and Evidence-Based Medicine The Globalization of RCTs and the Challenges of Similarities and Differences in Global Populations
    Social and Scientific Challenges in Randomized Controlled Trials
    Summary and Conclusion
    Key Facts
    Cross-References
    References
    2 Evolution of Clinical Trials Science
    Introduction
    The Scientific MethodScience is the study of natural phenomena, which are accessible to both passive and active observation. P...
    Some Key Evolutionary Developments
    Ethics Governance ModelsRunning a clinical trial in the modern world is not simple and requires some unique governance features. Whil...
    Computerization
    Statistical Advances
    A Likely Future
    Final Comments
    Key Facts
    Cross-References
    References
    3 Terminology: Conventions and Recommendations
    Introduction
    Clinical Trial
    Trial Versus Study
    Pilot Study Versus Feasibility Study
    Name of Trial
    Name of the Experimental Variable: Treatment Versus Intervention
    Name for Groups Represented by Experimental Variable: Study Group, Treatment Group, or Arm Persons Studied: Subject, Patient, or Participant
    Trial Protocol Versus Manual of Operations
    Blocking Versus Stratification and Quotafication
    Open
    Controlled
    Placebo
    Consent
    Randomization Versus Randomized
    Registration Versus Enrollment
    Single Center Trial Versus Multicenter Trial
    Multicenter Versus Cooperative Versus Collaborative
    Principal Investigator (PI) Versus Study Chair
    Clinical Investigator Versus Investigator
    Steering Committee Versus Executive Committee
    Data Monitoring Versus Data Monitoring Committee
    Random Versus Haphazard Primary Versus Secondary Outcomes
    Outcome Versus Endpoint
    Treatment Failure Versus Treatment Cessation
    Blind Versus Mask
    Lost to Followup
    Dropout
    Withdrawals
    Design Variable Versus Primary Outcome Measure
    Baseline Versus Baseline Period
    Screened Versus Enrolled
    End of Followup Versus End of Trial
    Analysis by Assigned Treatment Versus Per Protocol Analysis
    Bias
    Early Stop Versus Nominal Stop
    Summary
    References
    4 Clinical Trials, Ethics, and Human Protections Policies
    Origins of Research Ethics
    Conception of Trials
    Design of Trials
    Digital Access Springer [2022]
  • Digital
    John A. Vaughn, Anthony J. Viera, editors.
    Summary: This unique and comprehensive title offers state-of-the-art guidance on all of the clinical principles and practices needed in providing optimal health and well-being services for college students. Designed for college health professionals and administrators, this highly practical title is comprised of 24 chapters organized in three sections: Common Clinical Problems in College Health, Organizational and Administrative Considerations for College Health, and Population and Public Health Management on a College Campus. Section I topics include travel health services, tuberculosis, eating disorders in college health, and attention deficit hyperactivity disorder among college students, along with several other chapters. Subsequent chapters in Section II then delve into topics such as supporting the health and well-being of a diverse student population, student veterans, health science students, student safety in the clinical setting, and campus management of infectious disease outbreaks, among other topics. The book concludes with organizational considerations such as unique issues in the practice of medicine in the institutional context, situating healthcare within the broader context of wellness on campus, organizational structures of student health, funding student health services, and delivery of innovative healthcare services in college health. Developed by a renowned, multidisciplinary authorship of leaders in college health theory and practice, and coinciding with the founding of the American College Health Association 100 years ago, Principles and Practice of College Health will be of great interest to college health and well-being professionals as well as college administrators.

    Contents:
    part 1. Common clinical problems in college health
    part 2. Population and public health management on a college campus
    part 3. Organization and administrative considerations for college health.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Surveen Ghumman, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Detection of ovulation and aetiology of anovulation
    2. Evaluation prior to controlled ovarian stimulation
    3. Therapeutic intervention of endometrial pathology before ovarian stimulation
    4. Obesity and its impact on ovarian stimulation
    5. Oral ovulogens in IUI and IVF
    6. Ovarian stimulation in IUI
    7. Protocols for gonadotropin use
    8. Human menopausal gonadotropin, pure FSH, and recombinaant FSH: a comparative analysis
    9. GnRH agonists in controlled ovarian stimulation
    10. GnRH antagonist in ovarian stimulation
    11. GnRH agonist versus antagonist in ART
    12. Mild stimulation protocol
    13. Individualizing ovarian stimulation protocols in ART
    14. Impact of mutations and polymorphisms of gonadotrophins and their receptors on the outcome of controlled ovarian stimulation
    15. The role of androgens in controlled ovarian stimulation
    16. The role of LH in controlled ovarian stimulation
    17. Ovulation trigger: HCG vs. GnRH agonist
    18. The pharmacoeconomics of ovarian stimulation
    19. Endocrine monitoring of ART cycles
    20. Ultrasonography in controlled ovarian stimulation
    21. Effect of ovarian stimulation on the endometrium
    22. Luteal support: what to use when?
    23. Endometrial support beyond hormones
    24. Prediction of poor responders and current concepts in management
    25. Premature rise of progesterone during ovarian stimulation
    26. Empty follicle syndrome
    27. Luteinizing unruptured follicle
    28. Endometriosis: surgical management and optimal ovarian stimulation protocol for ART
    29. Hyperprolactinemia
    30. Polycystic ovarian syndrome and response to stimulation
    31. Role of laparoscopic ovarian drilling in polycystic ovarian syndrome and its effect on ART
    32. Ovulation induction in hypogonadotropic hypogonadism
    33. Ovarian stimulation protocols in fertility preservation
    34. Ovarian stimulation in cancer patient
    35. Epidenetics and ovarian stimulation
    36. Effect of ovarian stimulation protocols on oocyte and embryo quality
    37. Ovarian hyperstimulation syndrome: can we eliminate it as a complication of ART?
    38. Multifetal pregnancy reduction.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    ... by Noxon Toomey ...
    Contents:

    v. 3. Treatment.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    T71 .T67 1930
    1
  • Digital
    Ronnie A. Rosenthal, Michael E. Zenilman, Mark R. Katlic, editors.
    Summary: This new edition builds upon the foundation of the first and second editions of the handbook, volumes separated by a decade of experience in the field, in a format that is both comprehensive and fluid. The combination of print and electronic versions will promote more rapid up-dating of chapters as new information appears. The Third Edition opens with general principles. The broad body of the volume encompasses diseases of the elderly and physiologic changes by system, as well as geriatric syndromes, perioperative management, and transitions of care into post-acute settings. The large concluding section is comprised of specialty-specific results of surgery in the elderly and suggested modifications recommended by experienced surgeons. Principles and Practice of Geriatric Surgery provides a comprehensive account that will allow all providers of healthcare to the elderly understand the issues involved in choosing surgery as a treatment option for their patients.

    Contents:
    Section I: Principles
    Principles of Geriatric Surgery
    Defining Quality of Care
    Basic Science of Aging
    Surgery in Centenarians
    Section II: Pre-Operative Assessment and Perioperative Planning
    Patient Centered Surgical Decision
    Anesthesia Evaluation
    Geriatric Syndromes
    Frailty
    Function and Pre-habilitation
    Cognitive Function
    Nutrition
    Polypharmacy
    Cancer in Older Adults
    Diabetes in Older Adults
    Cardiac Disease in Older Adults
    Pulmonary Disease in the Older Adult
    Renal Disease in Older Adults
    Traumatic Injury in Older Adults
    Ethical Issues in Older Adults
    Legal Issues in Older Adults
    Section III: Peri-Operative Care
    Anesthetic Management
    Pain Management
    Post-Operative Delirium
    Models of Care
    Nursing Issues in Older Adult Surgery Patients
    Intensive Care in Older Adult Surgery Patients
    Wound Healing
    Enhanced Recovery After Surgery
    Section IV: Transitions of Care
    Transitioning Care of Discharge
    Rehabilitation and Functional Recovery
    Available Government and Community Resources
    Outcomes of Surgery in Older Adults
    Section V: Specific Specialties
    Neurosurgery
    Otolaryngology, Head and Neck Surgery
    Oral Surgery
    Breast Surgery
    Heart Surgery
    Vascular Surgery
    Lung Surgery
    Esophageal Surgery
    Stomach and Duodenal Surgery
    Large Bowel Surgery
    Anal Rectal Surgery
    Abdominal Wall and Hernia Surgery
    Liver and Biliary Tract Surgery
    Pancreatic Surgery
    Renal Surgery
    Baldder and Prostate Surgery
    Gynecologic Surgery
    Orthopedic Surgery
    Skin and Soft Tissue Surgery
    Transplantation Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Dennis S. Chi, MD, Deputy Chief, Head of Ovarian Cancer Surgery, Gynecology Service, Department of Surgery, Memorial Kettering Cancer Center, New York, New York, Andrew Berchuck, MD, Director, Division of Gynecologic Oncology, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Director, Gynecologic Cancer Program, Duke Cancer Program, Duke Unitersity Medical Center, Durham, North Carolina, Don S. Dizon, MD, FACP, Clinical Co-Director, Gynecologic Oncology, Massachusetts General Hospital Cancer Center, Associate Professor, Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts, Catheryn Yashar, MD, Professor, Chief of Breast and Gynecologic Services, Medical Director La Jolla, University of California, San Diego, San Diego, California.
    Contents:
    Sect. I: Etiology, prevention, and molecular biology
    Epidemiology of gynecologic cancers
    Molecular pathogenesis of gynecologic cancers
    Hereditary gynecologic cancers
    Invasion, metastasis, and angiogenesis
    Development and identification of tumor serum markers
    Cancer prevention strategies
    Preinvasive disease of the lower genital tract
    Sect. II: Diagnostic and therapeutic modalities
    Perioperative and critical care
    Surgical principles in gynecologic oncology
    Diagnostic imaging
    Biologic and physical principles of radiation oncology
    Targeted therapies in gynecologic cancers
    Principles of chemotherapy in gynecologic cancer
    Pharmacology and therapeutics in gynecologic cancer
    Immunotherapy of gynecologic malignancies
    Clinical trials methodology and biostatistics
    Cost-effective and value-based gynecologic cancer care
    Sect. III: Disease sites
    Vulva
    Vaginal cancer
    Cervix uteri
    Corpus: epithelial tumors
    Corpus: mesenchymal tumors
    Epithelial ovarian cancer
    Overian germ cell tumors
    Overian sex cord-stromal tumors
    Gestational trophoblastic disease: molar pregnancy and gestational trophoblastic neoplasia
    Sect. IV: Special management topics
    Breast cancer
    Management of infection in patients with gynecologic malignancy
    Management of surgical complications of gynecologic cancer treatment
    Management of pain
    Nutrition support of patients with gynecologic cancer
    Palliative and supportive care.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    editors, Sylvia C. McKean, MD, SFHM, FACP, Deputy Editor for Editorial Projects, UpToDate, formerly, leave of absence, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Hospitalist, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, John J. Ross, MD, CM, FIDSA, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Hospitalist Service, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Daniel D. Dressler, MD, MSC, SFHM, FACP, Professor of Medicine, Director, Internal Medicine Teaching Services, Emory University Hospital, Associate Program Director, J. Willis Hurst Internal Residency Program, Co-Director, Semmelweis Society, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia, Danielle B. Scheurer, MD, MSCR, SFHM, Chief Quality Officer and Hospitalist, Associate Professor of Medicine, Medical University of South Carolina, Charleston, South Carolina.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2017
  • Digital
    Mohammad Javed Ali, editor.
    Summary: Lacrimal Disorders and Surgery: Historical Perspective -- Embryology of the Lacrimal Drainage System -- Anatomy, Physiology and Immunology of Lacrimal System -- Paradigm Shifts in Lacrimal Anatomy -- The Sino-nasal Anatomy: Endoscopic Lacrimal and Orbital Perspectives -- Evaluation of Epiphora -- Set up for Nasal Endoscopy and Endoscopic Surgery -- Nasal Endoscopic Evaluation -- Dacryoendoscopic Examination of the Lacrimal System -- Imaging Modalities for Lacrimal Disorders -- Disorders of the Upper Lacrimal System -- Congenital Nasolacrimal Duct Obstructions Primary and Secondary Acquired Lacrimal Duct Obstructions (PANDO and SALDO) -- Functional Obstructions of the Lacrimal System -- Infections of the Lacrimal Drainage System -- Lacrimal Trauma and its Management -- Primary External Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Endoscopic Guided Single Self-linking of Stents -- Aesthetic External Dacryocystorhinostomy: The Subciliary Approach -- Aesthetic External Dacryocystorhinostomy: The Transconjunctival Approach -- Primary Endoscopic Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Ultrasonic Endoscopic Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Non-endoscopic Endonasal Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Primary Endocanalicular Laser Dacryocystorhinostomy -- 5mm and 9mm Balloon Assisted Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Revising a Failed Dacryocystorhinostomy Conjunctivodacryocystorhinostomy: Indications, Techniques and Complications -- Adjunctive Endonasal Procedures with Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Evaluation of a Dacryocystorhinostomy Ostium and DOS Scoring -- Intubation in Lacrimal Surgery: Devices and Techniques -- Pediatric and Adult Balloon Dacryoplasty -- Dacryoendoscopic guided canalicular and nasolacrimal duct recanalization -- Tumors of the Lacrimal Drainage System -- Dacryocystectomy: Indications and Techniques -- Debates in Dacryology: The Ostium Dilemma! -- Selva -- Debates in Dacryology: The Mitomycin C Dilemma -- Debates in Dacryology: The Intubation Dilemma! -- The Great Debate: External versus Endonasal Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Quality of Life in Lacrimal Disorders and Patient Satisfaction following Management -- Future Directions in Lacrimal Disorders and their Management. Lacrimal disorders are one of the very common conditions encountered not only by the oculoplastic surgeons but also by the general ophthalmologists in their daily practice. Written by global experts in the field of dacyrology, this book is a comprehensive, updated practical guide on evaluation and management of patients with lacrimal diseases. This up-to-date reference work covers all aspects of the field including the basic anatomy and underlying pathology, evaluation of a patient, and all surgical procedures currently used in managing various disorders in an organized fashion. Surgical modalities including the endoscopic approaches are thoroughly and succinctly reviewed with ample illustrations for better understanding. Since familiarity with a surgical technique is incomplete without the knowledge of risk factors and red flags, an emphasis on dealing with surgical complications and failure has received priority in this treatise. Controversial topics and treatment dilemmas have been discussed in detail with the objective of reviewing the present consensus among the experts.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Robert A. Convissar.
    Summary: Successfully expand the use of lasers in your dental practice! With vibrant, detailed clinical images and easy-to-follow writing, Principles and Practice of Laser Dentistry, 3rd Edition walks you through the most common uses of lasers in areas such as periodontal surgery, dental implants, prosthetic and cosmetic reconstruction and describes how lasers work, how they interact with tissues, and how this knowledge may be applied to dental practice with a focus on technology, surgical techniques, and key steps in treatment. Written by laser dentistry pioneer Dr. Robert A. Convissar and a team of leading experts, this edition includes an ebook free with each purchase of a print book, three new chapters, and new case histories and clinical tips. It contains everything you need to know to build your skills in the rapidly growing field of laser dentistry.

    Contents:
    Einstein’s “Splendid Light”: Origins and Dental Applications
    Laser Fundamentals
    Laser-Assisted Nonsurgical Periodontal Therapy
    Minimally Invasive Surgical and Regenerative Laser Periodontics and Laser-Assisted Oral Medicine
    Lasers in Implant Dentistry
    Photodynamic Therapy in Management of Periodontitis and Periimplantitis
    Lasers in Fixed Prosthetic and Cosmetic Reconstruction
    Laser Bleaching: Tooth Whitening and Mucosal Depigmentation
    Laser-Enhanced Removable Prosthetic Reconstruction
    Use of Lasers for Minor Oral Surgery in General Practice
    Lasers in Major Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery
    Lasers in Restorative Dentistry
    Lasers in Pediatric Dentistry
    Lasers in Neonatal Dentistry—Tongue-Tie and Lip-Tie Release
    Lasers in Orthodontics
    Lasers in Endodontics
    Photobiomodulation Therapy in Clinical Dentistry
    Noninvasive Outpatient Laser Therapy for Adult Snoring and Apnea
    Introducing Lasers Into the Dental Practice
    Research in Laser Dentistry: Current and Novel Treatments and Theranostics
    Selected US FDA Marketing Clearances
    Professional Societies Dedicated to the Use of Lasers in Medicine and Dentistry
    Selected Journals of Interest to Dental Laser Practitioners.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ming-Huei Cheng, David W. Chang, Ketan M. Patel.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    Ming-Huei Cheng, David W. Chang, Ketan M. Patel.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Sharon Einav, Carolyn F. Weiniger, Ruth Landau, editors.
    Summary: "This book contains a collection of the most recent insights regarding maternal morbidity and mortality and optimization of the care processes during acute critical illness. The volume represents a practical resource to be used in real-time by medical practitioners faced with a woman who is critically ill during pregnancy and the peripartum period. By providing concise tools for disease identifiers and management flow-charts, the Editors aimed to increase awareness and improve processes of care for this population. Many care paradigms for obstetric patients are currently unstandardized, unfocused and often do not follow a pre-determined path. Each chapter will provide the practitioner with updated information on how to identify specific critical conditions and how to manage them once they have been identified, to enhance recognition and readiness. This book should be used as a resource to improve the quality of care administered to obstetric patients, to reduce fragmented care processes and to improve interdisciplinary co-ordination and communication, with the overall aim of decreasing maternal morbidity and mortality. Therefore, this book represents an invaluable guide to specialists in critical care, anesthesia and obstetrics as well as to intensive care nurses and midwives.".

    Contents:
    Part I. Epidemiology
    Preventable maternal deaths
    Identifying the critically ill parturient
    Maternal near miss
    Maternal ICU admission
    Part II. The coagulation system
    Physiology of hyper and hypocoagability during pregnancy
    Severe peripartum hemorrhage
    Fluid management
    Management and prevention of thromboticand embolic phenomena during pregnancy- DVT, AFE and PE
    Part III. The cardiovascular system
    Normal changes in cardiovascular physiology during pregnancy
    Exacerbation of pre-existing heart disease (valves, IHD)
    Cardiomyopathy of pregnancy
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    POCUS
    point of care ultrasound in critical illness
    ECMO
    Part IV. The immune system
    Physiological changes of the immune system during pregnancy
    Hypertension, eclampsia and pre-eclampsia
    Viral infections during pregnancy
    HIV, Zika, H1N1, Dengue (including isolation and ICU management)
    Infection during early pregnancy and septic abortions
    Infections in Late Pregnancy and Puerperium
    Part V. The respiratory system
    Physiological changes in the airway and the respiratory system
    Airway management
    Lung ultrasound
    advanced
    Management of ventilation
    Part VI. The neuromuscular system
    Physiology and monitoring of the brain during pregnancy
    Management of maternal stroke
    Neurological crises (e.g. status epilepticus)
    Part VII. Maternal cardiac arrest
    Maternal Cardiac Arrest
    Post-resuscitaton care and targeted temperature management
    The brain dead mother
    ethics and physiology
    Part VIII. The renal system
    Renal physiology during pregnancy
    Kidney failure and RRT
    Part IX. The endocrine and metabolic systems
    Nutrition
    Acute fatty liver of pregnancy, liver failure and transplant
    Part X. Surgical dilemmas in critically ill women
    Trauma during pregnancy
    Intra-abdominal surgery
    Brain surgery
    Maternal critical care during disasters
    Part XI. Medications and complications
    Drugs
    Pain management
    Anaphylaxis.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Joseph Jankovic, Mark Hallett, Michael S. Okun, Cynthia L. Comella, Stanley Fahn; with contributions by Jennifer G. Goldman.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Rita Charon, Sayantani DasGupta, Nellie Hermann, Craig Irvine, Eric R. Marcus, Edgar Rivera Colsn, Danielle Spencer, and Maura Spiegel.
    Contents:
    Accounts of self : exploring relationality through literature / Maura Spiegel and Danielle Spencer
    This is what we do, and these things happen : experience, emotion, and relationality in the classroom / Maura Spiegel and Danielle Spencer
    Dualism and its discontents I : philosophy, literature, and medicine / Craig Irvine and Danielle Spencer
    Dualism and its discontents II : philosophical tinctures / Craig Irvine and Danielle Spencer
    Deliver us from certainty : training for narrative ethics / Craig Irvine and Rita Charon
    The politics of pedagogy : cripping, queering and un-homing health humanities / Sayantani Dasgupta
    Close reading : the signature method of narrative medicine / Rita Charon
    A framework for teaching close reading / Rita Charon
    Creativity : what, why, and where? / Nellie Hermann
    Can creativity be taught? / Nellie Hermann
    The ethnographic field : narrative, visual, contextual / Edgar Rivera Colón
    A narrative transformation of health and health care / Eric Marcus and Rita Charon
    Clinical contributions of narrative medicine / Rita Charon.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    [editors], Vikas Dhikav, Kuljeet Singh Anand
    Summary: "Principles and Practice of Neuropsychopharmacology: A Clinical Reference for Residents, Physicians, and Biomedical Scientists is a concise yet comprehensive book that discusses the drugs used in the treatment of neurological and psychiatric diseases from the perspective of practicing clinicians. There is a considerable overlap between these two specialties as neurologists often use the medicines used by psychiatrists and vice versa. This book addresses the merger of topics of mutual interest for them in a single volume of contemporary pharmacology. It provides detailed coverage of pharmacotherapy of neurological and psychiatric disorders in general practice. The content has been made more accessible with the judicious use of tables and figures, case examples, and details of neurochemical alterations. The book is useful for both beginners and advanced readers as it details clinical practices followed in dealing with psychiatric patients in developing nations like India to enhance practice-oriented learning and provides evidence-based guidelines from world’s leading medical bodies." - Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    History of neuropsychopharmacology
    Functional neuroanatomy in neuropsychopharmacology – Neurotransmitters
    Pharmacokinetic principles in neuropsychopharmacology
    Pharmacodynamics of neuropsychopharmacological agents
    Drug treatment of headaches – Antidepressants – Antipsychotics
    Antimanic agents
    Drugs for anxiety and insomnia
    Antiepileptic drugs
    Drugs for Parkinson’s disease
    Drugs for dementia
    Pharmacotherapy of stroke
    Deaddiction pharmacotherapy
    Pharmacological management of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder
    Genetic polymorphism in neuropsychopharmacology
    Cognitive enhancers.
  • Digital
    Stephen J. D. O'Keefe.
    Summary: This book provides the reader with an understanding of human nutritional and metabolic physiology and how it goes wrong in illness. Divided into three major sections, the volume instructs the reader on how and when to use nutritional support, and includes a summary of the published outcome studies on the application of nutritional support to the management of common illnesses. In this way, the book supplies the reader with all the known information on how to make the best judgment of when, what and how to feed sick patients. Authored by a renowned expert in the field, The Principles and Practice of Nutritional Support is a valuable resource for gastroenterologists, surgeons, critical care physicians, endocrinologists, and all those involved with patient-care, both in hospital, in rehabilitation, or at home.

    Contents:
    Cell Biology
    Physiology of Human Nutrition: Starvation and Obesity
    Physiology of Digestion and Absorption: the interdependence between food and the gut
    Pathophysiology: Nutrition in Illness
    Nutritional Support
    The Nutrition Support Team
    Key Principles for Nutritional Intervention
    Enteral Nutrition
    Parenteral Feeding
    Nutritional Support at Home
    Permanent Intestinal Failure and the Short Bowel Syndrome
    Small Bowel Transplantation
    Acute and Chronic Pancreatitis
    Liver Disease
    Renal Disease
    Nutrition Support in the Obese
    Nutritional Support in the Elderly.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Zahid H. Bajwa, R. Joshua Wootton, Carol A. Warfield.
    Summary: This concise yet comprehensive text is a true one-stop resource for anesthesiologists, specialists in pain medicine, neurologists, physiatrists, and primary care physicians wishing to understand more about pain medicine, and fellows and residents training in pain medicine. Every aspect of diagnosing and treating specific pain conditions and syndromes is covered, including general principles, anatomy, physiology, physical and laboratory diagnosis, psychology, and therapeutic interventions. Each chapter represents a careful distillation of current science, key concepts, and clinical treatments of the subject, all presented in a highly accessible design. The authors have included an extensive list of references at the end of each chapter to encourage further research.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessAnesthesiology
    AccessNeurology
  • Digital
    [editors], Ann M. Berger, Joseph F. O'Neill.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    editor, Sarah S. Long ; associate editors, Charles G. Prober, Marc Fischer.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    editor, Sarah S. Long ; associate editors, Charles G. Prober, Marc Fischer, David W. Kimberlin.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    editors, Philip A. Pizzo, MD, David and Susan Heckerman Professor of Pediatrics and of Microbiology and Immunology, former Dean of the Stanford University School of Medicine, Founding Director, Stanford Distinguished Careers Institute, Stanford University, Stanford, California, David G. Poplack, MD, Elise C. Young Professor of Pediatric Oncology, Head Hematology-Oncology Section, Department of Pediatrics, Baylor College of Medicine, Deputy Director, Texas Children's Cancer and Hematology Centers, Texas Children's Hospital, Houston, Texas ; associate editors: Peter C. Adamson, MD, Professor of Pediatrics & Pharmacology, Perelman School of Medicine of the University of Pennsylvania, The Children's Hospital of Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Susan M. Blaney, MD, Professor, Hematology-Oncology Section, Department of Pediatrics, Baylor College of Medicine, Deputy Director, Texas Children's Cancer Center and Hematology Centers, Texas Children's Hospital, Houston, Texas, Lee J. Helman, MD, Scientific Director for Clinical Research, Center for Cancer Research, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Maryland.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of childhood cancer
    Childhood cancer and heredity
    Molecular and genetic basis of childhood cancer
    Biology of childhood cancer
    Tumor immunology and pediatric cancer
    Clinical assessment and differential diagnosis of the child with suspected cancer
    Pathology and molecular diagnosis of leukemias and lymphomas
    Diagnostic pathology of pediatric malignancies
    Imaging studies in the diagnosis and management of pediatric malignancies
    General principles of chemotherapy
    Molecularly targeted therapies and biotherapeutics
    General principles of surgery
    General principles of radiation oncology
    Adoptive cellular immunotherapy
    Adolescents and young adults with cancer
    Hematopoietic stem cell transplantation in pediatric oncology
    Cancer clinical trials: design, conduct, analysis, and reporting
    Maximizing safety in cancer treatment
    Acute lymphoblastic leukemia
    Acute myeloid leukemia and myelodysplastic syndromes
    Myeloproliferative neoplasms of childhood
    Hodgkin lymphoma
    Malignant Non-Hodgkin lymphomas in children
    Lymphoproliferative disorders and malignancies related to immunodeficiencies
    Histiocytic diseases
    Gliomas, ependymomas, and other nonembryonal tumors of the central nervous system
    Embryonal and pineal region tumors
    Retinoblastoma
    Live tumors
    Renal tumors
    Neuroblastoma
    Rhabdomyosarcoma
    The nonrhabdomyosarcoma soft tissue sarcoma
    Ewing sarcoma
    Osteosarcoma
    Germ cell tumors
    Endocrine tumors
    Rare pediatric tumors
    Oncologic emergencies
    Hematologic supportive care for children with cancer
    Infectious complications in pediatric cancer patients
    Nutritional supportive care
    Pain and symptom management
    Nursing support of the child with cancer
    Rehabilitation of the child with cancer
    Psychiatric and psychosocial support for the child and family
    The other side of the bed: what caregivers can learn from listening to patients and their families
    Ethical considerations in pediatric oncology
    Late effects of childhood cancer and its treatment
    Educational issues for children with cancer
    Palliative care for the child with cancer
    Economic issues in pediatric cancer
    Pediatric cance policy and case advocacy on insurance, education, and employment
    Complementary and alternative medical therapies in pediatric oncology
    Pediatric oncology in countries with limited resources.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    [edited by] Stephen H. Sheldon, Meir H. Kryger, Richard Ferber, David Gozal.
    Summary: Principles and Practice of Pediatric Sleep Medicine, 2nd Edition, written by preeminent sleep medicine experts Drs. Sheldon, Kryger, Ferber, and Gozal, is the most comprehensive source for diagnosing and managing sleep disorders in children. Newly updated and now in full color throughout, this medical reference book is internationally recognized as the definitive resource for any health practitioner who treats children, providing absolute guidance on virtually all of the sleep-associated problems encountered in pediatric patients. Organized format separates coverage into Normal and Abnormal sleep for quick access to the key information you need.Abundantly referenced chapters help you to investigate topics further. Equips you with a complete understanding of both medical and psychiatric sleep disorders.

    Contents:
    The Function, Phylogeny and Ontogeny of Sleep
    History of Pediatric Sleep Medicine
    Development of Sleep in Infants and Children
    Chronobiology
    Circadian Rhythm Disorders: Diagnosis and Treatment
    Sleep during Adolescence
    Pharmacology of Sleep
    Promoting Healthy Sleep Practices
    Sleep History and Differential Diagnosis
    Sleep and Colic
    Sleep and Gastroesophageal Reflux
    Sleep and Pain
    Sleep Related Enuresis
    Bedtime Problems and Night Wakings
    Attention Deficit, Hyperactivity, and Sleep Disorders
    Sleep and Its Disturbances in Autism Spectrum Disorder
    Metabolic Syndrome and Obesity
    Narcolepsy
    Idiopathic Hypersomnia
    Kleine-Levin Syndrome and Recurrent Hypersomnias
    Post-Traumatic and Post-Neurosurgical Hypersomnia
    Medication-Related Hypersomnia
    Respiratory Physiology and Pathophysiology During Sleep
    Apnea of Prematurity
    Apparent Life Threatening Events (ALTE)
    Primary Snoring
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea Syndrome: Pathophysiology and Clinical Characteristics
    Diagnosis of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Cognitive and Behavioral Consequences of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Cardiovascular Consequences of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Metabolic Consequences of Sleep Disordered Breathing
    Treatment Options in Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    The Otolaryngologist Approach to Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Sleep Disorder Breathing: A Dental Perspective
    Non-Invasive Positive Airway Pressure Treatment
    Novel Pharmacological Approaches for Treatment of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Congenital Central Hypoventilation Syndrome
    Rapid-Onset Obesity with Hypothalamic Dysfunction, Hypoventilation, and Autonomic Dysregulation (ROHHAD)
    Disorders of Arousal
    REM Behavior Disorder
    Other Parasomnias
    Sleep-Related Movement Disorders
    Restless Legs Syndrome, Periodic Leg Movements and Periodic Limb Movement Disorder
    Sleep and Sleep Disorders in Epilepsy
    Neoplasms and Sleep: Impact and Implications
    Sleep in Psychiatric Disorders
    Evaluation of Sleep in Cancer
    Sleep and School Start Times
    Polysomnography and MSLT.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2014
  • Digital
    Mahmoud Torabinejad, Mohammad A. Sabeti, Charles J. Goodacre ; [contributors, Aladdin Al-Ardah ... et al].
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Meir Kryger, Thomas Roth, Cathy A. Goldstein, William C. Dement.
    Contents:
    Part I. Principles of sleep medicine
    Part II. Practice of sleep medicine.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    Lawrence S. Chin, William F. Regine, editors.
    Summary: Principles and Practice of Stereotactic Radiosurgery (SRS), Second Edition aims to serve as the definitive reference textbook for SRS practitioners. It provides a theoretical basis for the use of therapeutic SRS including imaging techniques and radiobiology. The bulk of the textbook contains chapters that are comprehensive in scope on all diseases that are treated by SRS. Lastly, it addresses administrative and technical aspects of running an SRS unit. Each chapter provides an expansive treatment of the subject. Emphasis is placed on the technical aspects of SRS so that practitioners in this field will use it as a daily reference. Each subject is presented by historical context, then by its pathophysiology. Current treatment methods and results are addressed in depth. A liberal use of tables and figures enhance the presentation. A review of all major clinical studies and representative case presentations, where possible, are provided with imaging, treatment planning, and follow-up results. Each chapter is followed by one or two mini-chapters that provide a counter-viewpoint experience to the main chapter, which is oriented to SRS. These counter-viewpoint chapters are written by a noted expert in that field and address in greater detail the indications, results, and complications of their approach to the disease discussed in the main chapter. Principles and Practice of Stereotactic Radiosurgery, Second Edition is the only reference needed for neurosurgeons, radiation oncologists, and medical physicists at all levels of training and practice who are interested in SRS.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    History of Stereotactic Radiosurgery
    Imaging and Treatment and Follow-up in Stereotactic Radiosurgery
    Techniques of Stereotactic Neurosurgery
    Radiation Biology and Physics
    The Physics of Stereotactic Radiosurgery
    Radiobiology Principles of Stereotactic Radiosurgery
    Experimental Radiosurgery Models
    Treatment Planning
    Designing and Building a Radiosurgery Unit
    Stereotactic Radiosurgery Techniques
    Gamma Knife
    LINAC
    Charged Particle
    Cyberknife
    GammaPod
    Treatment of Disease Types
    Metastatic Brain Tumors
    Glial Tumors
    Meningiomas
    Acoustic Tumors
    Pituitary Tumors
    Pediatric Disorders
    Pineal Region Tumors
    Skull Base Tumors
    Head and Neck Tumor
    Spinal Tumors
    Arteriovenous Malformations
    Cavernous Malformations and other Vascular Abnormalities
    Trigeminal Neuralgia
    Movement Disorder
    Psychiatric and Pain Disorders
    Epilepsy
    Ocular and Orbital
    Extracranial Radiosurgery
    Patient Care and Socio-Economic Issues
    Complication Management in Radiosurgery
    Cost Effectiveness and Quality of Life.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by O. James Garden, Rowan W. Parks.
    Contents:
    Metabolic response to injury, fluid and electrolyte balance and shock / Stuart McKechnie, Timothy Walsh
    Transfusion of blood components and plasma products / Rachel H.A. Green, Marc L. Turner
    Nutritional support in surgical patients / Gordon L. Carlson, Ken Fearon
    Infections and antibiotics / Savita Gossain, Peter M. Hawkey
    Ethics, preoperative considerations, anaesthesia and analgesia / Ewen M. Harrison, Michael A. Gillies
    Principles of the surgical management of cancer / Mark A. Potter
    Trauma and multiple injury / Euan J. Dickson
    Practical procedures and patient investigation / Damian James Mole
    Postoperative care and complications / Pawanindra Lal
    Evidence-based practice and professional development / Steven Anderson, Siun Walsh, Arnie D.K. Hill
    The abdominal wall and hernia / Andrew de Beaux
    The acute abdomen / Simon Paterson-Brown
    The oesphagus, stomach and duodendum / Richard Hardwick
    The liver and the biliary tract / Saxon Connor
    The pancreas and spleen / C. Ross Carter, Colin McKay
    The small and large intestine / Malcolm G. Dunlop
    The anorectum / Farhat Din
    Plastic surgery including common skin and subcutaneous lesions / Patrick Addison
    The breast / J. Michael Dixon
    Endocrine surgery / Sonia Wakelin
    Vascular and endovascular surgery / Hanafiah Harunarashid
    Cardiothoracic surgery / Robert R. Jeffrey
    Urological surgery / Grant D. Stewart
    Neurosurgery / Lynn Myles, Paul M. Brennan
    Transplantation surgery / Lorna Marson, John Forsythe
    Ear, nose and throat surgery / Janet Wilson
    Orthopaedic surgery / John C. McKinley, Issaq Ahmed.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    editor, Amar Safdar.
    Summary: This comprehensive volume provides a platform from which both major and minor infectious diseases related issues are addressed in-depth among this highly susceptible population. The book begins with an overview of infections in various modalities. This is followed by chapters on clinical disorders, etiologic agents, therapeutics, and infection prevention. Chapters include easy-to-follow figures and tables, radiologic images, and pictorial demonstrations of various disease states to familiarize and reacquaint the transplant clinicians and surgeons in practice and training, and those belonging to subspecialties providing supportive care for these patients. Discussions to enumerate the noninfectious causes that mimic infectious diseases; clinical relevance and effective utility of existing and emerging diagnostic tools are presented throughout the book. Authored by leaders in their fields, this book is the go-to reference for management of patients undergoing hematopoietic and solid organ transplantation.

    Contents:
    Es iseases due to Other Endemic Fungi in Transplant Recipients
    Cytomegalovirus
    Epstein-Barr Virus Infection and Post-Transplant Lymphoproliferative Disease
    Herpes Simplex Viruses 1 and 2, Varicella Zoster Virus and Human Herpes Viruses 6, 7 and 8 in Transplant Recipients
    Respiratory Viral Infections in Transplant Recipients
    . Hepatitis A, B, C
    Enterovirus Infection in Immunocompromised Hosts
    Parvovirus B19
    West Nile Virus in Immunocompromised Hosts
    Rare and Emerging Viral Infections in the Transplant Population
    Parasitic Infections in Transplant Recipients: Toxoplasmosis, Strongyloidiasis and Other Parasites
    Impacts and Challenges of Advanced Diagnostic Assays for Transplant Infectious Diseases
    Diagnosis of Systemic Fungal Diseases
    Viral Diagnostics
    Antibiotic Consideration in Transplant Recipients
    Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Antibiotics in Transplant Patients
    Antifungal Consideration for Transplant Recipients
    Immunomodulatory Properties of Antifungal Agents on Immune Functions of the Host
    Antiviral Consideration for Transplantation Including Drug Resistance
    Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Antiviral Drugs in Special Population
    Anti-Mycobacterial Consideration in Transplantation Including Drug Non-Susceptibility and Resistance: Tuberculosis and Nontuberculous Mycobacterial Disease
    Adaptive Immunotherapy for Opportunistic Infections
    Immunotherapy for Invasive Mold Disease in Transplant Patients – Dendritic Cell Immunotherapy, Interferon-gamma, Remcobinant Myeloid Growth Factors, and Healthy Donor Granulocyte Transfusions
    Antimicrobial Stewardship: Considerations for a Transplant Center
    The Use of Palliative Care in Organ Transplant Patients and End of Life Issues
    Infection Control Strategies in Transplant Populations
    Travel and Transplantation
    Vaccination in Organ Transplant
    Prevention of Fungal Disease
    Antimicrobial Drug Prophylaxis: Challenges and Controversi.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    A Tamilselvi, Ajay Rane, editors.
    Summary: Despite the wide prevalence of urogynaecological problems, in clinical practice, there is a paucity of specialists that are skilled in the management of these conditions. The recognition of the need for a specialist to deal with these specific problems has led to the recent evolution of urogynaecology as a subspecialty. This book, Principles and Practice of Urogynaecology, aims to equip the practicing professionals - Gynaecologists, Urogynaecologists and Urologists, with up-to-date information on the principles that guide the evaluation and management of pelvic organ prolapse and other common urogynaecological problems. With an emphasis on evidence based medicine, the book aims to deliver guidance on management of common urogynaecological problems and provides information on the latest cutting-edge surgical techniques. Written by global experts in the field of urogynaecology, the book focuses initially on pelvic floor anatomy and function, moving seamlessly to the evaluation and management of clinically relevant pelvic floor problems. A detailed discussion on management of mesh related complications is a highlight.

    Contents:
    Part I : Anatomy and Physiology
    Current Concepts in Pelvic Anatomy
    Neuroanatomy of Female Pelvis
    Physiology of Urinary Continence Part II: Lower Urinary Tract Dysfunction
    Evaluation of Urinary Incontinence
    Urodynamics -The Practical aspects
    Overactive bladder.-Management of Stress Urinary Incontinence
    Management of Sling surgery Complications
    Neurogenic Bladder
    Voiding Dysfunction
    Bladder Pain Syndrome Part III: Pelvic Floor Dysfunction
    Evaluation of Pelvic Organ Prolapse.-Conservative management of Pelvic Organ Prolapse.-Anterior and Posterior Vaginal Wall Prolapse
    Surgical management of Apical Prolapse
    Mesh in Prolapse Surgery Part IV: Ano-rectal Dysfunction
    Obstetric Anal Sphincter Injuries and Repair
    Fecal Incontinence.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Indranill Basu-Ray, editor-in-chief ; Darshan Mehta, editor.
    Summary: This is the worlds first reference book covering the role of Yoga in Cardiovascular Diseases. It details epidemiology, physiology, pathology, prevention, and management of cardiovascular diseases based on the current scientific understanding of Yoga. Seventy-five experts from four continents, including the most notable names, contributed to this work to create the worlds first comprehensive reference literature on Yoga in cardiovascular medicine. The chapters cover information related to Yoga, both as prevention and therapy, including coronary artery disease, heart failure, and arrhythmias. In addition, important cardiovascular topics like obesity and diabetes mellitus are also included. A special chapter covers the role of Yoga in the prevention of cardiovascular complications in COVID-19 patients.

    Contents:
    Yoga-A Historical Perspective
    Yoga as Therapy: Ethnomedical Perspective
    Neurophysiology and Neuroanatomy of Meditation
    Effects of Meditation on Psychological, Psychosocial and Physiological Responses to Stress
    Yoga and Autonomic, Vascular and Endothelin Function
    Yoga and Inflammation
    Yoga and Hypertension
    Yoga and Diabetes Mellitus
    Yoga and Obesity
    Yoga and Metabolic Syndrome
    Effects of Yoga on Subclinical Atherosclerosis
    Yoga and Primary Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease
    Yoga and Lifestyle Factors - Diet, Physical activity, Tobacco cessation, Alcohol, and Sleep
    Yoga and Coronary Artery Disease
    Yoga and Heart Failure
    Yoga and Atrial Fibrillation
    Yoga and Implantable Cardioverter: Defibrillator Therapy
    Yoga for Cardiac Surgeries
    Role of Yoga in Cardiovascular Health In HIV Patients. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    M.A. Hayat.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QH212.E4 H38
    1
  • Digital
    Amanda Bergeron, Russell Perkins, Emily Ingebretson, Linda Holifield, editors.
    Summary: This guide provides a summary of key nursing practices and established guidelines necessary to provide care to the spectrum of patients with COVID-19. Experts in the field offer concise and relevant information to fill current knowledge gaps. With the discovery of the novel Coronavirus, SARS-CoV-2, and the development of the subsequent pandemic, large amounts of information have become available about the nature of the virus and how best to care for those afflicted. As nurses caring for these critically ill patients, discerning good evidence-driven data from the masses can be overwhelming, and integrating it into current guidelines can be challenging. This book is meant as a practical nursing guide for both the inpatient and outpatient settings as well as the adult and pediatric populations. This virus has progressed rapidly, causing substantial disruption on a global scale never before seen in our lifetime. Caring for these patients has proven especially challenging due to the rapid growth of research and ever evolving data that comes with the discovery of a new disease. The editors desired to produce a concise, current, and convenient resource accessible to nurses of any background, in any geographical location, which would provide a foundation for the care of patients with COVID-19.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. History and Epidemiology
    Chapter 2. Prevention and Infection Control
    Chapter 3. Clinical Presentation
    Chapter 4. Pharmacological Management
    Chapter 5. Management of Oxygenation/Ventilation positioning
    Chapter 6. Systemic Complications
    Chapter 7 Pediatric Considerations
    Chapter 8. Hospital Discharge
    Chapter 9. Long Term Sequelae
    Chapter 10. Outpatient Management of Covid. 11. Psychological and Sociological Effects. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Niels D. Martin, Lewis J. Kaplan.
    Contents:
    Pain, Agitation, Delirium and Immobility in the ICU
    Bedside Neurologic Monitoring
    Status Epilepticus
    Traumatic Brain Injury
    Care of the Spinal Cord Injured Patient
    Non-traumatic Neurological Conditions
    Hemodynamic Monitoring and Resuscitation
    Hemodynamic Monitoring in Surgical Critical Care
    Cardiovascular Emergencies
    Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO)/Extracorporeal Carbon Dioxide Removal (ECCO2R)
    Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome and Lung Protective Ventilation
    Noninvasive Ventilation in the Peri-operative Period
    Care of the Surgical ICU Patient with Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease and Pulmonary Hypertension
    Diagnosis and Management of Acute Kidney Injury
    Renal Replacement Therapy in the Critically Ill Surgical Patient
    Gastrointestinal Hemorrhage
    Critical Care Management of Severe Acute Pancreatitis
    Hepatic Failure
    Abdominal Compartment Hypertension and Abdominal Compartment Syndrome
    Nutrition in the Surgical ICU Patient
    Antibiotic Strategy and Stewardship
    Sepsis, Severe Sepsis, and Septic Shock
    Source Control and Supporting Therapeutics: Integrating bacterial invasion, host defense, and clinical interventions with source control procedures
    Soft Tissue Infections
    Anemia in the Surgical ICU
    Coagulopathies and Anticoagulation
    Thrombocytopenia in the Surgical Intensive Care Unit
    Venous Thromboembolism in the Intensive Care Unit
    Glycemic Control, Insulin Resistance
    Critical Illness-Related Corticosteroid Insufficiency in the Intensive Care Patient
    Thyroid Disorders
    Hyperadrenergic Crisis
    Trauma
    Immunocompromised Patients
    Transplantation
    Intensive Care in Obstetrics
    The Pediatric Patient Cared for in the Adult ICU
    Organ Donor Management
    Biostatistics for the Intensivist: A Clinically-Oriented Guide to Research Analysis and Interpretation
    Administration
    Practical Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Ethics and the ICU
    Disaster Management and Preparedness
    Post-operative complications following surgery abroad
    Post-Intensive Care Syndrome (PICS)
    Operative Procedures in the Intensive Care Unit
    Anesthesia-Related Issues in the ICU
    Incorporating Advanced Practice Practitioners in the ICU
    Contemporary ICU Design
    Telemedicine for the Intensive Care Unit.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Tom L. Beauchamp and David DeGrazia.
    Summary: This volume is the first to present a framework of general principles for animal research ethics together with an analysis of the principles' meaning and moral requirements. This new framework of six moral principles constitutes a more suitable set of moral guidelines than any currently available, including the influential framework presented in the Principles of Humane Experimental Technique published in 1959 by zoologist and psychologist William M. S.0Russell and microbiologist Rex L. Burch. While other accounts have presented specific directives to guide the use of animals in research, Tom L. Beauchamp and David DeGrazia here offer a set of general moral principles that are adequate to the task of evaluating biomedical and behavioral research involving animals today. Their comprehensive framework addresses ethical requirements pertaining to societal benefit-a critical consideration in justifying the harming of animals in research-and features a thorough program of animal welfare protection. In doing so, their principles bridge the gap between the concerns of the research community and the animal-protection community.0The book is distinctive in featuring commentaries on the framework of principles by eminent figures in animal research ethics from an array of relevant disciplines: veterinary medicine, biomedical research, biology, zoology, comparative psychology, primatology, law, and bioethics. The seven commentators-Larry Carbone, Frans de Waal, Rebecca Dresser, Joseph Garner, Brian Hare, Margaret Landi, and Julian Savulescu-scrutinize Beauchamp and DeGrazia's principles in terms of both their theoretical cogency and practical implications, evaluating their relevance to the medical and scientific professions.

    Contents:
    Preamble to Principles of Animal Research Ethics
    The Essential Place of Moral Justification : Principles of Social Benefit : (1) The Principle of No Alternative Method
    (2) The Principle of Expected Net Benefit
    (3) The Principle of Sufficient Value to Justify Harm
    Principles of Animal Welfare : (1) The Principle of No Unnecessary Harm
    (2) The Principle of Basic Needs
    (3) The Principle of Upper Limits to Harm
    The Crucial Role of Ethics Review Committees
    Scientific Necessity as a Justification for Causing Harm
    On The Principles of Humane Experimental Technique
    Critical Commentary by Authorities on Animal Research Ethics : The Potential and Impacts of Practical Application of Beauchamp and DeGrazia's Six Principles / Larry Carbone
    Reflections on Primates in Research Frans B. M. de Waal
    Putting the Ethical Principles into Practice / Rebecca Dresser
    The Mouse in the Room : The Distinction Between Regulations and Ethics / Joseph P. Garner
    Compassion for Other Animals Beyond the Human Hierarchy of Concern / Brian Hare
    Commentary on the Beauchamp-DeGrazia Framework of Principles / Margaret S. Landi
    The Six Principles, Philosophy, and Applying Human Ethics to Animals / Julian Savulescu.
    Digital Access Oxford 2020
  • Digital
    William E. Prentice, PhD, ATC, PT, FNATA, professor, coordinator Sports Medicine Program, Department of Exercise and Sport Science, the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.
    Summary: Designed to be used by athletic trainers in courses concerned with the scientific evidence-based and clinical foundations of athletic training and sports medicine. The text leads the student from general foundations to specific concepts relative to injury prevention, evaluation management, and rehabilitation."--Publisher

    Contents:
    pt. I. Professional development and responsibilities. Ch. 1. The athletic trainer as a health care provider ; Ch. 2. Health care organization and administration in athletic training ; Ch. 3. Legal concerns and insurance issues
    pt. II. Risk management. Ch. 4. Fitness and conditioning techniques ; Ch. 5. Nutrition and supplements ; Ch. 6. Environmental considerations ; Ch. 7. Protective equipment ; Ch. 8. Wrapping and taping
    pt. III. Pathology of sports injury. Ch. 9. Mechanisms and characteristics of musculoskeletal and nerve trauma ; Ch. 10. Tissue response to injury
    pt. IV. Management skills. Ch. 11. Psychosocial intervention for sports injuries and illnesses ; Ch. 12. On-the-field acute care and emergency procedures ; Ch. 13. Off-the-field injury ; Ch. 14. Infectious diseases, bloodborne pathogens, and universal precautions ; Ch. 15. Using therapeutic modalities ; Ch. 16. Using therapeutic exercise in rehabilitation ; Ch. 17. Pharmacology, drugs, and sports
    pt. V. Musculoskeletal conditions. Ch. 18. The foot ; Ch. 19. The ankle and lower leg ; Ch. 20. The knee and related structures ; Ch. 21. The thigh, hip, groin, and pelvis ; Ch. 22. The shoulder complex ; Ch. 23. The elbow ; Ch. 24. The forearm, wrist, hand, and fingers ; Ch. 25. The spine
    pt. Vi. General medical conditions. Ch. 26. The head, face, eyes, ears, nose, and throat ; Ch. 27. The thorax and abdomen ; Ch. 28. Skin disorders ; Ch. 29. Additional general medical conditions
    Appendixes.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2017
  • Digital
    William E. Prentice.
    Summary: "Since the first edition of Principles of Athletic Training was published in 1963, the profession of athletic training has experienced amazing growth, not only in numbers but also in the associated body of knowledge. During all those years and in fifteen previous editions, the authors of this text, Daniel Arnheim, John Klafs, and now Bill Prentice, have taken it as a personal responsibility to provide the reader with the most current clinical information in athletic training and sports medicine. It has always been based on the most current research evidence and, consequently, it has endured as one of the preeminent textbooks for athletic training students and professionals for more than 50 years"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    The athletic trainer as a health care provider
    Health care organization and administration in athletic training
    Legal concerns and insurance issues
    Fitness and conditioning techniques
    Nutrition and supplements
    Environmental considerations
    Protective equipment
    Wrapping and taping
    Mechanisms and characteristics of musculoskeletal and nerve trauma
    Tissue response to injury
    Psyhosocial intervention for sports injuries and illnesses
    On-the-field acute care and emergency procedures
    Off-the-field injury evaluation
    Infectious diseases, blood borne pathogens, and universal precautions
    Using therapeutic modalities
    Using therapeutic exercise in rehabilitation
    Pharmacology, drugs, and sports
    The foot
    The ankle and lower leg
    The knee and related structures
    The thigh, hip, groin, and pelvis
    The shoulder complex
    The elbow
    The forearm, wrist, hand, and fingers
    The spine
    The head, face, eyes, ears, nose, and throat
    The thorax and abdomen
    Skin disorders
    Additional general medical conditions.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Abbott, A. C.
    Digital Access Google Books 1892-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    G41 .A13 1892
    1
  • Digital
    Ira J. Kalet, Ph.D.
    Summary: This second edition of a pioneering technical work in biomedical informatics provides a very readable treatment of the deep computational ideas at the foundation of the field. Principles of Biomedical Informatics, 2nd Edition is radically reorganized to make it especially useable as a textbook for courses that move beyond the standard introductory material. It includes exercises at the end of each chapter, ideas for student projects, and a number of new topics, such as: .tree structured data, interval trees, and time-oriented medical data and their use . On Line Application Processing (OLAP), an old database idea that is only recently coming of age and finding surprising importance in biomedical informatics a discussion of nursing knowledge and an example of encoding nursing advice in a rule-based system X-ray physics and algorithms for cross-sectional medical image reconstruction, recognizing that this area was one of the most central to the origin of biomedical computing .an introduction to Markov processes, and an outline of the elements of a hospital IT security program, focusing on fundamental ideas rather than specifics of system vulnerabilities or specific technologies. It is simultaneously a unified description of the core research concept areas of biomedical data and knowledge representation, biomedical information access, biomedical decision-making, and information and technology use in biomedical contexts, and a pre-eminent teaching reference for the growing number of healthcare and computing professionals embracing computation in health-related fields. As in the first edition, it includes many worked example programs in Common LISP, the most powerful and accessible modern language for advanced biomedical concept representation and manipulation. The text also includes humor, history, and anecdotal material to balance the mathematically and computationally intensive development in many of the topic areas. The emphasis, as in the first edition, is on ideas and methods that are likely to be of lasting value, not just the popular topics of the day. Ira Kalet is Professor Emeritus of Radiation Oncology, and of Biomedical Informatics and Medical Education, at the University of Washington. Until retiring in 2011 he was also an Adjunct Professor in Computer Science and Engineering, and Biological Structure. From 2005 to 2010 he served as IT Security Director for the University of Washington School of Medicine and its major teaching hospitals. He has been a member of the American Medical Informatics Association since 1990, and an elected Fellow of the American College of Medical Informatics since 2011. His research interests include simulation systems for design of radiation treatment for cancer, software development methodology, and artificial intelligence applications to medicine, particularly expert systems, ontologies and modeling.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    José Antonio Fornés.
    Summary: Molecular motors convert chemical energy (typically from ATP hydrolysis) to directed motion and mechanical work. Biomolecular motors are proteins able of converting chemical energy into mechanical motion and force. Because of their dimension, the many small parts that make up molecular motors must operate at energies only a few times greater than those of the thermal baths. The description of molecular motors must be stochastic in nature. Their actions are often described in terms of Brownian Ratchets mechanisms. In order to describe the principles used in their movement, we need to use the tools that theoretical physics give us. In this book we centralize on the some physical mechanisms of molecular motors.

    Contents:
    Brownian Ratchets and Molecular Motors
    The Fokker-Planck equation
    Biased Brownian Motion
    The Smoluchowski model
    Rotation of a dipole
    Ratchet dimer Brownian motor with Hydrodynamic interactions
    Fluctuations of the proton electromotive force across inner mitochondrial membrane
    Quantum Ratchets.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    by Wolfgang Link.
    Summary: This book explains how current medicines against cancer work and how we find new ones. It provides an easy-to-understand overview of current options to treat patients with cancer, which includes Surgery, Radiation therapy, Chemotherapy, Targeted therapy and Immunotherapy. The efficiency of all these treatments is limited by the capacity of cancer cells to escape therapy. This book explains the mechanisms of anti-cancer drug resistance and strategies to overcome it. The discovery and development process of a new drug is detailed beginning with the identification and validation of a therapeutic target, the identification of an inhibitor of the target and its subsequent preclinical and clinical development until its approval by regulatory authorities. Particular emphasis has been given to specific aspects of the development process including lead generation and optimization, pharmacokinetics, ADME analysis, pharmacodynamics, toxicity and efficacy assessment, investigational new drug (IND) and new drug application (NDA) and the design of clinical trial and their phases. The book covers many aspects of modern personalized oncology and discusses economic aspects of our current system of developing new medicines and its impact on our societies and on future drug research. The author of this book, Dr. Link counts with more than 20 years of experience in biomedical research reflected in numerous publications, patents and key note and plenary presentations at international conferences. Interested readers, students and teachers should read this book as it provides a unique way to learn/teach about basic concepts in oncology and anti-cancer drug research.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    Abbreviations
    Introduction
    Cancer Therapy
    Cancer drug resistance
    Drug Discovery and Development
    Economic and social implications of modern drug discovery. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Stuart J. Hutchison, MD, FRCP(C), FACC, FAHA, FSCCT, Clinical Professor of Medicine, Departments of Cardiac Sciences, Medicine, and Radiology, University of Calgary, Director of Echocardiography, Foothills Medicine Centre and Libin Cardiovascular Institute, Calgary, Alberta, Canada, Naeem Merchant, MD, FRCP(C), Clinical Professor of Medicine, Departments of Cardiac Services, Medicine, and Radiology, University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta, Canada.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Michael R. Barratt, Ellen S. Baker, Sam L. Pool, editors.
    Summary: In its first edition, Principles of Clinical Medicine for Space Flight established itself as the authoritative reference on the contemporary knowledge base of space medicine and standards of care for space flyers. It received excellent notices and is used in the curricula of civilian and military training programs and used as a source of questions for the Aerospace Medicine Certifying Examination under the American Board of Preventive Medicine. In the intervening few years, the continuous manning of the International Space Station has both strengthened existing knowledge and uncovered new and significant phenomena related to the human in space. The Second Edition incorporates this information. Gaps in the first edition will be addressed with the addition new and revised chapters. This edition is extensively peer reviewed and represents the most up to date knowledge. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part I: Unique attributes of space medicine: 1. Physical and bioenvironmental aspects of human space flight / Michael R. Barratt
    2. Radiation and radiation disorders / Jeffrey A. Jones, Fathi Karouia, Lawrence Pinsky, and Octav Cristea
    3. Hypoxia, hypercarbia, and atmospheric control / George Beck, Jennifer Law, Kira Bacal, and Michael R. Barratt
    4. Health effects of atmospheric contamination / John T. James and Valerie E. Ryder
    5. Acoustic and auditory issues / Richard W. Danielson, Christopher S. Allen, José G. Limardo, and Jonathan B. Clark
    6. Spaceflight medical systems / Terrance A. Taddeo, Stevan Gilmore, and Cheryl W. Armstrong
    7. Surgical capabilities / Mark R. Campbell and Roger D. Billica
    8. Telemedicine / Shannon Melton, Scott C. Simmons, Byron A. Smith, and Douglas R. Hamilton
    9. Diagnostic imaging in space medicine / Ashot E. Sargsyan
    10. Medical evacuation risk and crew transport / Smith L. Johnston III, Kieran T. Smart, and James M. Pattarini. Part II: Spaceflight clinical medicine: 11. Medical evaluations and standards / Gary W. Gray, Smith L. Johnston III, Joan Saary, and Tim Cook
    12. Human response to space flight / Ellen S. Baker, Michael R. Barratt, Clarence F. Sams, and Mary L. Wear
    13. Spaceflight metabolism and nutritional support / Scott M. Smith, Helen W. Lane, and Sara R. Zwart
    14. Space and entry motion sickness / Hernando J. Ortega Jr., Deborah L. Harm, and Millard F. Reschke
    15. Acute care / Thomas H. Marshburn, Kjell N. Lindgren, and Shannan Moynihan
    16. Decompression-related disorders / Andrew A. Pilmanis and Jonathan B. Clark
    17. Medical aspects of extravehicular activity / Joseph Dervay, Robert W. Sanders, Moriah S. Thompson, and Tracy Jo Snow
    18. Renal and genitourinary concerns / Jeffrey A. Jones, Robert A. Pietrzyk, Octav Cristea, and Peggy A. Whitson
    19. Musculoskeletal response to space flight / Linda C. Shackelford
    20. Physical performance, countermeasures, and postflight reconditioning / Stuart M. C. Lee, Richard A. Scheuring, Mark E. Guilliams, and Eric L. Kerstman 21. Immunology and microbiology / Clarence F. Sams, Brian E. Crucian, and Duane L. Pierson
    22. Cardiovascular aspects of space flight / Douglas R. Hamilton
    23. Neurologic concerns / Jonathan B. Clark, Jacob J. Bloomberg, and Kira Bacal
    24. Gynecologic and reproductive considerations / Richard T. Jennings and Ellen S. Baker
    25. Behavioral health and performance support / Walter E. Sipes, Christopher F. Flynn, and Gary E. Beven
    26. Sleep, circadian rhythms, and fatigue management in space flight operations / Smith L. Johnston III, Alexandra Whitmire, Thomas H. Marshburn, and Lakshmi Putcha
    27. Spaceflight pharmacology / Virginia Wotring
    28. Ophthalmologic concerns / Thomas H. Mader, C. Robert Gibson, and F. Keith Manuel
    29. Dental considerations / Michael H. Hodapp and Arthur H. Jeske
    30. Spacecraft accident investigation / Robert Banks, Serena M. Auñón, Richard Harding, and Amy Mumbower.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Jose Cibelli [and six others].
    Summary: Principles of Cloning, Second Edition is the fully revised edition of the authoritative book on the science of cloning. The book presents the basic biological mechanisms of how cloning works and progresses to discuss current and potential applications in basic biology, agriculture, biotechnology, and medicine. Beginning with the history and theory behind cloning, the book goes on to examine methods of micromanipulation, nuclear transfer, genetic modification, and pregnancy and neonatal care of cloned animals. The cloning of various species-including mice, sheep, cattle, and non-mammals-is considered as well.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Mark Savarise, Christopher Senkowski, editors.
    Contents:
    Section I: History
    Section II: ICD Coding
    ICD-9 Coding
    ICD-10 Coding
    Section III: CPT
    The CPT Process and Panel
    CPT Application
    Section IV: The RUC
    Harvard Study and the Evolution of the RVU
    History of the RUC
    RVU Valuation Process
    How RVU have been Used for Physician Benchmarking
    Section V: Reimbursement
    CMS and the SGR
    Copays, Deductibles, Out of Pocket
    Billing and Collections
    Section VI: APC, DRGs and Hospital Reimbursement
    Medicare Part A
    DRG-Based Payment, CCs and MCCs and APCs
    How ASCs are Reimbursed Differently
    Durable Medical Equipment
    Section VII: Alternative Payment Schemes
    Bundled Payment Models
    Accountable Care Organizations
    Pay for Performance
    Section VIII: Quality Measures
    PQRS, SCIP and Other Existing Measures
    Pay for Performance
    Section IX: Specific Coding Issues
    Evaluation and Management
    Skin and Soft Tissue Procedures
    Breast
    Vascular
    GI
    Laparoscopy
    Bariatric
    Colon and Rectal
    Abdominal Wall
    Oncology
    Transplant
    Trauma and Critical Care
    Endoscopy.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Jesse B. Hall, Gregory A. Schmidt, John P. Kress.
    Contents:
    An overview of the approach to and organization of critical care
    General mangement of the patient
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Pulmonary disorders
    Infectious disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Hematalogic and oncologic disorders
    Renal and metabolic disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    The surgical patient
    Special problems in critical care.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessSurgery
    AccessAnesthesiology
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    Alpesh Gandhi, Narendra Malhotra, Jaideep Malhotra, Nidhi Gupta, Neharika Malhotra Bora, editors.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Seth Navinda Delpachitra, Anton William Sklavos, Ricky Ritesh Kumar.
    Summary: "First text to focus solely on dentoalveolar extractions and surgery, Highly illustrated with full colour photographs throughout. Written using the format of a technical walk-through guide that can be used as a reference prior to surgery. Accompanied by a companion website featuring step-by-step videos, and MCQs to test knowledge"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Principles of Surgery
    Local Anaesthesia
    Basic Surgical Instruments and Principles of Use
    Simple Extraction Techniques
    Surgical Extraction Techniques
    Intraoperative Complications
    Third Molar Surgery
    The Management of Medical Compromise
    Postoperative Care and Late Complications.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Print
    Lewis Wolpert [and four others].
    Summary: Developmental biology is at the core of all biology. This text emphasises the principles and key developments in order to provide an approach and style that will appeal to students at all levels.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Leonid Poretsky, editor.
    Summary: The third edition of this important work is a timely update to the comprehensive textbook first published in 2002 and reissued in a second edition in 2010. The past few years have witnessed major developments in our understanding of diabetes and in therapeutic approaches to this disease and its numerous complications. Thus, all chapters have been significantly revised and updated with current evidence and best practices, and four brand new chapters are included, discussing the potential role of vitamin D in the pathogenesis of diabetes, peculiarities of diabetes in the elderly, oral manifestations of diabetes, and the current state of bariatric surgery. Written by an international group of experts and carefully edited by a leading authority on the subject, Principles of Diabetes Mellitus, Third Edition is an invaluable resource for researchers and physicians of all specialties, as well as medical students and investigators of all aspects of diabetes, who deal with an illness that has reached epidemic proportions.

    Contents:
    Part I: The Main Events in the History of Diabetes Mellitus
    Part II: Physiology of Glucose Metabolism
    Part III: Diagnosis and Epidemiology of Diabetes
    Part IV: Genes and Diabetes
    Part V: Diabetes Syndromes
    Part VI: Complications of Diabetes
    Part VII: Related Disorders
    Part VIII: Therapy of Diabetes Mellitus
    General Principles
    Part IX: Diabetes Prevention
    Part X
    Resources for Patients with Diabetes.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Antonino Belfiore, Derek LeRoith, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Wayne F. Larrabee Jr., David A. Sherris, Jeffrey C. Teixeira ; Kate Sweeney, medical illustrator,
    Contents:
    Soft tissue biomechanics and physiology
    Fundamental techniques
    Scalp
    Forehead
    Eyes
    Nose
    Cheek
    Ears
    Lips and chin
    Graft harvest techniques.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    edited by Shamsuddin Akhtar, Stanley Rosenbaum.
    Summary: The proportion of the population of octogenarians and elderly patients presenting for intensive care is rapidly increasing thus exacerbating the need to modify our critical care management to cater for this patient group. This book will provide practical guidance on all issues related to the critical care of elderly patients, incorporating physiological and epidemiological information, clinical guidance, ethical and end-of-life issues and advice about optimal use of drugs and new technologies. Complications of polypharmacy, high-risk surgery and increased recovery times are also discussed. Chapters are concise, each including a list of key points and summary of available data, making this a quick reference for experienced consultants, as well as a useful resource for trainees preparing for exams.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of critical illness in the elderly
    Chronic critical illness in geriatric patients
    Principles of geriatric pharmacotherapy
    Respiratory critical care in the elderly
    Neurocognitive dysfunction and geriatric neurocritical care
    Geriatric cardiovascular critical care
    Nutritional and metabolic derangements in the critically ill elderly
    Electrolyte and renal disorders in the critically ill elderly
    Trauma and musculoskeletal system dysfunction in the critically ill elderly
    Immune response and infections in the elderly
    Transfusion therapy and common hematologic problems in the critically ill elderly
    Stress response to surgery in the elderly
    Perioperative care of geriatric patients at risk of developing critical illness
    Ethical issues: withdrawing, withholding, and futility
    Geriatric critical care units: model for interdisciplinary approach.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    editors Danielle Laraque-Arena, Bonita F. Stanton.
    Summary: "This indispensable resource provides a cohesive, sustainable, and ethical approach to medical education and research that addresses the health needs of children locally and globally"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Part I. Operating principles for engaging in global education and research. Global child health populations: a community pediatrics framework and relevance to education and research
    Evolution of our understanding of the concept and challenges of global health research and education
    Positive strategies in achieving health for all children: an equity framework and its effect on research design and education
    Epidemiology and social determinants of global health as the basis for education and research
    A new development matrix for global child health
    Part II. Domains of competency for global health. Global health administrative competencies
    Global health education faculty competencies
    Global health research competencies
    Global health clinical competencies
    Part III. Educational models in global health settings
    Purposeful and mindful leadership: an educational framework for global child health
    A new advocacy paradigm for education: the role of persistence
    Cross-cultural training of residents and medical students in global child health
    The role of simulation in health education globally: a review of the Neonatal Resuscitation Program and Helping Babies Breathe
    Child development: the next global health frontier
    Part IV. Models for global health research. Environmental hazards and global child health: the need for evidence-based advocacy
    Implication of a community-based participatory research model in a behavioral intervention project in china
    Ethical research in global child health
    The GHESKIO Centers for Research in Haiti: an education and research model in action
    Injury prevention research and global child health
    A global snapshot of child maltreatment and child protection
    Developing the agenda for global child health at the American Academy of Pediatrics
    Global health research: role of specialty care
    Appendixes. Faculty competencies for global health
    List of abbreviations/organizations
    Glossary.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Pedro T. Ramirez, Michael Frumovitz, Nadeem R. Abu-Rustum.
    Summary: "With an emphasis on a practical, "how-to" approach, this comprehensive text addresses the most important and commonly performed procedures in gynecologic oncology surgery today. Written by leaders in the field, Principles of Gynecologic Oncology Surgery clearly describes the critical steps for each procedure, provides up-to-date information on the recent literature, and includes high-quality illustrations of anatomy and technique"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    I. Introduction
    II. Principles of abdominal and pelvic surgery
    III. Abdominal and Pelvic Anatomy
    IV. Vulvar/vaginal cancer. Preoperative evaluation
    Vulvectomy and sentinel node mapping
    Groin lymphadenectomy
    Vaginectomy
    Management of surgical complications
    V. Cervical cancer. Preoperative evaluation
    Indications for surgery for early- and locally advanced disease
    Conservative surgery
    Radical hysterectomy
    Sentinel node mapping
    Surgical staging for treatment planning
    Management of surgical complications
    VI. Endometrial cancer. Preoperative evaluation
    Indications for sentinel node mapping and lymphadenectomy
    Technique of standard hysterectomy and lymphadenectomy
    VII. Ovarian cancer. Preoperative evaluation
    Indications for laparoscopic assessment for cytoreduction
    Radical upper abdominal surgery (liver, diaphragm, spleen)
    Radical pelvic surgery
    Complications and management of radical cytoreduction
    VIII. Pelvic exenteration. Preoperative evaluation
    Removal of specimen
    Complications of exenteration
    IX. Surgery on the intestinal tract. Principles
    Small bowel resection/anastomosis
    Large bowel resection/anastomosis
    Creation of a stomae
    Complications and management of complications
    X. Surgery on the urinary tract. Principles
    Repair of cystotomy
    Reimplantation of ureter
    Creation of neobladders
    XI. Pelvic reconstructive procedures. Rectus abdominus flap
    Gracilis flap
    Continent and incontinent urinary diversion
    XII. Management of general complications. GI injuries
    GU injuries
    Vascular injuries
    XIII. Management of radiation complications. Radiation-related bowel obstruction
    Fistulae
    Radiation necrosis
    XIV. Novel Surgery in gynecologic oncology. Image-guided surgery
    Single-site minimally invasive surgery
    Robotic surgery.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Thomas E. Trumble, Ghazi M. Rayan, Jeffrey E. Budoff, Mark E. Baratz, David J. Slutsky.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Tim Benson, Grahame Grieve.
    Summary: This extensively updated fourth edition expands the discussion of FHIR (Fast Health Interoperability Resources), which has rapidly become the most important health interoperability standard globally. FHIR can be implemented at a fraction of the price of existing alternatives and is well suited for use in mobile phone apps, cloud communications and electronic health records. FHIR combines the best features of HL7's v2, v3 and CDA while leveraging the latest web standards and clinical terminologies, with a tight focus on implementation. Principles of Health Interoperability has been completely re-organised into five sections. The first part covers the core principles of health interoperability, while the second extensively reviews FHIR. The third part includes older HL7 standards that are still widely used, which leads on to a section dedicated to clinical terminology including SNOMED CT and LOINC. The final part of the book covers privacy, models, XML and JSON, standards development organizations and HL7 v3. This vital new edition therefore is essential reading for all involved in the use of these technologies in medical informatics.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Part 1 Principles of Health Interoperability
    The Health Information Revolution
    Why Interoperability is Hard
    Terminology, Content, Exchange
    Safety Thinking
    Part 2 FHIR
    FHIR Principles
    FHIR API
    FHIR Resources
    Administrative
    FHIR Resources - Clinical Summary
    FHIR Terminology
    FHIR Implementing FHIR
    Part 3 Other Exchange Standards
    HL7 Version 2
    CDA
    IHE XDS
    Part 3 Terminology
    Clinical Terminology / Coding and Classification
    SNOMED CT+ Concept Model
    LOINC
    Terminology & Content models
    Mapping between Terminologies
    Terminology Services
    Part 4 Security & Privacy
    Security : TLS & OAuth
    Integrity: Provenance and Audit Trails
    Privacy and Consent
    Part 5 Supporting Standards
    UML, XML, JSON
    Standards Development Organizations
    The HL7 V3 Framework
    Glossary
    Bibliography.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tim Benson, Grahame Grieve.
    Contents:
    PART 1 Principles of Health Interoperability
    Chapter 1 The Health Information Revolution
    Chapter 2 Why Interoperability is Hard
    Chapter 3 Models
    Chapter 4 UML, XML and JSON
    Chapter 5 Information Governance
    Chapter 6 Standards Development Organizations
    PART 2 Terminologies and SNOMED CT
    Chapter 7 Clinical Terminology
    Chapter 8 Coding and Classification Schemes
    Chapter 9 SNOMED CT
    Chapter 10 SNOMED CT Concept Model
    Chapter 11 Implementing SNOMED CT
    PART 3 HL7 and Interchange Formats
    Chapter 12 HL7 Version 2
    Chapter 13 The HL7 V3 RIM
    Chapter 14 Constrained Information Models
    Chapter 15 CDA
    Clinical Document Architecture
    Chapter 16 HL7 Dynamic Model
    Chapter 17 Sharing Documents and IHE XDS
    PART 4 FHIR
    Chapter 18 Principles of FHIR
    Chapter 19 The FHIR RESTful API
    Chapter 20 FHIR Resources
    Chapter 21 Conformance and Terminology
    Chapter 22 Implementing FHIR.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Donald W. Pfaff, Robert T. Rubin, Jill E. Schneider, Geoffrey A. Head.
    Contents:
    Section I. Characterizing the phenomena: hormone effects on behavior are strong and reliable
    Section II. History: hormone effects can depend on family, gender, and development
    Section III. Time: hormonal effects on behavior depend on temporal parameters
    Section IV. Space: spatial aspects of hormone administration and impact are important
    Section V. Mechanisms: molecular and biophysical mechanisms of hormone actions give clues to future therapeutic strategies
    Section VI. Environment: environmental variables influence hormone/behavior relations
    Section VII. Evolution.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Steven J Wang, Kevin Fung, editors.
    Summary: This text comprehensively reviews the major reconstruction challenges that are associated with the extirpation of tumors of the parotid gland and the lateral craniofacial region. It covers major functional and cosmetic consequences related to facial nerve paralysis, facial contour deformity, and soft tissue loss including the skin, ear, temporal bone, mandible, orbit, and cranial base. The text also includes basic concepts, a practical anatomical defect-based approach, and will highlight specific technical challenges that are commonly encountered in the contemporary era of intensive chemoradiation therapy, the aging population, and global health. Principles of Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction will be a great resource for residents and fellows in training and practitioners in otolaryngology, plastic surgery, facial plastic surgery, oral maxillofacial surgery, ophthalmology, head and neck surgery, and oculoplastic surgery.

    Contents:
    Section I: Basic Concepts and Principles
    Lateral Craniofacial Anatomy
    Anatomic Defect-based Approach to Reconstruction
    Section II: Defect Specific Reconstructive Issues
    Cutaneous Considerations in Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction
    Soft Tissue Considerations in Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction
    Maxillomandibular Considerations in Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction
    Rehabilitation of Facial Palsy-The Brow
    Surgical Rehabilitation of Facial Paralysis-Eyelids and Lower Face
    Parotidectomy Defect and Facial Nerve Reconstruction
    Section III: Special Considerations
    Role of Prosthetics/osseointegration in Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction
    Technical Issues in the High Risk Patient
    Lateral Craniofacial Reconstructive Challenges in the Developing World
    Emerging New Technologies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Shigehiko Katada.
    Summary: This book introduces physicians and physiotherapists around the world to the principles and techniques of the Arthrokinematic Approach (AKA)-Hakata method, which is currently being used to treat joint dysfunction, in particular sacroiliac joint dysfunction. Although manual medicine is not popular among young orthopaedic surgeons, it offers a number of benefits with regard to treating functional disorders. Further, the AKA-Hakata method is quite different from conventional manual techniques, as it takes into consideration articular neurology aspects, can prevent many patients from developing severe conditions, and can help avoid unnecessary sacroiliac joint surgery. The authors have extensive experience in this field and especially with this unique manual technique. As such, Principles of Manual Medicine for Sacroiliac Joint Dysfunction offers a valuable guide for physicians and physiotherapists alike, helping them achieve optimal outcomes in the treatment of sacroiliac joint dysfunction.

    Contents:
    The history of developing AKA-Hakata method for sacroiliac joint dysfunction
    Introduction to the principle of AKA-Hakata method and sacroiliac joint dysfunction
    Anatomical aspects
    Diagnosis of sacroiliac joint dysfunction
    Manual treatment for sacroiliac joint dysfunction
    Manual technique for recovering joint play in sacroiliac joint
    Classification of sacroiliac joint pathological conditions in AKA-Hakata method
    Articular originating referred pain: Location of pain and selection of joint to be treated
    Evidence of AKA-Hakata method
    Clinical case series.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gerhard Meisenberg, William H. Simmons.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to biomolecules
    2. Introduction to protein structure
    3. Oxygen-binding proteins: hemoglobin and myoglobin
    4. Enzymatic reactions
    5. Coenzymes
    6. DNA, RNA, and protein synthesis
    7. The human genome
    8. Protein targeting and proteostasis
    9. Introduction to genetic diseases
    10. Viruses
    11. DNA technology
    12. Biological membranes
    13. The cytoskeleton
    14. The extracellular matrix
    15. Extracellular messengers
    16. Intracellular messengers
    17. Plasma proteins
    18. Defense mechanisms
    19. Cellular growth control and cancer
    20. Digestive enzymes
    21. Introduction to metabolic pathways
    22. Glycolysis, tricarboxylic acid cycle, and oxidative phosphorylation
    23. Oxygen deficiency and oxygen toxicity
    24. Carbohydrate metabolism
    25. The metabolism of fatty acids and triglycerides
    26. The metabolism of membrane lipids
    27. Lipid transport
    28. Amino acid metabolism
    29. Metabolism of iron and heme
    30. The metabolism of purines and pyrimidines
    31. Micronutrients
    32. Integration of metabolism.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Michael Chappell.
    Summary: This introduction to medical imaging introduces all of the major medical imaging techniques in wide use in both medical practice and medical research, including Computed Tomography, Ultrasound, Positron Emission Tomography, Single Photon Emission Tomography and Magnetic Resonance Imaging. Principles of Medical Imaging for Engineers introduces fundamental concepts related to why we image and what we are seeking to achieve to get good images, such as the meaning of 'contrast' in the context of medical imaging. This introductory text separates the principles by which 'signals' are generated and the subsequent 'reconstruction' processes, to help illustrate that these are separate concepts and also highlight areas in which apparently different medical imaging methods share common theoretical principles. Exercises are provided in every chapter, so the student reader can test their knowledge and check against worked solutions and examples. The text considers firstly the underlying physical principles by which information about tissues within the body can be extracted in the form of signals, considering the major principles used: transmission, reflection, emission and resonance. Then, it goes on to explain how these signals can be converted into images, i.e., full 3D volumes, where appropriate showing how common methods of 'reconstruction' are shared by some imaging methods despite relying on different physics to generate the 'signals'. Finally, it examines how medical imaging can be used to generate more than just pictures, but genuine quantitative measurements, and increasingly measurements of physiological processes, at every point within the 3D volume by methods such as the use of tracers and advanced dynamic acquisitions. Principles of Medical Imaging for Engineers will be of use to engineering and physical science students and graduate students with an interest in biomedical engineering, and to their lecturers.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; About This Book; Contents; From Signals ... ; 1 Introduction; 1.1 What Is Medical Imaging?; 1.2 Signals; 1.3 Noise; 1.4 Contrast; 1.5 Electromagnetic Spectrum; 2 Transmission-X-rays; 2.1 Photon Interactions with Matter; 2.1.1 Photoelectric Attenuation; 2.1.2 Compton Scattering; 2.1.3 Other Mechanisms; 2.1.4 Attenuation Coefficient; 2.2 Contrast; 2.3 Background Signal; 2.4 Anti-scatter Grids; 2.5 The CT Number; 3 Reflection-Ultrasound; 3.1 Wave Propagation; 3.2 Acoustic Impedance; 3.3 Reflection and Refraction; 3.4 Scattering; 3.5 Absorption; 3.6 Attenuation 10.3 Iterative PET Reconstruction10.4 Compressed Sensing MRI Reconstruction; And Beyond ... ; 11 Generating and Enhancing Contrast; 11.1 Manipulating the Signal; 11.1.1 MRI Relaxation Contrast; 11.1.2 Diffusion; 11.2 Contrast Agents; 11.2.1 X-ray Contrast Agents; 11.2.2 Ultrasound Contrast Agents; 11.2.3 SPECT/PET Contrast Agents; 11.2.4 MRI Contrast Agents; 12 Beyond Contrast: Quantitative, Physiological and Functional Imaging; 12.1 Quantitative Imaging; 12.1.1 Transmission Methods; 12.1.2 Reflection Methods; 12.1.3 Emission Methods; 12.1.4 Dynamic Data; 12.1.5 Resonance Methods 3.7 Ultrasonic Contrast3.8 Doppler Ultrasound; 4 Emission-SPECT/PET; 4.1 Radionuclides; 4.1.1 Single-Photon Emission; 4.1.2 Positron Emission; 4.1.3 Radioactive Decay; 4.2 Detection; 4.2.1 Gamma Camera; 4.2.2 Attenuation; 4.2.3 Scatter; 4.2.4 Deadtime; 5 Resonance-Nuclear Magnetic Resonance; 5.1 Microscopic Magnetization; 5.2 Precession; 5.3 Macroscopic Magnetization; 5.4 Transverse Magnetization; 5.5 RF Excitation; 5.6 The Rotating Frame; 5.7 Relaxation; 5.7.1 Transverse Relaxation: T1; 5.7.2 Longitudinal Relaxation: T2; 5.8 The Bloch Equations; 5.9 Spin Echoes and T2*; To Images ... 6 Imaging6.1 Resolution; 6.1.1 Pixels and Voxels; 6.1.2 Line and Point Spread Functions; 6.2 The General Image Formation Problem; 6.3 The General Image Restoration Problem; 6.4 A Revision of Frequency Analysis; 6.4.1 Fourier in One Dimension; 6.4.2 Fourier in Two Dimensions; 6.4.3 2D FT in Polar Coordinates; 6.5 Sampling; 7 Timing-Based Reconstruction-Ultrasound; 7.1 Converting Time to Depth; 7.2 Ultrasound Beams and Pulse-Echoes; 7.3 Scanning; 7.4 Artefacts in Ultrasound; 8 Back-Projection Reconstruction-CT and PET/SPECT; 8.1 Projection: Computed Tomography; 8.2 The Sinogram 8.3 Slice-Projection Theorem8.4 Filtered Back-Projection; 8.5 SPECT; 8.6 PET; 8.6.1 Randoms; 8.6.2 Positron Range; 9 Fourier Reconstruction-MRI; 9.1 Gradients; 9.2 Slice Selection; 9.3 Frequency Encoding; 9.4 Scanning k-Space; 9.5 MRI Reconstruction; 9.5.1 Field of View; 9.5.2 k-Space Coverage and Resolution; 9.5.3 The Effect of T2 Decay; 9.6 More Advanced k-Space Trajectories; 9.6.1 Partial Fourier; 9.6.2 Non-Cartesian; 9.6.3 3D k-Space; 9.6.4 Compressed Sensing; 10 Principles of Reconstruction; 10.1 Analytic Reconstruction; 10.2 Reconstruction as Cost Function Minimization
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Eric R. Kandel, John D. Koester, Sarah H. Mack, Steven A. Siegelbaum.
    Summary: The goal of this sixth edition of Principles of Neural Science is to provide readers with insight into how genes, molecules, neurons, and the circuits they form give rise to behavior. With the exponential growth in neuroscience research over the 40 years since the first edition of this book, an increasing challenge is to provide a comprehensive overview of the field while remaining true to the original goal of the first edition, which is to elevate imparting basic principles over detailed encyclopedic knowledge.

    Contents:
    Part I: Overall Perspective
    Part I: Overall Perspective
    Chapter 1: The Brain and Behavior
    Chapter 2: Genes and Behavior
    Chapter 3: Nerve Cells, Neural Circuitry, and Behavior
    Chapter 4: The Neuroanatomical Bases by Which Neural Circuits Mediate Behavior
    Chapter 5: The Computational Bases of Neural Circuits That Mediate Behavior
    Chapter 6: Imaging and Behavior
    Part II: Cell and Molecular Biology of Cells of the Nervous System
    Part II: Cell and Molecular Biology of Cells of the Nervous System
    Chapter 7: The Cells of the Nervous System
    Chapter 8: Ion Channels
    Chapter 9: Membrane Potential and the Passive Electrical Properties of the Neuron
    Chapter 10: Propagated Signaling: The Action Potential
    Part III: Synaptic Transmission
    Part III: Synaptic Transmission
    Chapter 11: Overview of Synaptic Transmission
    Chapter 12: Directly Gated Transmission: The Nerve-Muscle Synapse
    Chapter 13: Synaptic Integration in the Central Nervous System
    ^Chapter 14: Modulation of Synaptic Transmission and Neuronal Excitability: Second Messengers
    Chapter 15: Transmitter Release
    Chapter 16: Neurotransmitters
    Part IV: Perception
    Part IV: Perception
    Chapter 17: Sensory Coding
    Chapter 18: Receptors of the Somatosensory System
    Chapter 19: Touch
    Chapter 20: Pain
    Chapter 21: The Constructive Nature of Visual Processing
    Chapter 22: Low-Level Visual Processing: The Retina
    Chapter 23: Intermediate-Level Visual Processing and Visual Primitives
    Chapter 24: High-Level Visual Processing: From Vision to Cognition
    Chapter 25: Visual Processing for Attention and Action
    Chapter 26: Auditory Processing by the Cochlea
    Chapter 27: The Vestibular System
    Chapter 28: Auditory Processing by the Central Nervous System
    Chapter 29: Smell and Taste: The Chemical Senses
    Part V: Movement
    Part V: Movement
    Chapter 30: Principles of Sensorimotor Control
    Chapter 31: The Motor Unit and Muscle Action
    ^Chapter 32: Sensory-Motor Integration in the Spinal Cord
    Chapter 33: Locomotion
    Chapter 34: Voluntary Movement: Motor Cortices
    Chapter 35: The Control of Gaze
    Chapter 36: Posture
    Chapter 37: The Cerebellum
    Chapter 38: The Basal Ganglia
    Chapter 39: Brain-Machine Interfaces
    Part VI: The Biology of Emotion, Motivation, and Homeostasis
    Part VI: The Biology of Emotion, Motivation, and Homeostasis
    Chapter 40: The Brain Stem
    Chapter 41: The Hypothalamus: Autonomic, Hormonal, and Behavioral Control of Survival
    Chapter 42: Emotion
    Chapter 43: Motivation, Reward, and Addictive States
    Chapter 44: Sleep and Wakefulness
    Part VII: Development and the Emergence of Behavior
    Part VII: Development and the Emergence of Behavior
    Chapter 45: Patterning the Nervous System
    Chapter 46: Differentiation and Survival of Nerve Cells
    Chapter 47: The Growth and Guidance of Axons
    Chapter 48: Formation and Elimination of Synapses
    ^Chapter 49: Experience and the Refinement of Synaptic Connections
    Chapter 50: Repairing the Damaged Brain
    Chapter 51: Sexual Differentiation of the Nervous System
    Part VIII: Learning, Memory, Language and Cognition
    Part VIII: Learning, Memory, Language and Cognition
    Chapter 52: Learning and Memory
    Chapter 53: Cellular Mechanisms of Implicit Memory Storage and the Biological Basis of Individuality
    Chapter 54: The Hippocampus and the Neural Basis of Explicit Memory Storage
    Chapter 55: Language
    Chapter 56: Decision-Making and Consciousness
    Part IX: Diseases of the Nervous System
    Part IX: Diseases of the Nervous System
    Chapter 57: Diseases of the Peripheral Nerve and Motor Unit
    Chapter 58: Seizures and Epilepsy
    Chapter 59: Disorders of Conscious and Unconscious Mental Processes
    Chapter 60: Disorders of Thought and Volition in Schizophrenia
    Chapter 61: Disorders of Mood and Anxiety
    ^Chapter 62: Disorders Affecting Social Cognition: Autism Spectrum Disorder
    Chapter 63: Genetic Mechanisms in Neurodegenerative Diseases of the Nervous System
    Chapter 64: The Aging Brain.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2021
  • Digital
    Alejandro Monroy-Sosa, Srikant S. Chakravarthi, Jaime G. de la Garza-Salazar, Abelardo Meneses Garcia, Amin B. Kassam, editors.
    Summary: "This book provides a comprehensive overview of the management of brain and skull base tumors. It features detailed insight into the intrinsic molecular biology, anatomical foundation, radiological planning, surgical execution, and the novel therapeutics that guide today's treatment regimens. The first section features concepts related to the epidemiology and pathological basis of disease processes, including relevant cellular and molecular biology. In the second section, integral anatomical foundations and principles are covered including microsurgical anatomy of the cerebrum, white matter tracts, ventricles, brainstem, skull base, advancements in radiological imaging, and cognitive examinations. Surgical approaches and how to execute these procedures are then subsequently discussed in the third part of the work. Principles of Neuro-Oncology: Brain & Skull Base is a practically applicable guide to the latest treatment techniques available to treat these patients"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Liqun Luo.
    Summary: "Principles of Neurobiology, Second Edition presents the major concepts of neuroscience with an emphasis on how we know what we know. The text is organized around a series of key experiments to illustrate how scientific progress is made and helps upper-level undergraduate and graduate students discover the relevant primary literature. Written by a single author in a clear and consistent writing style, each topic builds in complexity from electrophysiology to molecular genetics to systems level in a highly integrative approach. Students can fully engage with the content via thematically linked chapters and will be able to read the book in its entirety in a semester-long course. Principles of Neurobiology is accompanied by a rich package of online student and instructor resources including animations, figures in PowerPoint, and a Question Bank for adopting instructors"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: An Invitation to Neurobiology
    Chapter 2: Signaling within Neurons
    Chapter 3: Signaling across Synapses
    Chapter 4: Vision
    Chapter 5: Wiring the Visual System
    Chapter 6: Olfaction, Taste, Audition, and Somatosensation
    Chapter 7: Constructing the Nervous System
    Chapter 8: Motor Systems
    Chapter 9: Regulatory Systems
    Chapter 10: Sexual Behavior
    Chapter 11: Memory, Learning, and Synaptic Plasticity
    Chapter 12: Brain Disorders
    Chapter 13: Evolution of the Nervous System
    Chapter 14: Ways of Exploring
    Digital Access TandFonline 2021
    Limited to 4 simultaneous users
  • Print
    Liqun Luo.
    Contents:
    1. An invitation to neurobiology. Nature and nurture in brain function and behavior ; How the nervous system organized ; General methodology ; Summary
    2. Signaling within neurons. Cell biological and electrical properties of neurons ; How do electrical signals propagate from the neuronal cell body to its axon terminals? ; Summary
    3. Signaling across synapses. How is neurotransmitter release controlled at the presynaptic terminal? ; How do neurotransmitters act on postsynaptic neurons? ; Summary
    4. Vision. How do rods and cones detect light signals? ; How are signals from rods and cones analyzed in the retina? ; How is information processed in the visual cortex? ; Summary
    5. Wiring of the visual system. How do retinal ganglion cell axons find their targets? ; How do experience and neuronal activity contribute to wiring? ; How do molecular determinants and neuronal activity work together? ; Visual system development in drosophila : linking cell fate to wiring specificity ; Summary
    6. Olfaction, taste, audition, and somatosensation. How do we sense odors? ; How do worms and flies sense odors? ; Taste : to eat, or not to eat? ; Audition : how do we hear and localize sounds? ; Somatosensation : how do we sense body movement, touch, temperature, and pain? ; Summary
    7. Wiring of the nervous system. How does wiring specificity arise in the developing nervous system? ; Assembly of olfactory circuits : how do neural maps form? ; How do ~20,000 genes specify 10¹⁴ connections? ; Summary
    8. Motor and regulatory systems. How is movement controlled? ; How does the brain regulate the functions of internal organs? ; How is eating regulated? ; How are circadian rhythms and sleep regulated? ; Summary
    9. Sexual behavior. How do genes specify sexual behavior in the fly? ; How are mammalian sexual behaviors regulated? ; Summary
    10. Memory, learning, and synaptic plasticity. Prelude: What is memory, and how is it acquired by learning? ; How is synaptic plasticity achieved? ; What is the relationship between learning and synaptic plasticity? ; Where does learning occur, and where is memory stored in the brain? ; Summary
    11. Brain disorders. Alzheimer's disease and other neurodegenerative diseases ; Psychiatric disorders ; Neurodevelopmental disorders ; Summary
    12. Evolution of the nervous system. General concepts and approaches in evolutionary analysis ; Evolution of neuronal communication ; Evolution of sensory systems ; Evolution of nervous system structure and development ; Summary
    13. Ways of exploring. Animal models in neurobiology research ; Genetic and molecular techniques ; Anatomical techniques ; Recording and manipulating neuronal activity ; Behavioral analyses ; Summary and perspectives
    Glossary.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP355.2 .L86 2016
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Richard G. Ellenbogen, Laligam N. Sekhar, Neil D. Kitchen.
    Contents:
    Section 1: General overview. Landmarks in the history of neurosurgery
    Challenges in global neurosurgery
    Pearls for clinical evaluation of the nervous system
    Principles of modern neuroimaging
    Neuro anesthesia and monitoring for cranial and complex spinal surgery
    Surgical positioning, navigation, important surgical tools, craniotomy and closure of cranial and spinal wounds
    Section 2: Pediatric neurosurgery. Spinal dysraphism and tethered spinal cord
    Hydrocephalus in children
    Diagnosis and surgical options for craniosynostosis
    The Chiari malformations and syringohydromyelia
    Posterior fossa and brainstem tumors in children
    Craniopharyngiomas
    All other brain tumors in pediatrics
    Pediatric vascular disease and stroke
    Section 3: Vascular neurosurgery. Medical and surgical treatment of cerebrovascular occlusive disease
    Intracranial aneurysms, gen principles of management (ruptured and unruptured)
    Surgery for anterior circulation aneurysms
    Surgery for posterior circulation aneurysms
    Complex intracranial aneurysms and bypasses for aneurysms
    Vascular malformations (arteriovenous malformations and rural arteriovenous fistulas)
    Cavernous malformations of the brain and spinal cord
    Spontaneous intracerebral hemorrhage
    Endovascular treatment of acute stroke and occlusive cerebrovascular disease
    Endovascular treatment of intracranial aneurysms
    Section 4: Trauma. Surgical Management of Closed Head Injury
    Critical Care Management of Neurosurgical Patients
    Penetrating Brain Injury
    Traumatic Skull and Facial Fractures
    Section 5: The spine. Injuries to the cervical spine
    Thoracolumbar spine fractures
    Intradural extramedullary and intramedullary spinal cord tumors
    Treatment of spinal metastatic tumors
    Spinal cord injury
    Craniovertebral junction: a reappraisal
    Degenerative spine disease (cervical)
    Degenerative spine disease (thoracolumbar)
    Pediatric and adult scoliosis
    Section 6: Tumors. High-grade gliomas
    Low-grade gliomas
    Metastatic brain tumors
    Convexity, and parasagittal vs. skull base meningiomas
    Tumors of the pineal region
    Cerebellopontine angle tumors
    Pituitary tumors: diagnosis and management
    Endoscopic approaches to ventricular tumors and colloid cysts
    Microsurgical approaches to the ventricular system
    Base tumors: evaluation and microsurgery
    Endoscopic approaches to skull base lesions
    Jugular foramen tumors: paraganglioma and schwannoma
    Section 7: Radiosurgery and radiotherapy. Application of current radiation delivery systems and radiobiology
    Radiosurgery of central nervous system tumors and arteriovenous malformations
    Proton beam therapy and particle beam radiotherapy for cranial and skull base tumors
    Section 8: Functional pain. Trigeminal neuralgia
    Spasticity: classification, diagnosis and management
    Surgery for temporal lobe epilepsy
    Extratemporal procedures and hemispherectomy for epilepsy
    Deep brain stimulation for movement disorders
    Stereotactic functional neurosurgery for mental health disorders, pain and epilepsy
    Section 9: Miscellaneous. Surgical management of infections of the central nervous system, cranium and of the spine
    Adult congenital CSF disorders
    Management of peripheral nerve injuries
    Entrapment neuropathies, peripheral nerve tumors
    Pre-hospital care of TBI patients.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    Alan David Kaye, Scott Francis Davis, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to the Operating Room
    2. Anatomy of Intraoperative Monitoring
    3. Cellular Neurophysiology
    4. Electrophysiology and Bioinstrumentation
    5. Anesthesiology and Intraoperative Electrophysiological Monitoring
    6. Somatosensory Evoked Potential Monitoring
    7. Motor Evoked Potentials
    8. Electromyography (EMG)
    9. Brainstem Auditory Evoked Potentials
    10. Electroencephalography
    11. The H-Reflex and F-Response
    12. Monitoring Procedures of the Spine
    13. Intraoperative Monitoring for Surgery of the Spinal Cord and Cauda Equina
    14. Monitoring Posterior Fossa Craniotomies
    15. Intraoperative Monitoring for Carotid Endarterectomy
    16. Monitoring for ENT Procedures
    17. Peripheral Nerve Monitoring
    18. Intraoperative Cortical Mapping: Basic Concepts, Indications, and Anesthesia Considerations
    19. Neurological Assessment and Correlation in Spinal Cord Nerve Root Pathology
    20. Electrophysiological Assessment of Spinal Cord Pathology in Pain Medicine
    21. Spinal Cord Stimulation: Principles and Applications
    22. New Vistas: Small-Pain-Fibers Method of Testing for Spinal Cord Assessment in Pain States.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Scott Francis Davis, Alan David Kaye, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive, focused resource on intraoperative neurophysiological monitoring (IOM). This rapidly evolving field has created a demand for an up-to-date book such as this that builds on foundational concepts necessary to the practice of IOM in the context of anatomy and physiology. Each chapter is designed to not only inform the reader, but to also test the reader on the information presented - therefore promoting practical, problem-based learning. Boxes on important pathological conditions supplement chapter discussions, along with high quality figures and tables. Surpassing the quality of its successful predecessor, Principles of Neurophysiological Assessment, Mapping, and Monitoring, Second Edition, is positioned to suit the needs of residents and fellows studying for the IOM certificate programs, physicians and anesthesiologists practicing IOM, and neurotechnologists both experienced and in training. .

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction to the Operating Room
    Chapter 2. Anatomy of Intraoperative Monitoring
    Chapter 3. Cellular Neurophysiology
    Chapter 4. Electrophysiology and Bioinstrumentation
    Chapter 5. Anesthesiology and Intraoperative Electrophysiological Monitoring
    Chapter 6. Somatosensory-Evoked Potential Monitoring
    Chapter 7. Motor Evoked Potentials
    Chapter 8. Electromyography (EMG)
    Chapter 9. Brainstem Auditory Evoked Potentials
    Chapter 10. Electroencephalography
    Chapter 11. The H-Reflex and F-Response
    Chapter 12. Monitoring Procedures of the Spine
    Chapter 13. Monitoring and Mapping of the Spinal Cord
    Chapter 14. Monitoring Posterior Fossa Craniotomies
    Chapter 15. Intraoperative Monitoring for Carotid Endarterectomy
    Chapter 16. Monitoring ENT Procedures
    Chapter 17. Peripheral Nerve Monitoring
    Chapter 18. Intraoperative Cortical Mapping: Basic Concepts, Indications, and Anesthesia Considerations
    Chapter 19. Neuromonitoring in the Pediatric Patient
    Chapter 20. Neurological Assessment and Correlation in Spinal Cord Nerve Root Pathology
    Chapter 21. Electrophysiological Assessment of Spinal Cord Pathology in Pain Medicine
    Chapter 22. Spinal Cord Stimulation: Principles and Applications
    Chapter 23. New Vistas: Intraoperative Neurophysiological Monitoring and Small-Pain-Fibers Method of Testing for Spinal Cord Assessment in Pain States.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Majid Assadi, Hojjat Ahmadzadehfar, Hans-Jürgen Biersack.
    Summary: This book is the ideal study tool for all who are preparing for national or international nuclear medicine exams and in addition represents a truly outstanding quick review resource. More than 4200 questions, with comprehensive answers, are presented in order to enable readers to assess their knowledge and identify areas of weakness that require further self-study. Informative subchapters permit exploration of specific topics in greater depth, and practice tests will familiarize readers with the process of taking multiple-choice examinations. The book covers the entire spectrum of nuclear medicine, from basic science to clinical applications for diagnosis and treatment. Individual sections focus on oncology, bone and joint disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, acute care, cardiology, neurology and psychiatry, and renal disease. Principles of Nuclear Medicine is highly recommended for those who are taking nuclear medicine or radiology board examinations or recertifying their subspecialty certificate (CAQ) in nuclear medicine. More generally, it will be an asset for all trainees and practitioners of nuclear medicine and radiology.

    Contents:
    Nuclear medicine in tumor diagnosis
    Nuclear medicine in tumor therapy
    Nuclear medicine in bone and joint disorders
    Nuclear medicine in gastrointestinal function
    Nuclear medicine in acute care
    Nuclear cardiology
    Nuclear medicine in neurological and psychiatric diagnosis
    Nuclear medicine in renal disorders
    Basic sciences.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Andrew J. Schoenfeld, Cheri A. Blauwet, Jeffrey N. Katz, editors.
    Summary: Primary care providers (physicians, nurse practitioners, physician assistants) make decisions on a daily basis regarding treatment for musculoskeletal problems, including referrals to orthopedic surgeons and other specialists. Despite the large number of patients presenting with musculoskeletal complaints, primary care providers often feel poorly educated about how to assess and manage these conditions. Now in its fully revised second edition, Principles of Orthopedic Practice for Primary Care Providers continues to be a go-to resource for clinicians interested in the effective treatment of musculoskeletal disorders. Written by expert orthopedic, physical medicine and pain management specialists at major Harvard teaching hospitals, the second edition of Principles of Orthopedic Practice for Primary Care Providers represents a high-yield and succinct resource on the assessment and management of musculoskeletal conditions. Chapters overview specific body parts, typical presentations of disease, options for diagnostic testing, treatment paradigms, and anticipated outcomes of management both in the primary care setting and following specialist consultation. The text offers suggested pathways for working up and treating these problems with an emphasis on when referral to a specialist, or surgical intervention, is needed. While all previous chapters have been fully revised, this edition also includes nine brand new chapters, including chapters on pain management, hip-spine syndrome, adult spinal deformity, sports-related injuries, and cost and quality in musculoskeletal care.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: The Spine
    Chapter 1: Axial Neck and Back Pain
    Introduction
    Definition and Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation
    Pain History
    Physical Examination
    Differential Diagnosis and Diagnostic Testing
    Myofascial Pain
    Pain Associated with Fractures and Ligamentous Injuries
    Discogenic Pain
    Facetogenic Pain
    Sacroiliac Pain
    Conditions Causing Referred Pain to the Spine
    Nonoperative Management
    Indications for Surgery
    Operative Management
    Anterior Spinal Fusion Posterior Spinal Fusion
    SI Joint Fusion
    Expected Outcomes
    Suggested Reading
    Chapter 2: Sacroiliac Joint Dysfunction and Piriformis Syndrome
    Part I: Sacroiliac Joint Dysfunction
    SI Joint Anatomy, Innervation, and Function
    Anatomy
    Innervation
    Function
    Etiology and Pathology of SI Joint Pain
    Epidemiology
    Diagnostic Evaluation
    History
    Physical Examination
    Differential Diagnosis
    Imaging
    Diagnostic Injections
    Treatment Options
    Physical Therapy
    Manual Therapy and Manipulation
    Orthotics
    Medications
    Intra-Articular Injection Radiofrequency (RF) Ablation
    Prolotherapy and Platelet-Rich Plasma (PRP) Injection
    SI Joint Fusion
    Conclusion
    Part II: Piriformis Syndrome
    Anatomy
    Etiology
    Epidemiology
    Diagnostic Evaluation
    History
    Physical Examination
    Imaging and Diagnostic Testing
    Treatment
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Pain Management for Chronic Musculoskeletal Disorders
    Myofascial Pain Syndrome
    Pharmacologic Therapy
    Minimally Invasive Therapy
    Trigger Point Injection
    Botulinum Toxin Injection
    Lumbar Spine
    Lumbar Epidural Steroid Injections Lumbar Facet Interventions
    Sacroiliac Joint Interventions
    Thoracic Spine
    Thoracic Facet Interventions
    Thoracic Epidural Steroid Injections
    Cervical Spine
    Cervical Epidural Steroid Injections
    Cervical Facet Nerve Blocks and Ablation
    Post-Laminectomy Syndrome
    Spinal Cord Stimulation
    Dorsal Root Ganglion Stimulation
    Intrathecal Pump
    References
    Chapter 4: Adult Spinal Deformity
    Definition and Epidemiology
    Cobb Angle Measurement
    Scoliosis
    Kyphosis/Lordosis
    Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation and Diagnosis
    Non-operative Management Indications for Surgery, Operative Management, Postoperative Management
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 5: Cervical Radiculopathy and Myelopathy
    Cervical Radiculopathy
    Definition and Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation
    Differential Diagnosis and Diagnostic Testing
    Nonoperative Management
    Indications for Surgery
    Operative Management and Expected Outcomes
    Cervical Myelopathy and Myeloradiculopathy
    Definition and Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation
    Differential Diagnosis and Diagnostic Testing
    Nonoperative Management
    Indications for Surgery
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    David E. Golan, MD, PhD, editor in chief ; Ehrin J. Armstrong, MD, MSc, April W. Armstrong, MD, MPH, associate editors.
    Summary: "Highly regarded by both students and instructors, Principles of Pharmacology: The Pathophysiologic Basis of Drug Therapy, 4th Edition, _offers an integrated mechanism-based and systems-based approach to contemporary pharmacology and drug development. An easy-to-follow format helps first- and second-year students grasp challenging concepts quickly and efficiently. Each chapter presents a clinical vignette illustrating a therapeutic problem within a physiologic or biochemical system; followed by a discussion of the biochemistry, physiology, and pathophysiology of the system; and concluding with a presentation of the pharmacology of_the drugs and drug classes that activate or inhibit the system by interacting with specific molecular and cellular targets. Chapters are integrated into sections that focus on organ systems and therapeutic areas of highest importance. Clear, concise illustrations highlight key points, and drug summary tables offer quick access to essential information"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    SECTION I, Fundamental Principles of Pharmacology :
    1. Drug-Receptor Interactions / David E. Golan
    2. Pharmacodynamics / David E. Golan
    3. Pharmacokinetics / David E. Golan
    4. Drug Metabolism / F. Peter Guengerich
    5. Drug Transporters / Keith A. Hoffmaster
    6. Drug Toxicity / David E. Golan
    7. Pharmacogenomics / Kelan Tantisira. SECTION II, Principles of Neuropharmacology :
    SECTION IIA, Fundamental Principles of Neuropharmacology :
    8. Principles of Cellular Excitability and Electrochemical Transmission / Gary R. Strichartz
    9. Principles of Nervous System Physiology and Pharmacology / Daniel H. Lowenstein
    SECTION IIB, Principles of Autonomic and Peripheral Nervous System Pharmacology :
    10. Cholinergic Pharmacology / Gary R. Strichartz
    11. Adrenergic Pharmacology / David E. Golan
    12. Local Anesthetic Pharmacology / Gary R. Strichartz
    SECTION IIC, Principles of Central Nervous System Pharmacology :
    13. Pharmacology of GABAergic and Glutamatergic Neurotransmission / Eng H. Lo
    14. Pharmacology of Dopaminergic Neurotransmission / Victor W. Sung
    15. Pharmacology of Serotonergic and Central Adrenergic Neurotransmission / Roy H. Perlis
    16. Pharmacology of Abnormal Electrical Neurotransmission in the Central Nervous System / Daniel H. Lowenstein
    17. General Anesthetic Pharmacology / Keith W. Miller
    18. Pharmacology of Analgesia / Clifford J. Woolf
    19. Pharmacology of Drugs of Abuse / Sachin Patel. SECTION III, Principles of Cardiovascular Pharmacology :
    20. Pharmacology of Cholesterol and Lipoprotein Metabolism / David E. Cohen
    21. Pharmacology of Volume Regulation / Seth L. Alper
    22. Pharmacology of Vascular Tone / Joseph Loscalzo
    23. Pharmacology of Hemostasis and Thrombosis / David E. Golan
    24. Pharmacology of Cardiac Rhythm / David E. Clapham
    25. Pharmacology of Cardiac Contractility / Ehrin J. Armstrong
    26. Integrative Cardiovascular Pharmacology: Hypertension, Ischemic Heart Disease, and Heart Failure / Ehrin J. Armstrong. SECTION IV, Principles of Endocrine Pharmacology :
    27. Pharmacology of the Hypothalamus and Pituitary Gland / Ursula B. Kaiser
    28. Pharmacology of the Thyroid Gland / William W. Chin
    29. Pharmacology of the Adrenal Cortex / Gail K. Adler
    30. Pharmacology of Reproduction / Robert L. Barbieri
    31. Pharmacology of the Endocrine Pancreas and Glucose Homeostasis / Steven E. Shoelson
    32. Pharmacology of Bone Mineral Homeostasis / Ehrin J. Armstrong. SECTION V, Principles of Chemotherapy :
    33. Principles of Antimicrobial and Antineoplastic Pharmacology / David E. Golan
    34. Pharmacology of Bacterial Infections: DNA Replication, Transcription, and Translation / Donald M. Coen
    35. Pharmacology of Bacterial and Mycobacterial Infections: Cell Wall Synthesis / Sarah P. Hammond
    36. Pharmacology of Fungal Infections / April W. Armstrong
    37. Pharmacology of Parasitic Infections / Edward T. Ryan
    38. Pharmacology of Viral Infections / Donald M. Coen
    39. Pharmacology of Cancer: Genome Synthesis, Stability, and Maintenance / David A. Frank
    40. Pharmacology of Cancer: Signal Transduction / David A. Frank
    41. Principles of Combination Chemotherapy / David E. Golan. SECTION VI, Principles of Inflammation and Immune Pharmacology :
    42. Principles of Inflammation and the Immune System / April W. Armstrong
    43. Pharmacology of Eicosanoids / Charles N. Serhan
    44. Histamine Pharmacology / April W. Armstrong
    45. Pharmacology of Hematopoiesis and Immunomodulation / George D. Demetri
    46. Pharmacology of Immunosuppression / April W. Armstrong
    47. Integrative Inflammation Pharmacology: Peptic Ulcer Disease / Helen M. Shields
    48. Integrative Inflammation Pharmacology: Asthma / Stephen Lazarus
    49. Integrative Inflammation Pharmacology: Gout / Lloyd B. Klickstein. SECTION VII, Environmental Toxicology :
    50. Environmental Toxicology / Joshua M. Galanter
    SECTION VIII Fundamentals of Drug Development and Regulation
    51. Drug Discovery and Preclinical Development / Maarten Postema
    52. Clinical Drug Evaluation and Regulatory Approval / Alexander E. Kuta
    53. Systematic Detection of Adverse Drug Events / Jerry Avorn. SECTION IX, Frontiers in Pharmacology :
    54. Protein Therapeutics / David E. Golan
    55. Drug Delivery Modalities / Robert Langer.
  • Digital/Print
    translated from the 5th German ed. (1902) by Edwrd Bradford Titchener.
    Digital Access Google Books 1904-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F355 .W966t
    1
  • Digital
    Yixin Zhou, Jing Tang, Hongyi Shao, editors.
    Summary: This book covers pertinent principles and practical surgical techniques related to primary total hip arthroplasty (THA) including complex cases. Written by experienced hip and knee surgeons, this book introduces the basic concepts of THA, helping the reader understand the basic science and history of THA. More chapters cover the preoperative planning and preparation, exposure using the various approaches, together with tips and tricks to position implants properly. Navigation-guided and robotic THA techniques are also included. Complications related to surgery, such as leg-length discrepancy, periprosthetic infections and fractures, hip instability, and deep vein thrombosis, are further discussed. Complex situations in specific diseases and pathology, such as rheumatoid hip arthritis, ankylosis spondylitis, and post-traumatic arthritic hip diseases are demonstrated.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Steven E. Weinberger, Barbara A. Cockrill, Jess Mandel.
    Contents:
    Pulmonary anatomy and physiology: the basics
    Presentation of the patient with pulmonary disease
    Evaluation of the patient with pulmonary disease
    Anatomic and physiologic aspects of airways
    Asthma
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Miscellaneous airway diseases
    Anatomic and physiologic aspects of the pulmonary parenchyma
    Overview of diffuse parenchymal lung diseases
    Diffuse parenchymal lung diseases associated with known etiologic agents
    Diffuse parenchymal lung diseases of unknown etiology
    Anatomic and physiologic aspects of the pulmonary vasculature
    Pulmonary embolism
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Pleural disease
    Mediastinal disease
    Anatomic and physiologic aspects of neural, muscular, and chest wall interactions with the lungs
    Disorders of ventilatory control
    Disorders of the respiratory pump
    Lung cancer: etiologic and pathologic aspects
    Lung cancer: clinical aspects
    Lung defense mechanisms
    Pneumonia
    Tuberculosis and nontuberculous mycobacteria
    Miscellaneous infections caused by fungi and pneumocystis
    Pulmonary complications in the immunocompromised host
    Classification and pathophysiologic aspects of respiratory failure
    Acute respiratory distress syndrome
    Management of respiratory failure
    Appendices. Sample problems using respiratory equations
    Pulmonary function tests: guidelines for interpretation and sample problems
    Arterial blood gases: guidelines for interpretation and sample problems
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony Atala, Robert Lanza, Antonios G. Mikos, Robert Nerem.
    Summary: "Principles of Regenerative Medicine, Third Edition, details the technologies and advances applied in recent years to strategies for healing and generating tissue. Contributions from a stellar cast of researchers cover the biological and molecular basis of regenerative medicine, highlighting stem cells, wound healing and cell and tissue development. Advances in cell and tissue therapy, including replacement of tissues and organs damaged by disease and previously untreatable conditions, such as diabetes, heart disease, liver disease and renal failure are also incorporated to provide a view to the future and framework for additional studies"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Raj Mitra.
    Contents:
    Section I: General assessment in rehabilitation medicine.
    An overview of rehabilitation medicine
    The history and physical examination of a patient with disability
    Nervous system
    Overview of the musculoskeletal system
    Assessment of the bladder and bowel dysfunction for the rehabilitation professional
    Skin, connective tissue, bone, and joints
    Autonomic and endocrine nervous system
    Common diagnostic tests in physical medicine and rehabilitation
    Outcome measures in the field of rehabilitation medicine
    Section II: Neurosciences: stroke, spinal cord injury, and traumatic brain injury. Stroke rehabilitation
    Rehabilitation of peripheral neuropathy
    Peripheral nerve injuries: mononeuropathy
    Other neurologic disorders: Alzheimer's, Parkinson's, and multiple sclerosis
    Traumatic myelopathy
    An overview of nontraumatic spinal cord injury and dysfunction
    Spinal cord injury: infectious and inflammatory etiologies
    Neoplastic diseases of the spinal column
    The pathophysiology of traumatic brain injury
    Epidemiology of traumatic brain injury
    Traumatic brain injury: patterns of injury
    Rehabilitation outcomes, systemic manifestations, and problems in traumatic brain injury
    Patient evaluation and diagnosis of TBI
    Patient management for traumatic brain injury
    Section III: Ambulatory care: sports, musculoskeletal, and pain medicine. The role of the team physician
    Basic principles of exercise physiology
    Health promotion and preventive health aspects of sports medicine
    Emergency assessment and care of the athlete
    A brief review of common sports-related injuries and conditions
    Rehabilitation of lower extremity injuries
    Rehabilitation of musculoskeletal conditions of the upper extremity
    Hand rehabilitation
    An overview of soft tissue disorders
    Taxonomy of pain systems
    Basic anatomy and physiology of pain mechanisms
    Spine pain
    Overview and management of complex regional pain syndrome
    Interventional pain management
    Rehabilitation of the pregnant and postpartum patient with pain
    Overview of headache
    Neuropathic pain
    Pain management in the geriatric population
    Pediatric pain management
    Pain management in individuals with cognitive impairment
    Orofacial pain
    Principles of pharmacology and selective agents in physical medicine and rehabilitation
    Cancer pain management
    Complementary and integrative health (CIH) approaches in rehabilitation
    Section IV: Basic principles: amputations, cardiovascular and pulmonary rehabilitation, basic principles of inpatient rehabilitation. Basic principles in the rehabilitation of persons with limb amputation
    Cardiac rehabilitation
    Pulmonary rehabilitation
    Neurogenic bladder dysfunction: a guideline for management
    Wound care
    Emergencies in the rehabilitation unit
    Rehabilitation psychology
    General topics in inpatient rehabilitation
    Spasticity and contractures
    Speech, language, and swallowing disorders
    Section V: Pediatric rehabilitation. Pediatric neurologic disorders
    Issues in pediatric amputations
    Pediatric musculoskeletal medicine
    Cardiovascular rehabilitation in the pediatric patient
    A review of movement disorders in the pediatric patient
    Pediatric oncology rehabilitation
    Pediatric rehabilitation: an overview of problems and outcomes
    History and physical examination of the pediatric rehabilitation patient
    Electrodiagnostic testing in the pediatric patient
    Clinical management of the pediatric patient with disability
    Prosthetics and orthotics: pediatric considerations
    Family-centered care and shared decision making in rehabilitation medicine
    Section VI: Electrodiagnostic and neuromuscular medicine. General concepts in electrodiagnosis
    Neuromuscular disease: motor neuron disorders
    Rehabilitation of root and plexus lesions
    Electrodiagnostic evaluation of neuropathy
    Disorders of the neuromuscular junction: myasthenia gravis
    Myopathies
    Section VII: Ancillary therapy services, prosthetics and orthotics. Modalities
    An overview of physical therapy
    Occupational therapy
    An overview of orthotics
    Section VIII: Special topics in physical medicine and rehabilitation. Arthritis: rheumatoid, osteoarthritis, crystalline arthropathies, and seronegative spondyloarthropathies
    General topics in end-of-life rehabilitation
    Management of the palliative care patient
    Geriatric rehabilitation
    Rehabilitation medicine of hip fractures and falls
    Sexual dysfunction in patients with disabilities
    Rehabilitation of the organ transplant patient
    Rehabilitation of the burn patient
    Management of the rehabilitation patient with psychiatric disorders
    Low vision rehabilitation
    Rehabilitation of the polytrauma patient
    Rehabilitation of reconstruction orthopedics: a smart care model for interdisciplinary, patient-focused care
    Rehabilitation of the temporomandibular joint
    Ethical considerations in rehabilitation
    Recent innovations in rehabilitation science
    Stem cell research and regenerative medicine
    Spinal manipulation: the osteopathic approach to rehabilitation
    Gait evaluation and management
    Oncology rehabilitation
    Work-attributed musculoskeletal conditions
    The rehabilitation of veterans with disability
    Rehabilitation issues in the developing world.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessNeurology
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    editor, Raj Mitra.
    Summary: "A high-yield study resource to help individuals test themselves on the core knowledge covered on the ABPMR Exam"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Contributors
    PrefaceSection 1: Neurologic Disorders
    1. Stroke Rehabilitation
    2. Rehabilitation of Patients with Spinal Tumors
    3. Spinal Cord Injury: Traumatic Myelopathy
    4. An Overview of Nontraumatic Spinal Cord Injury and Dysfunction
    5. Spinal Cord Injury: Infectious and Inflammatory Etiologies
    6. Patient Evaluation and Diagnosis of Traumatic Brain Injury
    7. Patient Management for Traumatic Brain Injury
    8. The Pathophysiology of Traumatic Brain Injury
    9. Rehabilitation Outcomes, Systemic Manifestations, and Problems in Traumatic Brain Injury
    10. Traumatic Brain Injury: Patterns of Injury
    11. Epidemiology of Traumatic Brain Injury
    12. Mononeuropathies and Polyneuropathies
    13. Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
    14. Multiple Sclerosis, Alzheimer's, and Parkinson's
    15. Rehabilitation of Motor Neuron Disease
    16. Pediatric Neurological Disorders
    17. Acute and Chronic Inflammatory Demyelinating Polyneuropathy
    18. Myopathies
    19. Rehabilitation of Thoracic Outlet Syndrome
    20. Rehabilitation of Plexopathy
    21. Cervical and Thoracic Radiculopathy22. Lumbar Radiculopathy
    Section 2: Musculoskeletal Medicine
    23. Overview of the Musculoskeletal System
    24. Pediatric Musculoskeletal Medicine
    25. Muscle and Joint Pain in Pediatric Rehabilitation
    26. Rehabilitation of Upper Extremity Injuries
    27. Rehabilitation of Lower Extremity Injuries
    28. A Brief Review of Common Sports-Related Injuries and Conditions29. Work-Attributed Musculoskeletal Conditions
    30. Arthritis: Rheumatoid, Osteoarthritis, Crystalline Arthropathies, and Seronegative Spondyloarthropathies31. An Overview of Soft Tissue Disorders
    32. Fibromyalgia and Myofascial Pain
    33. Emergent and Rehabilitative Care of the Athlete
    34. The Rehabilitation of Hip Fractures35. Rehabilitation of Strains and Sprains
    36. Tendinitis and Bursitis
    Section 3: Medical Rehabilitation
    37. Rehabilitation of the Patient with Osteoporosis38. Basic Principles in the Rehabilitation of Persons with Limb Amputation
    39. Pediatric Amputations
    40. Cardiac Rehabilitation
    41. Pulmonary Rehabilitation42. Urologic and Gastrointestinal Disorders in Rehabilitation43. Neurogenic Bowel Rehabilitation44. Sexual Dysfunction in Patients with Disabilities45. Pain in Pregnancy46. Oncology Rehabilitation
    47. Pediatric Oncology Rehabilitation
    48. Infectious Disease on the Rehabilitation Unit
    49. Endocrine and Autonomic Nervous System
    50. Burn Rehabilitation
    51. Rehabilitation of the Patient with Organ Transplant
    52. Geriatric Rehabilitation
    53. General Topics in Inpatient Rehabilitation
    54. Spasticity and Contractures
    55. Hydrocephalus on the Rehabilitation Unit
    56. Seizure Management in Rehabilitation Settings
    57. Posture and Balance Issues and Conditions
    58. Effects of Prolonged Bed Rest and Deconditioning During Inpatient Rehabilitation
    59. Heterotopic Ossification
    60. Rehabilitation of the Polytrauma Patient
    61. Wound Care
    62. Emergencies in the Rehabilitation Unit
    63. Communication Disorders and Dysphagia
    64. Visual Dysfunction
    65. Low Vision Rehabilitation
    66. Cognitive Impairments Seen in Acquired Brain Injuries
    67. Sleep Disorders
    68. A Review of Movement Disorders in the Pediatric Patient
    69. Rehabilitation Psychology
    70. Substance Abuse
    71. Disorders of Consciousness
    72. Spine Pain
    73. Complex Regional Pain Syndrome
    74. Opioid Management
    75. Pain Management in the Geriatric Population
    76. Neuropathic Pain
    77. Pediatric Pain Management
    Section 4: Patient Management
    78. Patient Evaluation and Diagnosis: Physical Examination, Signs, Symptoms, and Functional Evaluation
    79. Pediatric Rehabilitation: History, Physical Examination, and Assessment
    80. Common Diagnostic Tests in Physical Medicine & Rehabilitation
    81. Gait Evaluation and Management
    82. Clinical Management of the Pediatric Patient with Disability83. Pediatric Rehabilitation: An Overview of Problems and Outcomes
    84. General Concepts in Electrodiagnostic Medicine85. Electrodiagnosis
    86. Disorders of the Neuromuscular Junction: Myasthenia Gravis
    87. Ethics and Clinical Decision-Making in Rehabilitation
    88. Physical Agent Modalities
    89. An Overview of Physical Therapy
    90. Exercise Physiology
    91. Spinal Manipulation, Traction, and Massage
    92. Pharmacology of Analgesics
    93. Pharmacology of Antiseizure and Antispasmodic Medications
    94. Pharmacologic Interventions: Antibiotics
    95. Psychopharmacology in Rehabilitation
    96. Pharmacology of Anti-inflammatory Medications
    97. A Review of Procedures and Interventions in Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation
    98. Biofeedback
    99. Neuropsychological Evaluations
    Section 5: Equipment & Assistive Technology
    100. Orthotics
    101. Lower Extremity Prosthetics
    102. Functional Electrical Stimulation
    103. Transcutaneous Electrical Stimulation
    104. Electrical Stimulation in Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation
    105. Augmentative Communications
    106. Wheelchair and Seating in Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation
    Section 6: Basic Sciences
    107. Anatomy Review of the Brain
    108. Anatomy of the Spine
    109. Anatomy Review of the Peripheral Nerves
    110. Anatomy Review of the Head and Neck
    111. Anatomy Review of the Knee, Hip, Shoulder, Arm, Wrist, and Ankle
    112. Anatomy Review of the Hand and Foot
    113. Anatomy Review of Bone
    114. Basic Science Review of Muscles
    115. Basic Science Review of Cancer Rehabilitation
    116. Physiology Review of the Muscles, Joints, and Spine
    117. Kinesiology
    118. Nutrition in Rehabilitation Medicine
    119. Rehabilitation in the Developing World
    120. Rehabilitative Management of the Palliative Care Patient
    121. General Topics in End of Life Rehabilitation
    122. Stem Cell Research and Regenerative Medicine
    Index.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Rajender R. Aparasu, John P. Bentley.
    Summary: "Most pharmacy schools offer a course in the pharmacy professional program that covers fundamentals of research design, biostatistics, and evaluation of pharmacy literature, as required by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE). Consequently, this book is divided into three sections to provide comprehensive course content to meet and exceed these curriculum standards set by the ACPE. Section 1 of the book covers principles of scientific research with an emphasis on clinical research designs ranging from randomized clinical trials to case reports. Section 2 of the book provides the foundation necessary to understand statistics and to critically evaluate results from statistical analyses reported in the medical literature with a focus on common statistical methods. Section 3 of the book covers principles of evidence-based medicine, drug literature sources and evaluation techniques, and application of evidence to patient care. There are seven chapters in each section of the book. This book is designed for professional pharmacy (PharmD) students. Instructors teaching principles of research and drug literature evaluation can design the professional course primarily based on this book or can supplement this book with research articles. The contents of the book can be delivered in one or two semesters. Chapters are written by expert authors specializing in pharmacy practice and research. Each chapter includes the following elements: Learning Objectives present the chapter's desired outcomes to the reader. Key Terminology helps the reader quickly identify critical new terms. Review Questions allow readers to apply what has been learned in the chapter and assess their understanding of the content. Online Resources direct students to web sites relevant to the content"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The scientific approach to research and practice
    Ethical considerations in clinical research
    Research design and methods
    Randomized controlled trials
    Cohort and case control studies
    Other observational studies
    Case reports and case series
    Measurement and descriptive analysis
    Interpretation and basic statistical concepts
    Bivariate analysis and comparing groups
    Simple and multiple linear regression
    Logistic regression and survival analysis
    Sample size and power analysis
    Systematic review and meta-analysis
    Principles of evidence-based medicine
    Introduction to drug literature
    Evaluating clinical literature : an overview
    Evaluating randomized clinical trials
    Evaluating observational studies
    Applying drug literature to patient care
    Basics of journal club.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Emanuel Rubin, MD, Distinguished Professor of Pathology, Anatomy and Cell Biology, Kimmel Medical College, Thomas Jefferson University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, American Medical Writer's Award: Best Medical Textbook of the Year, 1989, Tom Kent Award of Group for Research in Pathology Education (GRIPE): Excellence in Pathology Education, 2001, Association of Pathology Chairs: Distinguished Service Award, 2006, American Society for Investigative Pathology: Robbins Distinguished Educator Award, 2017, Howard M. Reisner, PhD, Professor of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine Department of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, North Carolina, Professor of Pathology, Jerry M. Wallace School of Osteopathic Medicine, Campbell University, Buies Creek, North Carolina ; illustrations by Dimitri Karetnikov, George Barile, and Kathy Jaeger.
    Summary: "Principles of Rubin's Pathology" distills need-to-know concepts and practices into an easy-to-read text with expert coverage of disease processes and their effects on cells, organs, and individuals. The seventh edition presents a combination of basic science and clinical information for the modern pathology curriculum -- beginning with principles of general pathology chapters applicable to all or most organ systems, followed by chapters focused on organs or systemic disease that include pathologic descriptions, epidemiology, molecular biology, and clinical features. -- From publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Cell adaptation, injury, death, and aging
    Inflammation and repair
    Immunopathology
    Neoplasia
    Developmental and genetic diseases
    Infectious and parasitic diseases
    The amyloidoses
    Blood vessels and hemodynamic disorders
    Heart
    The respiratory system
    The gastrointestinal tract
    The liver and biliary system
    The exocrine pancreas
    The kidney
    The lower urinary tract and male reproductive system
    The female reproductive tract
    The breast
    Hematopathology
    Endorine system, diabetes, and nutritional diseases
    The skin
    The head and neck
    Bones, joints, and soft tissue
    Skeletal muscle
    The central nervous system and eye
    Traumatic and environmental injury.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    Michael K. Pugsley, Michael J. Curtis, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Part 1. An Overview of Safety Pharmacology and its Role in Drug Discovery
    Part 2. The Safety Pharmacology Core Battery
    Part 3. Supplemental Safety Pharmacology
    Part 4. Safety Pharmacology of Biological and Anticancer Pharmaceuticals
    Part 5. Clinical Safety Pharmacology.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Robert Lanza, Robert Langer, Joseph Vacanti.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Martin Wehling, Department of Clinical Pharmacology Mannheim, University of Heidelberg, Mannheim, Germany.
    Summary: Principles of Translational Science in Medicine: From Bench to Bedside, Second Edition, provides an update on major achievements in the translation of research into medically relevant results and therapeutics. The book presents a thorough discussion of biomarkers, early human trials, and networking models, and includes institutional and industrial support systems. It also covers algorithms that have influenced all major areas of biomedical research in recent years, resulting in an increasing numbers of new chemical/biological entities (NCEs or NBEs) as shown in FDA statistics. The book is ideal for use as a guide for biomedical scientists to establish a systematic approach to translational medicine.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    S. Jane Flint, Vincent R. Racaniello, Glenn F. Rall, Anna Marie Skalka and Lynn W. Enquist.
    Summary: Principles of Virology is the leading virology textbook because it does more than collect and present facts about individual viruses. Instead, it facilitates an understanding of basic virology by examining the shared processes and capabilities of viruses. Using a set of representative viruses to present the complexity and diversity of a myriad of viruses, this rational approach enables students to understand how reproduction is accomplished by known viruses and provides the tools for future encounters with new or understudied viruses. This fully updated edition represents the rapidly changing field of virology. A major new feature is the inclusion of 26 video interviews with leading scientists who have made significant contributions to the field of virology. Applicable courses: undergraduate courses in virology and microbiology as well as graduate courses in virology and infectious diseases.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Molecular biology
    Volume 2. Pathogenesis and control.
  • Digital/Print
    Jane Flint, Department of Molecular Biology, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey, Vincent R. Racaniello, Department of Microbiology & Immunology, Vagelos College of Physicians and Surgeons, Columbia University, New York, New York, Glenn F. Rall, Fox Chase Cancer Center, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Theodora Hatziioannou, The Rockefeller University, New York, New York, Anna Marie Skalka, Fox Chase Cancer Center, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
    Summary: "All five editions of this textbook have been written according to the authors' philosophy that the best approach to teaching introductory virology is by emphasizing shared principles. Studying the common steps of the viral reproductive cycle illustrated with a set of representative viruses, and considering mechanisms by which these viruses can cause disease, provides an integrated overview of the biology of these infectious agents. Such knowledge cannot be acquired by learning a collection of facts about individual viruses. Consequently, the major goal of this book is to define and illustrate the basic principles of virus biology. In this information-rich age, the quantity of data describing any given virus can be overwhelming, if not indigestible, for student and expert alike. The urge to write more and more about less and less is the curse of reductionist science and the bane of those who write textbooks meant to be used by students. In the fifth edition, we continue to distill information with the intent of extracting essential principles, while providing descriptions of how the information was acquired, and tools to encourage our readers' exploration of the primary literature. Boxes are used to emphasize major principles and to provide supplementary material of relevance, from explanations of terminology to descriptions of trailblazing experiments. Our goal is to illuminate process and strategy as opposed to listing facts and figures. In an effort to make the book readable, we have been selective in our choice of viruses that are used as examples. The encyclopedic Fields' Virology (Knipe DM, Howley PM (ed). 2020. Fields Virology, 7th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, PA.) is recommended as a resource for detailed reviews of specific virus families"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Molecular biology
    volume 2. Pathogenesis and control.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Khaled M. Emara, Nicolas S. Piuzzi, editors.
    Summary: Filling a gap in literature, this concise and practical book presents the principles of virtual orthopedic assessment and shares insights into the use of technology for distance patient-physician communication. Offering expert know-how and best practices, it equips readers with essential information on how to best remotely manage the diagnosis, treatment and follow-up of patients. The book starts by defining telemedicine and presenting the basic requirements. The following chapters each focus on a specific joint or compartment, highlighting its peculiarities in terms of remote clinical assessment, and also discussing data security, patient confidentiality and consent as well as medico-legal issues. Moreover, the book features a dedicated chapter that analyzes specific issues related to remote assessment in children, older patients, noncompliant patients, and patients with pain. Covering all the basic and practical aspects of this emerging field, this book is a must-read for orthopedists and other professionals, such as general practitioners and physiotherapists, wanting to gain insights into remote orthopedic patient care.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    What is telemedicine?
    Basic requirements for proper virtual orthopedic assessment
    Shoulder and upper arm
    Elbow and forearm
    Hand and wrist
    Pelvis, hip and thigh
    Knee
    Lower leg, foot and ankle
    Spine
    Neurological assessment
    Special issues and situation on telemedicine
    Medico legal & confidentiality & data security & patients consents
    Dealing with children and old age and noncompliant patients, and patients in pain
    Other related issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Eckhard Nagel, Michael Lauerer, editors.
    Summary: The gap between a rising demand for health care services on the one side and scarce resources on the other, is leading to a growing pressure on decision-making processes. Hence, prioritization in medicine has become an increasingly important issue for assuring stability of health systems and improving the capability of health care. The present volume addresses normative dimensions of methodological and theoretical approaches, the legal basis behind priority setting as well as international experiences concerning the normative framework and the process of priority setting. It also examines specific criteria for prioritization and discusses economic evaluations. Contributing authors from a broad range of scientific disciplines discuss prioritization within an international dialogue.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    International Experiences: Normative Basis and Process of Priority Setting
    Criteria for Prioritization
    Methodological Approaches to Prioritization
    Economical Aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Larry Yet.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Benzodiazepines
    3. 1,4-dihydropyridines
    4. Biaryls
    5. 4-(Hetero)Arylpiperidines
    6. Spiropiperidines
    7. 2-Aminopyrimidines
    8. 2-Aminothiazoles
    9. 2-(Hetero)Arylindoles
    10. Tetrahydroisoquinolines
    11. 2,2-Dimethylbenzopyrans
    12. Hydroxamates
    13. Bicyclic pyridines containing ring-junction nitrogen
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Naheed Mojgani, Maryam Dadar, editors.
    Summary: This book covers all aspects of probiotic bacteria and their metabolites, as well as their role and significance in human and animal health. Given the role of probiotic bacterial strains in the production of short chain fatty acids, butyrate etc probiotics may be considered as an alternative approach for the prevention or treatment of intestinal dysbiosis, cancers, cardiovascular diseases, hypertensions. Additionally, the significance of probiotics added in aquaculture systems for improving health, performance and growth of aquatic organisms has been highlighted. In this book, the multi-functional role of probiotics and their post-biotic metabolites in improving overall health status of man and animals, is discussed. It is a comprehensive compilation useful for researchers, academics, veterinarians and students in the field of microbiology, food technology and biotechnology.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Bacillus spp. In Aquaculture mechanisms and Applications: An Update View
    Chapter 2. Immunity and Gut Microbiome: role of Probiotics and Prebiotics
    Chapter 3. Preventive Effects of Probiotics and Prebiotics in Food Allergy: potentials and promises
    Chapter 4. An Overview of Dairy Probiotic Microflora
    Chapter 5. Remarkable Metabolic Versatility of the Commensal Bacteria Eubacterium hallii and Intestinimonas butyriciproducens, Potential Next Generation Probiotics
    Chapter 6. Anti-carcinogenic Potential of Probiotic, Postbiotic Metabolites and Paraprobiotics on Human Cancer Cells
    Chapter 7. Postbiotic Metabolites of Probiotic in Animal Health
    Chapter 8. Probiotics Application: Implication for Sustainable Aquaculture
    Chapter 9. Honeybees Gut as a Reservoir of Probiotic Bacteria
    Chapter 10. Role of Probiotic Bacteria on Bio-availability of Functional Ingredients Under Fermentation Process
    Chapter 11. Quality and Health Aspects of Dairy Foods Affected by Probiotic Microbes and Their Metabolites
    Chapter 12. Encountering the Antibiotic Resistance by Bioactive Components and Therapies: Probiotics, Phytochemicals and Phages
    Chapter 13. Probiotic Bacteria as a functional Delivery Vehicle for the Development of Live Oral Vaccines
    Chapter 14. Promising Aspects of Probiotics and Postbiotics Derived from Lactic Acid Bacteria as Pharma Foods
    Chapter 15. Non-Dairy Foods as Potential Carriers of Probiotic Bacteria and Postbiotics.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Martin H. Floch, Adam Kim.
    Contents:
    Clinical insights : probiotics, prebiotics and gut health / Martin H. Floch & Adam Kim
    Ask the experts : an introduction to probiotics, prebiotics and gut health / Adam Kim & Martin H. Floch
    Modification of the gut microbiota to promote human health / Catherine Tomaro-Duchesneau, Shyamali Saha & Satya Prakash
    Antimicrobial and immune modulation properties of probiotics / Saad Y. Salim & Karen L. Madsen
    Prebiotics and synbiotics : how do they affect health? / Kristin Verbeke
    Probiotic use in the critically ill / Lee E. Morrow, Vijaya K. Gogineni & Mark A. Malesker
    Use of probiotics and prebiotics in inflammatory bowel disease / Sanam Verma, Rosica Valcheva, Shakir Bakkari & Levinus Dieleman
    Use of probiotics in irritable bowel syndrome / Eamonn M.M. Quigley
    Diarrheal disease / Eavan G. Muldoon, Shira Doron & Sherwood L. Gorbach
    Multiple choice questions : answers.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    Stefano Guandalini, Flavia Indrio, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Diana Di Gioia, Bruno Biavati.
    Summary: This book discusses the role of probiotics and prebiotics in maintaining the health status of a broad range of animal groups used for food production. It also highlights the use of beneficial microorganisms as protective agents in animal derived foods. The book provides essential information on the characterization and definition of probiotics on the basis of recently released guidelines and reflecting the latest trends in bacterial taxonomy. Last but not least, it discusses the concept of "dead" probiotics and their benefits to animal health in detail. The book will benefit all professors, students, researchers and practitioners in academia and industry whose work involves biotechnology, veterinary sciences or food production.

    Contents:
    1) Probiotics and prebiotics: an overview on recent trends (Tannock G.W., University of Otago, Dunedin, New Zealand; Pot B. Center for Infection and Immunity, Lille, Institute Pasteur de Lille, Lille, France)
    2) Characterization of probiotics for taxonomic purpose (Biavati B., University of Malta, Department of Earth Systems, Division of Rural Sciences and Food Systems, Malta)
    3) Role of the gut microbiota in health and disease (Holzapfel W.H., School of Life Sciences, Handong Global University, Pohang, Gyeongbuk, South Korea)
    4) Protective cultures for the safety of animal derived foods (Rovira J. and Melero B., Department of Biotechnology and Food Science, University of Burgos, Burgos, Spain)
    5) Probiotics and prebiotics for the health of monogastric farm animals (poultry, pig, horses)
    (Kritas S.K., Faculty of Veterinary Medicine, Scholl of Health Science, Aristotele University of Thessaloniki, Greece; Akoy R., School of Biological Sciences, University of Plymouth, Plymouth, Devon, UK)
    6) Probiotics and prebiotics for the health of polygastric farm animals (Azad E., Department of Animal Science, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Canada)
    7) Probiotics and prebiotics for the health of companion animals (Ridgway M.D., University of Illinois College of Veterinary Medicine, USA)
    8) Probiotics and prebiotics in aquaculture (Pandiyan P., CAS in Marine Biology, Annamalai University, Parangipettai 608502, Tamil Nadu, India)
    9) Probiotics for bees' health (Gaggia Francesca, Baffoni Loredana, Alberoni Daniele, Department of Agricultural Science, University of Bologna, Italy)
    10) Dead or live probiotics for animal health? (Sant'Ana A., Department of Food Science, Faculty of Food Engineering, University of Campinas, Brazil)
    11) Conclusion and future perspectives (Diana Di Gioia, Department of Agricultural Science, University of Bologna, Italy; Bruno Biavati, University of Malta, Department of Earth Systems, Division of Rural Sciences and Food Systems, Malta).
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Daniel Alicata, Negar Jacobs, Anthony Guerrero, Melissa Piasecki, editors.
    Summary: In keeping with the growing emphasis on psychiatry in the medical school curriculum, problem-based learning (PBL) offers students a unique patient-centred, multidisciplinary approach to study and the synthesis of knowledge. The new 2nd edition of Problem-Based Behavioral Science and Psychiatry integrates DSM-5 updates and diagnostic criteria, and is fully consistent with PBL models and methods. Building on the strengths of the popular and widely downloaded 1st edition, the 2nd edition is a clinically robust resource for both the medical and the behavioral science student. Over 40 contributors, many themselves graduates of PBL medical schools, apply problem-based learning methods to specific psychiatric disorders, general clinical issues, and bedrock physician skills such as the intake interview and treatment planning. The book's fictional case vignettes illustrated typical patient scenarios, providing real-world context for content areas, and accompanying case diagrams show the relationships between patient behaviour and underlying neurobiological structures. Each student-friendly section ends with helpful review questions. A sampling of the content areas covered: · Childhood development and brain development. · Major psychiatric illnesses, including personality, mood, anxiety, and psychotic disorders. · Stress, substance abuse, and violence. · Eating, sleep, and sexual disorders. · Coping skills and treatment compliance. · End-of-life care. · PLUS chapters on cultural sensitivity, ethical concerns, and the physician/patient relationship. This book is ideal for first and second year medical students wanting to learn about psychiatry in the exciting context of realistic cases. It also makes an excellent prep/review text for third- and fourth-year medical students preparing for the USMLE Step 1 and 2 exams, as well as being suited to graduate students in psychology or clinical social work. Problem-Based Behavioral Science and Psychiatry encourages lifelong learning and helps build the foundation for a lifelong career.

    Contents:
    How to Use this Book
    Child Development
    Effects of Early Experience on Brain and Body
    Learning Principles of Human Behavior
    Sexuality Throughout the Life Cycle
    Adaptation and Coping in a Medical Setting
    Violence and Abuse
    The Physician-Patient Relationship
    Clinical Ethics and Professionalism
    Adherence in Medicine
    Stress and Health
    Healthcare 101 and Systems-based Practice
    Stigma and Medicine
    Culture, ethnicity, and medicine
    Quantitative Measures in Healthcare
    Death, Dying, and End-of-life Care
    Basic Principles of Evaluation: Interviewing, Mental Status Examination, Differential Diagnosis, and Treatment Planning
    Disorders of Childhood
    Substance-related and Addictive Disorders
    Schizophrenia Spectrum and Other Psychotic Disorders
    Mood Disorders and suicide
    Anxiety disorders, obsessive-compulsive and related disorders, trauma and stressor-related disorders
    Somatic Symptom and Related Disorders
    Personality Disorders
    Neurocognitive Disorders
    Sleep-Wake Disorders
    Feeding and Eating Disorders
    Sexual Disorders
    Other Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Hemanshu Prabhakar, Shobana Rajan, Indu Kapoor, Charu Mahajan, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Stockholm International Peace Research Institute.
    Contents:
    pt. 1. History
    pt. 2. Weapons, military doctrines, national policies
    pt. 3. CBW at the League of Nations and United Nations 1920-69
    pt. 4. Verification
    pt. 5. International law
    pt. 6. Possible steps to avoid CB warfare.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I1246 .S86
    3
  • Digital
    Joseph Schulman, editor.
    Summary: Neonatal intensive care unit (NICU) teams in the US and around the world receive performance reports that locate their particular value for selected process and outcome measures within the range of values from all reporting NICUs. Understandably, many providers focus primarily, if not exclusively, on their particular value. When a value appears undesirable, providers often justify it in an apparent reflex response rather than critically analysing their data. Exceedingly few reflect on the width or implications of the range within which their performance lies. Standard medical education does not include these skills, yet unwarranted practice variation necessarily compromises a populations overall quality of care. Researchers report wide variation in health care resource use with little connection to patient outcomes, challenging the belief that directing incrementally more resources at certain healthcare problems necessarily produces better results. This book provides requisite knowledge to enable readers without research expertise to understand the notion of unwarranted practice variation, how to recognize it, its ubiquity, and why it is generally undesirable why narrowing is pervasiveness improves quality. The book begins by describing practice variation, its prevalence, and why it matters. Next, it examines alternative conceptualizations of NICU work. One view is task-oriented, while the other is aim-oriented. NICU teams rarely articulate their aims explicitly, so this book offers examples that guide thinking and action. Finally, this book asks, "Which rate is 'right'; what is the performance target?" The answer entails identifying the lowest resource use rate associated with desirable outcomes. This requires data describing efficient and predictably performing provision of current evidence-based care, along with relationships to a variety of outcomes. Provider conceptualization of healthcare quality also is often vague. The challenge lies in defining this notion operationally. This book does precisely that and gives readers tools to think critically about process, outcome, and quality measures, via some understanding of systems, risk-adjustment modelling, and discriminating signal from noise in process data.

    Contents:
    1. What is practice variation and why should we care about it?
    2. Clinical Care: Why do we do what we do? Exactly what are we trying to achieve?
    3. How do practice variation and quality improvement efforts relate?
    4. The ubiquity of practice variation
    5. The Dartmouth Atlas of Neonatal Care. Author: David C. Goodman, MD, MS
    6. The Norwegian Neonatal Healthcare Atlas. Author: Atle Moen, MD, PhD
    7. NICU Antibiotic Practice Variation
    8. Can Performance Feedback Affect NICU Antibiotic Practice Variation?
    9. A Single Measure of Antibiotic Practice Variation is Insufficient Hospital Diagnostic Efficiency for Early- and Late-onset Neonatal Sepsis
    10. Association Between Inborn NICU Admission rates and Proportion With High Illness Acuity
    11. Expanding Our Evaluative Focus
    12. The NICU Electronic Medical Record and Performance Evaluation
    13. How to Interpret Your Dot: What Does Your Risk-Adjusted Performance Measure Actually Tell You?
    14. A Primer on Systems Thinking and Understanding Variation in Care Processes Results Statistical Process Control Methods
    15. Practice Variation and (Mis)Aligned Incentives
    16. Eliminating Site of Care as an Independent Outcome Determinant
    17.Which Rate is "Right?"
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Subba R. Digumarthy, Suhny Abbara, Jonathan H. Chung.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    section/associate editors, Stuart Mirvis, Wayne Scott Kubal, Kathirkamanathan Shanmuganathan, Jorge Soto, Joseph S. Yu.
    Contents:
    Strategies for reducing radiation exposure from MDCT in the acute care setting / Aaron D. Sodickson
    Image management in emergency radiology / Martin Lee Gunn
    Craniocerebral trauma / Wayne Scott Kubal
    Non-traumatic brain emergencies / Wayne Scott Kubal
    Face and neck emergencies / Wayne Scott Kubal
    Spinal trauma / Wayne Scott Kubal
    Non-traumatic spine emergencies / Thomas Ptak
    Blunt chest trauma / Lisa A. Miller and Stuart E. Mirvis
    Nonvascular chest emergencies / Jamlik-Omari Johnson, Anuj Tewari and Waqas Shuaib
    Vascular chest emergencies / Sanjeev Bhalla
    Blunt abdominal and retroperitoneal trauma / Kathirkamunathan shanmuganathan
    Imaging of penetrating trauma of the torso and / Kathirkamunathan shanmuganathan
    Non-traumatic abdominal emergencies / Jorge Soto and Kathirkamunathan shanmuganathan
    Upper extremity / Joseph S. Yu
    Lower extremity / Joseph S. Yu
    Pelvis / Joseph S. Yu
    Emergent soft tissue conditions / Joseph S. Yu.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Francesco Maria Angelici, Lorenzo Rossi, editors.
    Summary: In a world where habitats are constantly changing and the impact of anthropization on the environment is increasingly intense, interactions between human and wildlife are becoming more and more complex. Some species pose problems for human activities while many others need to be helped in order to continue to exist. This book follows the first volume called 'Problematic Wildlife', edited by F.M. Angelici and published by Springer in 2016, which has had considerable success with readers and critics. The volume includes 21 chapters divided into 7 parts devoted specific topics which are approached in a multidisciplinary way. There are both review chapters and specific cases, always bearing in mind the interest for an international audience. The book can be useful both for scientists, wildlife specialists, conservationists, zoologists, ecologists, university students, nature managers, and for those who live in contact with wildlife and its problems, such as farmers, shepherds, hunters, urban planners, and staff of parks and nature reserves. Its ultimate goal is to offer scientific and pragmatic approaches to manage each categories of problematic species.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Part 1. Introduction to 'Problematic Wildlife II'. Problematic species are increasing, in a world that is constantly changing
    Chapter 1. The need and relevance of the book. Problematic Wildlife and the Modern World
    Part 2. From direct danger to humans to negative impact on human activities
    Chapter 2. Large Felid Predators and 'Man-eaters: Can we successfully balance conservation of endangered apex predators with the safety and needs of rapidly expanding human populations?
    Chapter 3. A large carnivore among people and livestock: the common leopard
    Chapter 4. Recent changes in wolf habitat occupancy and feeding habits in Italy: implications for conservation and reducing conflict with humans
    Part 3. Urban wildlife conflicts are an emerging problem
    Chapter 5. 'Good and 'bad urban wildlife
    Chapter 6. Wildlife and traffic
    an inevitable but not unsolvable problem?
    Chapter 7. The colonization of the Western Yellow-legged Gull (Larus michahellis) in an Italian city: evolution and management of the phenomenon
    Part 4. Hunting and eco-tourism: possible mechanisms for conservation and coexistence?
    Chapter 8. How hunting and wildlife conservation can coexist. Review and case studies
    Chapter 9. What do we know about wild boar in Iberia?
    Chapter 10. Travelling in a fragile world: The value of Ecotourism
    Part 5. Species extinction
    Chapter 11. Assessing presence, decline and extinction for the conservation of difficult-to-observe species
    Chapter 12. Extinct or perhaps surviving relict populations of big cats. Their controversial stories and implications for conservation
    Part 6. Zoos, Conservation, Animal Rights
    Chapter 13. Alternative facts and alternative views: Scientists, managers, and animal rights activists
    Chapter 14. Zoos and conservation in the Anthropocene: opportunities and problems
    Chapter 15. Problematic Animals in the Zoo: the issue of charismatic megafauna
    Chapter 16. Cryptic pr oblematic species and troublesome taxonomists: A tale of the Apennine bear and the Nile white rhinoceros
    Chapter 17. Communication and wildlife conservation (grey wolf and brown bear in Italy)
    Part 7. Humans and Herpetofauna
    Chapter 18. Snakes, snakebites, and humans
    Chapter 19. Giant Snake-Human Relationships
    Chapter 20. Risk assessment model for brown treesnake introduction into the continental United States
    Chapter 21. The Asian toad (Duttaphrynus melanostictus) in Madagascar: A report of an ongoing invasion
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Jack Fisher, MD, FACS, Associate Clinical Professor, Department of Plastic Surgery, Vanderbilt University, Nashville, Tennessee, Neal Handel, MD, FACS, Associate Clinical Professor, Division of Plastic Surgery, David Geffen School of Medicine, University of California, Los Angeles, Los Angeles, California.
    Summary: "Problems in Breast Surgery: A Repair Manual is destined to become a valued part of every plastic surgeon and breast surgeon's library. This unique book provides a virtual lifeline for addressing the challenges encountered in aesthetic and reconstructive breast surgery and avoiding possible problems and complications. This is not a traditional technique-oriented textbook; rather, it has a problem focus and provides different solutions for solving complex problems associated with secondary breast surgery. The book begins with chapters on the basic principles of corrective breast surgery and the key anatomic factors and mechanisms of failure that are key to accurate analysis. With this foundation in place, it proceeds to address the spectrum of potential problems that can occur with each of the different procedures, ranging from breast augmentation, reduction, and mastopexy to breast and nipple-areola reconstruction. Each chapter is introduced with a specific problem presented by Drs. Fisher and Handel. Then the second portion of the chapter features a variety of solutions from different experts for treating the problem. These experts provide case examples of similar problems with the step-by-step explanation of how they solved these problems and why they took the approach that they used. The book covers both aesthetic and reconstructive breast surgery. The goal of this book is not to judge which solution is the best (that decision is left to the reader). Designed to provide a detailed road map, this manual explains how to move from point A, the problem, to point B, the solution. Beautifully Illustrated, Dramatic color illustrations and numerous preoperative, intraoperative, and postoperative images will help the reader visualize the steps of each operative solution. Unique Features: This book's approach is unique and should be of great educational value to surgeons, both residents and practitioners, in solving challenging problems and complications; but even more important, it will help them avoid problems and complications in future cases"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Michael W. Neumeister, Michael Sauerbier.
    Summary: "The intricate balance of the intrinsic and extrinsic soft tissue structure and boney scaffold of the hand, coupled with 31 articulating services in the hand and wrist can lead to significant surgical challenges. Providing surgeons with technical pearls to overcome these challenges is the primary focus of Problems in Hand Surgery by internationally renowned hand surgeons Michael W. Neumeister, Michael Sauerbier, and an impressive group of contributors. Organized by 29 sections and 90 chapters, this comprehensive book focuses on secondary hand surgeries to optimize hand form and function in patients with challenging trauma- and disorder-related hand issues. Among the many topics addressed are problems associated with nonunion, malunion, dysvascular limbs, trauma-related degenerative changes, stiffness, tendon dysfunction, joint disruption, nerve injury, neuropathy, vasospasm, fractures, and osteoarthritis"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    [edited by] Foad Nahai, Ted H. Wojno.
    Summary: "The field of periorbital surgery has expanded exponentially in recent decades. With its rise in popularity, however, comes a rise in complications. Finally there is a comprehensive guide to repairing the problems encountered in periorbital surgery, compiled by masters in the art of periorbital surgery! This unique resource for plastic, facial plastic and oculoplastic surgeons offers several key features: - A thorough discussion on the history and examination for the evaluation of the eyelid - Stepwise guidance for correcting a range of complications in periorbital surgery, including infection and bleeding, blindness and motility disorders, specific upper and lower eyelid problems including lid retraction, chemosis, and adverse results from fillers and resurfacing - Several chapters, presenting different approaches, devoted to the challenging problem of lid retraction and its multifactorial etiology - A case-report format that provides detailed discussions of all possible complications - Expert techniques from renowned surgeons providing multiple perspectives on the same problems - More than 300 color photographs and beautifully detailed surgical illustrations - Multiple video clips showing details of eyelid evaluation and corrective techniques - Both print and electronic formats for easy access everywhere To meet the ever-increasing patient demand for these youth-restoring procedures, all surgeons undertaking eyelid surgery and committed to prevent and treat complications of periorbital surgery should have this resource in their collection! Foad Nahai, MD, FACS, FRCS (HON), Maurice"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
  • Digital
    editors Marc R. Avram, Mathew M. Avram, Désirrée Ratner.
    Digital Access AccessDermatology 2015
  • Print
    [edited by] David H. Ciocon, Yoon-Soo Cindy Bae.
    Summary: "Since the 1980s, dermatologists have increasingly assumed the reins of surgical reconstruction after Mohs micrographic surgery of the head and neck, as well as delicate areas of the hands, feet, and genitalia. Volume I of Procedural Dermatology: Postresidency and Fellowship Compendium, edited by esteemed dermatologists David H. Ciocon and Yoon-Soo Cindy Bae, provides a comprehensive review of the latest techniques in surgical reconstruction after Mohs surgery based on the location of the defect. The content reflects years of firsthand expertise from an impressive group of internationally recognized reconstructive surgery experts, who contributed chapters on evidence-based surgical, cosmetic, and laser techniques"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Facial, Scalp, Neck, Hands, Lower Extremities, and Genital Anatomy
    Reconstruction of the Forehead Unit
    Reconstruction of the Nasal Unit
    Reconstruction of the Eyelid Units
    Reconstruction of the Cheek
    Reconstruction of the Upper and Lower Lip Unit
    Reconstruction of the Mental Unit
    Reconstruction of the Ear
    Reconstruction of the Neck Unit
    Reconstruction of the Scalp
    Reconstruction of the Hand and Nail Unit after Mohs Surgery
    Reconstruction of the Genital
    Reconstruction of the Lower Legs
    Reconstruction of Scars
    Mohs and Melanoma
    Prevention and Repair of Internal Nasal Valve Dysfunction for the Reconstructive Surgeon
  • Print
    [edited by] Yoon-Soo Cindy Bae, David H. Ciocon.
    Summary: "Since the 1980s, dermatologists have increasingly assumed the reins of surgical reconstruction after Mohs micrographic surgery of the head and neck, as well as delicate areas of the hands, feet, and genitalia. Procedural Dermatology: Postresidency and Fellowship Compendium, edited by esteemed dermatologists David H. Ciocon and Yoon-Soo Cindy Bae, provides a comprehensive review of the latest techniques in surgical reconstruction after Mohs surgery based on the location of the defect. The content reflects years of firsthand expertise from an impressive group of internationally recognized reconstructive surgery experts, who contributed chapters on evidence-based surgical, cosmetic, and laser techniques"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Nonablative Rejuvenation
    Ablative Rejuvenation
    Body Contouring
    Cellulite Treatment
    Skin Laxity: Microneedling
    Scar Treatments
    Pigmented Lesion Removal
    Lasers and Light Devices for Hair Removal
    Tattoo Removal
    Leg Vein Treatment
    Lasers and Lights in Acne
    Chemical Peels
    Light-Emitting Diode Photomodulation
    Combining Treatments
    Neuromodulators and Injection Technique
    Soft-Tissue Augmentation with Dermal Fillers
    Procedural Hair Restoration: Platelet-Rich Plasma for Hair Loss and Hair Transplant
    Blepharoplasty, Lower Facelift, and Brow Lift
    Devices and Treatment Options for Axillary Hyperhidrosis
    Thread Lifts
    Cosmeceuticals
    Kybella/Deoxycholic Acid/Off-Label Uses
    High-Definition Body Contouring: Advancing Traditional Liposuction through Experience
    Fat Transfer
  • Digital
    Bedros Taslakian, Aghiad Al-Kutoubi, Jamal J. Hoballah, editors.
    Contents:
    Core Biopsy of Cervical Lymph Node
    Core Biopsy of Neck Lesion
    Core Biopsy of the Parotid Gland
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Cervical Lymph Node
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Thyroid Nodule
    Sialography
    Aspiration of Pleural Effusion
    Catheter Drainage of Lung Abscess
    Catheter Drainage of Pleural Effusion
    Core Biopsy of Chest Wall Lesion
    Core Biopsy of Lung Lesion
    Core Biopsy of Mediastinal Lesion
    Exchange of Chest Drain
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Lung Lesion
    Thermal Lung Ablation
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Axillary Lymph Node
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Breast Lesion
    MRI-Guided Biopsy of Breast Lesion
    Needle Localization of Breast Lesion
    Stereotactic Core Biopsy of Breast Lesion
    Ultrasound-Guided Core Biopsy of Breast Lesion
    Colorectal Stent Placement
    Conversion Gastrojejunostomy
    Esophageal Balloon Dilation and Stent Placement
    Gastroduodenal Stent Placement
    Nasal /Oral Feeding Tube Insertion
    Percutaneous Cecostomy
    Percutaneous Direct Jejunostomy
    Percutaneous Feeding Tube Replacement
    Percutaneous Gastrojejunostomy
    Percutaneous Gastrostomy
    Core Biopsy of the Liver
    Hepatic Tumor Ablation
    Liver Abscess Drainage
    Percutaneous Cholecystolithotomy
    Percutaneous Cholecystostomy
    Percutaneous Diagnostic Cholecystocholangiography
    Percutaneous Biliary Stone Extraction (Hepatolithotomy and Choledocolithotomy)
    Percutaneous Transhepatic Biliary Balloon Dilation for Benign Biliary Strictures
    Percutaneous Transhepatic Biliary Drainage
    Percutaneous Transhepatic Biliary Stent Placement
    Percutaneous Transhepatic Cholangiography
    Ablation of Renal Tumors
    Alcohol Ablation of Renal Cyst
    Antegrade Nephrostogram
    Core Biopsy of the Kidney
    Nephrostomy
    Antegrade Ureteral Stenting
    Nephroureterostomy
    Suprapubic Cystostomy
    Bone Biopsy
    Discography
    Intra-Articular Facet Joint Injection
    Kyphoplasty
    Percutaneous Epidural and Nerve Root Block
    Percutaneous Management of Malignant Bone Tumors
    Percutaneous Nucleotomy
    Radiofrequency Ablation of Osteoid Osteoma
    Sacroiliac Joint Injection
    Sacroplasty
    Shoulder Arthrography
    Soft Tissue Biopsy
    Steroid Injections in the Shoulder
    Vertebroplasty
    Aspiration of Abdominopelvic Fluid Collection
    Catheter Drainage of Abdominopelvic Abscess
    Catheter Drainage of Ascites
    Celiac Plexus Neurolysis and Block
    Core Biopsy of Abdominopelvic Lesions
    Exchange of Drainage Catheter
    Fluoroscopy Guided Lumbar Puncture
    Myelography
    Tractography (Pull-Out Tractography)
    Tubography (Sinography)
    Aortography and Selective Angiography
    Endovascular Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm Repair (EVAR)
    Percutaneous Transluminal Embolization of Type II Endoleak
    Thoracic Endovascular Aortic Repair (TEVAR) and Aortic Fenestration
    Transarterial Embolization of Type II Endoleak
    Brachiocephalic / Subclavian Venoplasty and Stenting
    Inferior vena Cava Filter Insertion
    Inferior vena Cava filter Retrieval
    Inferior Vena Cavogram
    Peripherally Inserted Central Catheter (PICC)
    Placement of Non-Tunneled Central Venous Catheter
    Placement of Subcutaneous Central Venous Port
    Placement of Tunneled Central Venous Catheter
    Superior Vena Cava Stent Insertion
    Superior Vena Cavogram
    Abdominal Visceral Arteriography
    Celiac and Superior Mesenteric Artery Angioplasty and Stenting
    Embolization for Management of Acute Non-Variceal Gastrointestinal Hemorrhage
    Embolization of the Splenic Artery in Nontraumatized Patients
    Embolization of the Splenic Artery in Traumatic Splenic Injury
    Embolization of Visceral Aneurysms and Pseudoaneurysms
    Thrombolysis for Management of Acute Mesenteric Ischemia
    Catheter-Directed Embolization of Renal Artery in Nontraumatized Patients
    Embolization of Renal Angiomyolipoma
    Management of Acute Renal Ischemia
    Renal Arteriography
    Renal Artery Angioplasty and Stent Placement
    Renal Sympathetic Denervation
    Renal Venography
    Transcatheter Embolization for the Treatment of Renal Trauma
    Transjugular Renal Biopsy
    Embolization of Hepatic Tumors
    Part 1: Bland and Chemoembolization
    Embolization of Hepatic Tumors
    Part 2: Radioembolization
    Embolization of the Hepatic Artery in Traumatic Liver Injury
    Management of Budd-Chiari Syndrome
    Preoperative Portal Cein Embolization
    Transjugular Intrahepatic Portosystemic Shunt (TIPS)
    Transjugular Liver Biopsy
    Interventional Therapy for Varicoceles
    Ovarian Vein Embolization
    Uterine Artery Embolization
    Bronchial Artery Embolization
    Embolization for Pulmonary Arteriovenous Malformations
    Pulmonary Angiography
    Pulmonary Artery Thrombectomy and Thrombolysis
    Subclavian artery Balloon Angioplasty and Stenting
    Subclavian Vein Thrombolysis
    Subclavian/Brachial Artery Thrombolysis
    Upper Extremity Angiogram
    Endovascular Treatment of Popliteal Aneurysm
    Lower Extremity Angiogram
    Superficial Femoral, Popliteal, and Tibial Artery Angioplasty and Stenting
    Thrombectomy for Management of Acute Limb Ischemia
    Thrombolytic Therapy for Lower Extremity Deep Vein Thrombosis
    Adrenal Venous Sampling
    Inferior Petrosal Vein Sampling
    Parathyroid Venous Sampling
    Renal Vein Renin Sampling
    Venous Sampling for Localizing Pancreatic Endocrine Tumors
    Dialysis Access Interventions (Arteriovenous Fistulas and Grafts)
    Dialysis Fistulogram
    Endovenous Thermal Ablation for Lower Extremity Venous Insufficiency
    Management of Visceral and Extremity Arteriovenous Malformations
    Percutaneous Obliteration of Common Femoral Artery Pseudoaneurysm
    Retrieval of Intravascular Foreign Body
    Brain Arteriovenous Malformation Embolization
    Diagnostic Cerebral Angiography
    Endovascular Management of Epistaxis
    Extracranial Carotid Artery Angioplasty and Stenting
    Intracranial Aneurysm Coil Embolization
    Intracranial Stenting
    Transcatheter Treatment of Acute Ischemic Stroke
    Vertebral Artery Stenting
    Wada Test
    Review of History and Physical Examination
    Society of Interventional Radiology Guidelines for Preprocedural Coagulation Parameter Surveillance Based on the Procedural Risk for Bleeding
    Society of Interventional Radiology Preprocedural Management Guidelines for Current Antithrombotic Medications Based on the Procedural Risk for Bleeding
    Surgical Procedures? Classification
    Antibiotic Prophylaxis in Vascular and Interventional Radiology
    Interventional Radiology Preprocedural Documentation
    Immediate Procedure Note
    Supplemental Reading Material.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Andrew Krakowski ; associate editors, John C. Browning, Craig N. Burkhart, Lucia Z. Diaz, Amanda A. Gosman, Kristen M. Kelly, H. Peter Lorenz, Harper N. Price.
    Summary: "Many factors contribute to the challenge of performing dermatologic procedures in children including the use of different instruments, skin differences, patient and parental anxiety, pain management and anesthesia, and the need to optimize outcomes over the lifetime of the patient. Pediatric Procedural Dermatology is a first-of-its-kind reference that provides thorough, step-by-step instruction for over 100 dermatological procedures specific to the pediatric population. Using a multidisciplinary, practical approach, this unique title equips today's clinicians to perform safe, effective care to children with guidelines and clinical pearls/tips for pre-, intra- and postprocedure strategies in addition to coding and insurance guidelines. Six sections: I: Pre-procedural Approach II: Procedural Approach III. Diagnostic-specific Procedures IV. A to Z lesion-specific Procedures V. Postprocedure Approach"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    Section on Anesthesiology and Pain Medicine, American Academy of Pediatrics ; editors, Joseph D. Tobias, Joseph P. Cravero.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2015
  • Digital
    Niraj Arora, editor.
    Summary: This practical book covers neuro-critical care procedures performed in medical or surgical ICU and different procedures dedicated to acute neurological care. The book's format allows for quick decisions about care and protocols while treating neurologically injured patients. Divided into two sections, the first focuses on procedures. The outlines of these chapters include indication, technique, types of kits available, and challenges. The second section covers the protocols; these chapters feature flowcharts, drugs/device, doses of drugs, description of device, indication, evidence, and future prospects. This succinct guide will serve as a go-to reference for residents, fellows, intensivists, or any healthcare personnel within neuro-critical care unit.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Murad Alam, Jeffrey S. Dover.
    Summary: Offering a step-by-step, practical approach to this expanding area of dermatology, Procedures in Cosmetic Dermatology: Hair Restoration enables you to master the up-to-date hair restoration techniques that produce the superior results your patients expect. Focusing on non-invasive treatment of diffuse, non-scarring hair loss, including androgenetic alopecia, this unique title, edited by expert clinicians Drs. Murad Alam and Jeffrey S. Dover, thoroughly covers the latest treatment options—all abundantly illustrated and evidence based. A video library demonstrating techniques helps you successfully incorporate today’s most effective procedures into your practice.

    Contents:
    Medical workup for hair loss
    Ethnic differences in hair
    Diagnosis and treatment of scarring alopecia
    Nutritional supplements
    Hair cosmetics, styling, and processing
    Wigs and hair prosthetics
    Micropigmentation and microblading
    Minoxidil, finasteride, and dutasteride
    Topical immunotherapies
    Systemic immunotherapies
    Complementary and alternative medicine for hair loss
    Platelet-rich plasma
    Stem cell–based therapies
    Hair transplantation
    Lasers, lights, and led
    Emerging medications
    Devices and genomic therapies.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    edited by Jean Carruthers, Alastair Carruthers, Jeffrey S. Dover, Murad Alam, Omer Ibrahim.
    Summary: Offering a step-by-step, practical approach to sought-after cosmetic procedures, Procedures in Cosmetic Dermatology: Soft Tissue Augmentation, 5th Edition, enables you to master the up-to-date cosmetic techniques that produce the superior results your patients expect. Edited by expert clinicians Drs. Jean Carruthers and Alastair Carruthers, along with Jeffrey S. Dover, Murad Alam, and Omar Ibrahim, it covers the different classes of fillers including how to choose a filler, treatment areas by location including different injection techniques, and reversals, as well as an entire section on complications—all abundantly illustrated and evidence based. A substantial video library helps you successfully incorporate the latest procedures into your practice. Provides complete, clear descriptions and rationales for using dermal fillers to combat loss of facial fat, muscle, and bone density. Logically organized content begins with general injection techniques and facial considerations, followed by numerous options of filler material and chapters for each treatment area.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Fillers: Paradigm Shifts Produce New Challenges
    Facial Beauty and the Central Role of Volume
    Introduction to Temporary Fillers: Pros and Cons
    Restylane Filler Product Family
    Juvéderm Family
    The Belotero Family
    Resilient Hyaluronic Acid (RHA®) Fillers
    Calcium Hydroxylapatite Ultradilute, HA Dilution
    Poly-L-Lactic Acid
    Emervel Family (Now as Restylane Optimal Balance Technology Line Part of the Restylane Family)
    Autologous Fat
    Introduction to Permanent Fillers: Pros and Cons
    Liquid Injectable Silicone
    Bellafill
    Forehead Reflation
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of the Temple
    Three-Dimensional Reflation of the Glabella and Adjacent Forehead
    Volumetric Treatment of the Brows
    Infraorbital Hollow and Nasojugal Fold
    Midface
    The Anatomical Basis for Safe Injection Rhinoplasty
    Filler Injection of the Melolabial Folds and Marionette Lines
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of the Chin and Jawline
    Lip Augmentation
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of Lip Lines
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of the Hands
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of the Neck and Chest
    Soft Tissue Augmentation and Buttocks Contouring
    Earlobe Rejuvenation
    Hyaluronic Acid Microdroplet Injection for Skin Quality Enhancement
    Filler Injection Techniques
    Soft Tissue Filler for the Transgender Patient
    Combinations
    Complications of Temporary Fillers
    Complications of Permanent Fillers
    Vascular Compromise
    Reversers
    Legal Considerations in Soft Tissue Fillers.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Print
    edited by G. L. Cantoni & David R. Davies.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    V581.N9 C2
    2
  • Digital
    Anggoro Cahyo Sukartiko, Tri Rini Nuringtyas, Siti Nurleily Marliana, Alim Isnansetyo, editors.
    Summary: The proceeding of the 2nd International Conference on Tropical Agriculture (ICTA) is a proceeding to publish papers presented at the corresponding conference held in 26-27 October 2017. The conference was organized by Universitas Gadjah Mada, Indonesia in collaboration with five Faculties including Faculty of Agriculture, Faculty of Animal Science, Faculty of Veterinary, Faculty of Agricultural Technology and Faculty of Forestry. The conference was held with the theme "Integrated and sustainable tropical agriculture with subtheme "Building community socio-ecological resilience to climate change through agricultural innovations." Interest is growing in sustainable agriculture when agriculture has evolved for many years from simple or manual farming to more industrial agriculture. The sustainable agriculture involves the use of productive farming technology that takes advantages of biological resources and process to conserve the environment and enhance public health. Furthermore, sustainable agriculture should include all aspects of sustainable criteria, such as technical, socio-economic, and ecological aspects. This book covers the sustainable tropical agriculture, sustainable tropical animal production and health, sustainable tropical forestry, socio-economic dimension in tropical agriculture and innovative and emerging food technology and management as chapters in this book. The common challenging problems in plant, animal, and fisheries production in the tropic are climate change, inefficiency production system, low technological innovation, decreasing environment quality, and the outbreak risk of pest and diseases. The problems are closely bound to the condition of socio-economic of farmers as the small scale farm is dominant in this area. In addition, post-harvest technology is crucial to maintaining the high quality of the product after on farm production.^This book provides the recent research and development on tropical agriculture production systems either for the plant, terrestrial animal and aquatic animal to establish the sustainable agriculture production in the tropic.

    Contents:
    Preface
    1. Sustainable Tropical Agriculture
    2. Sustainable Tropical Animal Production and Health
    3. Innovative and Emerging Agricultural Technology and Management
    4. Socio-economic Dimensions in Tropical Agriculture
    5. Organizing committee, editors and reviewers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    U735 .N29 1967
    1
  • Print
    General editor: M. Rocha e Silva.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Mode of action of anti-parasitic drugs.--
    v. 2. Pharmacology of reproduction.--
    v. 3. Clinical pharmacology.--
    v. 4. Mechanisms of drug toxicity.--
    v. 5. The control of growth processes by chemical agents.--
    v. 6. Drugs in relation to blood coagulation haemostasis and thrombosis.--
    v. 7. Physico-chemical aspects of drug action.--
    v. 8. Salt and water balance.--
    v. 9. Pharmacology of pain.--
    v. 10. Monoamine oxidas inhibitors: relationship between pharmalogical clinical effects.--
    v. 11. Immunopharmacology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    V502 .I63 1966
    11
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    D333 .C74.7
    2
  • Print
    edited by Olof Gilland.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Theme 1 : Technical progress in neurological diagnostics
    v. 2. Themes II-IV : The demand for neurological services ; Steroid treatment of neurological disorders ; Free subjects.
  • Print
    editors, D.T. Mason, G.G. Neri Serneri, M.F. Oliver.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC685.I6 F56 1979
    2
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    U735 .I59
    1
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC960 .I54
    5
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    TL6 .S78
    7
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access SPIE v. 1200-, 1990-
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Proceedings of SPIE-- the International Society for Optical Engineering to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP552.P4 A43
    10
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QP95 .L63
    2
  • Print
    General editor: Börje Uvnäs.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Plenary session. Pharmacological control of release of hormones including antidiabetic drugs.--
    v. 2. Effects of drugs on synthesis and mobilization of lipids.--
    v. 3. New aspects of cardiac glycosides.--
    v. 4. Drugs and membranes.--
    v. 5. Methods for the study of pharmacological effects at cellular and subcellular levels.--
    v. 6. Metabolic factors controlling duration of drug action.--
    v. 7. Modern concepts in the relationship between structure and pharmacological activity.--
    v. 8. Pharmacological analysis of central nervous action.--
    v. 9. Bradykinin and vaso-dilating polypeptides. Pharmacology of the lung.--
    v. 10 Abstracts.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    V502 .I63 1961
    1
  • Print
    editors: Carlos D. Guerrero, Abner I. Weisman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N12 .W92 1953
    2
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
  • Digital
    edited by Uwe Gottschalk.
    Contents:
    1. Downstream processing of monoclonal antibodies: current practices and future opportunities
    2. The development of antibody purification technologies
    3. Harvest and recovery of monoclonal antibodies: cell removal and clarification
    4. Next-generation clarification technologies for the downstream processing of antibodies
    5. Protein A-based affinity chromatography
    6. Purification of human monoclonal antibodies: non-protein A strategies
    7. Hydrophobic interaction chromatography for the purification of antibodies
    8. Purification of monoclonal antibodies by mixed-mode chromatography
    9. Advances in technology and process development for industrial-scale monoclonal antibody purification
    10. Alternatives to packed-bed chromatography for antibody extraction and purification
    11. Process-scale percipitation of impurities in mammalian cell culture broth
    12. Charged ultrafiltration and microfiltration membranes for antibody purification
    13. Disposable prepaced-bed chromatography for downstream purification: form, fit, function, and industry adoption
    14. Integrated polishing steps for monoclonal antibody purification
    15. Orthogonal virus clearance applications in monoclonal antibody production
    16. Development of a platform process for the purification of therapeutic monoclonal antibodies
    17. The evolution of platform technologies for the downstream processing of antibodies
    18. Countercurrent chromatography for the purification of monoclonal antibodies, bispecific antibodies and antibody-drug conjugates
    19. The evolution of continuous chromatography: from bulk chemicals to biopharma
    20. Accelerated seamless antibody purification: simplicity is key
    21. Process economic drivers in industrial monoclonal antibody manufacture
    22. Design and optimization of manufacturing
    23. Smart design for an efficient facility with a validated disposable system
    24. High-throughput screening and modeling technologies for process development in antibody purification
    25. Downstream processing of monoclonal antibody fragments
    26. Downstream processing Fc fusion proteins bispecific antibodies, and antibody-drug conjugates
    27. Manufacturing concepts for antibody-drug conjugates
    28. Purification of IgM and IgA
    29. Purification of monoclonal antibodies from plants
    30. Very-large-scale production of monoclonal antibodies in plants
    31. Trends in formulation and drug delviery for antibodies
    32. Antibody purification: drivers of change.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Timothy Hodgson, editor.
    Summary: This volume covers a broad range of current research topics addressing the function of visuospatial attention and working memory. It discusses a variety of perspectives ranging from evolutionary and genetic underpinnings to neural substrates/computational processes and the connection between attention and working memory. Contributions address the topic at the molecular, system and evolutionary scales and will be of interest to a range of audiences from animal behaviour specialists, experimental psychologists to clinicians in the field of psychiatry and neurology.

    Contents:
    Part I Evolution and Development
    The Evolution of Gaze Shifting Eye Movements
    Visuospatial integration and hand-tool interaction in cognitive archaeology
    Development of Visual-Spatial Attention
    Variations in the beneficial effects of spatial structure and serial organization on working memory span in humans and other species
    Part II Processes, mechanisms and models
    Biasing allocations of attention via selective weighting of saliency signals: behavioral and neuroimaging evidence for the Dimension-Weighting Account
    Active inference, novelty, and neglect
    Prefrontal contributions to attention and working memory
    Functions of memory across saccadic eye movements
    What is memory-guided attention? How past experiences shape selective visuospatial attention in the present
    Superstitious perception in humans and neural networks
    Dynamic Protention: the architecture of real-time cognition for future events
    Recent studies on the relationship between covert visuo-spatial attention, visual search and saccadic eye movements
    Functional imaging of visuo-spatial attention in complex and naturalistic conditions
    Part III Neuropsychology and Neuropsychiatry
    Visuo-spatial attention and working memory in progressive supra-nuclear palsy
    Attention and working memory in Alzheimers and Parkinsons disease
    Mechanisms underlying visuospatial working memory impairments in schizophrenia
    Dopamine and working memory: The impact of genetic variation, stress and implications for mental health
    Eye movements in neuropsychological tasks.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Rafael Díaz-Nieto, editor.
    Summary: This practical guide provides a full but concise account of the organ donation and transplantation process, from the management of the donor and organ preservation to perioperative management and surgical techniques. Readers will learn about various aspects of multi-organ retrieval such as different types of donors and evaluation of organ donors, as well as the retrieval process itself and ethical aspects of transplantation. Written in a consistent format, each of the themed parts examines the different types of solid organ transplantation, namely kindey, pancreas and liver. Each part discusses the indications for transplantation, organ allocation, surgical technique, post-operative management outcomes and professional skills for the surgeon. This is an essential guide for the transplant surgeon offering a unique summary of the critical issues in abdominal organ transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Vivekkumar K. Redasani, Sanjay B. Bari.
    Contents:
    Ch. 1. Introduction
    Ch. 2. Concept of prodrug
    Ch. 3. Types of prodrugs
    Ch. 4. Approaches for prodrugs
    Ch. 5. Applications
    Ch. 6. Role in drug discovery
    Ch. 7. Work reported
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    Cathy Thomas Hess.
    Summary: "Get informed on the numerous skin and wound care products on the market - and make safe and accurate choices for your patients - with this crucial product guide. Choose the best skin and wound care products to support your patients' skin health and wound healing, with Product Guide to Skin and Wound Care, 8th Edition. Listing more than 294 products in alphabetical order, this handy product guide for wound care practitioners across all practice settings offers detailed information - sizes, action, indications, contraindications, application, and removal information - so that your choices stay informed and accurate. A must for wound care nurses, this pocket guide also offers vital on-the-spot support for home healthcare, emergency, family practice, and dermatology nurses, as well as physical therapists. Know the purpose and use of skin and wound care products, to assist in the proper product choice, usage, and documentation. This new edition has a softcover format that fits easily in your coat pocket for on-the-go information access. There are new products to update your formulary choices, including sizes, action, indication, application and removal. Offers concise reviews of the many skin and wound care products now available - including collagens, hydrocolloids, antifungals and antimicrobials, liquid skin protectants, moisture barriers, and other skin care products. There are newly enhanced full-color manufacturer photos of each product. Offers the characteristics, function, and use of skin and wound care dressings, drugs, and devices, including correct classification of a particular condition. Offers an Alphabetical Wound Care Product Guide that illustrates product information detailing action, indications, contraindications, application, and removal; reimbursement codes for products provided by manufacturers; and many product references supporting products. Provides information on products that may contain ingredients that can cause allergic reactions. Provides help in mixing products correctly, explaining which ingredients should not be mixed with certain other ingredients. Wound care product categories include alginates, antimicrobials, cellular and tissue-based products, collagens, composites, contact layers, drugs, foams, hydrocolloids, hydrogels, negative pressure wound therapy, specialty absorptives, surgical dressings, transparent films, wound fillers, and other devices and products. Offers a comprehensive listing of additional products such as abdominal dressing holders and binders, compression bandage systems, conforming bandages, elastic bandage rolls, impregnated gauzes, nonimpregnated gauzes, packing strips, tapes and wound cleansers. A must-have for any wound care practitioner as it provides you with the easy-to-reference product details needed to move your practice forward and stay at the forefront of your field."--from the publisher description.

    Contents:
    Part I. Wound care products
    Alginates
    Antimicrobials
    Cellular and tissue-based products (CTPs)
    Collagens
    Composites
    Contact layers
    Drugs
    Foams
    Hydrocolloids
    Hydrogels
    Negative pressure wound therapy
    Specialty absorptives
    Surgical supplies, Miscellaneous
    Transparent films
    Wound fillers
    Other products
    Part II. Skin care products and additional dressings and products
    Antifungals and antimicrobials
    Compression bandage systems
    Conforming bandages
    Elastic bandage rolls
    Gauze, impregnated with other than water, normal saline, or hydrogel, without adhesive border
    Gauze, impregnated with water or normal saline, without adhesive border
    Gauze, nonimpregnated, with adhesive border
    Gauze, nonimpregnated, without adhesive border
    Liquid skin protectants
    Moisture barriers
    Skin cleaners
    Surgical dressing holder, non-reusable, each
    Tapes
    Therapeutic moisturizers
    Wound cleansers.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    Zhen Fang, Richard L. Smith, Jr., Xiao-Fei Tian, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a collection of studies on state-of-art techniques developed specifically for lignocellulose component derivation, and for the production of functional materials, composite polymers, carbonaceous biocatalysts, and pellets from lignocellulosic biomass, with an emphasis on using sustainable chemistry and engineering to develop innovative materials and fuels for practical application. Technological strategies for the physical processing or biological conversion of biomass for material production are also presented. All chapters were contributed by respected experts in the field from around the globe, providing a broad range of perspectives on cutting-edge applications. The book offers an ideal reference guide for academic researchers and industrial engineers in the fields of natural renewable materials, biorefinery of lignocellulose, biofuels and environmental engineering. It can also be used as a comprehensive reference source for university students in chemical engineering, material science and environmental engineering.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Isolation and Purification of Lignocellulose Components
    Chapter 1. Isolation, Purification, and Potential Applications of Xylan
    Part 2: Composite Polymers Derived from Lignin and Cellulose
    Chapter 2. Development of Lignin-Based Antioxidants for Polymers
    Chapter 3. Nanocellulose Applications in Papermaking
    Part 3: Functional Materials Derived from Cellulose and Lignocelluloses
    Chapter 4. Recent Advances in Cellulose Chemistry and Potential Applications
    Chapter 5. Production, Characterization and Alternative Applications of Biochar
    Chapter 6. Carbons from Biomass for Electrochemical Capacitors
    Chapter 7. Carbonaceous Catalysts from Biomass
    Chapter 8. Synthesis and Design of Engineered Biochars as Electrode Materials in Energy Storage Systems
    Part 4: Biomass Pellets as Fuels
    Chapter 9. Biomass Pelletization: Contribution to Renewable Power Generation Scenarios
    Chapter 10. Biocarbon Production and Use as A Fuel
    Chapter 11. Mechanical Aspects and Applications of Pellets Prepared from Biomass Resources
    Part 5: Biosynthesis of Polymers from Renewable Biomass
    Chapter 12. Microbial Production and Properties of Lactic Acid-Based Polymers and Oligomers from Renewable Feedstock.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mohammad Maqbool Mir, Umar Iqbal, Shabir Ahmad Mi, editors.
    Summary: Globally stone fruits are emerging in the market due to the increased consumer's desire for health-promoting foods. Stone fruits attract research attention, mainly due to the cultural and commercial aspects of the array of varieties that are grown. Being grown in wide range of environments, it is very important to understand what factors influence the production and quality attributes of stone fruits. There is a lack of systematic scientific information on strategic approach for production technologies of such fruits. This book will be first of its kind focusing on technological aspects of stone fruits especially on latest developments in present day horticulture. It will be an essential reference for professionals including academicians, scholars, researchers and industries working in the said area. We hope that readers will find this book a useful resource for their research or studies, and it will be helpful in the development of high quality stone fruits in future which will improve the economic and social life of people. Besides, this book fulfills the needs of a number of horticultural courses of Universities and will serving as a pomological manual for all occasions.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Varietal diversification of stone fruits
    Chapter 2. Nutrient management in stone fruits
    Chapter 3. Pollination management in stone fruit crops
    Chapter 4. Canopy management in stone fruits
    Chapter 5. Rootstocks of stone fruit crops
    Chapter 6. Irrigation management in stone fruits
    Chapter 7. Physiological disorders in stone fruits
    Chapter 8. Orchard factors affecting postharvest quality of stone fruits
    Chapter 9. Nutritional composition of stone fruits
    Chapter 10. Chemical treatments for shelf life enhancement of stone fruits
    Chapter 11. Packaging and storage of stone fruits
    Chapter 12. Hi tech stone fruit industry, issues and approaches
    Chapter 13. Growth and supply chain of stone fruits in the world- an indian outlook
    Chapter 14. Diseases of stone fruit crops
    Chapter 15. Integrated pest management of stone fruits
    Chapter 16. Nematodes associated with stone fruits & their management strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Tahir Mahmood, Forth Park Hospital, Kirkcaldy, Sambit Mukhopadhyay, Norfolk & Norwich University Hospital.
    Summary: "Introduction to educational theories: There are a number of educational theories that underpin the practice of teaching and learning. Some of the more widely used theoretical frameworks relevant to medical education are highlighted here. Andragogy: Knowles suggests that adult learners share the following characteristics (1): . Are independent and self-directed learners . Use accumulated experience as a scaffold for new learning . Value integration of new learning into their existing commitments . Value problem-centred approaches to learning . Have internal drivers for motivation to learn . Need to know why and how learning benefits the learner In any setting involving adult learners, these characteristics need to be considered when planning educational events. Constructivist theory: Learning occurs through the construction of new ideas or concepts built upon the learners' existing knowledge and experiences. As this is based upon an individual's own previous knowledge and experiences, new knowledge can be constructed at the individual level, or be co-constructed by groups of learners within communities of practice (2)"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Laurence B. McCullough, John H. Coverdale, Frank A. Chervenak.
    Summary: A comprehensive, accessible approach to the everyday ethical challenges faced in obstetric and gynecological practice. Offering practical guidance for practitioners at all levels, the text also provides a sustained exploration of professional ethics in the intersection of obstetrics and gynecology with psychiatry. Drawing on their award-winning teaching, the authors start each chapter with goals, objectives, topics, and a list of key concepts, which are defined in a separate section. Chapters cover a multitude of topics, from pregnancy and the quest for the 'perfect' baby to end-of-life care - all underpinned by the need for professionally responsible research, advocacy, and health policy. Professional Ethics in Obstetrics and Gynecology is an indispensable resource for both trainee and practicing obstetricians and gynecologists. A chapter devoted solely to pedagogy in professional ethics in obstetrics and gynecology supports the readers' learning and those with or without formal training in ethics to teach students, residents, and colleagues.

    Contents:
    Professional ethics in medicine
    Professional ethics in obstetrics and gynecology
    Decision making by, with, and for patients
    Confidentiality
    Conflicts of interest and conflicts of commitment
    Teaching professional ethics in obstetrics and gynecology
    Prevention of pregnancy
    Initiation of pregnancy
    Induced abortion and feticide
    Fetal analysis
    Periviability
    Intrapartum management
    The perfect baby
    Cancer and pregnancy
    Setting ethically justified limits on clinical management
    Leadership
    Clinical innovation and research
    Health policy and advocacy.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    clinical editor, Laura M. Willis.
    Summary: "Although pathology changes very little, our understanding of pathophysiology is constantly changing as it is enriched by new scientific research. Indeed, research has contributed greatly to our knowledge base regarding normal physiology as well as disease states. This fourth edition of Professional Guide to Pathophysiology reflects such recent advances in medical knowledge. The first chapter of the book lays a foundation for normal cellular physiology and pathologic deviations of disease. Following that, cancer, infection, and fluid and electrolytes each deserve a specific chapter because of their ubiquitous effects. The remainder of the book is organized by body system, with an initial discussion of normal anatomy and physiology as a background for pathology specific to that area. Subsequent disease entries cover causes, pathophysiology, signs and symptoms, complications, diagnosis, treatment, and special considerations. Professional Guide to Pathophysiology, Fourth Edition, readily provides the vital information needed, helping the clinician keep current and helping the student emerge more knowledgeable"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of pathophysiology / Katrin Moskowitz
    Cancer / Kathryn E. Dinh
    Infection / Melanie DeGonzague
    Fluids and electrolytes / Cheryl L. Brady
    Genetics / Stefanie Nelson Tyler
    Cardiovascular system / Natalie Burkhalter
    Respiratory system / Alan C. Eddison
    Nervous system / Andrea Borchers
    Gastrointestinal system / Melanie DeGonzague
    Musculoskeletal system / Amy Weaver
    Hematologic system / Katrin Moskowitz
    Immune system / Kathryn E. Dinh
    Endocrine system / Katrin Moskowitz
    Renal system / Diego Acero
    Sensory system / Cherie R. Rebar
    Integumentary system / Amy L. Slusher
    Reproductive system / Alisha H. Wilkes
    Appendix: Less common disorders / Laura M. Willis.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Print
    Kathleen Koernig Blais, Ed. D., RN, Florida International University, Janice S. Hayes, PhD, RN, University of Northern Colorado.
    Contents:
    Beginning the journey
    Socialization to professional nursing roles
    Historical foundations of professional nursing
    Ethical foundations of professional nursing
    Legal foundations of professional nursing
    Knowledge development in nursing
    The nurse as health promoter and care provider
    The nurse as learner and teacher
    The nurse as leader and manager
    The nurse's role in evidence-based health care
    The nurse's role in quality and safety
    The nurse's role as political advocate
    The nurse as colleague and collaborator
    Communicating effectively
    Managing change
    Technology and informatics
    Nursing in an evolving health care delivery system
    Providing care in home and community
    Global health
    Dimensions of holistic health care
    Nursing in a culturally diverse world
    Nursing in a spiritually diverse world
    Nursing in a culture of violence
    Advanced nursing education and practice
    The future of nursing.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RT84.5 .B53 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Douglas E. Mitchell, Robert K. Ream, editors.
    Summary: At the center of this book is the complex and perplexing question of how to design professional preparation programs, organizational management practices, public policy systems and robust professional associations committed to and capable of, maintaining confidence, trust and the other hallmarks of responsible professionalism. To do this, we need to rebuild our understanding of professional responsibility from the ground up. We describe how individuals might be prepared to engage in responsible professional service delivery, examine promising options for the reform of professional service systems and finally, outline a reform strategy for improving practice in education and medicine ? two essential public services. The nexus of the reform problem in professionalism is establishing a more robust and effective working relationship between teachers and their students; between health care professionals and their patients and between educators and health professionals. Professionalism means acceptance of professional responsibility for student and patient outcomes ? not just acceptance of responsibility for technical expertise, but commitment to the social norms of the profession, including trustworthiness and responsibility for client wellbeing. In the past, it may have been sufficient to assume that adequate knowledge can be shaped into standards of professional practice. Today, it is clear that we must take careful account of the ways in which practicing professionals develop, internalize and sustain professionalism during their training, along with the ways in which this commitment to professionalism may be undermined by the regulatory, fiscal, technological, political and emotional incentive systems that impinge on professional workplaces and professional employment systems.

    Contents:
    A Brief Introduction to the Problem of Professional Responsibility
    Dilemmas of Educational Practice: Global Competition and Achievement Gaps
    Challenges Facing the Medical Profession in the US
    Professional Responsibility: The Problem and Why It Needs Attention
    How Institutional Contexts Shape Professional Responsibility
    Professional Practice in Complex Organizations
    Erecting the Pipeline for Socially Responsible Physicians
    How Linking University Research to School Needs Influences Scholars and Schools
    Cultural Induction: Professionalism?s Life or Death Struggle
    Creating Incentives to Support Professional Responsibility
    Getting Task Structures and Institutional Designs Right
    Educator Professional Responsibility for Family Health
    Professional Ethics and Virtue Ethics in Community Medical Practice
    The Role of Graduate Schools of Education in Training Autism Professionals to Work with Diverse Families
    Preparing Teachers as Momentum Builds for Dual-Language Classrooms
    Policy, Structural, Role and Knowledge Barriers to Best Practice in School Psychology
    Whither Collaboration? The Capacity and Will to Integrate Professional Services
    Collaborative Community in Schools
    Summarizing the Lessons, Shaping a Blueprint.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    by Grace W. Gengoux, Sanno E. Zack, Jennifer L. Derenne, Athena Robinson, Laura B. Dunn, Laura Weiss Roberts.
    Summary: "This volume is a collaboration by several psychiatrists and psychologists who posit a new culture, one that is supportive of the health and well-being of health care professionals and the patients and populations they serve. The individual and systemic barriers to professional well-being and the unique challenges faced by health care providers at different stages of professional and personal development are examined. Personal resilience and realistic strategies to improve well-being are discussed. Detailed case studies and vignettes and thought-provoking discussion questions and exercises are included"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Healthy Clinicians, Healthy Patients
    Professional and Personal Developmental Milestones
    Burnout and Clinician Mental Health
    Approaches to Mental Health Care for Fellow Clinicians
    Special Challenges for Clinicians-in-Training
    Systems and Supports for Clinician Wellness
    Legal and Ethical Issues in the Context of Impairment and Recovery
    Preventive Health Care Strategies : Fostering Positive Self-Care and Resilience
    Mindfulness and Spiritual Well-Being
    Nutrition and Physical Activity
    Sleep
    Relationships and Social Connection
    Psychiatric Care and Psychotherapy
    Meaningful Professional Contributions.
  • Digital
    Laura Weiss Roberts, M.D., M.A., Gabriel Termuehlen, B.A..
    Summary: "This new edition of Professionalism and Ethics: Q & A Self-Study Guide for Mental Health Professionals thoroughly updates the highly regarded and groundbreaking first edition, offering the contemporary reader clinical wisdom and ethical guidance for challenging times. As with its predecessor, the second edition features commentaries by leaders in psychiatric ethics, plus two foundational chapters on ethics and professionalism in the field of mental health. These commentaries and introductory chapters provide an overview of essential ethical principles and concepts, the professional obligations of the mental health clinician, common ethical tensions found in practice, ethical aspects of caring for special populations, and ethical issues in professional training and research. The introductory chapters are followed by case-oriented questions and answers on core concepts and topics in clinical care, medical research, and interactions with colleagues and trainees. Topics explored in-depth include authorship, disclosure, and ethical peer review for scientific publications; assisted suicide and euthanasia; professional voyeurism versus patient privacy online and on social media; the appropriate process for reporting an impaired colleague; and problems of burnout, work-life balance, and professional well-being. Professionalism and Ethics: Q & A Self-Study Guide for Mental Health Professionals poses and plumbs critically important ethical dilemmas in a compelling, down-to-earth way for today's practitioners and learners"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Ethics, Professionalism, and the Field of Mental Health : An Overview / Laura Weiss Roberts, Max Kasun, Gabriel Termuehlen
    Ethics in the Mental Health Professions / Laura Weiss Roberts, Max Kasun, Gabriel Termuehlen
    Core Concepts in Ethics and Professionalism
    Ethics and Professionalism in Clinical Care
    Ethics and Professionalism in Medical Research
    Ethics and Professionalism in Interactions With Colleagues and Trainees
    Ethics and Professionalism Questions for Review.
  • Digital
    Laura Weiss Roberts, Daryn Reicherter, editors.
    Summary: Professionalism and Ethics in Medicine: A Study Guide for Physicians and Physicians-in-Training is a unique self-study guide for practitioners and trainees covering the core competency areas of professionalism, ethics, and cultural sensitivity. This novel title presents real-world dilemmas encountered across the specialties of medicine, offering guidance and relevant information to assist physicians, residents, and medical students in their decision-making. The text is divided into two parts: Foundations and Questions with Answers. The first part provides a substantive foundation of knowledge in the principles, scholarship, policy guidelines, and decision-making strategies of the modern health professions. The second part assists practitioners and trainees in preparing for the complex issues that arise each day in the settings where health professionals work and train ? clinics, research centers, educational contexts, and communities. Developed by renowned leaders in a broad range of clinical fields, Professionalism and Ethics in Medicine: A Study Guide for Physicians and Physicians-in-Training is a major, invaluable contribution to the literature and an indispensable reference for clinicians at all levels.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Foundations
    Chapter 1: Introductions to Ethics in Clinical Medicine
    Chapter 2: The Legal Framework of Medical Ethics in the United States
    Chapter 3: Multicultural and Ethical Considerations in American Medicine
    Chapter 4: Ethical Issues in Biomedical Research and Clinical Training
    Chapter 5: Professionalism in Medicine as a Transnational and Transcultural Ethical Concept
    Part 2 Questions with Narrative Answers
    Part 3 Core Concept Q&A
    Part 4 Clinical Q&A
    Part 5 Research and Education Q&A.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ronald E. Domen, MD, Richard M. Conran, MD, PhD, JD, Robert D. Hoffman, MD, PhD, Cindy B. McCloskey, MD, Suzanne Zein-Eldin Powell, MD
    Summary: Professionalism in Pathology and Laboratory Medicine provides a basic understanding of how ethics and professionalism impact pathology and laboratory medicine. Approaches and guidance to educational and assessment tools, including more than 100 case vignettes to guide discussion, are included. The book also discusses professionalism in the context of research, pathologist well-being and burnout, legal aspects, diversity, organizational leadership, and patient safety and quality of care. Lapses in ethical and professional behavior as well as recommendations on future directions for research and education in professionalism also are addressed.

    Contents:
    Cover Title Copyright Contents Contributors Preface
    1 Introduction to Ethics and Professionalism in Pathology and Laboratory Medicine
    2 Professionalism and Ethics in Pathology Graduate Medical Education
    3 Teaching Professionalism
    4 Interprofessionalism and the Role of Pathologists
    5 Professionalism Across Organizational Culture and Leadership
    6 Diversity and Professionalism
    7 Professionalism, Patient Safety, and Quality of Care
    8 Professionalism in Research
    9 Professionalism and Physician Health and Wellness
    10 Addressing Unprofessional Behavior in the Workplace
    11 Recognizing and Remediating Lapses in Ethical and Professional Behavior
    12 Legal and Ethical Aspects of Professionalism
    13 Best Practices in Professionalism
    14 A Compendium of Case Scenarios in Ethics and Professionalism
    15 Future Directions for Research and Education in Professionalism Backcover
  • Print
    Karen Kelsky, Ph.D.
    Summary: Offers career guidance to Ph.D. degree holders, addressing such issues as publishing, interviews, CVs, cultivating references, avoiding career path mistakes, and transitioning to non-academic work.

    Contents:
    Part I. Dark times in the academy. The end of an era ; Breaking out of the ivory tower ; The myths grad students believe
    Part II. Getting your head in the game. The tenure track job search process explained ; Stop acting like a grad student! ; The attributes of a competitive tenure track candidate ; Building a competitive record ; Your campaign platform ; Why they want to reject you ; When to go on the market and how long to try ; Where are the jobs? Institution types and ranks ; Where and how to find reliable advice ; Why "yourself" is the last person you should be
    Part III. The nuts and bolts of a competitive record. Take control of your CV ; Getting teaching experience ; Publish this, not that ; Why you want and need grants ; Cultivating your references ; Applying to conferences ; How to work the conference
    Part IV. Job documents that work. The academic skepticism principle ; What's wrong with your cover letter ; Tailoring with dignity ; Rules of the academic CV ; Just say no to the weepy teaching statement ; Evidence of teaching effectiveness ; The research statement ; What is a diversity statement, anyway? ; The dissertation abstract
    Part V. Techniques of the academic interview. Academic job interview basics ; The key questions in an academic interview ; The conference interview (including phone and Skype) ; The campus visit ; The job talk ; The teaching demo ; How to talk to the dean ; They said what? Handling outrageous questions ; Waiting, wondering, Wiki
    Part VI. Navigating the job market minefield. Good job candidates gone bad ; Fear of the inside candidate ; Wrangling recalcitrant references ; Managing your online presence ; Evaluating campus climate ; When you feel like you don't belong ; What if you're pregnant? ; What not to wear ; Covering the costs
    Part VII. Negotiating an offer. Don't be afraid to negotiate ; The rare and elusive partner hire ; The rescinded offer--who is in the wrong?
    Part VIII. Grants and postdocs. The foolproof grant template ; Proving your project is worthy ; The postdoc application: How it's different and why ; The good and the bad of postdocs
    Part IX. Some advice about advisors. Best advisors, worst advisors ; A good advisor is not nice ; Ph.D. debt and ethical advising
    Part X. Leaving the cult. It's OK to quit ; Let yourself dream ; 100+ skills that translate outside the academy ; Collecting information ; Applying while Ph.D. Breaking free: The path of the entrepreneur ; Declaring independence.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Prof Dev 129
    1
  • Digital
    Howard J.A. Carp, editor.
    Summary: This book brings together the most up-to-date information about the physiology of progestogens. Addressing the bidirectional communication between hormones, fertility, tumors, and autoimmunity, it provides the basic science and clinical perspectives of progestogens which have not been previously available in one volume. In addition to estrogens, androgens, mineralocorticoids and glucocorticoids, progestogens are a major class of steroid hormone. While present in certain phases of estrous and menstrual cycles, progestogens are named for their function in maintaining pregnancy. This book is essentially practical in orientation, addressing the specific issues that confront the practitioner, and provides information to Obstetricians, Gynecologists, Reproductive endocrinologists, as well as Gynecological Oncologists and Rheumatologists. Contributions are from an international team of experts in the field, now completely updated in this new edition with new developments in primary dysmenorrhea and contraception.

    Contents:
    Physiological actions of Progesterone
    Pharmacology of different progestogens and side effects
    Progestogens in infertility practice
    Progestogens and threatened miscarriage
    Progestogens and recurrent miscarriage
    Progestogens in pre-term labour
    Progestogens in Abnormal uterine bleeding
    Progestogens in contraceptives
    Progestogens and Endometriosis
    Progestogens and Breast Cancer
    Progestogens in Endometrial Cancer
    Progestogens in the post menopause
    Progestogens and Autoimmunity
    Progestogens in non gynecological indications.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Angelo Sghirlanzoin, Giuseppe Lauria and Luisa Chiapparini, editors.
    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Vascular Diseases: Ischemic Stroke
    Vascular Diseases: Cerebral Hemorrhage
    Inflammatory Diseases of the Cerebral Arteries
    Trauma of the Central Nervous System
    Coma
    Sleep Disorders
    Viral Infections of the Nervous System
    Bacterial, Fungal and Parasitic Infections of the Central Nervous System
    Leprosy
    Prion Diseases
    Myelin Disorders: Multiple Sclerosis
    Myelin Disorders: Devic's Syndrome
    Myelin Disorders: Post-Infectious Neurological Syndromes (PINS)
    Leukodystrophies
    Antibody-Mediated Encephalitis
    Dementias
    Intellectual Disability
    Toxic and Deficiency Encephalopathies
    Inborn Errors of Metabolism
    Mitochondrial Disorders
    Disorders of Upper and Lower Motor Neurons
    Headaches
    Disorders of Cerebrospinal Fluid Circulation
    Epilepsy and Myoclonus
    Neoplastic Disorders
    Neurofibromatosis Type 1 and Type2.-Paraneoplastic Neurological Syndromes
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Parkinson's Disease
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Atypical Parkinsonisms
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Huntington's Disease
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Hyperkinetic Movement Disorders
    Tics and Tourette Syndrome
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Essential Tremor
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Dystonia
    Ataxias and Cerebellar Degenerations
    Disorders of Peripheral Nerves
    Disorders of Autonomic Nervous System
    Autoimmune Ion Channel Disorders of the Peripheral Nervous System
    Muscular Dystrophies
    Inflammatory Myophaties
    Pain and Related Syndromes.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Click on Series link(s) for access options
  • Digital
    Hideaki Hara [and 4 others], editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest knowledge on the roles of progranulin (PGRN) in normal physiology and pathology and explores the emerging significance of PGRN as a therapeutic target and biomarker in various CNS disorders, including frontotemporal lobe degeneration and other neurodegenerative diseases. Following initial recognition of the importance of PGRN in sexual differentiation of the developing brain and adult neurogenesis, it was subsequently discovered that PGRN acts as a chaperone of lysosomal enzymes and plays a crucial role in maintaining cellular protein homeostasis. It has also been found that sex steroids modulate the expression of PGRN and its trophic effects in the developing CNS and that PGRN directly or indirectly influences neural stem and progenitor cells. Against this background, deeper understanding of the molecular and functional properties of PGRN would provide fresh impetus for the development of mechanism-based therapeutic approaches for multiple disorders. Medications targeting the recovery of lysosomal function appear to hold particular promise in patients with neurodegenerative diseases resulting from PGRN insufficiency. In examining multiple aspects of this fascinating field, the book will be of high value for researchers and graduate students.

    Contents:
    Molecular and functional properties of progranulin
    Progranulin as a potential biomarker of central nervous system disease
    Progranulin and frontotemporal lobar degeneration
    PGRN and neurodegenerative dieseases other than FTLD
    Progranulin regulations of lysosomal homeostatis and its involvement in neurodegenerative diseases
    Progranulin in sexual differentiation of the developing brain
    Progranulin and inflammation/neuroinflammation
    Neural stem/progenitor cells and progranulin
    Generationa nd phenotyping of progranulin-deficient mice
    Pleiotropic protective effects of progranulin in the treatment of ischemic stroke
    New therapeutic appraoches against ocular diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Mukesh Verma, Debmalya Barh.
    Contents:
    Introduction / C. Hizel, J. Tremblay, G. Bartlett and P. Hamet
    Clinical next-generation sequencing / D. Dhawan
    Phenotyping in precision medicine / R.Z. Paracha, A. Obaid and A. Ali
    Cancer genetic screening and ethical considerations for precision medicine / R.G. Dumitrescu
    Precision medicine in primary health care / G. Bartlett, M. Dawes, Q. Nguyen and M.S. Phillips
    Population approach to precision medicine / M. Verma
    Regulation of genomic testing in the era of precision medicine / A. Ali, A. Hassan, S. Rehman, S.T. Ashraf, K. Naz and A. Naz
    Image-based modeling and precision medicine / N.I. Soormo and S.M. Bakhtiar
    Sharing outside the sandbox? / V. Rahimzadeh
    Lessons learned from cohort studies, and hospital-based studies and their implications in precision medicine / A. Munshi, V. Sharma and S. Sharma
    Clinical trials in precision medicine / R. Simon
    Time to educate physicians and hospital staff in electronic medical records for precision medicine / S. Sharma, A. Munshi and V. Sharma
    Computational approaches in precision medicine / J. Espinal-Enríquez, R.A. Mejía-Pedroza and E. Hernández-Lemus
    Handling big data in precision medicine / E. Hernández-Lemus, J. Espinal-Enríquez and R. García-Herrera
    Trends in precision medicine / Jaspreet Kaur, B. Rahat, S. Thakur and Jyotdeep Kaur
    Personalized medicine / V. Lemay, P. Hamet, C. Hizel, É. Lemarié and Y. Tremblay.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Francisco M. Cánovas, Ulrich Lüttge, Christoph Leuschner, María-Carmen Risueño, editors.
    Summary: With one volume each year, this series keeps scientists and advanced students informed of the latest developments and results in all areas of the plant sciences. The present volume includes reviews on plant physiology, biochemistry, genetics and genomics, forests, and ecosystems.

    Contents:
    1. Nitrogen and Sulfur Metabolism in Microalgae and Plants: 50 Years of Research
    2. Progress Toward Deep Sequencing-Based Discovery of Stress-Related MicroRNA in Plants and Available Bioinformatics Tools
    3. Recent Advances in MS-Based Plant Proteomics: Proteomics Data Validation Through Integration with Other Classic and -Omics Approaches
    4. Membrane Trafficking and Plant Signaling
    5. Molecular Aspects of Iron Nutrition in Plants
    6. Urea in Plants: Metabolic Aspects and Ecological Implications
    7. Biosynthesis and Regulation of Secondary Cell Wall
    8. Stress-Induced Microspore Embryogenesis in Crop Plants: Cell Totipotency Acquisition and Embryo Development
    9. Potential of Microalgae Biomass for the Sustainable Production of Bio-commodities
    10. Crassulacean Acid Metabolism and Its Role in Plant Acclimatization to Abiotic Stresses and Defence Against Pathogens
    11. The Role of the Shikimate and the Phenylpropanoid Pathways in Root-Knot Nematode Infection
    12. Functional Diversity of Photosynthesis, Plant-Species Diversity, and Habitat Diversity
    13. When the Tree Let Us See the Forest: Systems Biology and Natural Variation Studies in Forest Species
    14. The Ecological Importance of Winter in Temperate, Boreal, and Arctic Ecosystems in Times of Climate.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Francisco M. Cánovas, Ulrich Lüttge, María-Carmen Risueño, Hans Pretzsch, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: With one volume each year, this series keeps scientists and advanced students informed of the latest developments and results in all areas of the plant sciences. This latest volume includes reviews on plant physiology, biochemistry, genetics and genomics, forests, and ecosystems.

    Contents:
    1.Tools Shape Paradigms of Plant-Environment Interactions
    2.Gene Expression in Coffee
    3. Cross-Talk Between Sporophyte and Gametophyte During Anther and Ovule Development In Angiosperms
    4. The Photosynthetic System in Tropical Plants Under High Irradiance and Temperature Stress
    5. Plant Peroxisomes and Their Metabolism of ROS, RNS, and RSS
    6. Ammonium Assimilation and Metabolism in Rice
    7. How can we Interpret the Large Number and Diversity of Abscisic Acid Transporters?
    8. Orient in the World with a Single Eye: The Green Algal Eyespot and Phototaxis
    9. Bidirectional Lateral Transport Barriers in Serving Plant Organs and Integral Plant Functioning: Localized Lignification, Suberinization, and Cutinization
    10. The Haustorium of Phytopathogenic Fungi: A Short Overview of a Specialized Cell of Obligate Biotrophic Plant Parasites
    11. Transmission of Phloem-Limited Viruses in the Host Plants by Their Aphid Vectors
    12. Biotechnology for Biofuel Production
    13. Modelling Urban Tree Growth and Ecosystem Services: Review and Perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Francisco M. Cánovas, Ulrich Luttge, Rainer Matyssek, Hans Pretzsch, editors.
    Summary: With one volume each year, this series keeps scientists and advanced students informed of the latest developments and results in all areas of the plant sciences. This latest volume includes reviews on plant physiology, biochemistry, genetics and genomics, forests, and ecosystems.

    Contents:
    Vegetation, climate and soil: 50 years of global ecology
    Engineering plants for the future: farming with value-added harvest
    Sequencing plant genomes
    NAC transcription factors in woody plants
    ON the elaborate network of thioredoxins in higher plants
    From aspartate to ethylene: central role of N, C, and S shuttles by aminotransferases during biosynthesis of a major plant growth hormone.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital/Print
    Shuren Zhang, editor.
    Contents:
    Antibody therapies in cancer / Shengdian Wang and Mingming Jia
    Biological response modifier in cancer immunotherapy / Ronghua Liu, Feifei Luo, Xiaoming Liu, Luman Wang, Jiao Yang, Yuting Deng, Enyu Huang, Jiawen Qian, Zhou Lu, Xuechao Jiang, Dan Zhang, and Yiwei Chu
    Therapeutic cancer vaccines / Zhenlong Ye, Zhong Li, Huajun Jin, and Qijun Qian
    Adoptive Cellular Therapy (ACT) for cancer treatment / Fan Yang, Hao Jin, Jian Wang, Qian Sun, Cihui Yan, Feng Wei, and Xiubao Ren
    Oncolytic immunotherapy for treatment of cancer / A. Tsun, X.N. Miao, C.M. Wang, and D.C. Yu.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N236 .P96
    5
  • Digital/Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    57
  • Digital/Print
    Jaroslava Halper, editor.
    Summary: This volume is a reference handbook focusing on diseases like Marfan syndrome, Ehlers-Danlos syndrome, Loeys-Dietz syndrome and other heritable soft connective tissue diseases. The book presents detailed information for both basic scientists and for clinicians seeing patients. It is also a stepping stone for new investigations and studies that goes beyond the facts about the composition and biochemistry of the connective tissue and extracellular matrix, as the authors connect individual components to specific aspects of various soft tissue disorders and to the actual or potential treatment of them. Progress in Heritable Soft Connective Tissue Diseases features very prominent physicians and scientists as contributors who bring their most recent discoveries to the benefit of readers. Their expertise will help clinicians with proper diagnosis of sometimes elusive and uncommon heritable diseases of soft connective tissues. This book also offers an update on the pathophysiology of these diseases, including an emphasis on unifying aspects such as connections between embryonic development of the different types of connective tissues and systems, and the role of TGF-beta in development and physiology of soft tissues. This new set of data explains, at least in part, why many of these disorders are interconnected, though the primary pathophysiological events, such as gene mutations, may be different for each disorder.

    Contents:
    Structure, physiology and biochemistry of collagens
    Basic components of connective tissues and extracellular matrix
    Proteoglycans and diseases of soft tissues
    Advances in the use of growth factors for treatment of disorders of soft tissues
    Clinical, diagnostic, and therapeutic aspects of the Marfan syndrome
    Loeys-Dietz syndrome
    Connective Tissue Disorders and Cardiovascular Complications: The indomitable role of Transforming Growth Factor-beta signaling
    The Ehlers-Danlos Syndrome
    Ehlers-Danlos syndrome associated with glycosaminoglycan abnormalities
    Cutis laxa
    Collagen type VI myopathies
    Mouse Models in Tendon and Ligament Research
    Connective tissue disorders in domestic animals.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jaroslava Halper, editor.
    Summary: This volume represents a substantially revised and updated 2nd edition of a reference handbook on major structural components of soft connective tissues and a whole slew of heritable diseases of soft connective tissues. The number of clearly identifiable and distinct disorders has grown somewhat since the 1st edition in 2014, e.g., Ehlers-Danlos syndrome has now 13 entities. A brand new syndrome, Meester Loeys syndrome carrying the name of Bart Loeys was added as a companion to Loeys-Dietz syndrome. Numerous variations of cutis laxa and joint mobility disorders have been discovered taking advantage of recent advancements in genetic analysis. We have acquired better understanding of pathogenesis and biochemical changes in some other, more established entities, such as Marfan and collagen VI myopathies where better management and possible treatment are on the horizon. Even in the case of connective tissue diseases in domestic animals some progress has been made. All these updates were contributed by a group of distinguished and preeminent physicians and scientists, all of them not just working in the field but making new discoveries described by them. Readers will notice that seemingly there is an overlap among many of these disorders. And indeed, many of them, if not most are interconnected because of the prominent roles of TGFβ, of fibrillin microfibrils and collagen fibril assembly (and other molecules) playing in connective tissues physiology, and by extension in pathogenesis of many disorders described in the book. What I found particularly helpful that author(s) of each chapter bring their own perspective even when described closely related mechanism of the disease. These observations should help with diagnosis and management of such cases. The first chapters are more general, concentrating more on the physiology, structure and biochemistry of normal soft tissues. That should help in better understanding of the pathophysiology. Last but not least, the chapters are very readable, more like detective stories than dry description of genetic/biochemical defects. I do hope that basic scientists and clinicians with similar and diverse interests alike will appreciate this volume and will be inspired by it to develop their research in the field.

    Contents:
    Basic structure, physiology and biochemistry of connective tissues and extracellular matrix collagens
    Tendon Extracellular Matrix Assembly, Maintenance and Dysregulation Throughout Life
    Basic Components of Connective Tissues and Extracellular Matrix: Fibronectin, Fibrinogen, Laminin, Elastin, Fibrillins, Fibulins, Matrilins, Tenascins and Thrombospondins
    Proteoglycans and Diseases of Soft Tissues
    Growth Factor Roles in Soft Tissue Physiology and Pathophysiology
    Connective Tissue Disorders and Cardiovascular Complications: The Indomitable Role of Transforming Growth Factor-β Signaling
    The Pathophysiology and Pathogenesis of Marfan Syndrome
    Ehlers-Danlos syndromes, joint hypermobility and hypermobility spectrum disorders
    Ehlers–Danlos Syndrome Associated with Glycosaminoglycan Abnormalities
    Loeys-Dietz Syndrome
    Meester-Loeys syndrome
    Clinical and Molecular Delineation of Cutis Laxa Syndromes: Paradigms for Elastic Fiber Homeostasis
    Collagen VI Muscle Disorders: Mutation Types, Pathogenic Mechanisms and Approaches to Therapy
    Connective Tissue Disorders in Domestic Animals.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    editors, Claude Griscelli, Jaak Vossen.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC606 .M49 1984
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Springer v. 84-, 2020-
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Progress in inflammation research to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: "This book is a compendium of articles providing insights into a range of contemporary ideas concerning the core yet unsettled clinical issues. Important aspects of pulmonary disorders are tackled such as occupational respiratory health hazards, asthma, or the role of vitamin D in obstructive airway diseases. Genotyping offers a clear promise in the diagnostics of chronic pulmonary lesions of autoimmune background. Cardiac and respiratory-driven pulsation of cerebrospinal fluid content offers novel arguments in the pathophysiologic savvy of a range of brain dysfunctional conditions, including respiratory-related hypoxic pathologies. Some other articles tackle the heady topics of rehabilitation medicine, offering an insight into research-underpinned diagnostics and practical management solutions in a range of musculoskeletal disorders and injuries that affect the human body's movement, particularly those controlled by the autonomic nervous system. The book is addressed to clinicians, researchers, physiotherapists, and medical professionals engaged in patient care"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Baker's asthma : is the ratio of rye flour-specific IgE to total IgE more suitable to predict the outcome of challenge test than specific IgE alone / V. van Kampen, I. Sander, R. Merget, T. Brüning, M. Raulf
    SERPINA1 gene variants in granulomatosis with polyangiitis / Malgorzata Hadzik-Blaszczyk, Aneta Zdral, Tadeusz M. Zielonka, Ada Rozy, Renata Krupa, Andrzej Falkowski, Kazimierz A. Wardyn, Joanna Chorostowska-Wynimko, and Katarzyna Zycinska
    Hyperglycemia in children hospitalized with acute asthma / Khalid F. Mobaireek, Abdulrahman Alshehri, Abdulaziz Alsadoun, Abdullah Alasmari, Abdullah Alashhab, Meshal Alrumaih, Mohammad Alothman, and Abdullah A. Alangari
    Serum vitamin D concentration and markers of bone metabolism in perimenopausal and postmenopausal women with asthma and COPD / K. Białek-Gosk, R. Rubinsztajn, S. Białek, M. Paplińska-Goryca, R. Krenke, R. Chazan
    Oscillations of subarachnoid space width as a potential marker of cerebrospinal fluid pulsatility / Marcin Gruszecki, Magdalena K. Nuckowska, Arkadiusz Szarmach, Marek Radkowski, Dominika Szalewska, Monika Waskow, Edyta Szurowska, Andrzej F. Frydrychowski, Urszula Demkow, and Pawel J. Winklewski
    Very high frequency oscillations of heart rate variability in healthy humans and in patients with cardiovascular autonomic neuropathy / Mario Estévez-Báez, Calixto Machado, Julio Montes-Brown, Javier Jas-García, Gerry Leisman, Adam Schiavi, Andrés Machado-García, Claudia Carricarte-Naranjo, and Eli Carmeli
    Improvement in hand trajectory of reaching movements by error-augmentation / Sharon Israely, Gerry Leisman, Eli Carmeli
    Estimation of posturographic trajectory using k-nearest neighbors classifier in patients with rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis / Beata Sokołowska, Teresa Sadura-Sieklucka, Leszek Czerwosz, Marta Hallay-Suszek, Bogdan Lesyng, Krystyna Księżopolska-Orłowska
    Effects of manual somatic stimulation on the autonomic nervous system and posture / Giovanni Barassi, Rosa Grazia Bellomo, Camillo Di Giulio, Giuseppe Giannuzzo, Giuseppe Irace, Claudia Barbato, and Raoul Saggini
    Robot-assisted body-weight-supported treadmill training in gait impairment in multiple sclerosis patients : a pilot study / Marek Łyp, Iwona Stanisławska, Bożena Witek, Ewelina Olszewska-Żaczek, Małgorzata Czarny-Działak, Ryszard Kaczor.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Mindy F. Levin, editor.
    Summary: "This volume is the most recent installment of the Progress in Motor Control series. It contains contributions based on presentations by invited speakers at the Progress in Motor Control IX meeting held in at McGill University, Montreal, in July, 2013. Progress in Motor Control is the official scientific meeting of the International Society of Motor Control (ISMC). The Progress in Motor Control IXI meeting, and consequently this volume, provide a broad perspective on the latest research on motor control in humans and other species"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Jozsef Laczko, Mark L. Latash, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Theoretical motor control. Modularity for motor control and motor learning / Andrea d'Vella
    Synergies in grasping / Jeroen B.J. Smeets and Eli Brenner
    Encoding temporal features of skilled movements: what, whether and how? / Katja Kornysheva
    Predictability and robustness in the manipulation of dynamically complex objects / Dagmar Sternad and Christopher J. Hasson
    part 2. Fifty years of the equilibrium-point hypothesis. Fifty years of physics of living systems / Mark L. Latash
    The relationship between postural and movement stability / Anatol G. Feldman
    Principles of motor recovery after neurological injury based on a motor control theory / Mindy F. Levin
    part 3. Neurophysiological mechanisms of motor control. What do TMS-evoked motor potentials tell us about motor learning? / Richard G. Carson, Kathy L. Ruddy and Emmet McNickle
    Motor control of human spinal cord disconnected from the brain and under external movement / Winfried Mayr, Matthias Krenn and Milan R. Dimitrijevic
    Anticipation in object manipulation: behavioral and neural correlates / Thomas Schneider and Joachim Hermsd̲rfer
    part 4. Learning of skilled behavior. Brain plasticity and the concept of metaplasticity in skilled musicians / Eckart Altenmüller and Shinichi Furuya
    The coordination dynamics of observational learning: relative motion direction and relative phase as informational content linking action-perception to action-production / John J. Buchanan
    Rethinking the study of volition for clinical use / Elizabeth B. Torres
    part 5. Impaired motor control and rehabilitation. Motor lateralization provides a foundation for predicting and treating non-paretic arm motor deficits in stroke / Robert L. Sainburg, Candice Maenza, Carolee Winstein and David Good
    Control of cycling limb movements: aspects for rehabilitation / Jozsef Laczko, Mariann Mravcsik and Peter Katona
    Impaired voluntary movement control and its rehabilitation in cerebral palsy / Andrew M. Gordon
    Can motor recovery in stroke be improved by non-invasive brain stimulation? / John C. Rothwell
    part 6. Human-machine interface. Organizing and reorganizing coordination patterns / Rajiv Ranganathan and Robert A. Scheidt
    A computational index to describe slacking during robot therapy / Davide Piovesan
    Toward a proprioceptive neural interface that mimics natural cortical activity / Tucker Tomlinson and Lee E. Miller.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editor, Jong-Whan Rhim.
    Contents:
    Progress in nanomaterials for food packaging / Jong-Whan Rhim
    From micro to nano : a background to nanotechnology in food packaging / Jong-Whan Rhim
    Progress in barrier packaging materials : bio-based nanocomposites as barrier materials for food packaging applications / Giuliana Gorrasi
    Nano and nanocomposite antimicrobial materials for food packaging applications / Paulraj Kanmani & Jong-Whan Rhim
    Progress in biodegradable packaging materials / Alberto Jiménez, Elmira Arab-Tehrany & Laura Sánchez-González
    Progress in active food packaging materials / Dong Sun Lee
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Karger v. 1-, 1966-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD593 .P964
    15
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC266.5 .P964
    2
  • Print
    Digital Access Karger v. 28-, 1997-
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Progress in respiratory research. to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    edited by Arthur Rook.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    T36 .R77 1960
    2
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access WHO 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    TD353 .P773 2017
    1
  • Digital/Print
    WHO/UNICEF Joint Monitoring Programme for Water Supply and Sanitation.
    Summary: "Even though progress towards the MDG target represents important gains in access for billions of people around the world, it has been uneven. Sharp geographic, sociocultural and economic inequalities in access persist and sometimes have increased. This report presents examples of unequal progress among marginalized and vulnerable groups. Section 1 presents the status of and trends in access to improved drinking water sources and sanitation. Section 2 provides a snapshot of inequalities in access to improved drinking water sources and sanitation. Section 3 presents efforts to strengthen monitoring of access to safe drinking water and sanitation services under a post-2015 development agenda, as well as the challenges associated with these efforts."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access WHO 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    TD353 .P773 2014
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: Despite significant progress in water and sanitation, much still remains to be done. This report shows how the world has changed since 1990. It provides an assessment of progress towards the MDG target, and insight into the remaining challenges. Section A provides an overview of progress against the parameters specified in the MDG target for water and sanitation, in both urban and rural areas. It presents data for the world as a whole, and compares progress across regions. The report goes on to examine trends over the MDG period by region and by level of service. It pays particular attention to the numbers of people who have gained the highest level of service in drinking water supply -- piped water on premises -- and those with no service at all, who use surface water for drinking and practise open defecation.
    Digital Access WHO 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA591 .P76 2015
    1
  • Digital
    volume editors, Holger Christiansen, Nina Merete Christiansen.
    Contents:
    Clinical features of progressive neuroblastoma / Simon, T.
    DNA copy number changes and beyond / Fieuw, A.; Schulte, J.; De Preter, K.; Speleman, F.
    Genomic alterations and abnormal cell cycle in high-risk neuroblastoma / Capasso, M.; Sidarovich, V.; Quattrone, A.; Tonini, G.P.
    MYCN and microRNAs / Althoff, K.; Schulte, J.H.
    MYCN and its posttranslational regulation in neuroblastoma / Otto, T.
    Neuroblastoma and the P53 pathway / Chen, L.; Tweddle, D.A.
    Targeting cell death pathways in neuroblastoma / Fulda, S.
    Neuroblastoma and angiogenesis / Russler, J.
    The role of the anaplastic lymphoma kinase receptor in neuroblastoma / Yeung, C.M.; George, R.E.
    Molecular-targeted therapy in refractory or relapsed neuroblastoma / Corbacioglu, S.
    Immune regulation in neuroblastoma / Fest, S.; Starke, S.
    Approaches to passive and active vaccination against neuroblastoma / Lode, H.N.
    Role of cell therapy in neuroblastoma / Bremm, M.; Brehm, C.; Huenecke, S.; Rettinger, E.; Bader, P.
    Minimal residual disease in neuroblastoma / Weber, A.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] James L. Harris, Linda A. Roussel, Catherine Dearman, Patricia L. Thomas.
    Summary: "This book answers the call to action for interprofessional teams to develop quality improvement initiatives. It encompasses project planning, management, budget strategies, cost calculations, big data, and skills necessary to remain viable, successful, and sustainable in a challenging healthcare landscape. The fourth edition has moderately-heavily revised content, with 2 new chapters and multiple combined chapters that advance knowledge, collaboration, and avenues for an interconnected link between amongst professionals"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Key Foundations of Successful Quality Project Planning, Implementation, Evaluation, and Management : An Overview / James L. Harris and Bettina Riley
    Quality Improvement Projects and Quality Improvement Research : Advancing Translational Science / Linda Roussel
    Implementation Science, Team Science, and Translational Science : The Value for Projects / Clista Clanton and Linda Roussel
    Forming and Managing a Synergistic Interprofessional Improvement Team
    Making the Case for a Project : Organizational and Needs Assessment / Carolyn Thomas Jones and Linda Roussel
    Using Findings from Organizational Analysis and Clinical Needs Assessment to Frame Improvement Projects and Implementation /Linda Roussel and Shea Polancich
    Literature Synthesis and Organizational Alignment to Project Interventions and Implementation / Catherine Dearman and Lolita Chappel-Aiken
    Building the Improvement Project Budget : Quantifying the Cost and Quality Equation / Patricia L. Thomas and James L. Harris
    Developing Metrics That Support Project Plans, Interventions, and Programs / Patricia L. Thomas
    The Institutional Review Board Process / Catherine Dearman, Dionne Roberts, and Lolita Chappel-Aiken
    Big Data and Information Systems : Understanding the Value for Improvement Projects / James L. Harris, Todd Harlan, and Lonnie K. Williams
    Developing Metrics That Support Project Plans, Interventions, and Programs / Patricia L. Thomas and Michael Bleich
    Innovation, Diffusion, and Dissemination of Improvement Outcomes / James L. Harris and Catherine Dearman.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Print
    by Claire Myers Vernier, Ph.D. .... ; foreword by Isabelle V. Kendig, Ph.D. ...
    Contents: <br/
    >1. Projective drawings.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L469 .V53
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Jean-Claude Bertrand, Philippe Normand, Bernard Ollivier, Télesphore Sime-Ngando.
    Summary: The purpose of this book is to show the essential and indispensable role of prokaryotes in the evolution of a living world. The evolutionary success of prokaryotes is explained together with their role in the evolution of the geosphere, the biosphere and its functioning, as well as their ability to colonize all biotopes, including the most extreme ones. We consider that all past and present living beings emerged from prokaryotes and have interacted with them. Forces and mechanisms presented in the various theories of evolution apply to prokaryotes. The major stages of their evolution and biodiversity are also described. Finally, it is emphasized that prokaryotes are living organisms that provide indisputable evidence of evolutionary processes. Many examples of ongoing evolution in prokaryotes, observable at the human scale, are provided.

    Contents:
    1. Prokaryotes /Eukaryotes dichotomy and Bacteria/Archaea/Eukarya domains: two inseparable concepts
    2. Phylogeny and Biodiversity of Prokaryotes
    3. Importance of Prokaryotes in the Functioning and Evolution of the Present and Past Geosphere and Biosphere
    4. Evolutionary Success of Prokaryotes
    5. The Evolution of Living Beings Started with Prokaryotes, and In Interaction with Prokaryotes
    6. Evolution Underway in Prokaryotes.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Nevan J. Krogan, Mohan Babu, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on innovative experimental and computational approaches for charting interaction networks in bacterial species. The first part of the book consists of nine chapters, focusing on biochemical and genetics and genomics approaches including yeast two hybrid, metagenomics, affinity purification in combination with mass spectrometry, chromatin-immunoprecipitation coupled with sequencing, large-scale synthetic genetic screens, and quantitative-based mass spectrometry strategies for mapping the bacterial physical, functional, substrate, and regulatory interaction networks needed for interpreting biological networks, inferring gene function, enzyme discovery, and identifying new drug targets. The second part comprises five chapters, covering the network of participants for protein folding and complex enzyme maturation. It also covers the structural approaches required to understand bacterial intramembrane proteolysis and the structure and function of bacterial proteins involved in surface polysaccharides, outer membrane, and envelope assembly. This volume concludes with a focus on computational and comparative genomics approaches, especially network-based methods for predicting physical or functional interactions, and integrative analytical approaches for generating more reliable information on bacterial gene function. This book provides foundational knowledge in the understanding of prokaryotic systems biology by illuminating how bacterial genes f unction within the framework of global cellular processes. The book will enable the microbiology community to create substantive resources for addressing many pending unanswered questions, and facilitate the development of new technologies that can be applied to other bacterial species lacking experimental data.

    Contents:
    Metagenomics as a tool for enzyme discovery : hydrolytic enzymes from marine-related metagenomes
    Investigating bacterial protein synthesis using systems biology approaches
    Biology and assembly of the bacterial envelope
    Comparative genomics and evolutionary modularity of prokaryotes
    Predicting functional interactions among genes in prokaryotes by genomic context
    Functional implications for domain organization within prokaryotic rhomboid proteases
    Mapping transcription regulatory networks with ChIP-seq and RNA-seq
    Quantitative and systems-based approaches for deciphering bacterial membrane interactome and gene function
    Toward network biology in E. coli cell
    Genetic interaction scoring procedure for bacterial species
    Mapping the protein-protein interactome networks using yeast two-hybrid screens
    Biogenesis of Escherichia coli DMSO reductase : a network of participants for protein folding and complex enzyme maturation
    Microbial proteome profiling and systems biology : applications to mycobacterium tuberculosis
    Structural aspects of bacterial outer membrane protein assembly
    Substrate interaction networks of the Escherichia coli chaperones : trigger factor, DnaK and GroEL
    Genetic, biochemical, and structural analyses of bacterial surface polysaccharides.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nicholas A. Tritos, Anne Klibanski, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro; Series Editor Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: History of Prolactin Disorders; Medical Therapy; Introduction; Did Mary Tudor of England Have a Prolactinoma? [1]; The Discovery of Human Prolactin; Cell of Origin; Prolactin Action; Neuroendocrine Regulation; Actions of High Levels of Prolactin; Medical Treatment of Hyperprolactinaemia; Pituitary Tumour Shrinkage; Surgery; Radiotherapy; Summary; References;
    Chapter 2: Pituitary Anatomy and Development; Historical Anatomy; Macroscopic Anatomy; Landmarks of the Sellar Region; Pituitary Gland Vascularization of the Pituitary GlandEmbryologic Anatomy; Radiologic Anatomy; Microscopic and Functional Anatomy; Anterior Pituitary (Adenohypophysis); Pars Distalis; Pars Intermedia; Marginal Zone; Pars Tuberalis; Posterior Pituitary; Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 3: Prolactin Assays and Regulation of Secretion: Animal and Human Data; Prolactin Assays; What Is Measured in Prolactin Assays?; The History of Prolactin Assays; Measurement of Prolactin Levels; Analytical Pitfalls; The "Hook Effect"; Macroprolactin; Interference from Heterophilic Antibodies; Interference with Biotin
    Chapter 4: Physiological Actions and ReceptorsPhysiological Actions in Humans and Other Mammals; Mammary Glands; Reproductive Tissues; Receptors and Signaling; Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 5: Prolactin Excess and Deficiency: Epidemiology, Causes (Excluding Prolactin-Secreting Pituitary Tumors); Introduction; Normal Levels of Prolactin; Prolactin Excess: Epidemiology and Causes; Physiologic Causes; Pregnancy; Nipple Stimulation and Lactation; Stress; Other; Pathologic Causes; Decreased Dopaminergic Inhibition of Prolactin Secretion; Decreased Clearance of Prolactin Prolactin Increase Due to Neural MechanismGenetic Causes: Germline Loss-of-Function Mutation; Other Causes; Pharmacological Causes; Antipsychotics; Antidepressants; Gastric Motility Drugs; Antihypertensive Drugs; Estrogens; Opioids; Other Drugs; Idiopathic Hyperprolactinemia; Prolactin Deficiency: Epidemiology and Causes; Pathological Causes; Sheehan's Syndrome; Genetic Causes; Pharmacological; Dopamine Agonists; Aripiprazole; Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 6: Prolactin-Secreting Pituitary Adenomas: Epidemiology and Natural History; Epidemiology of Sporadic Prolactinomas; Population Studies
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, Women's Health Care Physicians.
    Contents:
    Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Preface
    PROLOG Objectives
    Start of Critique Content
    Appendix
    Index
    Assessment Book
    Preface
    Instruction
    Start of Content
  • Digital
    American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, Women's Health Care Physicians.
    Contents:
    Front Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Preface
    Prolog Objectives
    1. Borderline ovarian tumor
    2. Complete mole
    3. Endometrial cancer
    4. Instrumental Activities of Daily Living score in an older patient
    5. Adenocarcinoma in situ
    6. High-risk gestational trophoblastic disease
    7. Human papillomavirus primary screening
    8. Vulvar cancer
    9. Postoperative hemorrhage
    10. Cervical cancer recurrence
    11. Wound infection
    12. Radiation proctitis
    13. Paget disease
    14. Chemotherapy for recurrent ovarian cancer 15. Pain management after surgery
    16. Total parenteral nutrition
    17. Imaging modality in a patient with a diagnosis of vulvar cancer
    18. Laparoscopic complications
    19. Palpable breast mass
    20. Intraoperative cell salvage
    21. Preoperative workup of a pelvic mass in an older patient
    22. Genetic counseling for familial history of breast cancer
    23. Posttreatment surveillance in cervical cancer
    24. Intraoperative hypercapnia in a patient with obesity
    25. Clostridium difficile infection
    26. Sex cord-stromal tumors of the ovary
    27. Serous endometrial cancer 28. Types of clinical studies
    29. Acupuncture for patients with cancer
    30. Malignant pleural effusion
    31. Cervical cancer
    32. Indications for BRCA testing
    33. Endometriosis-associated ovarian cancer
    34. Spinal metastasis
    35. Postmolar gestational trophoblastic disease
    36. Atypical glandular cells on cervical cytology
    37. Low-grade serous ovarian cancer
    38. Hospice
    39. Postoperative feeding
    40. Pulmonary embolism
    41. Ovarian cancer recurrence
    42. Minimally invasive surgery for endometrial cancer
    43. Receiver operator characteristic curve 44. Low-resource cervical cancer screening
    45. In vitro fertilization and ovarian cancer
    46. Complex adnexal mass in a postmenopausal woman
    47. Ureteral injury
    48. Ovarian cancer
    49. Endometrial cancer recurrence
    50. Early-stage cervical cancer
    51. Nosocomial pneumonia
    52. Paraneoplastic syndrome
    53. Placental site trophoblastic tumor
    54. Microinvasive cervical cancer
    55. First-line chemotherapy after suboptimal debulking
    56. Febrile neutropenia
    57. Immunohistochemistry staining for pathologic evaluation
    58. Pelvic exenteration 59. Intraperitoneal chemotherapy
    60. Positive and negative predictive values
    61. Human papillomavirus vaccination
    62. Brain metastases
    63. Malignant ovarian germ cell tumor
    64. Complications of epidural after surgery
    65. Perioperative cardiac risk assessment
    66. Perioperative venous thromboprophylaxis
    67. Small-bowel obstruction
    68. Lymph node involvement in cervical cancer
    69. Low-grade serous ovarian cancer and tumor showing a BRAF mutation
    70. Bladder injury
    71. Imaging modality in a patient with a diagnosis of cervical cancer
  • Digital
    the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists.
    Summary: "PROLOG: Patient Management in Office is the premier learning tool for staying up to date in the specialty area. Consisting of an assessment book and critique book, PROLOG is an effective, self-directed study resource and reference for both obstetricians-gynecologists and those in training. The content is peer-reviewed, current, and clinically relevant. Upon completion, users of this unit should be able to: Identify epidemiologic factors that contribute to women's health issues encountered in office practice Determine appropriate screening approaches to identify health conditions in women Correlate presenting signs and symptoms with appropriate diagnostic tools Describe appropriate traditional and alternative management strategies for select conditions encountered in office practice Counsel patients about the impact of health and illness throughout their lives and about risks and benefits of treatment Apply professional medical ethics to the practice of obstetrics and gynecology Incorporate appropriate legal, risk management, and office management guidelines and techniques in clinical practice"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists.
    Contents:
    Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Preface
    PROLOG Objectives
    Start of Critique Content
    Appendix
    Index
    Assessment
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Preface
    PROLOG Objectives
    Start of Assessment
    Instructions
  • Digital
    Mary Grossman.
    Summary: This is the first Nursing book on cancer care designed around a conceptual model of whole person care. Key concepts are stress, healing, resilience and health. As a clinical model, nursing goals, desired outcomes, key concepts and proposed psychosocial interventions with patients and family caregivers, advance the practice of clinical nursing toward a more comprehensive understanding of the whole person with cancer and their loved ones. As a model for teaching nursing students about chronic illness, it provides a scientific basis for students to learn how to assess and care for the whole person and his loved one. As a model for clinical research in the field of cancer care, it serves as a predicate for the development, evaluation and interpretation of clinical interventions. The model is a dynamic framework that both informs and is informed by research findings. It is hoped that future research findings will reveal the optimal combination of interventions to provide comprehensive care across clinical contexts. With a patient-centred humanistic focus anchored by the quality of the nurse patient and family caregiver relationships, it is hoped that the nurse's technical, procedural and medical expertise may complement rather than define the nurse's approach to the whole patient and family. The book is structured to facilitate the reader's easy access to needed information. Each chapter examines a key concept of the model, and is organized around an introduction, learning objectives, definitions, and relevant research findings that serve as the scientific predicate for suggested interventions discussed in Part 4, Nursing approaches. Clinical and personal anecdotes, tables and figures illustrate the concepts under discussion. Nurse practitioners, clinic nurse specialists, nursing professors, graduate students, and nurse researchers may find this book a useful reference for conceptualizing whole person care, and for determining relevant interventions that promote healing, resilience and health. But it is also relevant for family doctors and fourth year students learning to care for the whole person with a chronic illness.

    Contents:
    PART
    1 Stress, healing and resilience in the whole person with cancer. 1
    Introduction 2
    Stress, healing and resilience conceptual model of nursing 3
    Psychological stress PART 2;- Resilience 4
    Introduction 5
    Biological resilience 6
    Psychological resilience PART 3
    Poor resilience 7
    Introduction 8
    Poor resilience 9
    Cancer PART 4
    Fostering healing 10
    Introduction 11- Nurse-patient (family caregiver) relationship 12
    Promoting cognitive-behavioral adaptive coping 13
    Enhancing meaning, purpose and acceptance 14
    Strengthening supportive relationships 15.-Psychological healing and leveraging the placebo effect 16
    Enhancing the relaxation response and mindful meditation 17
    Use of touch, healing touch and massage PART 5
    Clinical approaches 18
    Introduction 19
    Diagnosis 20
    Treatment 21
    Transition to Survivorship 22
    End of life 23
    Closing remarks: Is it feasible 24
    Final comments.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Adele Martel, Jennifer Derenne, Patricia K. Leebens, editors.
    Summary: This concise and practical book provides an overview of how to safely and effectively transition adolescents with mental health conditions into a college environment. Therapeutic strategies to assess and promote readiness for transition to college are discussed in case-based chapters, which include case history, analysis of transition, clinical pearls, literature review, and helpful resources for clinicians, patients, and families. Filling a significant gap in the literature, this resource delivers essential information for psychiatrists, psychologists, and other mental health professionals who work with children, adolescents, and their families before, during, and after the transition to college.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Erin Martz.
    Summary: "Promoting Self-Management of Chronic Health Conditions covers a range of topics related to self-management-theories and practice, interventions that have been scientifically tested, and information that individuals with specific conditions should know (or be taught by healthcare professionals)"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note:
    1. Introduction: Why Study Self-Management?
    Erin Martz
    2. Defining Self-Management on the Individual Level
    Erin Martz
    Part I: Individual-Level Theories and Interventions to Promote Self-Management
    3. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy to Promote Self-Management
    Sharon Eldar, Nora M. Esser, and Stefan G. Hofmann
    4. Spreading HOPE: The Development of a Hope-Based Self-Management Intervention
    Andy Turner and Faith Martin
    5. Illness Intrusiveness and Self-Management of Medical Conditions
    Gerald M. Devins and Amy Deckert
    6. Motivational Interviewing to Promote Self-Management
    Rebecca Phillips, Anne Hogden, and David Greenfield
    Part II: Chronic Impairment-Specific Research
    7. Self-Management of Addictive Behaviors
    Vanja Radoncic, Betty Marcou, and Denise Hien
    8. Self-Management of Arthritis
    Jessica Brooks, Kanako Iwanaga, and Fong Chan
    9. Self-Management of Burn Injury
    James Fauerbach and Carisa Perry-Parrish
    10. Self-Management of Cancer
    Amy Deckert and Gerald M. Devins
    11. Self-Management of Cardiac-Related Health Issues
    Noa Vilchinsky
    12. Self-Management of Diabetes
    Jonathan F. Deiches, Emre Umucu, and Fong Chan
    13. Self-Management of Epilepsy
    Janice Buelow and Henry Smithson
    14. Self-Management of Hearing Impairments
    Lucy Handscomb, Gabrielle H. Saunders, and Derek J. Hoare
    15. Self-Management of HIV
    Faith Martin
    16. Self-Management of Multiple Sclerosis
    Malachy Bishop and Michael Frain
    17. Self-management of pain
    Thomas Hadjistavropoulos
    18. Self-Management of Tinnitus
    Erin Martz
    19. Self-management of vision impairments
    Vicki Drury, Ai Tee Aw, and Priscilla Lim Shiow Huey
    Part III: Innovative Technology and Techniques to Promote Self-Management
    20. Telemedicine
    Kristian Kidholm
    21. Internet Interventions
    Gerhard Andersson
    Part IV: Promoting Self-Management across the Globe
    22. Systemic Models of Self-Management
    Erin Martz.
    Digital Access Oxford [2018]
  • Digital
    edited by Rory A. Cooper, Paul F. Pasquina, Douglas A. Etter.
    Contents:
    Framework for reintegration and resilience for service members and veterans / Rory A. Cooper, Paul F. Pasquina, and Douglas A. Etter
    Physical medicine and rehabilitation / Adam J. Susmarski
    The promise of the future : assistive technology, transportation, and emerging technologies / Rosemarie Cooper, Cheng-Shiu (Joshua) Chung, John Coltellaro, Christina LaCroix, Amy Lane, Alissa Ling, Amanda Reinsfelder, Benjamin Salatin, and Goeran Fiedler
    Psychosocial factors in reintegration / Michelle L. Sporner and Anne E. Barry
    Spirituality and reintegration : building strength, fortitude, optimism, and connection / Douglas A. Etter, Amy Mountain, and Audrey Schoomaker
    The role of friends and family in reintegration : building insights and strategies that promote reintegration and resiliency / Christina Berchock Shook
    Sexuality and intimacy / Stanley H. Ducharme, Rebecca P. Cameron, and Linda R. Mona
    The role of sports and recreation in promoting successful reintegration / Rory A. Cooper, Michael Mushett, and Thomas Williams
    Virtual reality and telemedicine to support reintegration and health maintenance
    Deepan C. kamaraj and Rory A. Cooper
    Community/peer support and services / Al Condeluci, Rory A. Cooper, Melva Gooden-Ledbetter, and D. Joshua Marino
    Financial management / Daniel J. Fisher, Joseph A. Wineman, and Randy Levander
    Education and employment / Mary R. Goldberg, Anne E. Barry, Maria Milleville, Michelle L. Sporner, Ron Drach, Allen Lewis, and Brian Bilski
    Accessible homes, communities, and transportation / Carol Peredo Lopez, Lavinia Fici Pasquina, Amanda McAlpine, Patrick Rakszawaski, Steve Bucha, and Paul F. Pasquina
    Overview of military and veteran resources / Rory A. Cooper
    The role of service organizations and volunteers / S. Elaine Eitler and William M. Lake
    Culture and reintegration of veterans / Allen Lewis, Seth Messinger, Twylla Kirchen, Jeanne Wenos, and Shelly Brown
    Summary / Rory A. Cooper.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
  • Digital
    Sergio V. Delgado, Ernest V. Pedapati, Jeffrey R. Strawn.
    Summary: Clinicians often have difficulty helping the parents of youth with emotional and behavioral difficulties and fail to recognize that often it is the youths cognitive and learning weaknesses that drive their maladaptive behaviors. This book aims to help clinicians further understand the roots of youths maladaptive behaviors. It also addresses the impact of youths varied cognitive abilities on their behaviors and problems with self-esteem, particularly in youth that do not meet the diagnostic criteria for a formal learning disability. While many clinicians view learning deficits as impairments in specific academic skills, these deficits go beyond varied learning abilities and often experience difficulties in emotional, social, and behavioral functioning. These impairments vary from child to child and it is crucial to develop practical interventions for improved self-esteem and emotional success. Varied learning abilities reflect a neurodevelopmental problem in youth that can lead to difficulties with their emotional, social, and academic functioning and limit their intellectual potential. There are often treatment impasses when a youths behavioral problems do not improve with traditional forms of psychotherapy and medication. The practical individualized interventions recommended in this book will: 1) decrease conflict in day-to-day interactions between youth and parents, 2) improve self-esteem and 3) help to achieve realistic social, emotional and academic goals. The text will help clinicians determine which maladaptive behaviors are a result of cognitive deficits and not symptoms of a disease-based mental disorder. Written by experts in the field, Promoting the Emotional and Behavioral Success of Youths reviews appropriate interventions in the context of the public health strategies that address the prevention of secondary socio-economic aspects as a result of cognitive weaknesses, such as realistic educational needs, career and employment choices. Clinicians will be able to use this book to develop best fit multimodal interventions to help parents of youth develop adaptive behaviors.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Biological, Emotional and Social Development
    The Four Pillars of a Contemporary Diagnostic Interview
    Temperament: The Building Block of Personality
    Intelligence: Why dont you behave?
    Cognitive Flexibility (Theory of Mind): Being in your shoes
    Personality: My Friends Are Just Like Me
    Putting It All Together: Adapting to Youths Strengths and Weaknesses
    Parenting principles to help youths: Debunking common parenting myths.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Pauline Heslop, Crispin Hebron, editors.
    Summary: This textbook presents a practical guide for new and experienced health or social care staff, helping them promote the health and well-being of people with learning disabilities. Given the considerable demand for mandatory training on supporting people with learning disabilities, especially in England, the book provides a valuable resource for all training courses on working with people with learning disabilities. The chapters are co-written by practitioners and people with learning disabilities and their families, rooting the book in the lived experiences of those concerned. Topics covered include core elements of being happy and healthy, communication, changes in our behaviour when we are unwell, making decisions about our health, accessing health services, how we would want to be treated if we were unwell, the use of psychotropic medication, what a 'good death would be, and how to keep ourselves healthy. In addition, the chapters include narrative examples concerning people with learning disabilities and their families, so as to highlight key points and share best-practice examples. The use of personal reflection is used to consider how we can ensure that people with learning disabilities receive care and support that matches what we would expect for ourselves. Core questions at the end of each chapter ask the reader to reflect on how the chapter content relates to their own work and how they will apply what they have learned. A consistent theme throughout the book is equality of opportunity for people with learning disabilities to achieve good health. There is now substantial evidence that people with learning disabilities have poorer health than the general population, are more likely to have multiple health needs, and can experience difficulties in having their illnesses diagnosed and treated promptly. This book aims to help those supporting people with learning disabilities to achieve more equal outcomes.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Being happy and healthy
    Chapter 2. Communication
    Chapter 3. Behaviour
    Chapter 4. Decision-making
    Chapter 5. Access to health services
    Chapter 6. Providing holistic care
    Chapter 7. Psychotropic medication
    Chapter 8. Death and dying
    Chapter 9. Staying healthy
    Chapter 10. Sources of advice about our health or that of others.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Julie Ann St. John, Susan L. Mayfield-Johnson, Wandy D. Hernández-Gordon, editors.
    Summary: Community health workers (CHWs) are an increasingly important member of the healthcare and public health professions who help build primary care capacity. Yet, in spite of the exponential growth of CHW interventions, CHW training programs, and CHW certification and credentialing by state agencies, a gap persists in the literature regarding current CHW roles and skills, scope of practice, CHW job settings, and national standards. This collection of contributions addresses this gap by providing information, in a single volume, about CHWs, the roles CHWs play as change agents in their communities, integration of CHWs into healthcare teams, and support and recognition of the CHW profession. The book supports the CHW definition as defined by the American Public Health Association (APHA), Community Health Worker Section (2013), which states, "A community health worker is a frontline public health worker who is a trusted member of and/or has an unusually close understanding of the community served." The scope of the text follows the framework of the nationally recognized roles of CHWs that came out of a national consensus-building project called "The Community Health Worker (CHW) Core Consensus (C3) Project". Topics explored among the chapters include: Cultural Mediation Among Individuals, Communities, and Health and Social Service Systems Care Coordination, Case Management, and System Navigation Advocating for Individuals and Communities Building Individual and Community Capacity Implementing Individual and Community Assessments Participating in Evaluation and Research Uniting the Workforce: Building Capacity for a National Association of Community Health Workers Promoting the Health of the Community is a must-have resource for CHWs, those interested in CHW scope of practice and/or certification/credentialing, anyone interested in becoming a CHW, policy-makers, CHW payer systems, CHW supervisors, CHW employers, CHW instructors/trainers, CHW advocates/supporters, and communities served by CHWs.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Why community health workers (CHWs)?
    THe community health worker cor consensus (C3) project story: confirming core roles and skills of community health workers
    Roles, skills, and qualities of community health workers
    Describing results from the "Promoting the health of the community" national needs assessment
    Cultural mediation among individuals, communities, and health and social service systems
    Providing culturally appropriate health education and information
    Care coordination, case management, and system navigation
    Providing coaching and social support
    Advocating for individuals and communities
    Building individual and community capacity
    Providing direct services
    Implementing individual and community assessments
    Conducting outreach
    Participating in evaluation and research
    Uniting the workforce: building capacity for a national association of community health workers
    Where do we go from here? a closing reflection.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Iram Siddique, editor.
    Summary: Plant biotechnology has now become a key tool in improving crop productivity and enhancing commercial value of plant products. The book complies various methods of in vitro propagation and genetic manipulation of important aromatic and medicinal plants. It puts together latest techniques and innovations in the field of plant biotechnology such as effective protocols of genetic manipulation, isolation of secondary metabolites, use of somaclonal variation, stress management in plants. It also explores the role of various physiological and biochemical factors affecting the genetic stability of in-vitro cultured plants. These themes are of interest to both graduate and postgraduate students. Further this book will be useful for to researchers, academicians and industrialist to review latest progress and future prospects of these technologies.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    About the Editor
    1: Somaclonal Variation and Methods Used for Its Detection
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Uses of Somaclonal Variation in Agriculture
    1.2.1 Generation of New Agronomic Variants with Favorable Traits
    1.2.2 Generation of Disease Resistance Varieties
    1.2.3 Generation of Biochemical Variants with Abiotic Resistance
    1.3 Disadvantages of Somaclonal Variation
    1.4 Causes and Genetic Basis of Somaclonal Variation
    1.5 Methods Used for Assessing Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.1 Morphological Assessment of Somaclonal Variation 1.5.10 Detection of DNA Methylation Events Using the Methylation-Sensitive Amplification Polymorphism (MSAP)
    1.5.11 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using Transposon-Based Marker Systems
    1.5.12 Next-Generation Sequencing (NGS) for the Determination of Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.13 MicroRNA Involvement in Tissue Culture
    1.6 Conclusion
    References
    2: Synthetic Seed Technology in Some Ornamental and Medicinal Plants: An Overview
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Preparation of Synthetic Seeds
    2.3 Synthetic Seeds of Medicinal Plants
    2.4 Synthetic Seeds and Ornamental Plants 1.5.2 Biochemicals Used to Assess Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.3 Protein Markers Used to Assess Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.4 Cytogenetic Analysis for the Determination of Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.5 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using RFLP
    1.5.6 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using Random Amplified Polymorphic DNA (RAPD)
    1.5.7 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using Simple Sequence Repeat (SSR)
    1.5.8 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using the Inter-Simple Sequence Repeat (ISSR) Markers
    1.5.9 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using the AFLP Technique 2.5 Factors Affecting Development of Synthetic Seeds
    2.6 Factors Affecting Synthetic Seeds ́Performance
    2.7 Advantages of Synthetic Seeds
    2.8 Disadvantages of Synthetic Seeds
    2.9 Conclusion
    References
    3: Cytokinin Influence on Micropropagation System of Dianthus caryophyllus L.
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Materials and Methods
    3.2.1 Nodal Explants and Surface Sterilization
    3.2.2 Culture Media and Culture Room Conditions
    3.2.3 Effect of PGRs on Shoot Induction and Multiplication
    3.2.4 In Vitro Rooting in Microshoots
    3.2.5 Hardening and Acclimatization of Plantlets 3.2.6 Statistical Analysis
    3.3 Result and Discussion
    3.3.1 Induction and Multiplication Phase
    3.3.2 Rooting of Microshoots
    3.3.3 Acclimatization
    References
    4: Phenolic Compound Contents of Hypericum Species from Turkey
    4.1 Introduction
    4.1.1 The Florstc Characters of Hypercum L.
    4.1.2 Hypericum Speces in Turkey
    4.1.3 Traditional Uses of Hypericum Species in Turkey
    4.2 Phenolic Compounds of Hypericum Species
    4.2.1 Naphthodianthrones
    4.2.2 Phloroglucinols
    4.2.3 Flavonoids
    4.2.4 Biflavones
    4.2.5 Phenylpropanes
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    edited by Osman Nuri Dilek, Selman Uranues, Rifat Latifi.
    Summary: This volume introduces the reader to the most important standards and principles of prophylactic surgery. After discussing the comparative effectiveness of screening in the treatment of hereditary cancer syndromes and evaluating genetic predisposition, the book moves on to address ethical, legal, social and cost-effectiveness dimensions of prophylactic surgery. With the aim of preventing hereditary predisposition syndromes, it also includes a chapter on the application of preventive surgery to all specific fields of surgery. Given its scope, the book will appeal to a broad readership, from experienced surgeons to students.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreward
    1. Prophylactic surgery; Why, when and how?
    2. Minimal invasive procedures and prophylactic surgery
    3. PROPHYLACTIC APPROACHES IN ABDOMINAL WALL SURGERY: PREVENTING AND REPAIRING THE BURST ABDOMEN
    4. Cost-effectiveness of prophylactic surgeries in preventing hereditary predisposition syndromes
    5. Prophylactic thyroidectomy
    6. Prophylactic parathyroidectomy
    7. Genetic Predispositions and Prophylactic Mastectomy in Breast Cancer Patients
    8. Prophylactic mastectomy for benign pathologies
    9. Prophylactic surgery for liver pathologies
    10. Prophylactic surgical procedures for pancreas pathologies
    11. Prophlactic surgery for gallbladder and biliary tract pathologies
    12. Prophylactic splenectomy
    13. Prophylactic surgical procedures for esophageal pathologies
    14. Stomach and duodenum resections for genetic predispositions
    15. Prophylactic surgery for benign diseases of stomach and duodenum
    16. PROPHYLACTIC SURGERY FOR SMALL INTESTINES
    17. Prophylactic appendectomy
    18. Vascular problems related to colectomy: habitual and variant anatomy, prevention and tactical aspects
    19. Prophylactic resection for genetic predispositions of colon and rectum
    20. Prophylactic colon and rectum resections for benign pathologies
    21. Prophylactic adrenalectomy
    22. Omentectomy; Whether to Perform Should be Questioned
    23. Open access in laparoscopic surgery to prevent entry complications
    24. Prophylactic Surgery in Trauma
    25. Surgical prophlaxis of obesity
    26. Histopathological findings in prophylactic surgical specimens
    27. Prophylactic surgery for genetic predisposition of female organs
    28. Prophylactic surgery for benign gynecologic pathologies
    29. Prophylactic surgical procedures in Plastic Surgery
    30. Prophylactic cardiac and vascular surgery procedures
    31. Prophylactic chest surgery procedures
    32. Prophylactic surgery for Urologic pathologies
    33. Prophylactic procedures in Pediatric Surgery
    34. Prophylactic surgery for Neurosurgical pathologies
    35. Prophylactic procedures for orthopedic pathologies
    36. ETHICAL AND LEGAL DIMENSIONS OF PROPHYLACTIC SURGERY
    37. Psychiatric aspects of prophylactic surgery in adults
    38. Child and adolescent aspects in prophylactic surgery
    39. Endoscopic approaches for prophlactic purposes
    40. The place of prophylactic surgery in guidelines
    41. Interventional procedures reducing the needs for conventional surgery
    42. Radiological Screening for Hereditary Cancer Predisposition Syndromes.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Wanda Bonnel, Katharine V. Smith.
    Summary: "This book provides students with tools to implement in their own scholarly practice. Three chapters, new to this edition, focus on implementing quality-improvement projects, writing the final project report, and ongoing clinical scholarship opportunities. Chapters, consistent with previous editions, feature boxes offering advice from doctor of nursing practice (DNP) students who have completed project proposals. Each chapter has been thoroughly updated and edited to enhance clarity. In response to reviewers' requests, new proposal and project tips have been added to many chapters. Key features to engage readers continue from the earlier editions; these include reflective questions, tips for making proposals complete and concise, exemplars, and reader activities. This text helps develop reflective clinical scholars who can write about clinical challenges, propose solutions, and use the methods of quality improvement and research to develop scholarly proposals and projects"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction : why a scholarly proposal for the clinical project proposal?
    Using the writing plan as a developmental tool for the advanced clinical project
    Writing a good clinical problem statement and placing the clinical problem in context
    Clinical projects and quality improvement : thinking big picture / Brigid Weyhofen
    Into the literature : gaining best evidence and relevant literature
    Synthesizing best evidence and literature review / Linda Kroeger
    Framing the advanced clinical project with relevant clinical frameworks
    Addressing outcomes evaluation in the advanced clinical project proposal
    Guiding the advanced clinical project : the purpose of a purpose statement
    Mapping it out, from problem to advanced clinical project plan
    Writing the methods section : organizing the advanced clinical project proposal
    Gaining credible clinical project data : being systematic and objective
    Writing the data-analysis plans for advanced clinical projects
    Keeping clinical projects ethical and dependable
    Finalizing the proposal as a professional document : reviewing, editing, and revising
    Moving your project proposal to completed project
    Moving your project to written final report
    Moving your completed project to dissemination and further scholarship.
    Digital Access R2Library [2022], ©2022
  • Digital
    Defne Kaya, Baran Yosmaoglu, Mahmut Nedim Doral, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Application of array comparative genomic hybridization in newborns with multiple congenital anomalies / Krzysztof Szczałuba [and 10 others]
    Cytogenomic evaluation of children with congenital anomalies: critical implications for diagnostic testing and genetic counseling / Krzysztof Szczałuba [and 7 others]
    Impairment of immune function in children with familial hemophagocytic lymphohistiocytosis / K. Popko [and 9 others]
    Thyroid function in obese children and adolescents and its association with anthropometric and metabolic parameters / Małgorzata Rumińska [and 3 others]
    Relationship between 25(OH)D and IgF-I in children and adolescents with growth hormone deficiency / E. Witkowska-Se̜dek [and 3 others]
    Viral infections in children in the 2014/2015 epidemic season in Poland / E. Hallmann-Szelińska [and 4 others]
    Gastroesophageal reflux disease in children with interstitial lung disease / M.A. Dziekiewicz [and 10 others]
    Treatment outcomes in children with Henoch-Schönlein nephritis / Małgorzata Mizerska-Wasiak [and 4 others]
    Respiratory function and language abilities of profoundly deaf adolescents with and without cochlear implants / A. Żebrowska [and 5 others]
    High-frequency jet ventilation against small-volume conventional mechanical ventilation in the rabbit models of neonatal acute lung injury / D. Mokra [and 6 others].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Andrew MacLeod.
    Summary: This book is about how we think about the future. It is about how we think about our own personal futures and how such prospection is connected to our well-being and mental health. The ability to think about the future is essential for functioning, and is also central to individual well-being and mental health. This book reviews the growing evidence for the link between prospection and well-being. A variety of aspects of prospection are discussed, including prediction and anticipation for future events, judging how we will feel when events do happen to us, and how we feel in the here-and-now when contemplating what will happen in the future. Each of these aspects of prospection is connected to experiences of well-being and mental health in different ways. Questions of bias and accuracy in prediction are also addressed in the context of discussing optimism and pessimism. Qualities of goals for the future that are strongly implicated in aspects of well-being and mental health are reviewed, along with the role that difficulties in planning how to reach goals play in states of low well-being. The book also attempts to reconcile the seeming contradiction between being mindful in the present and thinking about the future. Ways of trying to change problematic prospection are also reviewed in light of their ability to improve well-being and reduce psychological distress.

    Contents:
    Thinking about the future
    Expectancies
    Optimism and pessimism
    Predicting feelings
    Anticipatory feelings
    Memory
    Goals
    Plans
    Temporal orientation and mindfulness
    Intervention
    Prospection, well-being, and mental health.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Jacqueline MacDonald, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an in-depth explanation of the advantages and current limitations of recombinant plant-made vaccines for use in veterinary medicine, including for livestock, pets, and wild animals. Written by top scientists in the field, it discusses the background to and latest scientific advances in plant-made vaccines for the most commonly targeted veterinary infections. With the recent high-profile research into recombinant plant-made therapeutics for Ebola and Zika viruses, it is likely that the products will be commercialized and widely used in the future. Plant-made therapeutics have a variety of advantages over those made in traditional systems; however, their most fruitful application may be in veterinary medicine, due to less stringent regulations and a greater need for low-cost products.

    Contents:
    1) History and promise of plant-made vaccines for animals, Ed Rybicki
    2) Plant transformation strategies, Verónica Araceli Márquez-Escobar, Omar González-Ortega, Sergio Rosales-Mendoza
    Vaccines for wild, feral and companion animals, 3) Rabies and related lyssaviruses, Charles E. Rupprecht, Rachel Chikwamba
    4) A comprehensive review of Toxoplasma gondii biology and host-cell interaction: challenges for a plant-based vaccine, Valeria Sander, Sergio O. Angel, Marina Clemente
    5) Vaccines against West Nile virus, Haiyan Sun, Qiang Chen
    Vaccines for poultry, 6) Plant-made veterinary vaccines for Newcastle disease virus, David R. Thomas, Amanda M. Walmsley
    7) Infectious bursal disease virus, Evangelina Gómez, Soledad Lucero, Matías Richetta, Silvina Chimeno Zoth, Analía Berinstein
    8) Plant-produced avian influenza antigens, Yanaysi Ceballo, Alina Lopez, Kenia Tiel, Abel Hernandez
    9) Plant-made vaccines against avian reovirus, Ching-Chun Chang, Hung-Jen Liu
    Vaccines for swine, 10) Toward the optimization of a plant-based oral vaccine against cysticercosis, Edda Sciutto, Marisela Hernández, Jacquelynne Cervantes-Torres, Elizabeth Monreal
    Escalante, Omayra Bolaños-Martínez, Juan Francisco Rodríguez, Gladis Fragoso, Sergio, Rosales-Mendoza
    11) Classical swine fever virus, Han Sang Yoo
    12) Porcine epidemic diarrhea virus, Zayn Khamis, Rima Menassa
    13) Porcine reproductive and respiratory syndrome (PRRS), Elizabeth Loza-Rubio, Edith Rojas-Anaya
    Vaccines for ruminants, 14) The benefit of a plant-based cattle vaccine for reducing Enterohemorrhagic Escherichia coli shedding and improving food safety, Adam Chin-Fatt, Ed Topp, Rima Menassa
    15) Foot-and-mouth disease, Vanesa Ruiz, Andrés Wigdorovitz
    Vaccines with limited research, 16) Diseases with limited research of plant-based vaccines, Ann Meyers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Upjohn.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    QP801.P68 P76 1980
    2
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Wiley no. 1-, 1981-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    v. 1-7, 1981-96.
    Supplement 1 BOUND WITH: Prostate, v. 2.
    2
  • Digital
    Rajal B. Shah, Ming Zhou.
    Summary: This book covers practical issues related to the interpretation of prostatic biopsies in day-to-day practice. It examines common clinical scenarios and features high-quality color images and uses algorithms and tables to simulate the decision-making process.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; About the Authors;
    1: Anatomy and Normal Histology of the Prostate Pertinent to Biopsy Interpretation; 1.1 Anatomy of Normal Prostate; 1.2 Anatomy and Disease Preference of Three Zones of the Prostate; 1.3 Histology of Normal Prostate; 1.4 Immunophenotype of Prostate Glandular Cells; 1.5 Histology of Three Zones of Normal Prostate Glands, Other Intraprostatic Structures, and Their Mimics; 1.6 Histologic Variations of Normal Prostate Tissue (Also See Chap. 7); References
    2: Needle Biopsy Sampling Techniques and Role of Multiparametric-Magnetic Resonance Imaging Modality in Prostate Cancer Diagnosis and Management2.1 Comparisons of Three Biopsy Techniques Utilized for Prostate Cancer Detection [2-13]; 2.2 Comparisons of Transrectal and Transperineal Biopsy Approach [13-14]; 2.3 Multiparametric-Magnetic Resonance Imaging (mp-MRI) for Prostate Cancer Diagnosis and Management [15-19]; References;
    3: Diagnosis of Limited Cancer in Prostate Biopsy; 3.1 General Approach to Prostate Needle Biopsy Evaluation 3.2 Histological Features Considered Specific for and Diagnostic of Cancer3.3 Major and Minor Diagnostic Features of Prostate Cancer in Biopsy; 3.4 Benign Conditions That Cause Architectural and Cytological Atypia; 3.5 Quantitative Threshold for Diagnosing Limited Cancer in Biopsy; 3.6 Histological Features for and against Cancer Diagnosis in Biopsy; 3.7 A Practical Approach to Diagnosis of Limited Cancer in Needle Biopsy; References;
    4: Immunohistochemistry in Prostate Biopsy Evaluation; 4.1 Commonly Used Immunohistochemical Markers for Diagnosis of Prostate Cancer in Biopsy 5.2 Prostate Cancer Nomograms and National Comprehensive Cancer Network (NCCN) Recurrence Categories and Prediction Models [5-9]5.3 The 2005/2014 Modifications of Gleason Grading System [10, 11]; 5.4 Contemporary Gleason Pattern 1 [2, 3, 9-16]; 5.5 Contemporary Gleason Pattern 2; 5.6 Contemporary Gleason Pattern 3; 5.7 Common Pitfalls of Pattern 3 (Reasons for Over-interpretation of Pattern 3 as Pattern 4) (See Figs. 5.8, 5.9, 5.10, 5.11, 5.12, 5.13, 5.14, 5.15, 5.16, 5.17, 5.18, 5.19, and 5.20); 5.8 Contemporary Gleason Pattern 4
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gilles Plourde.
    Summary: Prostate Cancer: A Case Report discusses the prevention, treatment modalities, and side effects of the medications used to treat prostate cancer. The book presents the most appropriate information, allowing patient empowerment to make informed decisions on their choice of treatments. Through the analysis of a real case report, the book also discusses the main complication associated with prostate cancer-bone metastasis-and provides information on treatment modalities for lung and liver metastasis. Diet, physical activities and the management of stress are also discussed, as is palliative care and the use of palliative sedation when other treatment modalities have failed. Cannabis, the pros and cons of euthanasia, and concerns raised by society are also covered. Esteemed author Dr. Plourde has more than 12 years' experience working on drug safety, especially for biologic products involved in the treatment of various cancers. For more than 4 years he has suffered from prostate cancer with metastasis to the lungs and bones. During this time he has learned a lot on prostate cancer from the medical literature and from discussions with various specialists. The case report presented in this book represents his own medical history. Prostate Cancer: A Case Report provides the most relevant and up to date information on the various aspects involved in the screening, diagnosis and treatment of prostate cancer.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    René Sotelo, Juan Arriaga, Raed A. Azhar, Inderbir S. Gill, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. An Appointment with the Urologist
    3. Prostate-Specific Antigen (PSA)
    4. Prostate Biopsy
    5. Prostatitis- Pelvic Pain
    6. Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia
    7. Prostate Cancer
    8. How to Get a Second Opinion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Scott M. Dehm, Donald J. Tindall, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews biochemistry, molecular biology and genetic changes in prostate cells that are the driving forces in the initiation and progression of cancer. Surveys cell interactions, including stem cells, reactive Stromal cells and membrane lipid rafts.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sam S. Chang, Michael S. Cookson, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a single, comprehensive reference source that incorporates all the latest information regarding prostate cancer. It serves as an easy reference source for researchers, clinicians, individuals in training, allied health professionals and medical students regarding prostate cancer by focusing on the controversial points of debate. New data regarding PSA screening, prostate cancer biomarkers, diagnostic evaluation techniques, surveillance protocols, and treatment interventions for localized and more advanced disease are discussed, and gaps in current knowledge and areas for future research are highlighted. Ongoing important clinical trials are also discussed. This text is organized around defined clinical scenarios which are encountered routinely by physicians who care for patients with prostate cancer. The case based format permits presentation of information of concise practical significance. The chapters run the gamut from screening controversies, utility of biomarkers, surveillance strategies, and innovative treatment. The text incorporates key educational concepts in the framework of patient situations with evidence-based discussions of screening, diagnosis, evaluation, and therapeutic management. It also features a comment section from leaders in the field that will be more "opinion-based" allowing the reader to get access to experienced physicians' thought processes and practice patterns. Prostate Cancer: Clinical Case Scenarios will quickly become the ready reference source for professionals and students in various fields with an interest in the management of a complex and multifaceted disease such as prostate cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Jack H. Mydlo and Ciril J. Godec.
    Contents:
    pt. I. Etiology, pathology, and tumor biology
    pt. II. Genetic susceptibility and hereditary predisposition, screening, and counseling
    pt. III. Epidemiology
    pt. IV. Prevention of prostate cancer
    pt. V. Conservative management
    pt. VI. Surgery
    pt. VII. Radiation therapy
    pt. VIII. Clinical dilemmas
    pt. IX. Advanced prostate cancer
    pt. X. Cryoblation, HIFU and focal therapy
    pt. XI. Governmental policies
    pt. XII. New horizons for prostate cancer.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Nelson N. Stone, E. David Crawford, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text provides a complete description of the newest technologies to diagnose and manage the most common prostate cancer diagnosed today: low risk disease. The book reviews new data about genetic markers, transperineal mapping biopsy and mpMRI, how to apply each of these technologies in patients with elevated PSA, when a prior prostate biopsy performed by the standard TRUS method is negative, and, in cases where low risk disease is already diagnosed, how to differentiate those men who might harbor more aggressive disease from those who do not. Over 75% of newly diagnosed prostate cancer meets the criteria for low risk disease which has created a dilemma for both patients and clinicians because of the inaccuracy of the standard TRUS biopsy method. Active surveillance programs have been initiated and are reviewed. How the new technologies impact surveillance programs are addressed. Clinical stage designation is updated and a new intra-prostatic staging system is discussed. Prostate biopsy techniques utilizing transrectal ultrasound, transperineal mapping, elastography and mpMRI are compared. Finally, utilization of these new technologies in the application of focal therapy is reviewed. The Prostate Cancer Dilemma will serve as a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons and researchers with an interest in early prostate cancer. Chapters are written by experts in their fields and include the most up-to-date scientific and clinical information as well as links to procedural video content.

    Contents:
    Part One: Diagnosis
    History of PSA, from Detection to Over Diagnosis
    Pathology of Prostate Cancer: What has Changed in the Last 30 years?- Clinical Risk Prediction Tools for Prostate Cancer: TMN to CAPRA-Should Risk be Re-defined?- TRUS Biopsy: Is There Still a Role?- Transperineal Biopsy Technique
    3D Biopsy: A New Method to Diagnose Prostate Cancer
    Elastography: Can it Improve Prostate Biopsy Results?- Multi parametric MRI of the Prostate as a Tool for Prostate Cancer Detection
    Genomic Markers
    Part Two: Treatment
    Current Status of Clinical Trials in Active Surveillance
    Focused targeted Therapy in Prostate Cancer
    Technologies and Methods in Primary Ablation with Focal Therapy
    Multi parametric MRI (mpMRI)-Guided Focal Therapy
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Jack Cuzick, Mangesh A. Thorat, editors.
    Summary: Prostate cancer is by far the most common cancer in men and the second leading cause of death due to cancer. It comprises a mixed group of tumours displaying varying clinical behaviour: while some have a very aggressive course, others are rather indolent. Prevention of prostate cancer and discrimination between aggressive and indolent forms are important clinical goals, and the acquisition of significant new evidence on means of achieving these aims makes this book particularly timely. A wide range of topics are covered by leading authorities in the field. The biology and natural history of prostate cancer are reviewed, and the role of lifestyle and dietary factors, assessed. Detailed attention is paid to risk prediction biomarkers and to the role of novel high-throughput nucleic acid-based technologies in improving risk prediction and thereby allowing tailored approaches to cancer prevention. Potential means of chemoprevention of prostate cancer are also reviewed in depth, covering the very positive new data on the impact of aspirin as well as evidence regarding 5-reductase inhibitors, DFMO, and lycopene. Guidance is provided on the differentiation of aggressive from indolent disease, and the policy and research implications of recent findings are examined. This book will be of interest to both clinicians and researchers.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sanchia S. Goonewardene, Raj Persad.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Temel Tirkes, editor.
    Summary: This book is a basic, practical guide to performing and interpreting state-of-the-art prostate MRI, utilizing the latest guidelines in the field. Prostate MRI has become one of the fastest growing examinations in the radiology practice, and this demand has continuously increased within the past decade. Since it is relatively new, MRI of the prostate is predominantly being performed at academic institutions, however there is a growing demand within the lower-tier health care institutions to offer this examination to their patients. This is an ideal guide for radiologists who want to enhance or initiate prostate MRI service for their referring clinicians and as a manual for technologists and those who are in training. Prostate cancer is the second leading cause of cancer death in men, exceeded only by lung cancer. The best predictor of disease outcome lies with correct diagnosis, which requires precise imaging and diagnostic procedures aided by prostate MRI. Urologists, medical oncologists and radiation oncologists all agree that multi-parametric prostate MRI is essential for evaluation of prostate cancer. However, the technical aspects of prostate MR imaging are not as straightforward as for the other imaging modalities and constantly evolving. Its small size presents a real challenge to the radiologist, who needs to do the T2 and diffusion weighted images and perform a dynamic contrast enhanced sequence correctly. These images may also need to be analyzed on an independent workstation. Due to the absence of a current reference manual, when a radiologist wants to establish a prostate imaging service, he/she needs to attend dedicated prostate MR workshops or dive into the literature search alone, only to get more confused about what to do and how to do it. With this book, expert authors were asked to give clear guidance to those who want to enhance or initiate their prostate imaging service. With this much-needed, concise, practical guidance, radiologists can perform and interpret multi-parametric prostate MRI in a standardized fashion, in concordance with PI-RADS v2.1 that can be applicable to all available hardware platforms (GE, Philips, Siemens, Toshiba). Additionally, they can perform post-processing for possible targeted biopsy and interpret post-therapy and PET studies. The book discusses imaging protocols (planning and prescription) and sequence parameters with representative images for each MRI sequence. This handbook-style practical manual can be used in the radiology reading room by those interpreting the MR exam as a reference as well as at the MRI scanner by the technologists as a guide. Coverage of basic prostate anatomy, pathology, Urologists point of view, MRI guided radiation treatment planning and molecular imaging is also included. Throughout the book, authors will discuss basics, pitfalls, and provide tips in image acquisition and interpretation, alongside several case examples.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Christopher R. Porter, Erika M. Wolff, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    History of Prostate Ultrasound
    Applied Anatomy of the Male Pelvis
    Basic Physics of Diagnostic Ultrasound
    Advanced Prostate Imaging: Correlating Prostate Anatomy with MRI and MRI/Ultrasound Fusion
    Prostate Ultrasound Artifacts and How to Fix Them
    Male Infertility And Prostate Ultrasound
    Application of Prostate Ultrasound for Benign Prostate Hyperplasia and Male Urinary Stress Incontinence
    Application of Prostate Ultrasound for Prostate Biopsy
    Prostate Ultrasound Complications and Patient Safety
    Imaging the Prostate with Quantitative Ultrasound: Implications for Guiding Biopsies, Targeting Focal Treatment, and Monitoring Therapy
    Prostate Elastography.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Maoqiang Wang, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a state-of-the-art review of the technical and clinical aspects of the arterial embolization procedures currently employed in treatment of prostate diseases. A particular focus is on artery embolization for benign prostate hyperplasia, whose efficacy is compared with transurethral resection and open prostatectomy. Additional chapters on application of PAE in the treatment of hematuria of prostatic origin and prostate malignant tumor are presented. Detailed information is provided on the full range of relevant topics, including prostatic artery anatomy, preoperative preparation, patient selection, embolization agents selection, and post embolization management. Complications and side-effects are also fully discussed. It will be a valuable reference for interventional radiologists and urological surgeons who perform the embolization procedures, as well as diagnostic radiologists and urological physicians interested in interventional procedures.

    Contents:
    6.2.1 Embolization: Management of Anastomoses or Collateral Vessels. Intro
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    Associate Editors
    Contributors
    1: Benign Prostate Hyperplasia
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Epidemiology
    1.3 Pathogenesis
    1.3.1 Age and Gonadal Hormone
    1.3.2 Inflammation
    1.4 Manifestation
    1.5 Diagnosis
    References
    2: The Treatment of Benign Prostate Hyperplasia
    2.1 Pharmacotherapy
    2.2 Surgical Therapy
    2.2.1 Open Surgery
    2.2.2 Transurethral Resection of Prostate
    2.3 Minimally Invasive Treatment
    2.3.1 Transurethral Microwave Treatment
    2.3.2 Transurethral Needle Ablation of the Prostate 2.3.3 Laser Treatments of the Prostate
    2.3.4 Intraprostatic Stents
    2.3.5 Intraprostatic Injections
    2.3.6 Prostatic Urethral Lift
    2.3.7 Aquablation
    2.3.8 Rezum
    2.3.9 Prostatic Artery Embolization
    References
    3: The History of Prostatic Arterial Embolization
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 History of Prostatic Arterial Embolization
    3.3 Prostatic Arteries: Imaging Anatomy
    3.4 PAE: Early Outcomes
    3.4.1 Technical Success
    3.4.2 Clinical Success
    3.4.2.1 PAE: Outcomes of the Single-Arm Non-randomized Control Study 3.4.2.2 PAE: Outcomes of the Randomized Controlled Trials
    3.4.2.3 PAE: Predictors for the Clinical Outcomes
    3.5 PAE: Complications
    3.5.1 Major Complications
    3.5.2 Minor Complications
    3.5.3 PAE: Radiation Injuries
    3.6 Conclusions
    References
    4: Prostatic Artery Anatomy
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Pelvic Arterial Anatomy
    4.3 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Imaging Evaluation
    4.4 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type I Pattern
    4.5 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type II Pattern
    4.6 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type III Pattern 4.7 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type IV Pattern
    4.8 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type V Pattern
    4.9 Prostate Arterial Anastomosis
    4.10 Summary
    References
    5: Pre-prostatic Arterial Embolization Preparation
    5.1 Pre-procedure Testing
    5.1.1 Laboratory Tests
    5.1.2 International Prostate Symptom Score
    5.1.3 Quality of Life
    5.1.4 International Index of Erectile Function short form:
    5.1.5 Postvoid Residual Urine Volume
    5.1.6 Peak/Maximum Urinary Flow Rate
    5.2 Pre-procedure Imaging
    5.2.1 Ultrasound 5.2.2 Pelvic CT and CT Angiography (CTA) Prior to PAE
    5.2.3 Pelvic MRA Prior to PAE
    5.2.4 Intra-Procedural Cone-Beam CT
    5.3 Indications and Contraindications
    5.3.1 Indications
    5.3.2 Contraindications
    5.4 Pre-procedure Preparation
    5.5 Selection of Embolic Agents
    5.5.1 Type of Embolic Agents
    5.5.2 Optimal Sizes of Embolic Agents
    5.5.3 Coil Embolization
    References
    6: The Procedure of Prostatic Arterial Embolization
    6.1 Angiography
    6.1.1 Arterial Access
    6.1.2 DSA Procedures
    6.1.3 Cone-Beam CT Prior to Embolization
    6.2 Embolization
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ari J. Isaacson, Sandeep Bagla, Mathew C. Raynor, Hyeon Yu, editors.
    Summary: This book comprehensively covers prostatic artery embolization (PAE) in interventional radiology (IR). PAE is a recently developed procedure primarily for the treatment of benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH). BPH is an extremely common problem, affecting the urination of about half of men over the age of 50. PAE is a minimally invasive IR procedure that improves urinary symptoms secondary to BPH and, unlike most available BPH treatments, carries very little risk of compromising sexual function. It should be noted, however, that PAE is known to be a very difficult procedure due to the variations in pelvic arterial anatomy and small diameter of the target vessels. Because of the inherent challenge, interventional radiologists need resources to learn how to perform PAE, so they can add this exciting new procedure to their practice. This comprehensive, yet compact, text covers everything from patient evaluation, through procedure, and finally how to deal with failure or repeat procedures. Expert authors who are responsible for more than a third of PAEs performed in the United States include best practices and detailed steps for performing PAE, with potential pitfalls and related issues considered. Readers should come away from reading the text feeling confident in being able to provide PAE to their patients, whether it be for BPH, hemorrhage, or hematuria. This is an ideal guide for interventional radiologists hoping to learn or improve their skills for PAE.

    Contents:
    Anticholinergics/M3 AntagonistsMechanism of Action; Summary of Evidence; Side Effects and Pharmacodynamics; Beta-3-Agonists; Mechanism of Action; Efficacy; Side Effects; Medication Combinations; Alpha-Blockers and 5[alpha]-Reductase Inhibitors; Combination of [alpha]-Adrenergic Blockers and Antimuscarinic Medication; References;
    Chapter 4: Indications for Surgical Management of Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Introduction; Transurethral Resection of the Prostate (TURP) (Fig. 4.1); Efficacy; Complications; Photoselective Vaporization of the Prostate (PVP) (Fig. 4.2); Efficacy; Complications Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: The Prostate and Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Normal Prostate Anatomy; Embryonic Development (Fig. 1.1); Relationships within the Pelvis (Fig. 1.2); Internal Prostate Anatomy (Fig. 1.3a, b); Normal Prostate Physiology; Function of the Prostate; Hormonal Control; Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Epidemiology; Pathophysiology; Clinical Features; References;
    Chapter 2: Diagnosis of Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Introduction; Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms (Table 2.1); History; Physical Exam; Objective Questionnaires Regarding BPH Symptoms In-Office Objective BPH StudiesPressure-Flow Studies; Cystourethroscopy; Imaging Studies; References;
    Chapter 3: Medical Management of Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Indications for Medical Management; Alpha-Adrenergic Receptor Blockers; Mechanism of Action; Nonspecific Versus Specific Alpha-Blockers; Summary of Evidence; Terazosin; Doxazosin; Alfuzosin; Tamsulosin; Silodosin; Side Effects; 5-Alpha-Reductase Inhibitors; Mechanism of Action; Summary of Evidence; Finasteride; Dutasteride; Side Effects; Phosphodiesterase-5 Inhibitors; Mechanism of Action; Summary of Evidence; Side Effects The Rezūm® System (NxThera Inc., Maple Grove, MN, USA) (Fig. 4.3)Efficacy; Complications; The UroLift® System (NeoTract, Pleasanton, CA, USA) (Fig. 4.4); Operative Technique; Efficacy; Complications; Surgical Treatment for Larger Prostates; Simple Prostatectomy; Open Prostatectomy; Robotic/Laparoscopic Prostatectomy; Efficacy; Complications; Holmium Laser Enucleation of the Prostate (HoLEP); Operative Technique; Efficacy; Complications; References;
    Chapter 5: Imaging of the Prostate; Imaging Overview; Ultrasound; Computed Tomography; Magnetic Resonance Imaging; References
    Chapter 6: Preclinical and Clinical Evidence for Prostatic Artery EmbolizationBackground; Preclinical Animal Studies; Clinical Evidence; Summary; Conclusion; Future Directions; References;
    Chapter 7: Arterial Anatomy for Prostatic Artery Embolization; Introduction; Internal Iliac Artery Anatomy; Prostatic Artery Origin Classification; Conclusion; References; Bibliography;
    Chapter 8: Patient Selection for Prostatic Artery Embolization; Introduction; Symptom Evaluation; Prostatic Medication History; Prostate Anatomy; Cystoscopy; Uroflowmetry Testing; Comorbid Conditions
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tommaso Cai, Truls E. Bjerklund Johansen, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction and aim of the book
    Epidemiology and microbiological considerations: what's new?.- The diagnostic approach to patient with prostatitis-like symptoms: what do we have to do?
    Classification of prostatitis: what is the clinical usefulness?
    Imaging studies: what is their role?
    Treatment of bacterial prostatitis: the pharmacologist's point of view
    Treatment of non-bacterial prostatitis: what's new?
    The role of phythoterapy in the management of prostatitis patients
    Management of infective complications following prostate biopsy
    The contribution of prostate infection and inflammation to BPH and cancer
    The role of STD pathogens in bacterial prostatitis patients
    Andrologic sequelae in prostatitis patients
    The role of chronic prostatitis in male infertility: is there a relationship?
    Thoughtless treatment of prostatitis is malpractice, sometimes even a forensic issue
    The prostatitis patient: Questions and Answers.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Asif Muneer, Ian Pearce, David Ralph, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction to Prosthetic Devices
    History of Prosthetic Surgery in Urology
    Infection and biofilms
    Patient selection and assessment
    Patient Consent for Surgery
    Theatre preparation and equipment
    Patient preparation for surgery
    Urinary Catheters, Drains and Stomas
    Ureteric Stents
    Prostatic Stents
    Testicular Prosthesis
    Surgery for female urinary incontinence
    Sacral neuromodulation
    The artificial urinary sphincter
    Male urethral slings
    Injectable agents in urology
    Penile reconstructive surgery using grafts
    Penile prosthesis surgery
    Complications of penile prosthesis surgery
    Future developments in prosthetic surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Vibhor R. Agrawal.
    Contents:
    Prosthetic and Orthotics
    Case Study
    Ankle Foot Orthosis
    Case Study
    Knee-Ankle-Foot Orthosis
    Case Study
    Spinal Orthosis
    Amputee
    Case Study
    Above Knee (Transfemoral) Amputee
    Case Study
    Below Knee (Transtibial) Amputee.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2016
  • Digital/Print
    by Howard B. Woolston, Ph.D.
    Digital Access Google Books 1921-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    O725 .U58
    1
  • Digital
    editor in chief Ruth A. Etzel, associate editor Sophie J. Balk
    Summary: Parents concerned about the effects of environmental hazards on their children's health will appreciate this accessible Q&A guide.

    Contents:
    Front Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Editors
    Contents
    Foreword
    Preface
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. A Healthy Family Begins Before the Baby Arrives
    Chapter 2. Feeding Your Baby
    Breastfeeding
    Bottle-feeding and Formula
    Chapter 3. Safe Drinking Water: It's More Complicated Than Buying a Filter
    Water Testing, Regulations, and Notices
    Babies and Drinking Water
    Drinking Water at Home and School: How Do We Know It Is Safe?
    Well Water
    Chapter 4. Healthy Eating: From Farm to Kitchen
    Antibiotics in Food
    Cooking and Food Storage
    Pesticides in Food Food and Cancer
    Arsenic in Food
    Lead in Food and Cookware
    Herbs and Supplements
    Chapter 5. Your Home: Keeping It Safe for Your Family
    Getting Rid of Pests Safely
    Arts and Crafts Are Safe, Aren't They?
    Renovating Your Home Safely
    Air: What You Need to Know to Breathe Easy
    Allergy and Asthma Triggers
    Air Cleaners
    Tobacco Smoke
    A Sea of Chemicals?
    Personal Care Products
    Specific Hazardous Substances
    Asbestos
    Carbon Monoxide
    Lead
    Mercury
    Nickel
    Radon
    Chapter 6. Technology: Friend or Foe? Chapter 7. Let's Go Outside! Playing It Safe in the Yard or on the Beach
    Decks and Wooden Structures
    Fun in the Sun
    Heat
    Sunscreen
    Playing in the Yard
    Chapter 8. What a Beautiful Day in the Neighborhood!
    Healthy Neighborhoods
    Air Quality
    Noise Pollution
    Landfills
    Hazardous Waste Sites
    Chapter 9. Oh, the Places They Go! All Around Town With Your Child
    Healthy Child Care
    School
    Around Town
    Chapter 10. Your Teenager: A Whole New World
    Chapter 11. Navigating Your Child's Health Care
    Blood and Other Testing for Environmental Toxicants Dental Issues
    X-rays
    Specific Health Conditions
    Asthma
    Cancer
    Developmental Disabilities
    Obesity
    Chapter 12. The Big Green Picture: Saving People and the Planet
    Appendix
    Resources
    Index
    About the Editors
    Back Cover
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Richard J. Giannone, Andrew B. Dykstra.
    Contents:
    1D4 : a versatile epitope tag for the purification and characterization of expressed membrane and soluble proteins / Laurie L. Molday and Robert S. Molday
    Affinity purification of heme-tagged proteins / Wesley B. Asher and Kara L. Bren
    Purification of a recombinant protein with cellulose-binding module 3 as the affinity tag / Dongmei Wang and Jiong Hong
    Purification of E. coli proteins using a self-cleaving chitin-binding affinity tag / Michael J. Coolbaugh and David W. Wood
    Simplified protein purification using an autoprocessing, inducible enzyme tag / Aimee Shen
    SUMO as a solubility tag and in vivo cleavage of SUMO fusion proteins with UlP1 / Dennis Kuo, Minghua Nie, and Albert J Courey
    Rescuing aggregation-prone proteins in Escherichia coli with a dual His6-MBP tag / Danielle Needle and David S. Waugh
    Expression, purification, and immobilization of recombinant tamavidin 2 fusion proteins Yashimitsu Takakura, Naomi Oka, and Masako Tsunashima
    Use of tandem affinity chromatography for purification of cannabinoid receptor CB2 / Silvia C. Locatelli-Hoops and Alexei A. Yeliseev
    Detection of protein-protein interactions using tandem affinity purification / Ian Goodfellow and Dalan Bailey
    An improved in vivo biotinylation strategy combined with FLAG and antibody based approaches for affinity purification of protein complexes in mouse embryonic stem cells / Francesco Faiolo [and three others]
    Purification of recombinant proteins with a multifunctional GFP tag / Takashi Murayama and Takuya Kobayashi
    Targeted purification of SnAvi-tagged proteins / Ursula Schäffer, Ralf Baumeister, and Ekkehard Schulze
    An efficient fluorescent protein-based multifunctional affinity purification approach in mammalian cells / Hanhui Ma [and three others]
    Bimolecular affinity purification : a variation of TAP with multiple applications / Petro Starokadomskyy and Ezra Burstein.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jian Zhang, Ruth Nussinov, editors.
    Summary: The book focuses on protein allostery in drug discovery. Allosteric regulation, ʹthe second secret of lifeʹ, fine-tunes virtually most biological processes and controls physiological activities. Allostery can both cause human diseases and contribute to development of new therapeutics. Allosteric drugs exhibit unparalleled advantages compared to conventional orthosteric drugs, rendering the development of allosteric modulators as an appealing strategy to improve selectivity and pharmacodynamic properties in drug leads. The Series delineates the immense significance of protein allostery-as demonstrated by recent advances in the repertoires of the concept, its mechanistic mechanisms, and networks, characteristics of allosteric proteins, modulators, and sites, development of computational and experimental methods to predict allosteric sites, small-molecule allosteric modulators of protein kinases and G-protein coupled receptors, engineering allostery, and the underlying role of allostery in precise medicine. Comprehensive understanding of protein allostery is expected to guide the rational design of allosteric drugs for the treatment of human diseases. The book would be useful for scientists and students in the field of protein science and Pharmacology etc. .

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Allostery in Drug Development
    Chapter 2. Dynamic Protein Allosteric Regulation and Disease
    Chapter 3. Protein Allostery in Rational Drug Design
    Chapter 4. Progress in Allosteric Database
    Chapter 5. Correlation between Allosteric and Orthosteric Sites
    Chapter 6. Characteristics of Allosteric Proteins, Sites and Modulators
    Chapter 7. Advances in the Computational Identification of Allosteric Sites and Pathways in Proteins
    Chapter 8. Advances in NMR Methods to Identify Allosteric Sites and Allosteric Ligands
    Chapter 9. Interrogating Regulatory Mechanisms in Signal-ling Proteins by Allosteric Inhibitors and Activators: A Dynamic View through the Lens of Residue Interaction Network
    Chapter 10. GPCR Allosteric Modulator Discovery
    Chapter 11. Allosteric Small-Molecule Serine/Threonine Kinase Inhibitors
    Chapter 12. Allosteric regulation of protein kinases downstream of PI3-kinase signaling. Chapter 13. Allosteric Modulators of Protein-Protein Interactions (PPIs)
    Chapter 14. Allosteric Modulation of Intrinsically Disordered Proteins
    Chapter 15. Engineering Allostery into Proteins.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by David Eliezer.
    Contents:
    Semisynthesis and enzymatic preparation of post-translationally modified α-Synuclein / Bruno Fauvet and Hilal A. Lashuel
    Isotope-labeled amyloids via synthesis, expression, and chemical ligation for use in FTIR, 2D IR, and NMR studies / Tianqi O. Zhang ... [et al.]
    Intermolecular paramagnetic relaxation enhancement (PRE) studies of transient complexes in intrinsically disordered proteins / Maria K. Janowska and Jean Baum
    Detection of helical intermediates during amyloid formation by intrinsically disordered polypeptides and proteins / Andisheh Abedini, Ping Cao, and Daniel P. Raleigh
    Fluorescence correlation spectroscopy : a tool to study protein oligomerization and aggregation in vitro and in vivo / Bankanidhi Sahoo, Kenneth W. Drombosky, and Ronald Wetzel
    Deep UV resonance raman spectroscopy for characterizing amyloid aggregation / Joseph D. Handen and Igor K. Lednev
    Analyzing tau aggregation with electron microscopy / Carol J. Huseby and Jeff Kuret
    Characterization of amyloid oligomers by electrospray ionization-ion mobility spectrometry-mass spectrometry (ESI-IMS-MS) / Charlotte A. Scarff, Alison E. Ashcroft, and Sheena E. Radford
    Formation and characterization of α-Synuclein oligomers / Wojciech Paslawski, Nikolai Lorenzen, and Daniel E. Otzen
    Fluorescence methods for unraveling oligomeric amyloid intermediates / Niels Zijlstra, Nathalie Schilderink, and Vinod Subramaniam
    Preparation of amyloid fibrils for magic-angle spinning solid-state NMR spectroscopy / Marcus D. Tuttle ... [et al.]
    Spin labeling and characterization of tau fibrils using electron paramagnetic resonance (EPR) / Virginia Meyer and Martin Margittai
    Preparation of crystalline samples of amyloid fibrils and oligomers / Asher Moshe, Meytal Landau, and David Eisenberg
    Quenched hydrogen exchange NMR of amyloid fibrils / Andrei T. Alexandrescu
    Studying the early stages of protein aggregation using replica exchange molecular dynamics simulations / Joan- Emma Shea and Zachary A. Levine
    Computational methods for structural and functional studies of Alzheimer's amyloid ion channels / Hyunbum Jang ... [et al.]
    Analyzing ensembles of amyloid proteins using Bayesian statistics / Thomas Gurry ... [et al.]
    In vitro studies of membrane permeability induced by amyloidogenic polypeptides using large unilamellar vesicles / Ping Cao and Daniel P. Raleigh
    Cell models to study cell-to-cell transmission of α-Synuclein / Eun-Jin Bae, He-Jin Lee, and Seung-Jae Lee
    Preparation of amyloid fibrils seeded from brain and meninges / Kathryn P. Scherpel ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Mike S. Lee and Qin C. Ji.
    Contents:
    Contemporary Protein Analysis by Ion Mobility Mass Spectrometry / Johannes PC Vissers, James I Langridge
    High-Resolution Accurate Mass Orbitrap and Its Application in Protein Therapeutics Bioanalysis / Hongxia Wang, Patrick Bennett
    Current Methods for the Characterization of Posttranslational Modifications in Therapeutic Proteins Using Orbitrap Mass Spectrometry / Zhiqi Hao, Qiuting Hong, Fan Zhang, Shiaw-Lin Wu, Patrick Bennett
    Macro- to Micromolecular Quantitation of Proteins and Peptides by Mass Spectrometry / Suma Ramagiri, Brigitte Simons, Laura Baker
    Peptide and Protein Bioanalysis Using Integrated Column-to-Source Technology for High-Flow Nanospray / Shane R Needham, Gary A Valaskovic
    Targeting the Right Protein Isoform: Mass Spectrometry-Based Proteomic Characterization of Alternative Splice Variants / Jiang Wu
    The Application of Immunoaffinity-Based Mass Spectrometry to Characterize Protein Biomarkers and Biotherapeutics / Bradley L Ackermann, Michael J Berna
    Semiquantification and Isotyping of Antidrug Antibodies by Immunocapture-LC/MS for Immunogenicity Assessment / Jianing Zeng, Hao Jiang, Linlin Luo
    Mass Spectrometry-Based Assay for High-Throughput and High-Sensitivity Biomarker Verification / Xuejiang Guo, Keqi Tang
    Monitoring Quality of Critical Reagents Used in Ligand Binding Assays with Liquid Chromatography Mass Spectrometry (LC-MS) / Brian Geist, Adrienne Clements-Egan, Tong-Yuan Yang
    Application of Liquid Chromatography-High Resolution Mass Spectrometry in the Quantification of Intact Proteins in Biological Fluids / Stanley (Weihua) Zhang, Jonathan Crowther, Wenying Jian
    LC-MS/MS Bioanalytical Method Development Strategy for Therapeutic Monoclonal Antibodies in Preclinical Studies / Hongyan Li, Timothy Heath, Christopher A James
    Generic Peptide Strategies for LC-MS/MS Bioanalysis of Human Monoclonal Antibody Drugs and Drug Candidates / Michael T Furlong
    Mass Spectrometry-Based Methodologies for Pharmacokinetic Characterization of Antibody Drug Conjugate Candidates During Drug Development / Yongjun Xue, Priya Sriraman, Matthew V Myers, Xiaomin Wang, Jian Chen, Brian Melo, Martha Vallejo, Stephen E Maxwell, Sekhar Surapaneni
    Sample Preparation Strategies for LC-MS Bioanalysis of Proteins / Long Yuan, Qin C Ji
    Characterization of Protein Therapeutics by Mass Spectrometry / Wei Wu, Hangtian Song, Thomas Slaney, Richard Ludwig, Li Tao, Tapan Das.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Print
    Fabio Bagnoli, Rino Rappuoli, editors.
    Contents:
    Envelope structures of gram-positive bacteria / Mithila Rajagopal and Suzanne Walker
    The canonical and accessory sec system of gram-positive bacteria / Irfan Prabudiansyah and Arnold J.M. Driessen
    Twin-arginine protein translocation / Vivianne J. Goosens and Jan Maarten van Dijl
    Membrane translocation and assembly of sugar polymer precursors / Véronique L. Taylors, Steven M. Huszczynski and Joseph S. Lam
    Predicting subcellular localization of proteins by bioinformatic algorithms / Henrik Nielsen
    Anchoring of LPXTG-like proteins to the gram-positive cell wall envelope / Sara D. Siegel, Melissa E. Reardon and Hung Ton-That
    Spatial organization of cell wall-anchored proteins at the surface of gram-positive bacteria / Shaynoor Dramsi and Hélène Bierne
    Pilus assembly in gram-positive bacteria / Werner Pansegrau and Fabio Bagnoli
    Type VII secretion systems in gram-positive bacteria / Daria Bottai, Matthias I. Gröschel and Roland Brosch
    Protein secretion in gram-positive bacteria: from multiple pathways to biotechnology / Jozef Anné, Anastassios Economou and Kristel Bernaerts
    Surface and exoproteomes of gram-positive pathogens for vaccine discovery / Massimiliano Biagini, Fabio Bagnoli and Nathalie Norais.
  • Digital
    edited by Anna S. Kashina.
    Contents:
    Protein arginylation: over 50 years of discovery / Anna S. Kashina
    Recollection of how we came across the protein modification with amino acids by aminoacyl trna-protein transferase / Hideko Kaji and Akira Kaji
    Arginyltransferase: a personal and historical perspective / Ricahrd L. Soffer
    Arginylation in a partially purified fraction of 150k x g supernatants of axoplasm and injured vertebrate nerves / Nicholas A. Ingoglia
    Preparation of ATE1 enzyme from native mammalian tissues / Anna S. Kashina
    Correlated measurement of endogenous ATE1 activity on native acceptor proteins in tissues and cultured cells to detect cellular aging / Hideko Kaji and Akira Kaji
    Assaying the posttranslational arginylation of proteins in cultured cells / Mauricio R. Galiano and Marta E. Hallak
    Assaying ATE1 activity in yeast by [beta]-Gal degradation / Anna S. Kashina
    Bacterial expression and purification of recombinant arginyltransferase (ATE1) and arg-tRNA synthetase (RRS) for arginylation assays / Junling Wang and Anna S. Kashina
    Assaying ATE1 activity in vitro/ Junling Wang and Anna S. Kashina
    High-throughput arginylation assay in microplate format / Sougata Sha, Junling Wang and Anna S. Kashina
    Assay of arginyltransferase activity by a fluorescent HPLC method / Koichi Takao
    Identification of arginylated proteins by mass spectrometry / Anna S. Kashina and Jon R. Yates III
    Analysis of arginylated peptides by subtractive edman degradation / Anna S. Kashina and Jon R. Yates III
    Transferase-mediated labeling of protein N-termini with click chemistry handles / Anne M. Wagner [and four others]
    Applying arginylation for bottom-up proteomics / H. Alexander Ebhardt
    Development of new tools for the studies of protein arginylation / Anna S. Kashina.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Aitziber L. Cortajarena, Tijana Z. Grove, editors.
    Contents:
    Protein design for nanostructural engineering: general aspects / Tijana Z. Grove, Aitziber L. Cortajarena
    Designed protein origami / Igor Drobnak, Ajasja Ljubetič Helena Gradišar, Tomaž Pisanski, Roman Jerala
    Two-dimensional peptide and protein assemblies / Elizabeth Magnotti, Vincent Conticello
    Designed repeat proteins as building blocks for nanofabrication / Sara H. Mejias, Antonio Aires, Pierre Couleaud, Aitziber L. Cortajarena
    Assembly, engineering and applications of virus-based protein nanoparticles / Mauricio G. Mateu
    Dynamic and active proteins: biomolecular motors in engineered nanostructures / Marisela V̌lez
    Natural composite systems for bioinspired materials / Joseph A. Frezzo, Jin Kim Montclare PhD
    Protein-based hydrogels for tissue engineering / Ashley C. Schloss, Danielle M. Williams, Lynne J. Regan
    Design of self-assembling protein-polymer conjugates / Nathan A. Carter, Xi Geng, Tijana Z. Grove
    Design of redox-active peptides: towards functional materials / Dayn Joseph Sommer, Rafael Alcala-Torano, Zahra Bahrami Dizicheh, Giovanna Ghirlanda
    S-layer-based nanocomposites for industrial applications / Johannes Raff, Sabine Matys, Matthias Suhr, Manja Vogel, Tobias Günther [and others]
    Protein design for nanostructural engineering: concluding remarks and future directions / Tijana Z. Grove, Aitziber L. Cortajarena.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Brendan P. Orner.
    Contents:
    Encapsulation of nanoparticles in virus protein shells / Irina B. Tsvetkova and Bogdan G. Dragnea
    Use of protein cages as a template for confined synthesis of inorganic and organic nanoparticles / Masaki Uchida [and three others]
    Ferritin encapsulation and templated synthesis of inorganic nanoparticles / Katherine W. Pulsipher and Ivan J. Dmochowski
    Determining the relaxivity values of protein cage-templated nanoparticles using magnetic resonance imaging / Barindra Sana and Sierin Lim
    Computationally assisted engineering of protein cages / Maziar S. Andrejani and Brendan P. Orner
    Recombinant expression and purification of "virus-like" bacterial encapsulin protein cages / W. Frederik Rurup, Jeroen J.L.M. Cornelissen, and Melisa S.T. Koay
    Production of bacterial microcompartments / Jonathan K. Lassila
    Detection of protein cage assembly with bisarsenic fluorescent probes / Thomas A. Cornell and Brendan P. Orner
    Determining the role of metal binding in protein cage assembly / Anne Grove, Ambuj K. Kushwaha, and Khoa H. Nguyen
    Differential scanning calorimetry to quantify the stability of protein cages / Yu Zhang and Maziar S. Ardejani
    Material properties of viral nanocages explored by atomic force microscopy / Mariska G.M. van Rosmalen, Wouter H. Roos, and Gijs J.L. Wuite
    Computational mechanics of viral capsids / Melissa G. Gibbons, Luigi E. Perotti, and William S. Klug.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Joaquim Ros.
    Contents:
    Reactive oxygen species signaling from the perspective of the stem cell / Saghi Ghaffari
    Analysis of protein carbonylation / Ashraf G. Madian, Fred E. Regnier, Ao Zeng
    Diversity of protein carbonylation pathways : direct oxidation, glycoxidation and modifications by lipid peroxidation products / Maria Fedorova
    Protein carbonylation by reactive lipids / Koji Uchida
    Mechanism and functions of protein decarbonylation / Yuichiro J. Suzuki
    Carbonylated proteins and their metabolic regulation: overview of mechanisms, target proteins and characterization using proteomic methods / Somaieh Afiuni-Zadeh, Timothy J. Griffin
    Oxidative stress and protein carbonylation in malaria / Maria Linares, Antonio Puyet, Amalia Dieza and Jose M. Bautista
    Protein carbonylation in brains of subjects with selected eurodegenerative disorders / Tanea T. Reed and D. Allan Butterfield
    Cigarette smoke-induced protein carbonylation: focus on recent human studies / Graziano Colombo, Maria Lisa Garavaglia, Aldo Milzani, Isabella Dalle-Donne
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and oxidative damage / Esther Barreiro
    Protein carbonylation in aging and senescence / Jeannette Kenig, Tobias Jung and Tilman Grune
    Adipose carbonylation and mitochondrial dysfunction / Amy K. Hauck, Dalay H. Olson, Joel S. Burrill and David A. Bernlohr
    Protein carbonylation in plants / Ian Max Miller, Jesper F. Havelund and Adelina Rogowska-Wrzesinska
    Specificity of protein carbonylation and its relevance in aging / Elisa Cabiscol, Jordi Tamarit, and Joaquim Ros.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Ke-li Han, Xin Zhang, Ming-jun Yang, editors.
    Summary: "This book discusses how biological molecules exert their function and regulate biological processes, with a clear focus on how conformational dynamics of proteins are critical in this respect. In the last decade, the advancements in computational biology, nuclear magnetic resonance including paramagnetic relaxation enhancement, and fluorescence-based ensemble/single-molecule techniques have shown that biological molecules (proteins, DNAs and RNAs) fluctuate under equilibrium conditions. The conformational and energetic spaces that these fluctuations explore likely contain active conformations that are critical for their function. More interestingly, these fluctuations can respond actively to external cues, which introduces layers of tight regulation on the biological processes that they dictate. A growing number of studies have suggested that conformational dynamics of proteins govern their role in regulating biological functions, examples of this regulation can be found in signal transduction, molecular recognition, apoptosis, protein / ion / other molecules translocation and gene expression"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Protein folding simulations by generalized-ensemble algorithms
    Application of Markov state models to simulate long timescale dynamics of biological macromolecules
    Understanding protein dynamics using conformational ensembles
    Generative models of conformational dynamics
    Generalized spring tensor models for protein fluctuation dynamics and conformational changes
    The joys and perils of flexible fitting
    Coarse-grained models of the proteins backbone conformational dynamics
    Simulating protein folding in different environmental conditions
    Simulating the peptide folding kinetic related spectra based on the Markov state model
    The dilemma of conformational dynamics in enzyme catalysis: perspectives from theory and experiment
    Exploiting intrinsic flexibility in drug design
    NMR and computational methods in the structural and dynamic characterization of ligand-receptor interactions
    Molecular dynamics simulation of membrane proteins
    Free-energy landscape of intrinsically disordered proteins investigated by all-atom multicanonical molecular dynamics
    Coordination and control inside simple biomolecular machines
    Multi-state targeting machinery govern the fidelity and efficiency of protein localization
    Molecular dynamics simulations of F1-ATPase
    Chemosensorial G-proteins-coupled receptors: a perspective from computational methods.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Anthony P. Nicholas, Sanjoy K. Bhattacharya, editors.
    Contents:
    Physiological pathways of PAD activity and citrullinated epitope generation
    from citrullination to specific immunity and disease in rheumatoid arthritis
    The role of citrullinated proteins in the pathophysiology of rheumatoid arthritis
    Protein citrullination: the link between rheumatoid arthritis and periodontitis?
    From genes and environment to anti-culture immunity in rheumatoid arthritis: The role of the lungs
    Neutrophils and their contribution to autoimmunity in rheumatoid arthritis
    Deimination in skin and regulation of PAD expression in keratinocytes
    Importance of citrullination on hair protein molecular assembly during trichocytic differentiation
    Deimination in the peripheral nervous system: A wallflower existence
    Deimination in multiple sclerosis and experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis
    Protein hypercitrullination in CNS demyelinating disease reversed by PAD inhibition
    Deimination in prion diseases
    Deimination in Alzheimer's disease
    Ongoing studies of deimination in neurodegenerative diseases using the F95 antibody
    The role of protein deimination in epigenetics
    Identifying citrullination sites by mass spectroscopy
    Homocitrulline\U+2014\an analogue and confounder related to citrulline
    Picking the PAD lock: Chemical and biological approaches to identify PAD substrates and inhibitors.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Valentin Köhler.
    Contents:
    De novo design of stable [alpha]-helices / Alexander Yakimov, Georgy Rychkov, and Michael Petukhov
    Design of monomeric water-soluble [Beta]-hairpin and [Beta]-sheet peptides/ M. Angeles Jiménez
    Combination of theoretical and experimental approaches for the design and study of fibril-forming peptides / Phanourios Tamamis ... [et al.]
    Posttranslational incorporation of noncanonical amino acids in the RNase S system by semisynthetic protein assembly / Maika Genz and Norbert Sträter
    Design, synthesis, and study of fluorinated proteins / Benjamin C. Buer and E. Neil G. Marsh
    High-quality combinatorial protein libraries using the binary patterning approach / Luke H. Bradley
    Methods for library-scale computational protein design / Lucas B. Johnson, Thaddaus R. Huber, and Christopher D. Snow
    Symmetric protein architecture in protein design : top-down symmetric deconstruction / Liam M. Longo and Michael Blaber
    Identification of protein scaffolds for enzyme design using scaffold selection / André C. Stiel, Kaspar Feldmeier, and Birte Höcker
    Computational design of novel enzymes without cofactors / Matthew D. Smith, Alexandre Zanghellini, and Daniela Grabs-Röthlisberger
    De novo design of peptide scaffolds as novel preorganized ligands for metal-ion coordination / Aimee J. Gamble and Anna F. A. Peacock
    Computational design of metalloproteins / Avanish S. Parmar, Douglas Pike, and Vikas Nanda
    Incorporation of modified and artificial cofactors into naturally occurring protein scaffolds / Koji Oohora and Takashi Hayashi
    Computational redesign of metalloenzymes for catalyzing new reactions / Per Jr. Greisen and Sagar D. Khare.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Nikolaos E. Labrou.
    Contents:
    Protein Purification: An Overview
    Establishment of a Design Space for Biopharmaceutical Purification Processes Using DoE
    High Throughput Process Development: I. Process Chromatography
    High Throughput Process Development: II. Membrane Chromatography
    Media Selection in Ion Exchange Chromatography in a Single Microplate
    High Throughput Screening of Dye-Ligands for Chromatography
    Measurement of Uptake Curves and Adsorption Isotherms by Automated Microscale Chromatography Pipette Tips
    Recovery of Recombinant Proteins from Plants Using Aqueous Two-Phase Partitioning Systems: An Outline
    Aqueous Two-Phase Systems Strategies for the Recovery of Proteins from Plants
    Aqueous Two Phase Assisted Precipitation of Proteins: A Platform for Isolation of Process Related Impurities from Therapeutic Proteins
    Simultaneous Purification and Refolding of Proteins by Affinity Precipitation and Macro-(Affinity Ligand) Facilitated Three Phase Partitioning (MLFTPP)
    Co-Expression and Co-Purification of Antigen-Antibody Complexes in Bacterial Cytoplasm and Periplasm
    Immunoglobulin Purification by Caprylic Acid
    Affinity Tags in Protein Purification and Peptide Enrichment: An Overview
    Expression and Purification of Large Active GST Fusion Enzymes
    Synthetic Ligand Affinity Chromatography. Purification of Human Serum Albumin and Related Fusion Proteins
    Zbasic
    A Purification Tag for Selective Ion-Exchange Recovery
    An Orthogonal Fusion Tag for Efficient Protein Purification
    Phage Display of Engineered Binding Proteins
    Biomimetic Affinity Ligands for Protein Purification
    Synthesis and Application of Dye-Ligand Affinity Adsorbents
    Peptide Affinity Chromatography Based on Combinatorial Strategies for Protein Purification
    Affinity Chromatography of Proteins on Monolithic Columns
    Sample Displacement Batch Chromatography of Proteins
    Analysis of Host-Cell Proteins in Biotherapeutic Proteins by LC/MS Approaches
    Preparation of Monolithic Affinity Media for Nano-Liquid Chromatography Applications
    Proteomic Analysis of Complex Protein Samples by MALDI TOF Mass Spectrometry
    Modern Bioanalysis of Proteins by Electrophoretic Techniques
    Protein Structure Validation and Analysis with X-Ray Crystallography
    Measuring Binding Constants of His-Tagged Proteins using Affinity Chromatography and Ni-NTA Immobilized Enzymes
    Stabilization of Therapeutic Proteins in Aqueous Solutions and Freeze-Dried Solids: An Overview
    Stabilization of Protein by Freeze-Drying in the Presence of Trehalose: A Case Study of Tubulin
    G Protein-Coupled Receptor Expression and Purification.- (Hyper)thermophilic Enzymes: Production and Purification
    Affinity Chromatography for Antibody Purification
    Screening and Purification of Recombinant Lignocellulolytic Enzymes
    Purification of PEGylated Proteins, with the Example of PEGylated lysozyme and PEGylated scFv
    One-Step Purification of Glutamate decarboxylase from E. coli Using Aqueous Two Phase System.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Dennis R. Livesay.
    Contents:
    Monitoring Side-Chain Dynamics of Proteins Using 2H Relaxation
    CPMG Relaxation Dispersion
    Confocal Single-Molecule FRET for Protein Conformational Dynamics
    Protein Structural Dynamics Revealed by Site-directed Spin Labeling and Multifrequency EPR
    Probing Backbone Dynamics With Hydrogen/Deuterium Exchange Mass Spectrometry
    Carbon-Deuterium Bonds as Non-perturbative Infrared Probes of Protein Dynamics, Electrostatics, Heterogeneity, and Folding
    Balancing Bond, Nonbond and G?-like Terms in Coarse Grain Simulations of Conformational Dynamics
    Tutorial on Building Markov State Models with MSMBuilder and Coarse-graining them with BACE
    Analysis of Protein Conformational Transitions Using Elastic Network Model
    Geometric Simulation of Flexible Motion in Proteins
    Principal Component Analysis: A Method for Determining the Essential Dynamics of Proteins
    A Case Study Comparing Quantitative Stability/Flexibility Relationships Across Five Metallo-?-Lactamases Highlighting Differences within NDM-1
    Towards Comprehensive Analysis of Protein Family Quantitative Stability/Flexibility Relationships using Homology Models
    Using the COREX/BEST Server to Model the Native State Ensemble
    Morphing Methods to Visualize Coarse-grained Protein Dynamics.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Claudio M. Gomes, Patricía F.N. Faísca.
    Summary: This snapshot volume is designed to provide a smooth entry into the field of protein folding. Presented in a concise manner, each section introduces key concepts while providing a brief overview of the relevant literature. Outlook subsections will pinpoint specific aspects related to emerging methodologies, concepts and trends.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Authors; 1 Protein Folding: An Introduction; 1 Protein Structure-How Is Structure Maintained?; 1.1 The Dawn of Protein Structural Biology; 1.2 The Universe of Protein Structures; 1.3 Physical Interactions Stabilising Proteins; 1.4 Protein Dynamics and Solvation; 2 Protein Folding-Why Is Structure Acquired?; 2.1 The Anfinsen Experiments; 2.2 The Thermodynamic Hypothesis; 2.3 Driving Forces for Protein Folding-Hydrophobic Effect and the Thermodynamics of Protein Folding; 3 Folding Kinetics and Mechanisms: How Is Structure Acquired? 3.1 Two-State Cooperativity in Protein Folding3.2 The Levinthal Paradox and the Timescale of Protein Folding; 3.3 Mechanisms of Protein Folding; 3.4 The Nucleation Condensation Mechanism of Protein Folding; 3.5 Phi-value Analysis and the Structure of the Folding Transition State; 3.6 The Energy Landscape and Folding Funnels; 3.7 The Importance of Native Geometry as a Determinant of Folding Rates; 3.8 The Folding Mechanism of Knotted Proteins; 4 Protein Misfolding: Why Proteins Misbehave?; 4.1 Protein Folding In Vivo; 4.2 Protein Misfolding and Aggregation; 4.3 Protein Misfolding Diseases 4.4 The Amyloid State4.5 Mechanism and Kinetics of Protein Aggregation; 4.6 Aggregation Propensity; 5 Methods for Protein Folding; 5.1 Biophysical Spectroscopies; 5.2 Computational Methods; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Jatinder Bhatia, Raanan Shamir, Yvan Vandenplas.
    Contents:
    Proteins, peptides and amino acids : role in infant nutrition / Nutten, S.
    Hydrolyzed proteins in allergy / Salvatore, S.; Vandenplas, Y.
    Infant formula with partially hydrolyzed proteins in functional gastrointestinal disorders / Vandenplas, Y.; Salvatore, S.
    Hydrolyzed proteins in preterm infants / Senterrre, T.; Rigo, J.
    Hydrolyzed formula for every infant? / Fleischer, D.M.; Venter, C.; Vandenplas, Y.
    The benefits of breast feeding / Shamir, R.
    Protein evolution of human milk / Thakkar, S.K.; Giuffrida, F.; Bertschy, E.; De Castro, A.; Destaillats, F.; Lee, L.Y.
    Metabolic programming : effects of early nutrition on growth, metabolism and body composition / Haschke, F.; Grathwohl, D. Haiden, N.
    Human milk : bioactive proteins/peptides and functional properties / Lönnerdal, B.L.
    Human milk for preterm infants and fortification / Bhatia, J.
    Protein needs of preterm infants : why are they so difficult to meet? / Ziegler, E.E.
    Optimizing early protein intake for long-term health of preterm infants / Singhal, A.
    Defining protein requirements of preterm infants by using metabolic studies in fetuses and preterm infants / van den Akker, C.H.P.; van Goudoever, J.B.
    Amino acid intake in preterm infants / Burattini, I.; Bellagamba, M.P.; D'Ascenzo, R.; Biagetti, C.; Carnielli, V.P.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Jinjiang Li, Mary E. Krause, Raymond Tu, editors.
    Summary: Proteins are exposed to various interfacial stresses during drug product development. They are subjected to air-liquid, liquid-solid, and, sometimes, liquid-liquid interfaces throughout the development cycle-from manufacturing of drug substances to storage and drug delivery. Unlike small molecule drugs, proteins are typically unstable at interfaces where, on adsorption, they often denature and form aggregates, resulting in loss of efficacy and potential immunogenicity. This book covers both the fundamental aspects of proteins at interfaces and the quantification of interfacial behaviors of proteins. Importantly, this book introduces the industrial aspects of protein instabilities at interfaces, including the processes that introduce new interfaces, evaluation of interfacial instabilities, and mitigation strategies. The audience that this book targets encompasses scientists in the pharmaceutical and biotech industry, as well as faculty and students from academia in the surface science, pharmaceutical, and medicinal chemistry areas. .

    Contents:
    1. Overview of the impact of protein interfacial instability on the development of biologic products
    2. Protein adsorption at a gas-aqueous interface
    3. Interfacial behaviors of proteins
    4. Interfacial stresses during drug substance purification processes
    5. Evaluation of interfacial stress during drug product development
    6.Relating interfacial shear and dilatations stress-es to protein aggregation in mAbs
    7. Analytical techniques for evaluating protein instability at interfaces
    8. Analysis of aggregates and particles
    9. Protein interfacial instability of mixing and lyophilization during drug product manufacturing process scale-up and tech transfer
    10. Excipients: Characterization, purpose, and selection
    11. Interfacial stress and proteins prepared in the solid state
    12. Interfaces in protein drug delivery: device concern
    13. Future perspectives. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Khalil Ahmed, Olaf-Georg Issinger, Ryszard Szyszka, editors
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    volume editor, Kevan M. Shokat.
    Contents:
    Catalytic mechanisms and regulation of protein kinases / Zhihong Wang and Philip A. Cole
    A structural atlas of kinases inhibited by clinically approved drugs / Qi Wang, Julie A. Zorn, and John Kuriyan
    Fragment-based approaches to the discovery of kinase inhibitors / Paul N. Mortenson, Valerio Berdini, and Marc O'Reilly
    Targeting protein kinases with selective and semi-promiscuous covalent inhibitors / Rand M. Miller and Jack Taunton
    The resistance tetrad: amino acid hotspots for kinome-wide exploitation of drug-resistant protein kinase alleles / Fiona P. Bailey, Veselin I. Andreev, and Patrick A. Eyers
    FLiK: a direct binding assay for the identification and kinetic characterization of stabilizers of inactive kinase conformations / Jeffrey R. Simar and Daniel Rauh
    Discovery of allosteric BCR-ABL inhibitors from phenotypic screen to clinical candidate / Nathanael S. Gray and Doriano Fabbro
    The logic and design of analog-sensitive kinases and their small molecule inhibitors / Michael S. Lopez, Joseph I. Kliegman, and Kevan M. Shokat.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Ayse Basak Engin, Atilla Engin, editors.
    Summary: "Protein phosphorylation via protein kinases is an inevitable process that alters physiological and pathological functions of the cells. Thus, protein kinases play key roles in the regulation of cell life or death decisions. Protein kinases are frequently a driving factor in a variety of human diseases including aging and cellular senescence, immune system and endothelial dysfunctions, cancers, insulin resistance, cholestasis and neurodegenerative diseases, as well as bacterial resistance in persistent infections. Recent developments in quantitative proteomics provide important opinions on kinase inhibitor selectivity and their modes of action in the biological context. Protein Kinase-mediated Decisions Between Life and Death aims to have the reader catch insights about up-to-date opinions on “Protein Kinases” related pathways that threaten human health and life"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Protein kinase-mediated decision between the life and death
    Aging and protein kinases
    The connection between cell fate and telomere
    Dark-side of exosomes
    Signal transduction in immune cells and protein kinases
    Role of protein kinase C in immune cell activation and its implication chemical-induced immunotoxicity
    Combined toxicity of metal nanoparticles: comparison of individual and mixture particles effect
    Protein kinases signaling in pancreatic beta-cells death and type diabetes
    Bile acid toxicity and protein kinases
    N-Methyl-D-aspartate receptor signaling-protein kinases crosstalk in cerebral ischemia
    Alzheimer’s disease and protein kinases
    Bacterial protein kinases
    Indoleamine 2,3-dioxygenase activity-induced acceleration of tumor growth, and protein kinases-related novel therapeutics regimens
    A crosstalk between dual-specific phosphatases and dual-specific protein kinases can be a potential therapeutic target for anti-cancer therapy
    Protein kinases in hematological disorders
    Metabolic stress and immunity: nutrient-sensing kinases and tryptophan metabolism.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pandjassarame Kangueane, Christina Nilofer.
    Summary: This book illustrates the importance and significance of the molecular (physical and chemical) and evolutionary (gene fusion) principles of protein-protein and domain-domain interactions towards the understanding of cell division, disease mechanism and target definition in drug discovery. It describes the complex issues associated with this phenomenon using cutting edge advancement in Bioinformatics and Bioinformation Discovery. The chapters provide current information pertaining to the types of protein-protein complexes (homodimers, heterodimers, multimer complexes) in context with various specific and sensitive biological functions. The significance of such complex formation in human biology in the light of molecular evolution is also highlighted using several examples. The chapters also describe recent advancements on the molecular principles of protein-protein interaction with reference to evolution towards target identification in drug discovery. Finally, the book also elucidates a comprehensive yet a representative description of a large number of challenges associated with the molecular interaction of proteins.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Protein-protein binding
    3. Low-resolution protein complexes
    4. Heterodimer protein complexes
    5. Homo multimer protein complexes
    6. Hetero multimer protein complexes
    7. Hot spots at the protein-protein interface
    8. Principles of protein-protein interaction
    Databases for protein-protein interaction
    10. Homodimer protein folding and binding
    11. Protein subunit-subunit to domain-domain interactions
    12. Domain-domain interactions
    13. Protein-protein interaction tools
    14. Protein-protein docking: Methods and tools
    15. HLA-peptide interaction to short peptide vaccine design
    16. Protein-protein interfaces and diseases
    17. Patented protein structural complexes in discovery platform
    18. Proteome-scale analysis of protein complexes
    19. Conclusions and challenges
    Useful formula.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Maria Sandkvist, Eric Cascales, Peter J. Christie.
    Summary: "Protein transport into and across membranes is a fundamental process in bacteria that touches upon and unites many areas of microbiology, including bacterial cell physiology, adhesion and motility, nutrient scavenging, intrabacterial signaling and social behavior, toxin deployment, interbacterial antagonism and collaboration, host invasion and disruption, and immune evasion. A broad repertoire of mechanisms and macromolecular machines are required to deliver protein substrates across bacterial cell membranes for intended effects. Some machines are common to most, if not all bacteria, whereas others are specific to Gram-negative or Gram-positive species or species with unique cell envelope properties such as members of Actinobacteria and Spirochetes. Protein Secretion in Bacteria, authored and edited by an international team of experts, draws together the many distinct functions and mechanisms involved in protein translocation in one concise tome. This comprehensive book presents updated information on all aspects of bacterial protein secretion encompassing: Individual secretory systems-Sec, Tat, and T1SS through the newly discovered T9SS Mechanisms, structures, and functions of bacterial secretion systems Lipoprotein sorting pathways, outer membrane vesicles, and the sortase system Structures and roles of surface organelles, including flagella, pili, and curli Emerging technologies and translational implications Protein Secretion in Bacteria serves as both an introductory guide for students and postdocs, and a ready reference for seasoned researchers whose work touches on protein export and secretion. This volume synthesizes the diversity of mechanisms of bacterial secretion across the microbial world into a digestible resource to stimulate new research, inspire continued identification and characterization of novel systems, and bring about new ways to manipulate these systems for biotechnological, preventative, and therapeutic applications"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2019
  • Digital
    Natalya Kurochkina.
    Summary: The volume covers the advances made by the most recent experimental and theoretical research in the structure of the most extensively studied main biological macromolecules - the proteins. Proteins are remarkably regular highly ordered biopolymers. Their precise organization allows living organisms to reliably perform complex functions. The book features an introduction into methods of protein structure determination, design, and modeling, and addresses the structural principles of fibrous and globular proteins such as enzymes, channels, signaling molecules and adaptors, and the relationships between primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary structure. The main focus is on determinants of protein conformation, canonical and noncanonical amino acids and polypeptides, conformational states and transitions, structure elements and arrangements, protein folds, helical assemblies, multiprotein complexes, structure and function relationships, the specificity of molecular recognition, ligand binding, and involvement in cellular processes. The book is a must read for scientists, engineers, teachers, undergraduate and graduate students, business professionals, and curious learners in the fields of Life Sciences and Biomedical Research. Prof. Natalya Kurochkina heads The School of Theoretical Modeling, Washington, DC, USA, teaches, and conducts research. She has PhD in Biophysics, from the Institute of Protein Research, Russian Academy of Sciences and worked as a postdoctoral fellow at the National Cancer Institute of the National Institute of Health. Her research focuses on principles of protein structure and protein conformation, and determinants of specificity of molecular recognition.

    Contents:
    Protein Structure
    Conformational transitions
    Allosteric regulation
    Protein channels
    Helical assemblies
    Multiprotein complexes
    Methods of structure determination
    Protein modeling
    References
    Dictionary.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Daisuke Kihara.
    Contents:
    Protein structure modeling with MODELLER / Benjamin Webb and Andrej Sali
    RaptorX server : a resource for template-based protein structure modeling / Morten Källberg ... [et al.]
    MULTICOM protein tertiary structure prediction system / Jilong Li ... [et al.]
    Modeling of protein side-chain conformations with RASP / Zhichao Miao, Yang Cao, and Taijiao Jiang
    Direct coupling analysis for protein contact prediction / Faruck Morcos ... [et al.]
    ITScorePro : an efficient scoring program for evaluating the energy scores of protein structures for structure prediction / Sheng-You Huang and Xiaoqin Zou
    Assessing the quality of modelled 3D protein structures using the ModFOLD server / Daniel Barry Roche, Maria Teresa Buenavista, and Liam James McGuffin
    3D-SURFER 2.0 : web platform for real-time search and characterization of protein surfaces / Yi Xiong ... [et al.]
    SPOT-Seq-RNA : predicting protein-RNA complex structure and RNA-binding function by fold recognition and binding affinity prediction / Yuedong Yang ... [et al.]
    POODLE : Tools Predicting Intrinsically Disordered Regions of Amino Acid Sequence / Kana Shimizu
    Prediction of intrinsic disorder in proteins using MFDp2 / Marcin J. Mizianty, Vladimir Uversky, and Lukasz Kurgan
    Modeling protein-protein complexes using the HADDOCK webserver "modeling protein complexes with HADDOCK" / Gydo C.P. van Zundert and Alexandre M.J.J. Bonvin
    Predicting the structure of protein-protein complexes using the swarmdock web server / Mieczyslaw Torchala and Paul A. Bates
    DOCK/PIERR : web server for structure prediction of Protein-protein complexes / Shruthi Viswanath, D.V.S. Ravikant, and Ron Elber
    Pairwise and multimeric protein-protein docking using the LZerD program Suite / Juan Esquivel-Rodriguez ... [et al.]
    Protocols for efficient simulations of long-time protein dynamics using coarse-grained CABS model / Michal Jamroz, Andrzej Kolinski, and Sebastian Kmiecik.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Thomas Böldicke, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I Methods of Structure Prediction
    Chapter 1 In Silico Prediction of Target-Inhibitor Interactions
    Part II Antibodies
    Chapter 2 Antibodies and Selection of Monoclonal Antibodies
    Chapter 3 Selection of Recombinant Human Antibodies
    Chapter 4 Selection of Recombinant Human Antibodies against Toxins and Viruses
    Chapter 5 Recent Advances with ER Targeted Intrabodies
    Chapter 6 Therapeutic Blocking Antibodies against Oncogenic Receptors and Growth Factors
    Chapter 7 Synthetic Cystine-Knot Miniproteins-Valuable Scaffolds for Polypeptide Engineering
    Part III Peptides, Small Molecules and Aptamers
    Chapter 8 Peptides and Peptide Analogs to Inhibit Protein
    Chapter 9 Allosteric Modulators of the Class A G Protein coupled Receptors
    Chapter 10 Phosphatases: Their Roles in Cancer and their Chemical Modulators
    Chapter 11 Selection and Application of Aptamers and Intramers
    Part IV Angiogenesis Inhibitors
    Chapter 12 Inhibitors of Angiogenesis.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Tristan Vaughan, Jane Osbourn, and Bahija Jallal.
    Summary: In this practice-oriented two volume handbook, professionals from some of the largest biopharmaceutical companies and top academic researchers address the key concepts and challenges in the development of protein pharmaceuticals for medicinal chemists and drug developers of all trades. Following an introduction tracing the rapid development of the protein therapeutics market over the last decade, all currently used therapeutic protein scaffolds are surveyed, from human and non-human antibodies to antibody mimetics, bispecific antibodies and antibody-drug conjugates. This ready reference then goes on to review other key aspects such as pharmacokinetics, safety and immunogenicity, manufacture, formulation and delivery. The handbook then takes a look at current key clinical applications for protein therapeutics, from respiratory and inflammation to oncology and immune-oncology, infectious diseases and rescue therapy. Finally, several exciting prospects for the future of protein therapeutics are highlighted and discussed.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    André L.S. Santos, Marta H. Branquinha, Claudia M. d'Avila-Levy, Lucimar F. Kneipp, Cátia L. Sodré, editors.
    Summary: This book contains a collection of critical reviews on the expression of biologically functional proteins in Leishmania and Trypanosoma, which was written by renowned researchers on this field. Species belonging to these trypanosomatids genera are etiological agents of leishmaniasis, Chagas' disease and sleeping sickness that are extremely debilitating human infection diseases, which remain a major health problem especially in countries from Latin America, Africa and Middle East. Substantiating the problem, the currently accepted drugs for these diseases are quite unsatisfying due to their low efficacy and high toxicity. In order to solve these real problems, several research groups around the world have become involved in the study and identification of novel potential targets in the trypanosomatid cell. Since proteins are key macromolecules involved in crucial metabolic processes of all living cells, studies have focused on the expression of specific proteins produced by Leishmania and Trypanosoma by means of different biochemical, molecular and proteomic approaches in order to explore them as targets for understanding the parasite life cycle and developing new strategies against trypanosomiasis. With these proposals in mind, the book "Proteins and Proteome of Leishmania and Trypanosoma" encompasses (i) an integrated view about the biochemistry of parasites belonging to the Leishmania and Trypanosoma genera; (ii) an updated review on the expression of biologically relevant proteins by human pathogenic trypanosomatids and their possible role in the interaction with host cells/molecules as well as a target for development of both alternative chemotherapies and vaccine; and (iii) several pictures, diagrams and tables that can be used to illustrate both undergraduate and postgraduate teaching as well as scientific lectures, being a useful resource for students and researchers.

    Contents:
    Biology of Human Pathogenic Trypanosomatids: Epidemiology, Lifecycle and Ultrastructure
    Selection of Molecular Targets for Drug Development against Trypanosomatids
    A2 and other visceralizing proteins of Leishmania: role in pathogenesis and application for vaccine development
    Arginase in Leishmania
    The heat shock proteins of Trypanosoma cruzi
    The Gp82 Surface Molecule of Trypanosoma cruzi Metacyclic Forms
    The Gp85 Surface Glycoproteins from Trypanosoma cruzi
    Trypanosoma cruzi Trans-Sialidase: Structural Features and Biological Implications
    Surface Topology Evolution of Trypanosoma Trans-Sialidase
    Ecto-Nucleotidases and Ecto-Phosphatases from Leishmania and Trypanosoma Parasites
    Gp63 Function in the Interaction of Trypanosomatids with the Invertebrate Host: Facts and Prospects
    Highlights on Trypanosomatid Aminoacyl-tRNA Synthesis
    The Expected Outcome of the Trypanosoma cruzi Proteomic Map: a Review of its Potential Biological Applications for Drug Target Discovery
    Proteomics advances in the study of Leishmania parasites and leishmaniasis
    Towards the Phosphoproteome of Trypanosomatids.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Ákos Végvári, editor.
    Contents:
    Proteogenomic tools and approaches to explore protein coding landscapes of eukaryotic genomes / Dhirendra Kumar, Debasis Dash
    Next generation sequencing data and proteogenomics / Kelly V. Ruggles, David Feny̲
    Proteogenomics: key driver for clinical discovery and personalized medicine / Ruggero Barbieri, Victor Guryev, Corry-Anke Brandsma, Frank Suits, Rainer Bischoff [and others]
    Identification of small novel coding sequences, a proteogenomics endeavor / Volodimir Olexiouk, Gerben Menschaert
    Using proteomics bioinformatics tools and resources in proteogenomic studies / Marc Vaudel, Harald Barsnes, Helge Ræder, Frode S. Berven
    Mutant proteogenomics / Ákos Végvári
    Proteogenomic analysis of single amino acid polymorphisms in cancer research / Alba Garin-Muga, Fernando J. Corrales, Victor Segura
    Developments for personalized medicine of lung cancer subtypes: mass spectrometry-based clinical proteogenomic analysis of oncogenic mutations / Toshihide Nishimura, Haruhiko Nakamura
    Proteogenomics for the study of gastrointestinal stromal tumors / Tadashi Kondo
    Proteogenomics for the comprehensive analysis of human cellular and serum antibody repertoires / Paula Díez, Manuel Fuentes
    Antibody-based proteomics / Christer Wingren.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Paul C. Guest, editor.
    Summary: Due to continuous technical developments and new insights into the high complexity of neurological diseases, there is an increasing need for the application of proteomic technologies which can yield potential biomarker readouts for improved clinical management as well as for the development of new drugs by struggling pharmaceutical companies. This book describes the step-by-step use of proteomic methods such as two-dimensional gel electrophoresis, multiplex immunoassay, liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LC-MS) and selective reaction monitoring MS, to increase our understanding of these diseases, with the ultimate aim of improving patient care. The volume will be of high interest to clinical scientists, physicians and pharmaceutical company scientists as it gives insights into the latest technologies enabling the revolution of personalized medicine. It is of direct interest to both technical and bench biomarker scientists as it gives step by step instructions on how to carry out each of the protocols. It is also of interest to researchers as each technique will be presented in the context of a specific neurological disorder, including Alzheimer's disease, multiple sclerosis, autism spectrum disorders, schizophrenia, major depressive disorder and bipolar disorder. Finally, it will also highlight the future research efforts in this field, which are endeavoring to convert proteomic platforms to the form of hand held devices which can be used in a point of care setting and return diagnostic results within the timeframe of a visit to the general practitioner.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Proteomic studies in psychiatric disease and neurological disorders
    Part 1: REVIEWS
    Application of proteomic techniques for improved stratification and treatment of schizophrenia patients
    Multiplexing biomarker methods, proteomics and considerations for Alzheimer's disease
    What have proteomic studies taught us about novel drug targets in autism?
    Application of proteomic approaches to accelerate drug development for psychiatric disorders
    Proteomic biomarker identification in cerebrospinal fluid for leptomeningeal metastases with neurological complications
    Connecting brain proteomics with behavioural neuroscience in translational animal models of neuropsychiatric disorders
    LC-MSE for qualitative and quantitative proteomicstudies of psychiatric disorders
    The utility of multiplex assays for identification of proteomic signatures in psychiatry
    Part 2: PROTOCOLS
    Blood sampling and preparation procedures for proteomic biomarker studies of psychiatric disorders
    Multiplex immunoassay profiling of serum in psychiatric disorders
    Sequential immunopreciptation of secretory vesicle proteins from biosynthetically-labelled cells
    2d gel electrophoresis of insulin secretory granule proteins from biosynthetically-labelled pancreatic islets
    Two-dimensional gel electrophoresis: a reference protocol
    A two-dimensional difference gel electrophoresis (2D-DIGE) protocol for studies of neural precursor cells
    Identifying biomarker candidates in the blood plasma or serum proteome
    Selective reaction monitoring mass spectrometry for quantitation of glycolytic enzymes in post-mortem brain samples
    A selected reaction monitoring mass spectrometry protocol for validation of proteomic biomarker candidates in studies of psychiatric disorders
    Application of iTRAQ shotgun proteomics for measurement of brain proteins in studies of psychiatric disorders
    Co-immunoprecipitation for deciphering protein interactomes
    Sequential co-immunopreciptation and immunoblot approach to determine oligomerisation of G-protein coupled receptors
    A protocol for producing the maternal low protein rat model: a tool for pre-clinical proteomic studies
    A clinical study protocol to identify serum biomarkers predictive of response to antipsychotics in schizophrenia patients
    Generation of the acute phencyclidine rat model for proteomic studies of schizophrenia A protocol for generation of a corticosterone model of psychiatric disorders
    MK-801-treated oligodendrocytes as a cellular model to study schizophrenia
    Combining patient-reprogrammed neural cells and proteomics as a model to study psychiatric disorders
    SILAC mass spectrometry profiling: a psychiatric disorder perspective
    Preparation of peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) as a model for proteomic studies psychiatric disorders
    Proteomic profiling of skin fibroblasts as a model of schizophrenia Proteomic profiling of the pituitary gland in studies of psychiatric disorders
    Development of an assay for measuring proprotein-conversion activity on a multiplex magnetic bead-based array platform
    Phenotyping multiple subsets of immune cells in situ in formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded tissue sections
    Lab-on-a-chip proteomic assays for psychiatric disorders
    Development of a user-friendly app for testing blood coagulation status in schizophrenia patients
    Part 3:FUTURE PERSPECTIVES
    Proteomic approaches to enable point-of-care testing and personalized medicine for psychiatric disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Anton Posch.
    Contents:
    Mechanical/physical methods of cell distribution and tissue homogenization / Stanley Goldberg
    Sample preservation through heat stabilization of proteins : principles and examples / Mats Borén
    Isolating peripheral lymphocytes by density gradient centrifugation and magnetic cell sorting / Frederic Brosseron, Katrin Marcus, and Caroline May
    Investigating the adipose tissue secretome : a protocol to generate high-quality samples appropriate for comprehensive proteomic profiling / Simon Göddeke, Jorg Kotzka, and Stefan Lehr
    Methods for proteomics-based analysis of the human muscle secretome using an in vitro exercise model / Mika Scheler ... [et al.]
    Urinary pellet sample preparation for shotgun proteomic analysis of microbial infection and host-pathogen interactions / Yanbao Yu and Rembert Pieper
    Protocol for the parallel isolation of intact mitochondria from rat liver, kidney, heart, and brain / Sabine Schulz ... [et al.]
    Isolation of mitochondria from cultured cells and liver tissue biopsies for molecular and biochemical analyses / Sabine Schmitt ... [et al.]
    Dynamic range compression with ProteoMiner : principles and examples / Lei Li
    Qualitative and quantitative proteomic analysis of formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue / Omid Azimzadeh, Michael J. Atkinson, and Soile Tapio
    Full-length protein extraction protocols and gel-based downstream applications in formalin-fixed tissue proteomics / Alessandro Tanca, Sergio Uzzau, and Maria Filippa Addis
    Enrichment of low-abundant protein targets by immunoprecipitation upstream of mass spectrometry / Barbara Kaboord ... [et al.]
    Principles of protein labeling techniques / Christian Obermaier, Anja Griebel, and Reiner Westermeier
    Isolation of extracellular vesicles for proteomic profiling / Dong-Sic Choi and Yong Song Gho
    Protocol for exosome isolation and characterization : evaluation of ultracentrifugation, density-gradient separation, and immunoaffinity capture methods / David W. Greening ... [et al.]
    Chloroplast isolation and affinity chromatography for enrichment of low-abundant proteins in complex proteomes / Roman G. Bayer, Simon Stael, and Markus Teige
    Depletion of RuBisCO protein using the protamine sulfate precipitation method / Ravi Gupta and Sun Tae Kim
    Step-by-step preparation of proteins for mass spectrometric analysis / Thomas Franz and Xinping Li
    Identification of protein N-Termini using TMPP or dimethyl labeling and mass spectrometry / Jingjing Deng ... [et al.]
    Optimization of cell lysis and protein digestion protocols for protein analysis by LC-MS/MS / Dominic Winter, Alireza Dehghani, and Hanno Steen
    Comprehensive protocol to simultaneously study protein phosphorylation, acetylation, and n-linked sialylated glycosylation / Marcella Nunes Melo-Braga ... [et al.]
    Protein profiling and phosphoprotein analysis by isoelectric focusing / Giuseppina Maccarrone and Michaela D. Filiou
    Principles and examples of gel-based approaches for phosphoprotein analysis / Birgit Steinberger and Corina Mayrhofer
    Neutral phosphate-affinity SDS-PAGE system for profiling of protein phosphorylation / Emiko Kinoshita-Kikuta, Eiji Kinoshita, and Tohru Koike
    Enrichment and identification of bacterial glycopeptides by mass spectrometry / Nichollas E. Scott and Stuart J. Cordwell
    In-gel peptide IEF sample preparation for LC/MS analysis / Tom Berkelman, Sricharan Bandhakavi, and Aran Paulus
    Western blotting using in-gel protein labeling as a normalization control : stain-free technology / Jennifer E. Gilda and Aldrin V. Gomes
    2-D western blotting for evaluation of antibodies developed for detection of host cell protein / Tom Berkelman, Adriana Harbers, and Sricharan Bandhakavi
    Free llow electrophoresis for separation of native membrane protein complexes / Lutz Andreas Eichacker ... [et al.]
    Three-dimensional electrophoresis for quantitative profiling of complex proteomes / Sergio Mauro ... [et al.]
    Bead-based multiplex sandwich immunoassay to assess the abundance and posttranslational modification state of [beta]-catenin / Nicola Groll ... [et al.]
    Identification of SUMO E3 ligase-specific substrates using the huprot human proteome microarray / Eric Cox ... [et al.]
    Amyloid-binding proteins : affinity-based separation, proteomic identification, and optical biosensor validation / Alexei Medvedev ... [et al.]
    Proteomic profiling by nanomaterials-based matrix- assisted laser desorption/ionization mass spectrometry for high-resolution data and novel protein information directly from biological samples / Suresh Kumar Kailasa and Hui-Fen Wu.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    volume editor, Daniel Martins-de-Souza.
    Contents:
    Proteomic characterization of the brain and cerebrospinal fluid of schizophrenia patients / Caf-Mendes, C.C.; Gattaz, W.F.; Schmitt, A.; Britto, L.R.G.; Martins-de-Souza, D
    Peripheral biomarker candidates in schizophrenia / Thome, J.; Bratek, A.; Krysta, K
    Schizophrenia : blood-serum-plasma metabolomics / Lista, S.; Giegling, I.; Rujescu, D
    Proteomic and metabolomic evidence for glial alterations in schizophrenia / Beasley, C.L.; Barakauskas, V.E
    Insights from proteomic studies on schizophrenia preclinical models : what can we learn for drug discovery? / Farrelly, L.A.; Fcking, M.; Cotter, D.R
    Metabolomics to study psychotic disorders and their metabolic comorbidities / Oresi, M
    Peripheral biomarkers for depression by plasma and serum proteomics / Domenici, E
    Proteomics of preclinical models of depression / Carboni, L
    Antidepressant response metabonomics / Qin, X.; Gao, X.; Qiao, Y.; Zhou, Y.; Tian, J.; Li, Z
    Proteomics and metabolomics of bipolar disorder / Sussulini, A
    Use of metabolomics and proteomics to reveal pathophysiological pathways in anxiety disorders / Altmaier, E.; Emeny, R.T.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Arun K. Shukla.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Andre Martinho de Almeida, Ingrid Eckersall, Ingrid Miller, Editors.
    Summary: Proteomics, like other post-genomics tools, has been growing at a rapid pace and has important applications in numerous fields of science. While its use in animal and veterinary sciences is still limited, there have been considerable advances in this field in recent years, in areas as diverse as physiology, nutrition and food of animal origin processing. This is mainly as a consequence of a wider availability and better understanding of proteomics methodologies by animal and veterinary researchers. This book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the-art account of the status of farm-animal proteomics research, focusing on the principles behind proteomics methodologies and its specific applications and offering clear example.

    Contents:
    Proteomics in Domestic Animals on a Farm to Systems Biology perspective: introductory note
    Considerations for farm animal proteomics experiments: an introductory view gel based versus non-gel based approaches
    Quantitative Gel electrophoresis
    Sample preparation for 2DE using samples of animal-origin
    Gel-free Proteomics
    Proteomic research in farm animal serum and plasma
    Proteomic Research in Urine and Other Fluids
    Colostrum proteomics research: a complex fluid with multiple physiological functions
    PROTEOMICS IN MILK AND DAIRY PRODUCTS
    Proteomics in skeletal muscle research
    Proteomics and the characterization of fatty liver metabolism in early lactation dairy cows
    Proteomics Research in the adipose tissue
    Proteomics and mammary gland research in dairy species
    Proteomics in wool and fibre research
    Proteomics of meat products
    Proteomics in Fish and Aquaculture research
    The use of proteomics to study biomarkers of stress and welfare in farm animals
    Bioinformatics Support for Farm Animal Proteomics
    Peptidomics on Farm Animal Research
    Studying the animal transcriptome: state of the art and challenges in the context of Animal and Veterinary Sciences
    NMR Metabolomics pari passu with Proteomics: two relevant tools for animal sciences combined
    Omics and Systems Biology Integration of Production and Omics data in Systems Biology
    CONCLUSION: Proteomics in Domestic Animals on a Farm to Systems Biology perspective: final remarks and future prospects.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Rosa Barrio, James D. Sutherland, Manuel S. Rodriguez, editors.
    Summary: This book, written by members of the European network PROTEOSTASIS, provides an up-to-date review of the research regarding protein homeostasis in health and disease. With new discoveries contributing to the increasing complexity of this topic, the book offers a detailed overview of the pathways regulating protein homeostasis, including autophagy and the ubiquitin protein family. Following a basic introduction, it explains how defects in protein homeostasis contribute to numerous pathologies, including cancer, neurodegeneration, inflammation and a number of rare diseases. In addition, it discusses, the role of protein homeostasis in cellular development and physiology. Highlighting the latest research in the field of protein homeostasis and its implications for various clinically relevant diseases, the book appeals to researchers and clinicians, while also offering a reference guide for scholars who are new to the field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Part I: Cancer
    Chapter 1: Ubiquitin-Regulated Cell Proliferation and Cancer
    1.1 Introduction to Cell Cycle Regulation
    1.1.1 Regulation of CDK-Cyclin Activity by the UPS
    1.1.2 SCF in Cell Cycle Control
    1.1.3 SCF in DNA Damage
    1.1.4 APC/C and the Regulation of Mitosis
    1.2 Non-proteolytic Protein Ubiquitination in the Control of Cell Cycle Progression
    1.2.1 Cell Signaling and Non-proteolytic Protein Ubiquitination in G1
    1.2.2 Non-proteolytic Protein Ubiquitination During G1/S to G2 Transition 2.4.1.1 Ubiquitin E1 Inhibitors
    2.4.1.2 Nedd8 E1 Inhibitors
    2.4.1.3 SUMO E1 Inhibitors
    2.4.2 E2 Inhibitors
    2.4.3 E3 Inhibitors
    2.4.3.1 MDM2 Inhibitors
    2.4.3.2 IAP Inhibitors
    2.5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: The Proteasome System in Health and Disease
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 20S Proteasomes: Structure and Regulation
    3.2.1 Alternative Composition of the 20S Proteasome
    3.2.2 Expression and Assembly of the 20S Proteasome
    3.2.3 Activation of the 20S Proteasome
    3.2.4 Posttranslational Modifications (PTMs)
    3.2.5 Localization 3.4 Proteasomes in Diseased States
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Saizar, Pedro.
    Contents:
    Contents
    t. 2. Dientes artificiales. Materiales de base. Diagnóstico. Preparación quirúrgica. Prótesis inmediata. Reparaciones. Organismo y prótesis. Historia.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    S651 .S15 1938
    1
  • Digital
    Guillem Pons-Lladó, editor.
    Contents:
    1. MR sequences for cardiovascular applications and planning of studies
    2. Study protocol for Ischemic Heart Disease
    3. Study protocol for Cardiomyopathies
    4. Study protocol for Pericardial Diseases
    5. Study protocol for Cardiac Masses and Tumors
    6. Study protocol for Great Vessels
    7. Study protocol for Valvular Heart Disease
    8. Study protocol for Congenital Heart Disease
    9. Protocols for the practice of cardiac studies by Computed Tomography
    10. Post-processing and analysis of Cardiac CT studies.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by John T. Queenan, Catherine Y. Spong, Charles J. Lockwood.
    Summary: "The current acceleration in medical discoveries parallels Moore's law for computer chips. In the 1950's medical knowledge doubled every 50 years, by the 1980's it doubled every 7 years and now medical knowledge is estimated to double about every two months (1). How can busy obstetricians keep pace? Through 7 editions Protocols for High-Risk Pregnancies has helped address this exact challenge. Providing just-in-time content, its focus on protocols and guidelines helps organize medical thinking, avoid heuristic errors of omission and commission and optimize maternal and fetal outcomes"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Concerns in Pregnancy. Alcohol Use in Pregnancy and Lactation / Ruta M Nonacs
    Smoking, Vaping, and Nicotine Exposure / John Byrne, George Saade
    Opioid Use, Misuse, and Addiction in Pregnancy and Postpartum / Mishka Terplan
    Depression / Kimberly Yonkers
    Antenatal Testing. Prenatal Testing for Chromosomal Abnormalities / Mary E Norton
    Fetal Echocardiography / Joshua A Copel
    Clinical Use of Doppler / Henry L Galan
    Antepartum Testing / Michael P Nageotte
    Fetal Blood Sampling and Transfusion / Patricia Santiago-Munoz
    Preconception Genetic Screening / Lauren Sayres, Jeffrey A Kuller
    Maternal Disease. Maternal Anemia / Elaine Duryea
    Hemoglobinopathies in Pregnancy / Bradley Sipe, Judette Louis
    Fetal and Neonatal Alloimmune Thrombocytopenia / Russell Miller, Richard Berkowitz
    Rheumatological Disorders / Lisa R Sammaritano, Bonnie L Bermas
    Antiphospholipid Syndrome / Robert M Silver
    Inherited Thrombophilias / Andra H James, Jerome J Federspiel
    Valvular Heart Disease in Pregnancy / Blake Zwerling, Afshan B Hameed
    Peripartum Cardiomyopathy / Sarah Rae Easter, Carolyn M Zelop
    Thromboembolism / Michael J Paidas
    Renal Disease / Shivani Patel
    Obesity / Patrick S Ramsey
    Diabetes Mellitus / Mark B Landon, Steven G Gabbe
    Thyroid Disorders / Elizabeth O Buschur, Stephen F Thung
    Hepatitis in Pregnancy / Andrew Myers, Asa Oxner, John Sinnott, Christian Brechot
    Asthma / Michael Schatz
    Epilepsy / Thomas McElrath
    Chronic Hypertension / Michal Fishel Bartal, Baha M Sibai
    Cytomegalovirus, Genital Herpes, Rubella, and Toxoplasmosis / Kerry E Drury, Brenna L Hughes
    Syphilis / Emily H Adhikari
    Vector-Borne Diseases in Pregnancy / Karin Nielsen-Saines, Tara Kerin
    Influenza / Amanda C Zofkie, Vanessa Rogers
    Malaria / Blair J Wylie
    Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection / Emily H Adhikari
    Parvovirus B19 / Kathy C Matthews, Emilie L Vander Haar, Laura E Riley
    Group B Streptococcus / Caitlin A MacGregor, Mara J Dinsmoor
    Biliary, Liver, and Pancreatic Disease / Vic Velanovich, Elizabeth Hoover, Stephanie Ros
    Obstetric Problems. Cervical Insufficiency / Rupsa C Boelig, Vincenzo Berghella
    Nausea and Vomiting / Jared T Roeckner, Haywood L Brown
    Fetal Death and Stillbirth / Alexander M Saucedo, Robert M Silver
    Abnormal Amniotic Fluid Volume / Christina M Ackerman, Thomas R Moore, Heather S Lipkind
    Fetal Growth Restriction / Jodi S Dashe, Anne M Amb©Ưa
    Rh and Other Blood Group Alloimmunizations / Kenneth J Moise
    Preterm Labor / Hyagriv N Simhan
    Prevention of Preterm Birth / Anna King, Sarah JE Stock
    Premature Rupture of the Membranes / Brian M Mercer
    Indicated Late-Preterm and Early-Term Deliveries / Catherine Y Spong
    Chorioamnionitis / Catalin S Buhimschi, Irina A Buhimschi
    Third-Trimester Bleeding / Ilina D Pluym, Christina S Han
    Amniotic Fluid Embolism / Irene A Stafford, Michael A Belfort
    Preeclampsia / Michal Fishel Bartal, Baha M Sibai
    Labor and Delivery. Elective Induction of Labor / Rachel G Sinkey
    Electronic Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring / David A Miller
    Breech Delivery / G Justus Hofmeyr, Mercy-Nkuba Nassali
    Vaginal Birth After Cesarean / James R Scott
    Placenta Accreta Spectrum / Robert M Silver, Deirdre J Lyell
    Shoulder Dystocia / George A Macones, Robert B Gherman
    Twins, Triplets, and Beyond / Mary E D'Alton
    Postpartum Hemorrhage / David B Nelson
    Appendix A: Evaluation of Fetal Health and Defects.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Mathieu Vinken, Vera Rogiers.
    Contents:
    Isolation and culture of mouse hepatocytes
    Cryopreservation of hepatocytes
    Culture conditions promoting proliferation and cell cycle synchronization
    Immortalized human hepatic cell lines for In vitro testing and research purposes
    Culture and functional characterization of human hepatoma hepG2s
    Establishment and characterization of an in vitro model of Fas-mediated hepatocyte cell death
    Serum-free directed differentiation of human embryonic stem cells to hepatocytes
    Human skin-derived precursor Cells: isolation, expansion, and hepatic differentiation
    Generation of hepatocytes from pluripotent stem cells for drug screening and developmental modeling
    Differentiation-promoting medium additives for hepatocyte
    Cultivation and cryopreservation
    Coculture and long-term maintenance of hepatocytes
    Primary hepatocytes in sandwich culture
    Establishing liver bioreactors for In Vitro Research
    Epigenetic modifications as antidedifferentiation strategy for primary hepatocytes in culture
    Transfection of Primary Hepatocytes with Liver-enriched transcription factors using adenoviral vectors
    Transcriptomics of hepatocytes treated with Toxicants for Investigating Molecular mechanisms underlying hepatotoxicity
    Global microRNA analysis in primary hepatocyte Cultures
    Mass Spectrometry-Based proteomics for telative protein quantification and biomarker Identification in primary human Hepatocytes
    Targeted metabolomics for homocysteine-related metabolites in primary hepatocytes
    Measurement of cytochrome P450 Enzyme Induction and Inhibition in human hepatoma cells
    Analysis of sinusoidal drug uptake transporter activities in Primary Human Hepatocytes
    Measurement of albumin secretion as functionality test in primary hepatocyte cultures
    Measurembent of Blood Coagulation Factor Synthesis in cultures of human hepatocytes
    Functionality testing of primary hepatocytes in Culture by Measuring Urea Synthesis
    Assay of Bile acid conjugation and excretion in human hepatocytes
    General cytotoxicity assessment by Means of the MTT assay
    Measurement of apoptotic and necrotic cell death in primary hepatocyte cultures
    Critical factors in the Assessment of cholestatic liver injury In vitro
    In vitro cell culture models of hepatic steatosis
    Assessment of liver fibrotic Insults In Vitro.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Koji Tsuboi, Takeji Sakae, Ariungerel Gerelchuluun, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive, practical guide to understanding the physical and biological characteristics of proton beam radiotherapy. The application of proton beams to the treatment of solid cancers has expanded exponentially over the last decade due to their physical properties, which make it possible to administer higher doses of radiation to lesions with only a minimum dose to the surrounding healthy tissues. Accordingly, understanding the basic aspects of proton beam radiotherapy is a primary concern not only for medical physicists and radiation biologists, but also for all physicians involved in cancer treatment using proton beams. The major aspects discussed include the techniques development background, the generation and delivery system for proton beams, physical characteristics, biological consequences, dosimetry, and future prospects in both medical physics and radiation biology in terms of effective cancer treatment. Gathering contributions from experts who provide clear and detailed information on the basics of proton beams, the book will greatly benefit not only radiological technicians, medical physicists, and physicians, but also scientists in cancer radiotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Steven J. Frank, X. Ronald Zhu.
    Contents:
    Principles of radiobiology
    Principles of proton beam therapy
    Clinical commissioning of pencil beam scanning for intensity-modulated proton therapy
    Immobilization and simulation
    Principles of intensity-modulated proton therapy treatment planning
    Physics quality assurance
    Intensity-modulated proton therapy patient treatments
    Proton radiotherapy for breast cancer
    Adult central nervous system tumors
    Gastrointestinal
    Proton therapy for gynecologic malignancies
    Proton therapy for prostate cancer
    Head and neck
    Proton therapy for hematologic malignancies
    Pediatric considerations for proton therapy
    Proton therapy and sarcomas
    Esophagus cancer
    Lung cancer
    Technological advancements and outlook in proton therapy
    Appendices. The University of Texas MD Anderson cancer center’s recommended proton therapy indications
    MD Anderson cancer center head and neck proton case library.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Adam W. Dell, Jessica Robnett, Dana N. Johns, Emily M, Graham, Cori A. Agarwal, Lindsey Imber, Nicole L. Mihalopoulos ; with contributions by Brett Myers and Hayley McLaughlin.
    Summary: This book aids clinicians in supporting and caring for transgender and gender-diverse children and adolescents youth who are born into an incongruent body. A recent study using data from 19 states reported that 1.8% of American youth identified as transgender. Many people who are transgender will experience gender dysphoria, the intense emotional distress that is caused by a discrepancy between a person's gender identity and their sex assigned at birth. In this compact volume, the authors discuss the variety of domains involved in addressing gender dysmorphia: social, psychological, medical, and legislative/advocacy. They provide clear and concise information on the types and timing of gender-affirming medications and surgical interventions and offer useful suggestions for making interactions in the clinic and the clinical space inclusive for transgender and gender-diverse youth. Among the topics covered include: identity development and gender nonconformity in early childhood and puberty the importance of access to mental health professionals with expertise in gender nonconformity the responsible use of developmentally appropriate gender-affirming medications and surgical interventions related clinical issues such as nutrition counselling for youth receiving gender-affirming treatments creating a safe and inclusive healthcare environment for transgender and gender-diverse youth advocating for transgender and gender-diverse patients by working with local and national policy makers Providing Affirming Care to Transgender and Gender-Diverse Youth is essential reading for pediatric healthcare professionals including physicians in pediatrics and family medicine, plastic surgeons, nurses, dietitians, psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, and other practitioners. Students in these fields as well as policy makers also would find this a useful resource.

    Contents:
    Providing affirming care to transgender and gender-diverse youth
    Introduction
    Identity development and mental health
    Gender affirmation: medical
    Gender affirmation: surgical
    Related clinical issues
    Equity and inclusivity.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Michelle Croston, Ian Hodgson, editors.
    Summary: This very first book helps nurses and healthcare practitioners working in the field of HIV care across European to have practical examples of how they could improve/ adapt their services to improve outcomes for people living with HIV. It provides the reader with both knowledge on a variety of different HIV related topic areas and also helps them to translate this learning into a clinical setting. The main focus of the book is to share best practice in HIV nursing, with the aim of providing a practical guide from multiple countries to improve outcomes for people living with HIV. The book also acts as a resource to healthcare practitioners who are interested in working in many places in the world or carrying out research in HIV care.

    Contents:
    The changing landscape of HIV care: Humanistic approaches to care delivery
    How do HIV nurses contribute to HIV care delivery?
    Leadership in HIV nursing: pathing the future
    HIV care in rural areas
    Innovations in care delivery: the need to think creatively
    Reaching vulnerable population to provide care
    Working with young people living with HIV who have cognitive impairment
    Women and HIV
    Maximising LGBTQ access to services
    Care considerations for ageing with HIV
    HIV and Ageing: managing with frailty
    From prevention to successful treatment outcomes: Why we need more engagement of nurse in eastern Europe
    Activism and Community
    Reducing the power of shame: a compassion focused approach for people living with HIV
    Who cares for the workforce? : developing mindfulness and resilience.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Thomas Youm.
    Summary: Currently, there are no texts focused on proximal hamstring pathology and surgical treatment options. While midsubstance muscle tears of the hamstring are typically treated non-operatively, proximal hamstring tears often require surgery, which can create anxiety for the orthopedic surgeon, as the exposure is deep and the sciatic nerve is at risk for injury. Moreover, the algorithm for repairing proximal hamstring tears is complex, as the spectrum of pathology starts from partial tears to acute tears to chronic tears with varying degrees of retraction. With the advent of arthroscopic procedures around the hip, innovative treatment methods such as endoscopic surgery have been utilized to repair the proximal hamstring. For successful treatment of chronic hamstring tendon tears, allograft reconstruction has been shown to be successful. The book opens with a thorough review of the relevant functional anatomy of the hamstring and related structures, before moving on to discuss epidemiology, classification and biomechanics of injury. The main focus, however, is on treatment strategies, from non-operative methods, including cutting-edge biologics, to open, endoscopic and arthroscopic approaches for partial, acute and chronic tears. The management of complications and rehabilitation protocols round out the presentation. Detailed illustrative case examples provide real-world demonstration of each chapter's concepts. Practical and user-friendly, Proximal Hamstring Tears will be very useful for the sports medicine, orthopedic surgery, rehabilitation medicine, and physical therapy communities.

    Contents:
    Functional Anatomy of the Hamstrings
    Epidemiology, Biomechanics and Classification of Proximal Hamstring Injuries
    Non-operative Treatment of Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Surgical Treatment of Partial Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Surgical Treatment of Acute Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Surgical Treatment of Chronic Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Endoscopic Treatment of Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Open vs. Endoscopic Approaches to Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears: Techniques, Pearls and Pitfalls
    Surgical Complications of Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Biological Treatment of Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Rehabilitation after Surgery for Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Proximal Hamstring Injury Rehabilitation and Injury Prevention.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Lynn A. Crosby, Robert J. Neviaser, editors.
    Summary: Proximal Humerus Fractures includes everything the orthopedic surgeon needs to know about the clinical management of these common shoulder injuries. Although non-operative treatment techniques are addressed and can be used in less severe circumstances, this book focuses mainly on the current operative treatment techniques for proximal humerus and tuberosity fractures, malunions and nonunions, including open reduction, percutaneous pinning, locking plate and intramedullary nail fixation, and humeral head hemiarthroplasty and reverse shoulder arthroplasty. A chapter on complications associated with these types of fractures and their management is also included. Dedicated to a common musculoskeletal injury, especially in athletes and the elderly suffering from osteoporosis, Proximal Humerus Fractures will be a valuable resource to all orthopedic surgeons and practitioners of sports medicine.

    Contents:
    Anatomy and Classification of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Non-operative Treatment of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Closed Reduction and Percutaneous Fixation of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Tuberosity Fractures
    Intramedullary Locking Nail Fixation of Proximal Humerus Fractures: Rationale and Technique
    Proximal Humeral Locking Plates for Displaced Fractures of the Proximal Humeral Humerus
    Hemiarthroplasty for the Treatment of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Reverse Shoulder Arthroplasty for Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Complications of Treatment of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Evaluation and Management of Proximal Humerus Nonunions and Malunions.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Amelia K. Hausauer, Derek H. Jones.
    Contents:
    Platelet-rich plasma : mechanism and practical considerations / Brian J. Abittan and Gary Goldenberg
    Platelet-rich plasma and fibrin sealants in plastic surgery : clinical applications and one practice's experience / Kamakshi Zeidler and R. Lawrence Berkowitz
    Platelet-rich plasma for rejuvenation and augmentation / Jeanette M. Black and Lisa M. Donofrio
    Platelet-rich plasma for alopecia and hair restoration / Jeffrey A. Rapaport, Sarah G. Versteeg, and Aditya K. Gupta
    Microneedling : mechanism and practical considerations / Amelia K. Hausauer
    Microneedling : clinical applications / Tina S. Alster and Brenda L. Pellicane
    Microneedling and radiofrequency / Chatchadaporn Chunharas, Douglas C. Wu, and Mitchel P. Goldman
    Applications and safety in skin of color / Naissan O. Wesley and DiAnne S. Davis
    Combination therapies / Peter W. Hashim and Gary Goldenberg
    Complications associated with PRP and microneedling in aesthetic medicine / Tatjana Pavicic and Matthias Aust.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Zhihong Gao, editor.
    Summary: This book reviews the current status of P. mume research, highlighting how the new data coming from the release of the P. mume genomes can advance science and help to solve a number of problems facing the P. mume industry. Prunus mume, which was domesticated in China more than 3,000 years ago as an ornamental plant and for its fruit, is one of the first genomes among the Prunus subfamilies of the Rosaceae family that has been sequenced. Combining the P. mume genome with available data, scientists have succeeded in reconstructing nine ancestral chromosomes of the Rosaceae family, as well as the chromosome fusion, fission and duplication history of three major subfamilies. The P. mumegenome sequence adds to our understanding of Rosaceae evolution and provides an important basis for the improvement of fruit trees. This book offers an essential a guide for all those who are interested in gene discovery, comparative genomics, molecular breeding and new breeding techniques; and will be particularly useful for scientists, breeders, university students, and public sector institutes that are involved in the P. mume industry and/or Rosaceae research.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface to the Series; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Abbreviations; 1 Production and Academic Importance of Prunus mume; Abstract; 1.1 Prunus mume Production in Eastern Asia; 1.2 Medicinal Values of Prunus mume; References; 2 Origin and Evolution of Prunus mume; Abstract; 2.1 Origin of Prunus mume; 2.2 Origin of Prunus mume; 2.3 The Evolution of Prunus mume; 2.4 Conclusions; References; 3 Botanical Description of Prunus mume; Abstract; 3.1 Growth Characteristics; 3.1.1 Tree Characteristics; 3.1.2 Roots; 3.1.3 Buds, Branches and Leaves; 3.1.3.1 Buds; 3.1.3.2 Branches; 3.1.3.3 Leaves 3.2 Fruiting Characteristics3.2.1 Fruiting Branch Types; 3.2.1.1 Water Sprout/Shoot; 3.2.1.2 Long Fruit Branch; 3.2.1.3 Medium Fruit Branch; 3.2.1.4 Short Branch; 3.2.1.5 Ultrashort or Tiny Fruit Branch; 3.2.1.6 Needle Branch; 3.2.2 Flower Dud Differentiation; 3.2.3 Flowering and Fruiting; 3.2.4 Fruit Development; 3.2.5 Fruit Drop; 3.2.5.1 First Fruit Drop; 3.2.5.2 Second Fruit Drop; 3.2.5.3 Third Fruit Drop; 3.3 Phenological Period; 3.3.1 Flowering Period; 3.3.2 Leaf-Opening Period; 3.3.3 Abscission and Dormancy Period; 3.4 Requirements in Terms of External Environmental Conditions 3.4.1 Temperature3.4.2 Precipitation; 3.4.3 Light; 3.4.4 Soil; 3.4.5 Other Environmental Conditions; References; 4 Taxonomy and Germplasm of Prunus mume; Abstract; 4.1 Overview, Criteria and Basis of Classification in Prunus Mume; 4.1.1 Overview of Classification; 4.1.2 Criteria and Basis of Classification; 4.2 Classification of Prunus mume; 4.2.1 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc; 4.2.2 Subspecies Group; 4.2.2.1 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. pleiocar Pa Maxim; 4.2.2.2 Prunus Mume Sieb. et Zucc, Var. Pallescens Franch; 4.2.2.3 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. cernua Franch 4.2.2.4 Prunus Mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. microcarpa Makino4.2.2.5 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. bungo Makino; 4.2.2.6 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. goethartiana Kochne; 4.2.2.7 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. pallidus Bao et Chen; 4.2.2.8 Prunus Mume Sieb. et Zucc. F. sempervirens Bao et Chen; 4.3 Prunus mume Varieties and Excellent Strains; References; 5 The Genome of Prunus mume; Abstract; 5.1 Plant Material; 5.2 Methods; 5.2.1 DNA Preparation and Whole-Genome Shotgun Sequencing; 5.2.2 K-mer Analysis; 5.2.3 Genome Assembly; 5.2.4 Estimation of Heterozygosity Rate 5.2.5 Whole-Genome Mapping5.2.6 Identification of RAD Markers; 5.2.7 Genetic Map Construction and Scaffold Anchoring; 5.2.8 Identification of Repetitive Elements; 5.2.9 Gene Prediction; 5.2.10 RNA-seq Data Generation; 5.2.11 Gene Annotation; 5.2.12 Identification of Noncoding RNA Genes; 5.2.13 Comparative Genome Analysis; 5.2.14 Identification of Duplicate and Syntenic Regions; 5.2.15 Identification of CBF and BEAT Genes; 5.3 Results; 5.3.1 Sequencing and Assembly; 5.3.2 Genome Annotation; 5.3.3 Genome Evolution; 5.3.4 Reconstruction of Ancestral Chromosomes of Rosaceae; 5.3.5 Early Blooming of P. Mume
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Laura Poliseno.
    Contents:
    Pseudogene redux with new biological significance / Leonardo Salmena
    Contribution of pseudogenes to sequence diversity / Mauno Vihinen
    Computational methods for pseudogene annotation based on sequence homology / Paul M. Harrison
    Computational methods of identification of pseudogenes based on functionality : entropy and GC content / Evgeniy S. Balakirev ... [et al.]
    Methods of identification of pseudogenes based on functionality : hybridization of 18S rRNA and mRNA during translation / Chuanhua Xing
    Whole-genome identification of neutrally evolving pseudogenes using the evolutionary measure dN/dS / Lise Olivia Andrieux and David Torrents Arenales
    Methods to study the occurrence and the evolution of pseudogenes through a phylogenetic approach / Jacques Dainat and Pierre Pontarotti
    Methods for detecting transcribed pseudogenes : PCR on regions of high sequence similarity followed by cloning and sequencing / Wenyong Ding and Jianwu Dai
    RNA amplification for pseudogene detection using RNA-Seq / Stephen C. M. Tsoi and Michael K. Dyck
    GENCODE pseudogenes / Adam Frankish and Jennifer Harrow
    Methods to detect transcribed pseudogenes : RNA-Seq discovery allows learning through features / Camilo Valdes and Enrico Capobianco
    Proteomics techniques for the detection of translated pseudogenes / Nadia Ucciferri and Silvia Rocchiccioli
    Pseudogenes as competitive endogenous RNAs : target prediction and validation / Florian A. Karreth ... [et al.]
    Pseudogenes : a novel source of trans-acting antisense RNAs / Per Johnsson, Kevin V. Morris, and Dan Grandér
    Pseudogene-derived endogenous siRNAs and their function / Wen-Ling Chan and Jan-Gowth Chang
    Methods to study translated pseudogenes : in vitro translation, fusion with a tag/reporter gene, and complementation assay / Anne Parle-McDermott
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Natalia Jura, James M. Murphy.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Alain Filloux, Juan-Luis Ramos.
    Contents:
    Gene transfer : transduction / Emanuela Frangipani
    Gene transfer : transformation/electroporation / Frédéric Cadoret, Chantal Soscia, and Romé Voulhoux
    Gene transfer : conjugation / Thibault G. Sana, Aurélie Laubier, and Sophie Bleves
    Pseudomonas bacteriophage isolation and production / Joana Azeredo, Sanna Sillankorva, and Diana P. Pires
    Genotyping methods / Burkhard Tümmler
    Drug susceptibility testing by dilution methods / Katy Jeannot and Patrick Plésiat
    Plate-based assay for swimming motility in Pseudomonas aeruginosa / Dae-Gon Ha, Sherry L. Kuchma, and George A. O'Toole
    Plate-based assay for swarming motility in Pseudomonas aeruginosa / Dae-Gon Ha, Sherry L. Kuchma, and George A. O'Toole
    Motility assay : twitching motility / Lynne Turnbull and Cynthia B. Whitchurch
    Qualitative and quantitative assays for flagellum- mediated chemotaxis / José Antonio Reyes Darias [and five others]
    Microscopic analysis : morphotypes and cellular appendages / Olga Zaborina, John Alverdy, Megha Shah, and Yimei Chen
    Determination of lipolytic enzyme activities / Karl-Erich Jaeger and Filip Kovacic
    Elastinolytic and proteolytic enzymes / Efrat Kessler and Mary Safrin
    In vitro assays to monitor the activity of Pseudomonas aeruginosa type III secreted proteins / Stephanie L. Rolsma and Dara W. Frank
    Cell fractionation / Bérengère Ize, Véronique Viarre, and Romé Voulhoux
    Characterization of molecular interactions using isothermal titration calorimetry / Tino Krell [and seven others]
    Proteomic analysis / Pascal Cosette and Thierry Jouenne
    Membrane proteomics of Pseudomonas aeruginosa / Zofia Magnowska, Isabel Hartmann, Lothar Jänsch, and Dieter Jahn
    Construction of Pseudomonas aeruginosa two-hybrid libraries for high-throughput assays / Sophie de Bentzmann and Christophe Bordi
    Biosensors for qualitative and semiquantitative analysis of quorum sensing signal molecules / Matthew Fletcher [and tree others]
    LC-MS/MS quantitative analysis of quorum sensing signal molecules / Catharine A. Ortori [and four others]
    LC/MS/MS-based quantitative assay for the secondary messenger molecule, c-di-GMP / Yasuhiko Irie and Matthew R. Parsek
    Metabolic footprinting : extracellular metabolomic analysis / Volker Behrends, Huw D. Williams, and Jacob G. Bundy
    Pyoverdine and pochelin measurements / Françoise Hoegy, Gaetan L. A. Mislin, and Isabelle J. Schalk
    Measurement of phenazines in bacterial cultures / Suzanne E. Kern and Dianne K. Newman
    Extraction and measurement of NAD(P)+ and NAD(P)H / Suzanne E. Kern, Alexa Price-Whelan, and Dianne K. Newman
    Cyanide measurements in bacterial culture and sputum / Chandrika Goh Nair, Ben Ryall, and Huw D. Williams
    Monitoring iron uptake by siderophores / Françoise Hoegy and Isabelle J. Schalk
    Exopolysaccharide quantification / Irina Sadovskaya
    Liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry for the identification and quantification of rhamnolipids / Ahmad Mohammad Abdel-Mawgoud, François Lépine, and Eric Déziel
    LPS quantitation procedures / Joseph S. Lam, Erin M. Anderson, and Youai Hao
    Monitoring lectin interactions with carbohydrates / Sophie de Bentzmann, Annabelle Varrot, and Anne Imberty
    Mining the Pseudomonas genome / Geoffrey L. Winsor and Fiona S. L. Brinkman
    Identification of bacterial small RNAs by RNA sequencing / María Gómez-Lozano [and three others.]
    Gene amplification and qRT-PCR / Cerith Jones and Alain Filloux
    The Standard European Vector Architecture (SEVA) plasmid toolkit / Gonzalo Durante-Rodríguez, Víctor de Lorenzo, and Esteban Martínez-García
    Chromosomal integration of transcriptional fusions / Rafael Silva-Rocha and Víctor de Lorenzo
    A method to capture large DNA fragments from genomic DNA / Geneviève Ball, Alain Filloux, and Romé Voulhoux
    Transposon mutagenesis / Hemantha D. Kulasekara
    Site-directed mutagenesis and gene deletion using reverse genetics / Daniela Muhl and Alain Filloux
    Signature-tagged mutagenesis / Irena Kukavica-Ibrulj and Roger C. Levesque
    Construction of a Pseudomonas aeruginosa genomic DNA library / Christophe Bordi
    Strategy for genome sequencing analysis and assembly for comparative genomics of Pseudomonas genomes / Julie Jeukens [and three others]
    Promoter fusions with optical outputs in individual cells and in populations / Ilaria Benedetti and Victor de Lorenzo
    Chromatin immunoprecipitation for ChIP-chip and ChIP-seq / Sebastian Schulz and Susanne Häussler
    Transcriptional analysis of Pseudomonas aeruginosa infected Caenorhabditis elegans / Ashleigh MacKenzie [and three others]
    Methods for studying biofilm formation : flow cells and confocal laser scanning microscopy / Tim Tolker-Nielsen and Claus Sternberg
    Biofilm formation in the 96-well microtiter plate / Barbara M. Coffey and Gregory G. Anderson
    Methods for studying biofilm dispersal in Pseudomonas aeruginosa / Nicolas Barraud [and three others]
    Pseudomonas aeruginosa PA14 pathogenesis in Caenorhabditis elegans / Natalia V. Kirienko [and three others]
    Assessing Pseudomonas aeruginosa virulence using a nonmammalian host : Dictyostelium discoideum / Geneviève Filion and Steve J. Charette
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence with nonmammalian host : Galleria mellonella / Gudrun Koch [and three others]
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence with the nonmammalian host model : Arabidopsis thaliana / Regina L. Baldini, Melissa Starkey, and Laurence G. Rahme
    Assessing Pseudomonas aeruginosa persister/antibiotic tolerant cells / Ronen Hazan [and three others]
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence with nonmammalian host : Zebrafish / María A. Llamas and Astrid M. van der Sar
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence with a nonmammalian host : Drosophila melanogaster / Samantha Haller, Stefanie Limmer, and Dominique Ferrandon
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence using host cells / Iwona Bucior, Cindy Tran, and Joanne Engel
    Assessing Pseudomonas aeruginosa virulence and the host response using murine models of acute and chronic lung infection / Irena Kukavica-Ibrulj [and four others]
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence using mammalian models : acute infection model / Antje Munder and Burkhard Tümmler
    Burn mouse models / Henrik Calum, Niels Høiby, and Claus Moser.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Fuxiang Zhang, Alan Sugar, Graham D. Barrett.
    Contents:
    Optics and neurophysiology of pseudophakic monovision
    Non-pseudophakic monovision
    Pseudophakic monovision
    Ocular comorbidities and pseudophakic monovision
    Special situations
    Limitations of pseudophakic monovision.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
  • Digital
    edited by M. Alan Menter, Caitriona Ryan.
    Contents:
    1. The history of psoriasis
    2. Epidemiology
    3. Microscopic findings
    4. Genetics
    5. Immunology
    6. Other environmental risk factors
    7. Plaque-type psoriasis- chronic plaque, guttate, and erythrodermic phenotypes
    8. Palmoplantar psoriasis
    9. Generalized pustular psoriasis
    10. Inverse psoriasis and genital disease
    11. Nail psoriasis
    12. Differential diagnoses of psoriasis
    13. Genetics, immunology, and pathogenesis
    14. Psoriatic arthritis: clinical manifestations
    15. Pediatric psoriasis
    16. Cardiometabolic comorbidities
    17. Psychiatric comorbidities
    18. Other disease associations: liver, gastrointestinal, respiratory, and neoplastic
    19. Assessment and measurement of disease
    20. Current and future topical treatments for psoriasis
    21. Phototherapy and photochemotherapy
    22. Traditional systemic therapies and monitoring guidelines
    23. Current biologic therapies (including IL-17) and monitoring guidelines
    24. Current and future oral small molecules
    25. Biologic therapies in the pipeline
    26. Future directions and personalized medicine
    27. Conclusion
    Index.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Adewale Adebajo, Wolf-Henning Boehncke, Dafna D. Gladman, Philip J. Mease, editors.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Historical Aspects
    1. Historical Perspectives on Psoriatic Arthritis
    2. GRAPPA Historical Perspective
    Section 2. Epidemiological Aspects
    3. Classification Criteria for Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    4. Epidemiology of Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    5. The Natural History of Psoriatic Arthritis
    Section 3. Pathological and Genetic Aspects
    6. Immunopathogenesis of Psoriasis Skin and Nail
    7. Immunopathology of the Psoriatic Arthritis Musculoskeletal Lesions
    8. Innate and Acquired Cellular Immune Responses in Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    9. Cytokine Pathways in Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    10. Genetics of Psoriasis
    11. Update on the Genetics of Psoriatic Arthritis
    12. Animal Models of Psoriasis and PSoriatic Arthritis
    13. Mechanisms of Bone Remodelling in Psoriatic Arthritis
    Section 4. Clinical Aspects
    14. Psoriasis
    15. Scalp Psoriasis: Clinical Features and Assessment
    16. Nail Psoriasis: Clinical Features and Assessment
    17. Psoriatic Arthritis
    Section 5. Imaging
    18. Imaging Tools in Skin and Nail Psoriasis
    19. Radiographic Assessment of Psoriatic Arthritis (PsA)
    20. Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis: Ultrasound Applications
    21. Magnetic Resonance Imaging in Psoriatic Arthritis
    22. Future Trends in Imaging Modalities for Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    Section 6. Laboratory Tests
    23. Relevant Laboratory Tests and Therapeutic Monitoring in Psoriasis
    24. Laboratory Tests for Psoriatic Arthritis. Section 7. Management Aspects
    25. Paradigms of Treatment in PsA
    26. Topical and Systemic Therapies for Moderate-to-severe Psoriasis.-27. Oral Non-Biologic Therapies and Non-Pharmacological Therapies in PsA
    28. Biologic Therapy for Psoriasis
    29. Biologic Therapy of Psoriatic Arthritis.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Tanya Calvey.
    Summary: "We are in the midst of what is being called the 'psychedelic renaissance' with growing interest into how psychedelics alter consciousness, brain function and brain connectivity. The acute, often profound, effects of the psychedelic experience can induce lasting improvements in mental health demonstrating that chemistry forms the basis of mystical experience, consciousness and mental wellbeing"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    An introduction to psychedelic neuroscience / Tanya Calvey and Fleur M. Howells
    The renaissance in psychedelic research: what do preclinical models have to offer / Kevin S. Murnane
    D-Lysergic acid diethylamide, psilocybin, and other classic hallucinogens: mechanism of action and potential therapeutic applications in mood disorders / Danilo De Gregorio, Justine P. Enns, Nicolas A. Nuñez, Luca Posa and Gabriella Gobbi
    Common neural signatures of psychedelics: frequency-specific energy changes and repertoire expansion revealed using connectome-harmonic decomposition / Selen Atasoy, Jakub Vohryzek, Gustavo Deco, Robin L. Carhart-Harris and Morten L. Kringelbach
    A case report SPECT study and theoretical rationale for the sequential administration of ibogaine and 5-MeO-DMT in the treatment of alcohol use disorder / Joseph Barsuglia, Martin Polanco, Robert Palmer, Benjamin Malcolm, Benjamin Kelmendi and Tanya Calvey
    Advances and challenges in neuroimaging studies on the effects of serotonergic hallucinogens: contributions of the resting brain / Felix Müller, Matthias E. Liechti, Undine E. Lang and Stefan Borgwardt
    Neurocognitive effects of cannabis: lessons learned from human experimental studies / Marco Colizzi and Sagnik Bhattacharyya
    Ibogaine as a treatment for substance misuse: potential benefits and practical dangers / John Martin Corkery.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Katie Evans, Debra Nizette, Anthony O'Brien ; UK adapting author, Catherine Johnson ; foreword by Gemma Stacey.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2020
  • Digital
    Sanjeev Sockalingam, Raed Hawa, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed to present a comprehensive, state-of the-art approach to assessing and managing bariatric surgery and psychosocial care. Unlike any other text, this book focuses on developing a biopsychosocial understanding of patients' obesity journey and psychosocial factors contributing to their obesity and its management from an integrated perspective. Psychiatric Care in Severe Obesity takes a 360 approach by covering the disease's prevalence and relationship to psychiatric illness and social factors, including genetics, neurohormonal pathways and development factors for obesity. This book presents evidence and strategies for assessing psychiatric issues in severe obesity and uses common psychiatric presentations to feature the impact on bariatric surgery and key assessment features for weight loss. Concluding chapters focus on evidence-based psychosocial treatments for supporting patients with weight loss and bariatric surgery and includes educational tools and checklists for assessment, treatment, and care. Experts on non-pharmacological interventions such as mindfulness, cognitive-behavioral therapy and nutrition education describe treatment approaches in each modality, concluding with pharmacological approaches for psychiatric conditions and eating pathology. Additional tools in the appendices support clinicians, making this the ultimate guide for managing psychiatric illness in patients suffering from severe obesity. As obesity continues to grow in prevalence as a medically recognized epidemic, Psychiatric Care in Severe Obesity serves a vital resource to medical students, psychiatrists, psychologists, bariatric surgeons, primary care physicians, dietitians, mental health nurses, social workers, and all medical professionals working with severely obese patients.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Severe Obesity for Psychiatrists
    Severe Obesity: A Patient's Perspective
    Causes and Treatment of Obesity: From Genes to Integrated Care Models
    Causes of Severe Obesity: Gene to Environment
    Insecure Attachment and Trauma in Obesity and Bariatric Surgery
    Medical Complications Resulting from Severe Obesity
    Overview of Medical & Surgical Treatment of Severe Obesity
    Integrated Models for Severe Obesity Management: Role for Psychosocial Teams
    Weight-Based Stigma and Body Image in Severe Obesity
    Mood Disorders and Severe Obesity
    Eating Disorders in Severe Obesity
    Addictive Disorders in Severe Obesity and After Bariatric Surgery
    Sleep and Severe Obesity
    Psychiatric Suitability Assessment for Bariatric Surgery
    Nutrition Education for Severe Obesity
    The Role of Social Support in Weight Loss Management for Morbidly Obese Individuals
    Motivational Interviewing for Severe Obesity
    Mindful Eating for Severe Obesity
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Severe Obesity
    Psychosocial/Behavioral Interventions in the Severely Mentally Ill
    Young Adulthood and Obesity Management: Developmental Issues and Transition of Care.-Technology to Promote Obesity Self-Management
    Pharmacological Treatment for Severe Obesity in Psychiatric Patients
    Psychopharmacology in Bariatric Surgery Patients
    Integrative Case and Summary.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Kathleen M. Prendergast, Kasey B. Jackman.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey
    ScienceDirect
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    40
  • Digital
    Alyson Gorun, Anna M. Kim, Christian Umfrid, Janna Gordon-Elliott, editors.
    Summary: This book guides psychiatry trainees through some of the most common psychiatric consultation requests in the general medical hospital, using accessible, case-based narratives. Clinical case scenarios are used to demonstrate how to consider both medical and psychological factors involved in the consultation, and the approach to challenging interpersonal dynamics that may occur between the hospitalized patient and the primary medical team. Each case illustrates how to begin to think like a consultation-liaison psychiatrist in order to arrive at a diagnosis and formulate a treatment plan in complex clinical situations. Cases unfold in real time to highlight the critical role of the psychiatrist as liaison to the patient and medical team in order to guide psychiatric management and facilitate effective communication and treatment in the hospital. In addition to clinical cases, each chapter features a concise list of strategies to identify and address patient symptoms and behaviors, interpersonal dynamics, and barriers to care that arise in the hospital. The Psychiatric Consult features resident-specific recommendations and a case-based format that make it a unique, realistic, and engaging learning tool.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Delirium
    Chapter 3: Altered Mental Status
    Chapter 4: Substance Intoxication and Withdrawal
    Chapter 5: Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV)
    Chapter 6: The Postpartum Patient
    Chapter 7: Mood Secondary to Medical Condition
    Chapter 8: Somatic Symptom Disorder
    Chapter 9: Malingering
    Chapter 10: The Suicidal Patient
    Chapter 11: Behaviors Interfering with Care
    Chapter 12: Adjustment Disorder
    Chapter 13: Major Neurocognitive Disorder.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, Lisa L. Boyle, editors.
    Summary: "Though mental health recommendations for the elderly is rapidly evolving, the few current textbooks on this subject are either too voluminous or complex for regular review by clinicians, and most do not contain the latest information available in the field. Written by experts in geriatric psychiatry, this book provides a comprehensive yet concise review of the subject. The text covers topics that include the social aspect of aging, treatment and diagnosis options unique to the elderly in need of psychiatric care, policy and ethics, and particular geriatric health concerns that may influence psychiatric considerations. Psychiatric disorders late in life is the ultimate resource for practicing psychiatrists, physicians, geriatricians, and medical students concerned with the mental healthcare of the elderly"--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Life course : developmental and transitional events / Nisha Mehta-Naik
    Demography and epidemiology / Sarah J. De Asis
    Culture and gender / Brandon C. Yarns
    Family and community / Jessica Koenig, Aurora Osteen, and Erica C. Garcia-Pittman
    Economics and health policy / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, Ashmita Banerjee, and Ravi Chivukula
    Neuroanatomy and neuropathology / Katherine Rice Goettsche, Caitlin Snow, and Jimmy Avari
    Biochemistry and neuropharmacology / Jimmy Avari, Katherine Rice Goettsche, and Caitlin Snow
    Anatomy and physiology / Caitline Snow, Katherine Rice Goettsche, and Jimmy Avari
    Interviewing and history taking / Lisa L. Boyle and Ali Abbas Asghar-Ali
    Mental status examination / Ali Abbas Asghar-Ali and Lisa L. Boyle
    Functional assessment / Lisa L. Boyle
    Psychological and neuropsychological testing / Lisa L. Boyle
    Neurologic examination / Lisa L. Boyle
    Clinical laboratory testing / Lisa L. Boyle
    Structural and functional imaging / Vimal M. Aga
    Neurocognitive disorders / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, Wynnelena C. Canio, Poorvanshi Alag, Dhweeja Dasarathy, and Joel P. Dey
    Depressive disorders and bipolar and related disorders / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, M. Ingre Walters, Geetha Manikkara, Poorvanshi Alag, and Garima Garg
    Sleep disorders / Nery A. Diaz
    Schizophrenia spectrum and other psychotic disorders / Michael Reinhardt, Dina Ghoneim, Bronwyn Huggins, Anup Mani, Tessa Murante, and Carl Cohen
    Substance-related and addictive disorders / Rachel D. Maree and Craig A. Riccelli
    Anxiety disorders / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, Suneela Cherlopalle, and Silpa Balachandran
    Sexual dysfunctions, gender dysphoria, and paraphilic disorders / Raman Marwaha, Poorvanshi Alag, and Amit Thour
    Intellectual disability in the elderly / Joanna C. Lim, Laurel J. Bessey, Pallavi Joshi, and Lisa L. Boyle
    Personality disorders / Karin Kerfoot
    Pharmacology and psychopharmacology / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, and Mallika Lavakumar
    Electroconvulsive therapy / Ali Ahsan Ali, Garima Garg, Deena J. Tampi, and Rajesh R. Tampi
    Psychotherapy / Brandon C. Yarns
    Multidisciplinary approaches / Jennifer Jacobson, Ashley Trust, Erica C. Garcia-Pittman, and Gayle Ayers
    Setting-specific treatment issues / Azziza Oluwakemi Bankole and Mamta Sapra
    Special management problems / Rosanne M. Radziewicz and Cheryl Bradas
    Policy, ethical, and legal issues / Aarti Gupta and Meera Balasubramaniam
    Care of patients with neurologic disease / Sophia Wang
    Psychiatric disorders due to a general medical condition / Michael C. Hann, Aaron Meyer, Evan N. Caporaso, and Thomas Wolfgang Klotz
    Psychological factors affecting medical conditions / Kalya Vardi.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Manfred Gerlach, Andreas Warnke, Laurence Greenhill, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive survey of the current state of knowledge in the field of neuro-psychopharmacology in childhood and adolescence. In the first part, the essentials of neuro-psychopharmacology are presented in order to provide a deeper understanding of the principles and particularities in the pharmacotherapy of children and adolescents. This part includes information on neurotransmitters and signal transduction pathways, molecular brain structures as targets for psychiatric drugs, characteristics of psychopharmacological therapy in children and adolescents, ontogenetic influences on pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics, and pharmacotherapy in the outpatient setting. The part on classes of psychiatric medications, which covers antidepressants, antipsychotics, anxiolytics and sedative-hypnotics, mood stabilizers, and psychostimulants and other drugs used in the treatment of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder, provides sufficient background material to better understand how psychoactive drugs work, and why, when, and for whom they should be used. For each drug within a class, information on its mechanisms of action, clinical pharmacology, indications, dosages, and cognate issues are reviewed. In the third part, the disorder-specific and symptom-oriented medication is described and discerningly evaluated from a practical point of view, providing physicians with precise instructions on how to proceed. Psychiatric Drugs in Children and Adolescents includes numerous tables, figures and illustrations and offers a valuable reference work for child and adolescent psychiatrists and psychotherapists, pediatricians, general practitioners, psychologists, and nursing staff, as well as teachers.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of Neuropsychopharmacology
    Special Features of Psychopharmacological Therapy in Children and Adolescents
    Pharmacotherapy in the Outpatient Practice
    Antidepressants
    Antipsychotics
    Anxiolytics and Sedative-Hypnotics
    Mood Stabilizers
    Psychostimulants and Other Drugs Used in the Treatment of Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD)
    Aggressive and Autoaggressive Behavior, Impulse Control Disorder, and Conduct Disorder
    Alcohol-Related Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders and Phobias
    Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorders
    Autism Spectrum Disorders
    Depressive Disorders
    Drug- or Substance-Related Disorders
    Eating Disorders
    Elective (Selective) Mutism
    Encopresis
    Enuresis and Functional Urinary Incontinence
    Manic Episode and Bipolar Affective Disorder
    Obsessive-Compulsive Disorders
    Personality Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders in Children and Adolescents with Intellectual Disability
    Psychiatric Emergency Therapy in Children and Adolescents
    Schizophrenia
    Sleep Disorders
    Tic Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Meera Balasubramaniam, Aarti Gupta, Rajesh R. Tampi, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive view of ethical, medicolegal, and forensic issues common to aging psychiatric patients. Written by experts in the field, this volume includes assessments of each patients capacity to make decisions, live independently, manage finances, drive a vehicle, have sexual relations, and a wide array of other topics in the context of ethics and the law. The text also discusses guardianship and care for patients who are no longer fit to handle their own care and the ethical dilemmas associated with these challenges. Finally, the text covers aging adults in the criminal justice system from an epidemiological perspective--a problem that is steadily increasing in many nations, including the United States. Psychiatric Ethics in Late-Life Patients is an excellent resource for all physicians navigating legal and ethical scenarios involving aging patients, including general, geriatric, and forensic psychiatrists, geriatricians, primary care providers, geriatric nurses, social workers, public health officials, and all others.

    Contents:
    Aging: Balancing Autonomy and Beneficence
    The capacity to make medical decisions
    The Capacity to Live Independently
    The Capacity to Manage Finances
    Capacity to Manage Critical Domains of Living: Driving, Voting and Sexual Expression
    Ethical Issues in Dementia: An Overview
    Research Ethics in Geriatric Psychiatry
    Advance Health Care Planning
    Surrogate Decision Making
    Guardianship
    Elder Abuse
    Social Determinants and Mental Health Among Older Adults in the Criminal Justice System
    Capacity to Stand Trial Evaluations for Geriatric Defendants
    Responding to Crisis of Aging People in Prison: Global Promising Practices and Initiatives.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Daniel J. Carlat.
    Summary: "Over the course of a 40-year professional career, you will do 100,000 diagnostic interviews. The diagnostic interview is by far the most important tool in the arsenal of any clinician, and yet the average training program directs relatively few resources to specific training in the skills required for it. The general assumption seems to be that if you do enough interviews with different kinds of patients, you'll naturally pick up the required skills. That may be true, but it can take a long time, and the learning process can be painful. I hatched the idea for this manual one night during my first year of psychiatric residency. Starting my shift in the acute psychiatry service (APS), I noticed five patients in the waiting room; the resident who handed me the emergency room beeper said that there were two more patients in the emergency room, both in restraints. At that moment, the beeper sounded, and I called the number. "Psychiatry? This is Ellison 6. We have a patient up here who says he's depressed and suicidal. Please come and evaluate, stat." That meant that I had a total of eight diagnostic assessments to do"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Daniel J. Carlat, M.D., Publisher, The Carlat Psychiatry Report, The Carlat Child Psychiatry Report, The Carlat Addiction Treatment Report, Associate Clinical Professor of Psychiatry, Tufts University School of Medicine, Boston, Massachusetts.
    Contents:
    Section 1. General principles of effective interviewing
    Section II. The psychiatric history
    Section III. Interviewing for diagnosis: the psychiatric review of symptoms
    Section IV. Interviewing for treatment.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
    LWW Health Library (PA Rotations)
  • Digital
    Claudio Cepeda, Lucille Gotanco.
    Summary: "The psychiatric interview is the foundation of the psychotherapeutic process and is critically important to establish trust, elicit useful responses, assess patient behavior and psychopathology, and establish treatment goals and plans."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    The diagnostic and therapeutic engagement
    General principles of interviewing
    Special interviewing techniques
    Family assessment
    Providing post-evaluation feedback to families
    Evaluation of special populations
    Psychiatric evaluation of preschoolers and very young children
    Documenting the examination
    Evaluation of internalizing symptoms
    Evaluation of externalizing symptoms
    Evaluation of abuse and other symptoms
    Neuropsychiatric interview and examination
    Comprehensive psychiatric formulation
    Symptom formation and comorbidity
    Diagnostic obstacles (resistances)
    Countertransference.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Shawn Christopher Shea.
    Contents:
    Part I. Clinical interviewing: the principles behind the art
    1. The delicate dance: engagement and empathy
    2. Beyond empathy: cornerstone concepts and techniques for enhancing engagement
    3. They dynamic structure of the interview: core tasks, strategies, and the continuum of open-endedness
    4. Facilics: the art of transforming interviews into conversations
    5. Validity techniques for exploring sensitive material and uncovering the truth
    6. Understanding the person beneath the diagnosis: the search for uniqueness, wellness, and cultural context
    7. Assessment perspectives and the human matrix: bridges to effective treatment planning in the initial interview
    8. Nonverbal behavior: the interview as mime
    Part II. The interview and psychopathology: from differential diagnosis to understanding
    9. Mood disorders: how to sensitivity arrive at a differential diagnosis
    10. Interviewing techniques for understanding the person beneath the mood disorder
    11. Psychotic disorders: how to sensitively arrive at a differential diagnosis
    13. Personality disorders: before the interview begins- core concepts
    14. Personality disorders: how to sensitively arrive at a differential diagnosis
    15. Understanding and effectively engaging people with difficult personality disorders: the psychodynamic lens
    Part III. Mastering complex interviewing tasks demanded in everyday clinical practice
    16. The mental status: how to perform and document it effectively
    17. Exploring suicidal ideation: the delicate art of suicide assessment
    18. Exploring violent and homicidal ideation: from domestic violence to mass murder.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC480.7 .S54 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Zakhari, Raymond.
    Contents:
    Cover
    Halftitle
    Authorbio
    Title
    Copyright
    Dedication
    Contents
    Preface
    Pass Guarantee
    Acknowledgments
    Part I Foundational Knowledge
    Chapter 1 Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing Certification
    Introduction
    PmH-Bc Exam Eligibility Requirements
    Studying And Caring For Yourself
    Self-Care
    Cognitive Distortions
    Exam Prep Exercise
    AbOut The American Nurses Credentialing Center (Ancc) Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Board C
    Pmh-Bc Test Content Map
    DisSecting Questions
    WhAt To Do After You Have Passed Your Boards
    RefErences Chapter 2 Scope and Standards of the Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse
    Introduction
    Health Promotion According to U.S. Governmental Entities
    Scope of Practice
    Professional Organizations
    Leadership Styles
    Health Promotion and Maintenance
    Ethics
    Cultural Competence
    Special Populations
    Forensics and Correctional Institutions
    Quality Improvement
    Prevention
    Health Behavior Guidelines
    Advanced Directives
    Anticipatory Guidance
    Knowledge Check: Chapter 2
    References
    Chapter 3 Fundamental Theories of Mental Illness and Nonpharmacological Interventions Introduction
    Health Belief Model (HBM)
    Transtheoretical Model (TTM)
    Motivational Interviewing (MI)
    Applying the four principles of MI
    Maslow's Hierarchy of Needs
    Relapse Prevention
    The probability of relapse is contingent on the coping strategy
    Social Learning Theory
    Psychological Stages of Human Development
    Key concepts
    Sullivan's Stages of Interpersonal Development
    Sigmund Freud
    Nursing Theorists
    Biopsychosocial Model
    Nonpharmacological Treatments
    Individual Therapy
    Group Therapy (Irvin Yalom, 1931-Present)
    Family Therapies Complementary and Alternative Therapies
    Knowledge Check: CHAPTER 3
    References
    Chapter 4 Neuroanatomy, Physiology, and Psychopharmacology
    Fast Facts
    Introduction
    THe Nervous System
    Neuroimaging
    Genetics
    Selected Neuropsychological Tests (Most Commonly Used)
    Psychopharmacology
    Psychotropic Classifications
    Psychopharmacology In Pregnancy
    Knowledge Check: Chapter 4
    References
    Part II Disorders
    Chapter 5 Substance Use Disorders and Addiction
    Fast Facts
    Substance Use Disorder
    Clinical Vignette Of The Prototypical Patient Incidence And Prevalence
    Screening Tools And Early Intervention
    Cultural Implications
    Knowledge Check: Chapter 5
    References
    Chapter 6 Delirium and Dementia
    FAst Facts
    Delirium
    Clinical Vignette Of The Prototypical Patient
    Incidence And Prevalence
    Screening Tools And Early Intervention
    Dementia
    Clinical Vignette Of The Prototypical Patient
    Incidence And Prevalence
    Screening Tools And Early Intervention
    Cultural Implications
    Traumatic Brain Injury
    Clinical Vignette Of The Prototypical Patient
    Incidence And Prevalence
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
  • Digital
    Raymond Zakhari.
    Summary: This review manual prepares students to successfully pass the ANCC Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Practitioner board certification examination. It encompasses all of the essential knowledge required, uses a succinct outline format that highlights critical detail, and systematically follows the test blueprint so that those taking the exam will be optimally prepared. The Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Practitioner Certification Review Manual begins with an overview of the certification examination, self-care, and test tips; the role of the psychiatric-mental health nurse practitioner, scope of practice, and regulations; and the theoretical foundations of care. Other topics examined include the neuroanatomy and physiology of mental illness; psychopharmacology; and physical assessment, diagnostic tests, and differential diagnosis. A wide range of psychiatric disorders, as organized in the DSM-5, are also reviewed. Each of the chapters include learning objectives and end-of-chapter review questions. The review manual concludes with a 150-question practice test. KEY FEATURES Reflects the latest ANCC test blueprint Includes test-taking strategies and tips for preparing for the big day; scope of practice; and theoretical foundations of care Covers a wide range of psychiatric disorders, as organized in the DSM-5 Includes end-of-chapter review questions and rationales PLUS a valuable 150-question practice test with rationales--more than 400 questions in total.

    Contents:
    Preparing to Pass the Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Practitioner Certification Exam
    The Role of the Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Practitioner : Regulations and Scope of Practice
    Theoretical Foundations of Care and Nonpharmacological Therapies
    Neuroanatomy, Physiology, and Mental Illness
    Psychopharmacology
    Physical Assessment, Diagnostic Tests, and Differential Diagnosis
    Substance Use Disorders
    Delirium and Neurocognitive Disorders
    Psychotic Disorders and Delusions
    Sleep Disorders
    Mood Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders
    Child/Adolescent Neurodevelopmental Disorders
    Personality Disorders
    Violence and Abuse
    Practice Test.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    Sheila L. Videbeck, Professor Emeritus, Des Moines Area Community College, Ankeny, Iowa ; illustrations by Cathy J. Miller.
    Summary: "Exploring the full psychiatric nursing curriculum, from theoretical foundations to interventions for commonly encountered disorders, Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing, 7th Edition provides a practical focus on the skills and concepts students need for successful practice. Throughout the book, students have opportunities to learn specific nursing interventions, build therapeutic communication skills, and apply content within the framework of the nursing process. A study guide built into every chapter reinforces student learning and builds critical reasoning skills"--Publisher.

    Contents:
    Foundations of psychiatric-mental health nursing
    Neurobiologic theories and psychopharmacology
    Psychosocial theories and therapy
    Treatment settings and therapeutic programs
    Therapeutic relationships
    Therapeutic communication
    Client's response to illness
    Assessment
    Legal and ethical issues
    Grief and loss
    Anger, hostility, and aggression
    Abuse and violence
    Trauma and stressor-related disorders
    Anxiety and anxiety disorders
    Obsessive-compulsive and related disorders
    Schizophrenia
    Mood disorders and suicide
    Personality disorders
    Addiction
    Eating disorders
    Somatic symptom illnesses
    Neurodevelopmental disorders
    Disruptive behavior disorders
    Cognitive disorders.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    Joan A. Camprodon, Scott L. Rauch, Benjamin D. Greenberg, Darin D. Dougherty, editors.
    Contents:
    Major Depression
    Obsessive Compulsive Disorder
    Neuroimaging and the Neurocircuitry of OCD and Major Depression
    ECT
    VNS
    Ablative Neurosurgical Procedures for OCD and MDD
    DBS for OCED and MDD
    TMS & MST
    Animal Models
    Ethis & History
    Future of Neurosurgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Victor Fornari, Ida Dancyger, editors.
    Summary: This book explores medical nonadherence to treatment and management of psychiatric disorders across the lifespan. Leading experts in the field, specializing in a range of mental health problems describe the impact of nonadherence in the treatment of children, adolescents, transition age youths, adults, and older adults. The book eloquently articulates the key elements of effective physicians and offers clinical pearls on professionalism, empathy, and the doctor-patient relationship-a key component to solving treatment nonadherence. This volume focuses on solutions for improved clinical outcomes, including communication skills, empathy and building trust, motivational interviewing techniques and the use of technology. Psychiatric Nonadherence is an excellent resource for all clinicians who care for individuals with psychiatric illness. This timely reference will provide guidance to enhance effective treatment adherence for a wide array of medical practitioners, including child and adolescent, adult forensic, and geriatric psychiatrists, addiction medicine specialists, primary care physicians, psychologists and nurses.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Mental Health Treatment Nonadherence;
    1: Health Economics: The Hidden Costs of Mental Illness; Introduction; Human Capital; Lost Economic Growth; Medical Conditions; Public Costs; Family Costs; The Impact of Psychiatric Illness; Comorbid Psychiatric and Physical Illness; The Financial Cost of Psychiatric Disorder; Family Burden of Psychiatric Disorder; The Cost of Incarceration; Summary; References;
    2: Nonadherence in Childhood Disorders: Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder; Overview of ADHD and Its Treatment Description, Impact, and CourseTreatment; Characteristics of Effective Pharmacotherapy for ADHD; Estimates of Treatment Adherence and Nonadherence; Correlates of Treatment Adherence; Treatment-Related Factors; Medications' Duration of Action; Care Delivery and Components; Pharmacotherapy Outcomes; Patient-Related Factors; Age; Clinical Characteristics; Family and Caregiver Factors; Caregiver Characteristics; Patient and Family Perspectives on ADHD and Treatment; Future Directions: Adherence with Interventions Other Than Pharmacotherapy Improving Outcomes by Diminishing Barriers to Adherence and Continuity with Effective TreatmentReferences;
    3: Coming of Age and Refusing to Eat: Overcoming Treatment Nonadherence for Adolescents with Anorexia Nervosa; Introduction; How Do Patients Comply with Treatment?; An Overview of AN; What Is the Etiology of AN?; Medical Complications of AN; What Are the Factors That Affect Adherence?; Healthcare Team and Health System-Related Factors; A Selective Brief Review of the Literature; Case Vignette # 1; Case Vignette # 2; Addressing the Factors That Impact Adherence What Are the Interventions to Improve Adherence?Conclusion; References;
    4: The Challenge of Nonadherence in Schizophrenia; Introduction; The Problem of Nonadherence; Engagement; Challenges for Studying Medication Nonadherence; Estimates of Medication Adherence in Schizophrenia; Factors Affecting Adherence; Social and Economic Factors; Health-Care Team- and System-Related Factors; Condition-Related Factors; Therapy-Related Factors; Patient-Related Factors; Interventions to Improve Adherence; Social and Economic Interventions; Health-Care Team and Health System Interventions Condition-Related InterventionsTherapy-Related Interventions; Patient-Related Interventions; Conclusion; References;
    5: Increasing Psychiatric Treatment Engagement and Adherence in the College Population; Introduction; The Current State of Mental Health on College Campuses; Costs of Nonengagement and Nonadherence in the College Population; Definition, Measures, and Rates of Nonadherence; Definition of Treatment Adherence; Measurement of Treatment Adherence; Rates of Mental Health Treatment Adherence in Emerging Adults; Barriers to Adherence and Recommendations for Intervention
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Anita W. Finkelman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC440 .F457 1994
    1
  • Digital
    Carlos W. Pratt, Kenneth J. Gill, Nora M. Barrett, Melissa M. Roberts.
    Summary: Psychiatric rehabilitation has grown tremendously as a field since the 1999 publication of the first edition of this work. With increased funding, evidence-based practice guidelines, a certification program, and increased academic programs at both graduate and undergraduate levels. The volume of information in this area keeps expanding exponentially. This book was written explicitly to serve as a text for the field and follows a logical progression from an intro to the field to the symptoms and etiology of severe mental illness, to treatment and outcome in a variety of settings. The new edition will discuss impending changes in DSM-V regarding diagnosis, new information on evidence-based treatment, skills training across mental disorders for better daily living, taking into account patient physical as well as mental health in treatment planning and outcome assessment. There will also be a new instructor website with ppts, and test questions and answers. Class exercises and biographical sketches will be moved from printed matter to the website on the basis of reviewer suggestions. Instructor website with ppts and test questions. Relocated boxed biographical sketches and class exercises to new website. Adds new coverage of DSM-V diagnosis, evidence based treatment, daily living skills training. Retains case studies, boxed controversial issues, glossary.

    Contents:
    Part 1
    Understanding the Nature of Severe Mental Illness; Chapter 1
    The Experience of Mental Illness: An Introduction to Psychiatric Rehabilitation; Introduction; The Story of Paul; The Serious Mental Illnesses; Psychiatric Disability; The Stigma of Major Mental Illness; What Does the Term "Psychiatric Rehabilitation" Mean?; Summary; Chapter 2
    Symptoms and Etiology of Serious Mental Illness; Introduction; Symptoms; Phases of Schizophrenia; Mood Disorders; How are Schizophrenia and Mood Disorders Different? Relevance to Psychiatric Rehabilitation; Dual Diagnosis and Co-occurring Disorders; Etiology; Summary; Chapter 3
    Course, Treatment, and Outcome of Severe Mental Illnesses; Introduction; Course; Treatment; Understanding Course, Treatment, and Outcome: What Is Not Known Can Hurt!; Summary; Part 2
    Psychiatric Rehabilitation Principles and Methodology; Chapter 4
    The Goals, Values, and Guiding Principles of Psychiatric Rehabilitation; Introduction; The Concept of Recovery; The Ongoing Study of Recovery; Recovery-oriented Mental Health Systems; The Goals, Values, and Guiding Principles of Psychiatric Rehabilitation; Psychiatric Rehabilitation Ethics; The Future of Psychiatric Rehabilitation Thought and Practice; Summary; Chapter 5
    Psychiatric Rehabilitation Methods; Introduction; Hallmarks of the Psychiatric Rehabilitation Process; The Psychiatric Rehabilitation Process; Evaluating Rehabilitation Progress; Summary; Part 3
    Applications of Psychiatric Rehabilitation Principles and Methodology; Chapter 6
    Health and Wellness; The Story of Ted; Overview of the Problem; Factors That Contribute to Poor HealthHealth Problems Interfere with the Attainment of Rehabilitation Goals; Strategies for Addressing Comorbid Illnesses; Promotion of Readiness for Lifestyle Changes; Wellness; Community-based Group Interventions; Summary; Chapter 7
    Psychiatric Day Programming; Introduction; Partial Hospitalization; The Development of Partial Hospitalization Programs; Components of a Psychiatric Day Program; The Development of Clubhouse Programs; The Story of Jill, Affinity House Member; Evaluating Psychiatric Day Programs; State-of-the-Art Psychiatric Rehabilitation Day Programming; Summary; Chapter 8
    Assertive Community Treatment and Case Management; Introduction; The Need for Continuity of Care; A Nonsystem System; Risk of Rehospitalization; Awareness of the Need for Care Coordination at the National Level; Case Management; The Story of Micky; Development of Assertive Community Treatment: A Practical Innovation; Evaluating Case Management; Fidelity and ACT; ACT as an Early Intervention Strategy; ACT and Persons in the Criminal Justice System; Other Case Management Approaches for Jail Diversion Purposes.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Luigi Mazzone, Benedetto Vitiello, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Psychiatric comorbidities in autism: diagnostic and treatment challenges
    Mood Disorders in ASD
    Anxiety Disorders and ASD
    Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder and ASD
    Schizophrenia spectrum, other psychotic disorders and ASD
    Feeding and Eating disorders in ASD
    Disruptive Behavioural Disorders, Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder in ASD
    Tourette's Disorder and tic disorder in ASD
    Substance-related disorders and ASD.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Elspeth Cameron Ritchie, Christopher H. Warner, Robert N. McLay, editors.
    Summary: This book tells the professional and personal experiences of American military psychiatrists and their fellow mental health providers in the longest conflict in American history. These men and women treat service members for the psychological consequences from their experiences in battle, including killing enemy combatants; seeing wounded and killed civilian casualties; losing their friends in combat; factoring in personal mental health needs, ; and potentially dealing with their own physical injuries from being shot or blown up. The volume consists of 20 short first-person case studies from mental health providers who have been risking their lives while treating patients in the battlefield since 9/11. Written by experts who have experienced these challenges directly, this text offers both clinical and personal accounts that are not found elsewhere. Topics include tips on providing psychotherapy in battle, evaluating and treating detainees in war prisons such as Abu Ghraib and Guantanamo Bay, and the unique challenges of prescribing medication to patients who are also comrades in war. Psychiatrists in Combat; Mental Health Clinicians in the War Zone is uniquely positioned to be a valuable resource for psychiatrists interested in trauma and veterans, psychologists, social workers, occupational therapists, military health personnel, and mental health professionals interested in military psychiatry.

    Contents:
    The Road to Iraq
    Farm Boy Turned Military Psychologist: A Summary of War Deployment Experiences, Struggles, and Coping
    Someone Always Has It Worse: The Convoy to Balad
    Psychiatrists in Combat: From the Deckplates to Division
    Occupational Therapists Share Deployment Experiences from Iraq and Afghanistan
    The Most Efficient Marine
    The Purposeful Doctor
    The Iraqi Heart of Darkness: A Visit to Abu Ghraib
    The Two Sides of Modern Day American Combat: From Camp Austerity to Camp Chocolate Cake
    Zero To Sixty: From Residency to the War Zone
    Research at the Tip of the Spear
    From Battalion Surgeon to Combat Psychiatrist: Three Tours in Iraq and Afghanistan
    "Oh, The Things You Can Find"
    Chronicles from the Cradle of Civilization
    To Squander the Fighting Strength? Personal
    Experiences with Preventive Psychiatry and the Dilemma of Wartime Public Mental Health
    Learning to Scale the Wall
    Shrink in the Making: Learning to Become a Psychiatrist From the War Wounded
    After the Smoke Clears
    The French Fourragère: Gore and Lore
    Leaving Our Mark
    Last of the OSCAR Psychologists in Afghanistan: An Expeditionary Model of Care Jesse. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    chairman, editorial board, Robert Michels ; editor, Jesse O. Cavenar, Jr. ; editorial board members, H. Keith H. Brodie ... [et al.].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    v. 1-4
    (including updates)
    RC454 .P7815
    4
  • Digital
    Konstantinos N. Fountoulakis.
    Summary: This book was the end product of life experiences, thoughts and intellectual wanderings of the author, who through his career and for the last twenty years was always serving all the three aspects of a Psychiatrist: He is a clinician, a researcher and an academic teacher. The book includes a comprehensive history of Psychiatry since antiquity and until today, with an emphasis not only on main events but also specifically and with much detail and explanations, on the chain of events that led to a particular development. At the center of this work is the question "what is mental illness?" and "does free will exist?" These are questions which tantalize Psychiatrists, neuroscientists, psychologists, philosophers, patients and their families and the sensitive and educated lay persons alike. Thus, the book includes a comprehensive review and systematic elaboration on the definition and the concept of mental illness, a detailed discussion on the issue of free will as well as the state of the art of contemporary Psychiatry and the socio-political currents it has provoked. Finally the book includes a description of the academic, social and professional status of Psychiatry and Psychiatrists and a view of future needs and possible developments. A last moment addition was the chapter on conspiracy theories, as a consequence of the experience with the social media and the public response to the COVID-19 outbreak which coincided with the final stage of the preparation of the book. Their study is an excellent opportunity to dig deep into the relation among human psychology, mental health, the society and politics and to swim in intellectually dangerous waters

    Contents:
    Foreword by Afzal Javed WPA President
    Foreword by Norman Sartorius, former WPA President
    Prologue
    Guide to read this book
    The origins of Psychiatry
    Part A: The historical roots
    Introductory remarks to history
    Antiquity
    Middle ages
    Renaissance
    Early modern period
    The Enlightenment
    Nineteenth century: the romantic first half
    Nineteenth century: the realistic second half
    Twentieth century: the pre-psychopharmacologic era
    Twentieth century: the era of psychopharmacology
    Part B: The Philosophical and scientific roots
    Introductory remarks to the philosophical roots
    The concept and definition of mental illness
    Mental health
    Disability in mental disorders
    The mind-brain problem and the issue of Free Will
    Part C: The identity of modern psychiatry
    Introductory remarks to the identity of modern psychiatry
    The state of the art
    Psychiatry among the other medical specialties
    Psychiatry as a professional activity
    Psychiatry among human, life and social sciences, philosophy and religion
    Psychiatry and society
    Anti-Psychiatry
    Post-Psychiatry
    Conspiracy theories
    The future of Psychiatry.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    Debra L. Klamen.
    Contents:
    Evaluation, assessment, and diagnosis
    Human behavior : theories of personality and development
    Human behavior : biologic and related sciences
    Disorders seen in childhood and adolescence
    Neurocognitive disorders and consultation-liaison psychiatry
    Schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders
    Psychotherapies
    Mood disorders
    Anxiety, obsessive-compulsive, trauma- or stressor-related, somatic symptom and dissociative disorders
    Personality disorders, human sexuality, and miscellaneous syndromes
    Substance-related disorders
    Psychopharmacology and other somatic therapies
    Law and ethics in psychiatry.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC457 .P78 2016
    2
  • Digital/Print
    Debra L. Klamen.
    Summary: "PreTest: Psychiatry is part of the successful PreTest clinical series, offering hundreds of Board style questions designed to help you in your clerkship and on the shelf exam. Completely revised to reflect new trends, findings and practices, all questions reflect both the format and range of content you'll be responsible for knowing during your clerkship and on your shelf exam. Each question is accompanied by a detailed answer that highlights important information and explains why each answer choice is right or wrong. To ensure that all content, was relevant, timely and high yield, this edition was carefully reviewed and edited by medical students who have successfully mastered their clerkship"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Basics of Psychiatry
    Biologic and Related Sciences
    Disorders Seen in Childhood and Adolescence
    Neurocognitive Disorders and Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry
    Schizophrenia and Other Psychotic Disorders
    Mood Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders, Obsessive-Compulsive, Trauma- or Stress-Related Disorders
    Somatic Symptom and Dissociative Disorders
    Personality Disorders
    Human Sexuality, Sleep and Other Disorders
    Substance-Related Disorders
    Management of Psychiatric Disorders
    Law and Ethics in Psychiatry
    Self-Test, Uncued Study Questions.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2021
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC457 .P78 2021
    2
  • Digital
    Pascual Ángel Gargiulo, Humberto Luis Mesones-Arroyo, editors.
    Contents:
    PART 1: EPISTEMOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT THE STUDY OF NORMAL AND ABNORMAL HUMAN BEHAVIORS
    1. Knowledge, by Philosophy or Science? Psychotherapy or Neuroscience?.- 2. Phenomenology as an approach method in the Neurosciences
    3. Trends in Philosophy of Mind and in Philosophy of Neuroscience
    4. Neurosciences, Neuroeconomics, and Metaphysics.- 5. Towards a Psychotherapy with a Philosophical Basis.- 6. DSM5: A Bioethical Overview.- PART 2: FROM BASIC NEUROSCIENCES TO HUMAN BRAIN.- 7. Brain Renin-Angiotensin System: A Novel Therapeutic Target for Psychostimulant and Alcohol Related Disorders?.- 8. Role of the Neuropeptide Angiotensin II in Stress and Related Disorders.- 9. Neurovascular Cognitive Alterations: Implication of Brain Renin-Angiotensin System (Ras). Therapeutic Opportunities and Risk Factors.- 10. Prevention of Stress-Induced Cognitive Impairment: Today and Tomorrow.- 11. Circadian Synchronization of Cognitive Functions.- 12. The Role of Iron and Other Trace Elements on Mental Development and Cognitive Function.- 13. New Insights in Glutamate-Mediated Mechanisms Underlying Benzodiazepines Dependence and Cocaine Vulnerability
    14. Soy and Psychotropic Effects: A Brief Overview.- 15. Use of Psychotropic Drugs: Between the Medicalization and Rationality
    PART 3: NEUROSCIENCES, LEARNING, TEACHING AND THE ROLE OF SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT
    16. Learning Styles: From Basic Investigation to Learning in the Classroom
    17. Learning Styles and Strategies: The Importance of the Tool Selection.- 18. Attentional Capacity in Children: Intervention Programmes for its Development.- 19. Social Representation and Imagery of Labor
    Evaluation Process of the Psychosocial and Labor Vulnerability (PSLV) and its Relation With Mental Health.- PART 4: EXPLAINING HUMAN PATHOLOGICAL BEHAVIORS: FROM BRAIN DISORDERS TO PSYCHOPATHOLOGY.- 20. The Ying and Yang of Pain: Protective vs. Damaging.- 21. Neuropsychological Disorders after Mild Traumatic Brain Injury or Concussion.- 22. Animal Models of psychopathology and its relation to clinical practice.- 23. Biological Markers in Psychiatry and its Relation with Translational Approaches: Brief Historical Review.- 24. 'Two Hit' Neurodevelopmental Mechanisms In Schizophrenia: Focus On Animal Models And The Role Of BDNF
    25. Translating the Glutamatergic Hypothesis of Schizophrenia through Homeostatic Regulation of Brain Glycine.- 26. Adenosine in the neurobiology of schizophrenia: potential adenosine receptor-based pharmacotherapy.- 27. Mindfulness and Neuroimaging.- 28. Clinical Magnetic Resonance Neuroimaging in Mild Cognitive Impairment and Alzheimeŕs Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Pascual Ángel Gargiulo, Humberto Luis Mesones Arroyo, editors.
    Summary: This broad and thought-provoking volume provides an overview of recent intellectual and scientific advances that intersect psychiatry and neuroscience, offering a wide range of penetrating insights in both disciplines. The fourth volume on the topic in the last several years from a varying panel of international experts identifies the borders, trends and implications in both fields today and goes beyond that into related disciplines to seek out connections and influences. Similar to its three Update book predecessors, Psychiatry and Neuroscience - Volume IV presents a range of interesting topics in the main disciplines - psychiatry and neuroscience - and attempts to provide deeper comprehension or explication of the normal and diseased human mind, its biological correlates and its biographical and existential implications. This engaging volume continues the previous style of exploring different disciplines and trying to integrate disciplinary evidence from varying points of view in an organic manner. The first section is about epistemological considerations regarding the study of normal and abnormal human behaviors, including, for example, the topic of phenomenological psychopathology and phenomenological psychiatry in relation to schizophrenia and substance misuse, among other topics. Section 2 addresses issues around the translation of basic neuroscience to expression in the human brain and behavioral implications. Section 3 discusses the issues of learning, teaching and the role of social environment in the field of neuroscience. Finally section 4 reviews various perspectives on explaining human pathological behaviors -- from brain disorders to psychopathology.

    Contents:
    SECTION 1. EPISTEMOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT THE STUDY OF NORMAL AND ABNORMAL HUMAN BEHAVIORS
    1. Psychiatry and the Inference to the Best Explanation
    2. The Notion of Empathy According to Edith Stein
    3. Coincidence with One's Self
    4. Naturalism, Psychology and Culture: Nature vs. Nurture?
    5. The Self-Organized Feedback Brain
    6. The Dynamis as the Object of a Philosophical Medicine. An Epistemological Analysis of the Treaty "On Ancient Medicine"
    7. Inserted Thoughts and the Higher-Order Thought Theory of Consciousness
    8. Relationship between Body and Soul According to Saint Thomas: An Obsolete Issue?
    9. The Conception of Psychosomatic Medicine in Spain: From Neurology to the Person
    10. From Phenomenological Psychopathology to Phenomenological Psychiatry: The Cases of Schizophrenia and Substance Misuse
    11. The Notion of Person in Neuroscience: From Cognitivism to a Comprehensive Phenomenology
    12. The Neuroethics of Beauty: Insights from Aldous Huxley's Theory of Knowledge
    13. Radical Solutions to the Ontological and Epistemological Problems of Consciousness
    14. A Discussion of Anxiety over the Last Millennium (1000 to 2000)
    SECTION 2: FROM BASIC NEUROSCIENCES TO HUMAN BRAIN
    15. Neurotransmitters and Hormones in Human Decision-Making
    16. Glial Cells in the Schizophrenia Puzzle: Angiotensin II Role
    17. Somatostatin and Neurotensin Systems in Schizophrenia
    18. Mechanisms of Action of Anxiolytics
    19. From Benzodiazepine Prescription to Dependence: Learning Processes Involved
    20. Beyond Acute Traumatic Brain Injury: Molecular Implications of Associated Neuro-inflammation in Higher-Order Cognitive Processes
    21. Physiology and Pharmacology of Melatonin
    22. Cytoprotection by Melatonin. The Metabolic Syndrome as an Example
    23. Neural-Network Simulations of a Possible Role of the Hippocampus in Pavlovian Conditioning
    24. Brassica Vegetables: Rich Sources of Neuroprotective Compounds
    25. Colored Compounds in Fruits and Vegetables and Health
    26. Prospects of Herbal Remedies in Neuropsychiatric Diseases from the Gut-Brain Communication Perspective
    27. Biological Strategies, Adjunct to the Current Antidepressant Treatment
    28. Potential Interactions between Environmental and Psychoneurobiological Factors in the Interface between Stress and Depression: A Road Map to Resilience
    29. The Impact of Apolipoprotein E allelic Variants on Alzheimer Disease
    30. Fearing Parkinson's Disease: Relationships between Cognition and Emotion
    SECTION 3: NEUROSCIENCES, LEARNING, TEACHING AND THE ROLE OF SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT
    31. Friendship Relationships in Children and Adolescents. Positive Development and Prevention of Mental Health Problems
    32. Bullying and Cyberbullying in Adolescents: A Meta-analysis on the Effectiveness of Interventions
    33. A Summary of the Developmental Trajectory of Executive Functions from Birth to Adulthood
    34. Approach to Learning in the University: Reference to Learning to Learn
    35. Comparative Cohort Study of Burnout Syndrome in State Schools' Teachers
    36. Traumatic Situations and Mental Disorders in Migrants, Refugees and Asylum Seekers
    SECTION 4: EXPLAINING HUMAN PATHOLOGICAL BEHAVIORS. FROM BRAIN DISORDERS TO PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
    37. The Transition to a Dimensional System for Personality Disorders: Main Advances and Limitations
    38. Epilepsy and psychiatric comorbidities: new approaches and perspectives
    39. Integrative Objective Quantification of Individual Locomotor Behavior in Depressive Patients: Implications for their Stratification and Personalized Treatment Monitoring
    40. Epidemiological Perspectives in Psychosomatic and Liaison Psychiatry
    41. Emotions and Cognitions in Bipolar Disorder
    42. Cannabis and Psychosis: A Causal Association
    43. Gut Microbiota Biomarkers in Autism Spectrum Disorders
    44. Brain Magnetic Resonance Imaging in Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD)
    45. Research Contributions of Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy in Psychopathology
    46. Prescribe Psychotropic Drugs in the Elderly. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pascual Ángel Gargiulo, Humberto Luis Mesones-Arroyo.
    Contents:
    Part I: Epistemological Considerations about the Study of Normal and Abnormal Human Behaviors.-Phenomenology of the Encounter According to Józef Tischner
    Psychopathology and Corporality: The Possibilities of Intersubjectivity for Restoring Experience--The Cases of Schizophrenia and Autism
    The Relationship between Philosophy and Neuroscience from Dan Zahavi's Phenomenology of Mind
    Aristotelian Hylomorphism: A Framework for Non-Physicalist Philosphers about Philosophy of Minder
    Aristotle's Concept of the Soul and the Link between Mind and Body in Contemporary Philosophy
    Life Project
    A Brief Bioethical Perspective on Work in the Field of Health
    Cosmetic Psychopharmacology, Inauthentic Experiences and the Instrumentalization of Human Faculties: Beyond Post-Emotional Society
    Dialogues between Philosophy and Psychiatry: The Case of Dissociative Identity Disorder
    Part II. From Basic Neurosciences to Human Brain
    Effects of Emotional Stress on Astrocytes and Their Implications in Stress-Related Disorders
    Role of the Glia and the Neural Crest in the Central Nervous System Health and Disease
    The Nitric Oxide Pathways in the Neurotoxicity from Glutamate-Induced Apoptosis: Mitochondrial Emerging Role
    Psychoneuroendocrinological and Cognitive Interactions in the Interface between Chronic Stress and Depression
    Mechanisms Involved in Memory Processes. Alterations Induced by Psychostimulants: Targeting the Central AT1 Receptors
    The Extent of Neuroadaptive Responses to Psychostimulants: Focus on Brain Angiotensin System
    Habit Learning and Addiction
    Stress and the Dynamic Fear Memory: Synaptic-Cellular Bases and its Implication for Psychiatry Disorders
    Relationship between drugs of abuse and palatable foods: pre-clinical evidence towards a better understanding of addiction-like behaviors
    Deep Brain Stimulation: A Promising Therapeutic Approach to the Treatment of Severe Depressed Patients. Current Evidence and Intrinsic Mechanisms
    Eye Movements: Parameters, Mechanisms and Active Vision
    Eye Movement Behavior Analyses for Studying Cognitive Performance and Conversion to Pathologies
    Psychotropic Medication Use in Elderly
    Part III: Neurosciences, Learning, Teaching and the Role of Social Environment
    Child Cognitive Stimulation Programs: Various Modalities of Intervention in Socially Vulnerable Contexts
    Work and Psychological Suffering: A Case Study on Customer Service's Employees at an Electrical Services Company
    Part IV: Explaining Human Pathological Behaviors. From Brain Disorders to Psychopathology
    Neuropathological Background Of Mk801 For Inducing Murine Model of Schizophrenia
    The Effect of Estradiol and its Analogues on Cognition in Preclinical and Clinical Research: Relevance to Schizophrenia
    Neuropsychiatric Symptoms Related to Cholinergic Deficits in Parkinson's Disease
    Pharmacotherapy through the Inhibition of Glycine Transporters: An Update on, and Beyond, Schizophrenia
    The Adenosinergic System in the Neurobiology of Schizophrenia: Prospective Adenosine Receptor-Based Pharmacotherapy
    Neuroimaging in Chronic Pain, Fibromyalgia, and Somatization
    Utility of Magnetic Resonance Findings in Elucidating Structural and Functional Brain Impairment in Traumatic Brain Injury
    Liaison Psychiatry: Playing "Hide and Seek"with Delirium
    Metabolic Association between Gut-Brain: Axis in Autism Spectrum Disorders
    Update on Dementia. Pathophisiology, Diagnosis and Treatment: DSM-IV versus DSM-V
    Nutrition and Central Nervous System
    Cognitive Impairment/Dementia in Chronic Renal Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Michal Lew-Starowicz, Annamaria Giraldi, Tillmann H. C. Krüger, editors.
    Summary: Psychiatry meets sexual medicine! This book explores the links between mental and sexual health and provides guidance for the treatment of the most common sexual problems. The book fills the need of many clinicians and trainees who work in the field of psychiatry and sexual medicine. Offering comprehensive and clearly structured information, case presentations, and key messages this book focuses on sharing essential knowledge and skills of recognized experts in the field. Get inspired by the vivid interactions of psychiatry and sexual medicine and help your patients on their way to improved sexual health!.

    Contents:
    Part 1 General aspects: Historical links between psychiatry and sexual medicine
    Sexual anatomy and functioning
    Neurophysiology of sexual response
    Sexual diversity and transcultural context
    Sexual relationships
    Sexual rights
    The (mental) health benefits of sexuality
    Sexual interview
    mental health and relationship issues
    Ethical issues in clinical sexology
    Part 2 Sexual dysfunctions
    focus on body and mind: Female sexual dysfunctions
    Male sexual dysfunctions
    Part 3 Psychiatric disorders and sexual functioning: Cognitive disorders
    Substance-related disorders
    Schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders
    Mood disorders
    Anxiety and somatoform disorders
    Eating disorders
    Sleep disorders
    Personality disorders
    Mental retardation
    Autism spectrum disorders
    Part 4 Impact of psychopharmacology on sexual functioning and its management
    Part 5 Psychiatry confronted with gender and sexual orientation-related issues: Non-mainstream sexual orientation
    Gender dysphoria
    Part 6 Traumatic sexual experiences and variant sexual behaviors: Sexual violence: Neuroscientific and clinical l issues in offenders and persons at risk
    Psychiatric and sexual issues in victims of sexual abuse
    Psychiatric issues of paraphilic disorders
    Forensic issues in sexology
    Part 7 Other topics related to psychiatry and sexual medicine: Late-life sexuality
    Problematic hypersexuality
    Genital dysmorphophobia
    Persistent genital arousal disorder
    Post-orgasmic illness syndrome
    Part 8 Psychotherapy and counseling in sexual medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Roberta Passione.
    Summary: This book is the result of extensive archival research conducted on the Collection "Silvano Arieti Papers" held in the Manuscript Division of the Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. It offers readers the first scientific biography of the renowned Italian-born psychiatrist Silvano Arieti, who in 1939 emigrated to the United States, where he gained fame and recognition for his work on schizophrenia. In 1975, the second edition of his book, Interpretation of Schizophrenia, received the National Book Award in Science. The book has been cast as a twofold journey: an exploration of the life of a psychiatrist and scientist and an overview of twentieth century psychiatry and its significant issues, debates, and transformations. Readers will find useful insights for a better understanding of psychiatry as a discipline capable of portraying the complexity of human nature. .

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Castaway
    3. New World
    4. Roots
    5. Horizons.-6. Landings
    7. At the End of the Journey.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Tobias Wasser, editor.
    Summary: This book is specifically designed for new psychiatrists and all other medical professionals who lack the legal training necessary to confront ethical issues in the face of the judicial system. Written by experts in the field, each chapter begins with a challenging case vignette synthesized from a historical legal case that places the reader in the role of the treatment administrator. The text presents details of the legal case, historical significance, and the precedent it sets before discussing the core principles of that particular subject area. Each chapter reviews the existing literature and reinforces the most salient points. Topics include risk assessment, substance misuse and the law, issues with child and adolescent psychiatry in the courtroom, prescription medication considerations, and other challenges that are not often adequately addressed in training. The text is specifically designed for new psychiatrists and other professionals who are transitioning from their studies into clinical practice, concisely explaining and defining the issues in a practical, reader-friendly tone suitable as both a quick-reference in a busy environment or as a resource for private study. Forensic Psychiatry: Basic Principles is an excellent resource for new psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, students, and other professionals accommodating medical and correctional boundaries in practice.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Why understanding the law matters / Tobias Wasser and Katherine Michaelsen
    Informed consent / Simha E. Ravven
    Confidentiality and privilege / Amanda Yuan Sun and Tobias Wasser
    Duties to third parties / Katherine Michaelsen
    Voluntary and involuntary hospitalization / Stephanie Yarnell and Reena Kapoor
    Civil commitment and involuntary outpatient commitment / Marina Nakic
    Involuntary medication / Kyle C. Walker
    Civil competence / Maya Prabhu
    Ethics / Karsten M. Heil and Charles C. Dike
    Malpractice / Scott Walmer
    Suicide risk assessment / Ish P. Bhalla and Kevin V. Trueblood
    Violence risk assessment / Alexander Westphal
    Substance abuse and the law / Lindsay Oberleitner
    Child and adolescent forensic psychiatry / Carlos A. Salgado
    Special topics in forensic psychiatry : the insanity defense and competence to stand trial / Hassan M. Minhas
    Conclusion: How to learn more about forensic psychiatry / Tobias Wasser.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Vincenzo Di Nicola, Drozdstoj Stoyanov.
    Summary: The field of academic psychiatry is in crisis, everywhere. It is not merely a health crisis of resource scarcity or distribution, competing claims and practice models, or level of development from one country to another, but a deeper, more fundamental crisis about the very definition and the theoretical basis of psychiatry. The kinds of questions that represent this crisis include whether psychiatry is a social science (like psychology or anthropology), whether it is better understood as part of the humanities (like philosophy, history, and literature), or if the future of psychiatry is best assured as a branch of medicine (based on genetics and neuroscience)? In fact, the question often debated since the beginning of modern psychiatry concerns the biomedical model so that part of psychiatry's perpetual self-questioning is to what extent it is or is not a branch of medicine. This unique and bold volume offers a representative and critical survey of the history of modern psychiatry with deeply informed transdisciplinary readings of the literature and practices of the field by two professors of psychiatry who are active in practice and engaged in research and have dual training in scientific psychiatry and philosophy. In alternating chapters presenting contrasting arguments for the future of psychiatry, the two authors conclude with a dialogue between them to flesh out the theoretical, research, and practical implications of psychiatry's current crisis, outlining areas of divergence, consensus, and fruitful collaborations to revision psychiatry today. The volume is scrupulously documented but written in accessible language with capsule summaries of key areas of theory, research, and practice for the student and practitioner alike in the social and human sciences and in medicine, psychiatry, and the neurosciences. Offers a critical survey of the history of modern psychiatry; Co-authors have dual training in scientific psychiatry and philosophy; Written in accessible language with capsule summaries of key areas of theory, research and practice; For students and specialists alike.

    Contents:
    Psychiatry in Crisis as a Medical Discipline
    Methods for clinical evaluation in psychiatry: quantitative decomposition of narratives vs. qualitative approach. Reconstruction of the methodological discrepancies based on an exemplary case: major depressive disorder
    Psychiatric nosology revisited: at the crossroads of psychology and medicine. Categorical vs. dimensional; nomothetic vs. ideographic classification and nomenclature; post-modern perspectives
    Psychiatry and neuroscience: at the interface. How to incorporate scientific data from neuroscience without turning psychiatry into an applied branch of neurology
    Invited commentary
    Critical Psychiatry
    The beginning of the end of psychiatry: a philosophical archaeology. Psychology: introspection and consciousness. Foundations of modern psychiatry. Schizophrenia: the worm in psychiatry's apple
    The end of phenomenology. "Who killed Ellen West?" A critical review of Ludwig Binswanger's foundational case of existential analysis
    The end of psychiatry. "Psychiatry against itself. " A philosophical archaeology of antipsychiatry
    Invited commentary
    Renewal in Psychiatry: Stoyanov in Dialogue with Di Nicola. Invited commentary
    Afterword.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Damir Huremović, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on how to formulate a mental health response to a massive infectious disease outbreak, including a pandemic outbreak. The book combines an emergency mental health response utilized by disaster psychiatry with clinical aspects and expertise on infectious diseases mental health developed by consultation-liaison psychiatry, making it an excellent resource for tackling each stage of an infectious outbreak crisis quickly and thoroughly. The book opens by contextualizing the issues with a historical overview of pandemics ranging from plagues of ancient times, through Black Death in the Middle Ages, Spanish flu pandemic of 1918, to outbreaks of modern times, including HIV, Ebola, and Zika. The text acknowledges the new infectious disease challenges presented by climate changes and bioterrorism and considers how to implement systems to prepare for these issues from an infection and social perspective. The manuscript then delves into the mental health aspects of these crises, including community and cultural responses, emotional epidemiology, and mental health concerns in the aftermath of a disaster. Finally, the text considers medical responses to situation-specific trauma, including quarantine and isolation-associated trauma, the mental health aspects of immunization and vaccination (including vaccine hesitancy), survivor mental health, and support for healthcare personnel, thereby providing guidance for some of the most alarming situations facing the medical community organizing a mental health response to an infectious outbreak. Written by experts in the field, Psychiatry of Pandemics is an excellent resource for infectious disease specialists, psychiatrists, psychologists, immunologists, hospitalists, public health officials, nurses, disaster mental health workers, and all medical professionals who may work with patients in an infectious disease outbreak.

    Contents:
    Historical Context
    History of Plagues and Their Impact on Human Civilizations
    Pandemics and Modern Medicine
    Pandemics and Psychiatry
    Spanish flu of 1918
    Smallpox Outbreak of 1972
    HIV Epidemic
    SARS (2003)
    Ebola Outbreak 2015
    MERS
    Zika Virus Outbreak
    Contagion as a Psychological Concept
    Emotional Epidemiology
    Cultural Aspects of a Pandemic
    Managing Public Perceptions and the Use of Social Media
    Effect on Mental health Patients
    Burden on Healthcare Personnel
    Psychological Challenges for Institutions and Communities
    History of Quarantine
    Mental Health Challenges Associated with Quarantine and Isolation
    Care for Individuals in Quarantine and Patients in Isolation
    Mental Health Aspects of Immunization and Vaccination
    Addressing Vaccine Hesitancy
    Mental health Care for Survivors
    Mental Health Care for Family Members of the Patients
    Mental Health Care and Psychological Support for Healthcare Personnel.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Sallie G. De Golia, Raziya S. Wang.
    Summary: Seamlessly combining the wisdom of seasoned leaders in psychiatry residency and fellowship training with the perspective of current residents-in-training, this book offers insights and guidance readers will not easily find in any other resource.

    Contents:
    Cover
    Half Title
    Title
    Copyright
    Table of Contents
    Preface
    Contributors
    PART 1 Understanding Residency
    1 Framing the Residency Experience
    2 The U.S. Mental Health Care Landscape
    PART 2 Centering Our Identities
    3 Centering Our Identities
    4 The Underrepresented in Medicine Experience
    5 Gender and Sexual Identity
    6 Professional and Personal Life: The International Medical Graduate Experience
    PART 3 Approaching Clinical Work
    7 Learning to Develop a Case Formulation
    8 Working With Historically Oppressed Patient Populations 9 The Psychiatric Emergency
    10 On Call and Night Float
    11 Nonpsychiatry Services
    12 Inpatient Services
    13 The Psychiatric Consultation
    14 Working in a Multidisciplinary Team
    15 Outpatient Services
    16 Best Practices in Prescribing Medications
    17 Best Practices in Providing Psychotherapy
    18 Telehealth Services
    19 Legal Issues
    20 Managing Patient Suicide
    21 Public Mental Health
    22 Supervision
    PART 4 Building Skills
    23 Blue Ink Spots Working Toward Accurate Self-Knowledge Through Self-Awareness
    24 Communication Skills and Managing Conflict 25 Embracing Uncertainty A Prescription Toward Clinical Expertise
    26 The Resident as Teacher
    27 Navigating Technology in Residency
    28 Navigating Use of Social Media
    29 Leadership
    30 Scholarship
    31 Publishing
    32 Advocacy
    PART 5 Developing a Career
    33 Mentorship and Sponsorship
    34 Preparing for Your Career
    35 Steps to Securing Your First Job
    36 Beyond Training Board Certification and Continuing Medical Education
    PART 6 Maintaining a Professional and Personal Life
    37 Work-Life Integration Accomplishing Your Professional and Personal Goals 38 Wellness Am I Well or Am I Burned Out?
    39 Handling Mistreatment and Discrimination
    40 Physician Impairment
    41 Practical Finances Creating a Budget and Beginning Investing
    Appendix: Self-Directed Learning
    Index
    Back Cover
  • Digital/Print
    J. Clive Spiegel, MD and John M. Kenny, MD.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC457 .S65 2017
    2
  • Print
    edited by William S. Breitbart, Phyllis N. Butow, Paul B. Jacobsen, Wendy W. T. Lam, Mark Lazenby, Matthew J. Loscalzo.
    Summary: "Psycho-oncology, 4th Edition is solemnly dedicated to Professor Jimmie C. Holland, M.D., internationally recognized as the founder of the field of Psycho-oncology. Dr. Holland, who was affectionately known by her first name "Jimmie", had a profound global influence on the fields of Psycho-oncology, Oncology, Supportive Care, Psychiatry, Behavioral Medicine and Psychosomatic Medicine. At the time of her passing, Dr. Holland was the Attending Psychiatrist and Wayne E. Chapman Chair at Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center (MSK) and Professor of Psychiatry, Weill Medical College of Cornell University in New York"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Cover
    Half title
    Psycho-Oncology Fourth Edition
    Copyright
    Dedication
    Contents
    Section editors
    Contributors
    Introduction: Our Past, Our Future-New Frontiers in Psycho-​Oncology
    SECTION I Behavioral and Psychological Factors in Cancer Risk and Prevention
    1 Tobacco Use and Cessation
    2 Diet and Cancer
    3 Physical Activity, Sedentary Behavior, and Cancer
    4 Sun Exposure and Cancer Risk
    5 Psychosocial Factors
    6 Viral Cancers and Behavior
    Section II Screening for Cancer in Normal and At-​Risk Populations
    7 Colorectal Cancer Screening 8 Cervical Cancer Screening and HPV Vaccination: Multilevel Challenges to Cervical Cancer Prevention
    9 Breast Cancer Screening
    10 Prostate Cancer Screening
    11 Lung Cancer Screening
    12 Skin Cancer Screening
    Section III Screening and Testing for Germ Line and Somatic Mutations
    13 Psychosocial Issues in Genetic Testing for Breast/​Ovarian Cancer
    14 Psychosocial Issues in Genetic Testing for Hereditary Colorectal Cancer
    15 Psychosocial Issues in Genomic Testing, Including Genomic Testing for Targeted Therapies 16 Psychosocial Issues Related to Liquid Biopsy for ctDNA in Individuals at Normal and Elevated Risk
    Section IV Screening and Assessment in Psychosocial Oncology
    17 Screening and Assessment for Distress
    18 Assessment, Screening, and Case Finding for Depression and Anxiety in People with Cancer
    19 Screening for Delirium and Dementia in the Cancer Patient
    20 Screening and Assessment for Cognitive Problems
    Section V Psychological Issues Related to Site of Cancer
    21 Melanoma
    22 Lung Cancer
    23 Breast Cancer
    24 Colorectal Cancer 25 Prostate Cancer and Genitourinary Malignancies
    26 Gastrointestinal Cancers
    27 Gynecologic Cancers
    28 Hematopoietic Dyscrasias and Stem Cell Transplantation/​CAR-​T Cell Therapy
    29 Head and Neck Cancer
    30 Central Nervous System Tumors
    31 HIV Infection and AIDS-​Associated Neoplasms
    Section VI Management of Specific Physical Symptoms
    32 Cancer-​Related Pain
    33 Nausea and Vomiting
    34 Cancer-​Related Fatigue
    35 Sexual Problems and Cancer
    36 Neuropsychological Impact of Cancer and Cancer Treatments
    37 Sleep and Cancer
    38 Weight and Appetite Loss in Cancer 39 Body Image-​An Important Dimension in Cancer Care
    Section VII Psychiatric Disorders
    40 Adjustment Disorders in Cancer
    41 Depressive Disorders in Cancer
    42 Suicide and Medical Aid in Dying
    43 Anxiety Disorders
    44 Delirium
    45 Substance Use Disorders
    46 Posttraumatic Stress Disorder Associated with Cancer Diagnosis and Treatment
    47 Psychiatric Toxicities of Cancer Therapies: Focus on Immunotherapy and Targeted Therapy
    Section VIII Evidence-​Based Interventions
    48 Delivering Integrated Psychosocial Oncology Care: The Collaborative Care Model
    Digital Access Oxford [2021]
  • Digital
    Ute Goerling, editor.
    Summary: Psycho-oncology is a thriving discipline in cancer care, and numerous research activities have been undertaken in the endeavor to improve treatment outcomes and to gain a better understanding of the psychological consequences of cancer. This book presents and discusses the latest findings from science and practice for a broad range of psychological and social issues related to cancer and its treatments. Not only are general psychosocial impacts of cancer described, but the very common fear of progression is elucidated. The relevance of psychooncology at different stages of disease (during oncological treatment, in rehabilitation, and during palliative care) is explained, and various psychooncological interventions are illustrated. Other important topics are the experience of being a cancer survivor, who may be cured but not be healthy, the psychological burden on relatives, and gender differences in coping with cancer. Quality of life and patient-reported outcomes are also commented on since they are among the key benchmarks for successful coping with the diagnosis of cancer, its treatment, and its late effects.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Ute Goerling, Anja Mehnert, editors.
    Summary: This book examines in detail the psychosocial impacts of cancer and its management, explaining the relevance of psycho-oncology during all stages from diagnosis and treatment through to cancer survivorship and rehabilitation and end-of-life care. This new edition has been revised throughout to reflect the latest knowledge and places particular emphasis on patients' perspectives and what professionals can learn from patients. Readers will find information on a variety of psycho-oncological interventions, and detailed attention is paid to quality of life and patient-reported outcomes (as key benchmarks for successful coping) and to the fear of progression during and after therapy. Entirely new chapters focus on the psychological impact of individualized therapies in oncology, communication skills training, medical risk communication, and current research approaches in psycho-oncology. Written by leading experts in the field, the book will serve as a valuable resource for all health care professionals who work with patients and their relatives in the field of psychosocial cancer care and oncology.

    Contents:
    Psychosocial impact of cancer
    Fear of progression in cancer patients and survivors
    Gender opportunities in psychosocial oncology
    Psycho-oncology : A patient's view
    The oncological patient in the palliative situation
    Family caregivers to adults with cancer: The consequences of caring
    Rehabilitation for cancer patients
    Cancer survivorship in adults
    Psychotherapy in the oncology setting
    Quality of life in oncology
    Psychosocial impact of personalized therapies in oncology
    COMSKIL communication training in oncology
    adaptation to German cancer care settings
    The barrier to informed choice in cancer screening: Statistical illiteracy in physicians and patients
    Future research in psycho-oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Shulamith Kreitler.
    Summary: This volume strives to give oncologists and other medical practitioners a thorough picture of the oncology patient. It's designed to show that psychological needs of the patient are an important aspect that should be considered for optimizing the effects of cancer treatment, no less than genetic, immunological, physiological and other medical features that are often considered as necessary components of personalized medicine. Using evidence-based information, the book describes the different ways cancer touches upon a person's life, including emotional, physical, and social changes, important decisions, and support structure. It also details the phases every cancer patient encounters along the way, from getting tested and waiting for the diagnosis, to treatments, survival, and confronting one's mortality. Psycho-oncology for the Clinician will serve to contribute to the further scientific development of psycho-oncology, expand its use as a treatment modality, strengthen its status as an essential component of cancer care, and promote the acceptance of psycho-oncology as the new evidence-based constituent of personalized medicine in oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Amritpal Singh Saroya, Jaswinder Singh.
    Summary: This book provides a clear and comprehensive overview of psychoactive medicinal plants, explaining in detail the species that are most commonly used in medicine, and describing their mechanism of action, the implicated toxin, clinical manifestation and therapeutic role. It explores the recent research in the area of psychoactive medicinal plants and fungal neurotoxins, and presents the various biochemical pathways involved and the bioactive targets. The book also discusses the current literature in the field, including the latest methodology used to identify the active compounds, their pharmacological and physiological properties along with their clinical efficacy. Compiling the most up to date information on major psychoactive medicinal plants and fungal neurotoxins, the book covers all major classes of psychoactive drugs, including stimulants, cognitive enhancers, sedatives and anxiolytics, psychotherapeutic herbs, analgesics and anesthetic plants, hallucinogens and cannabis.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Psychoactive Medicinal Plants
    Chapter 2: Major Hallucinogenic Medicinal Plants in Folk medicine
    3: Description of Psychoactive Medicinal Plants
    Chapter 4: Pharmacology of Fungal Neurotoxins
    CHAPTER 5: MYCOTOXINS IN HERBAL MEDICINES.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    edited by Mali Mann.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Psychoanalytic impact of assisted reproductive technology / Mali Mann
    Psychoanalytic understanding of repeated in-vitro fertilization trials, failures, and repetition compulsion / Mali Mann
    Family complexes and oedipal circles: mothers, fathers, babies, donors, and surrogates / Diane Ehrensaft
    Psychoanalytic treatment of anxiety related to motherhood and the use of assisted reproductive technology / Terese Schulman
    Egg donors and sperm donors: parental identity formation / Mali Mann and Andrea Mann
    Infertility, trauma, and assisted reproductive technology: psychoanalytic perspectives / Manisha Near-Akhtar
    Assisted reproduction as explored in The Kids Are All Right / Katherine MacVicar.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG133.5 .P79 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Kostas N. Fountoulakis, Ioannis Nimatoudis, editors.
    Summary: The book provides a comprehensive reference on the neurobiological understanding of behaviour, how behaviour is regulated by the brain, and how such behaviours in turn influence the brain. The work offers an introduction to neural systems and genetics/epigenetics, followed by detailed study of a wide range of behaviours - temperament and personality, instincts and drives, memory and cognitive function, sex and sexual differentiation, ethology and evolutionary biology, aging, drug abuse and other problematic behaviors, psychophysiology and ultimately the links to biological psychiatry and psychopharmacology. Research findings on the neural basis of social behaviour are integrated across different levels of analysis, from molecular neurobiology and neural systems/behavioural neuroscience to fMRI imaging data on human social behaviour. The content covers research on both normal and abnormal behaviours, as well as developmental aspects. The target audience includes psychiatrists, neurologists, nurses, psychologists and all researchers and advanced students in behavioural, social and developmental neuroscience, as well as clinical neuroscientists.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Functional anatomy of the human brain
    Memory-learning
    Basic vital functions and instincts
    Temperament-personality-character and evolutionary biology
    Sexuality
    Aging
    Substance use and abuse
    Sleep and dreams
    Genetics and behavior
    Psychobiology and psychoanalysis
    Psychophysiology
    The contribution of sociology, ethology and other disciplines
    Biological psychiatry and psychopharmacology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Anthony Bewley, Peter Lepping, Ruth Taylor, editors.
    Summary: This book represents a simple, practical resource for all healthcare professionals working with dermatological patients with psychological and psychiatric aspects to their disease. The emphasis is on effective guidance rather than exhaustive case reviews, providing readers with a manual on the appropriate way to approach management of the patient in each case. Comprehensive in coverage, but concise in its delivery of information, Psychodermatology in Clinical Practice presents an idealized approach to management of psychodermatology patients within a global perspective, and provides practical tools to aid assessment of patients and in the decision-making process. It is suitable for dermatologists, psychiatrists and psychologists, dermatology nursing staff, primary care physicians and pediatricians.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    History
    Exam
    Assessment tools
    Psych assessment
    Risk assessment
    Psychopharmacology
    Psychological Immunology
    Delusional disorders
    OCDs
    Factitious skin disease
    Nodular prurigo
    Psychogenic Itch
    Dysesthesias
    Trigeminal trophic syndrome
    Affective disorders in dermatology
    Substance abuse.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Vittorio Lingiardi, Nancy McWilliams.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Rationale for the PDM-2 classification system
    Updating and refining the original PDM
    Part I. Adulthood
    Part II. Adolescence
    Part III. Childhood
    Part IV. Infancy and early childhood
    Part V. Later life
    Part VI. Assessment and clinical illustrations
    Index.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    by David Mintz.
    Summary: "The troubling increase in treatment resistance in psychiatry has many culprits: the rise of biomedical psychiatry and corresponding sidelining of psychodynamic and psychosocial factors; the increased emphasis on treating the symptoms rather than the person; and a greater focus on the electronic medical record rather than the patient, all of which point to a breakdown in the person-centered prescriber-patient relationship. Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology illuminates a new path forward. It examines the psychological and interpersonal mechanisms of pharmacological treatment resistance, integrating research on evidence-based prescribing processes with psychodynamic insights and skills to enhance treatment outcomes for patients who are difficult to treat. The first part of the book explores the evidence base that guides how, rather than simply what, to prescribe. It describes precisely what psychodynamic psychopharmacology is and why its emphasis on combining the often-neglected psychosocial aspects of medication with biomedical considerations provides a more optimized approach to addressing treatment resistance. Part II delves into the psychodynamics that contribute to pharmacological treatment resistance, both when patients' ambivalence about their illness, the medication itself, or their prescriber manifests in nonadherence and when medications support a negative identity or are used as replacements for healthy capacities. Readers will gain basic skills for addressing the psychological and interpersonal dynamics that underpin both scenarios and will be better positioned to ameliorate interferences with the healthy use of medications. The final section of the book offers detailed technical recommendations for addressing pharmacological treatment resistance. It tackles issues that include countertransference-driven irrational prescribing; primitive dynamics, such as splitting and projective identification; and the overlap between psychopharmacological treatment resistance and the dynamics of treatment nonadherence and nonresponse in integrated and collaborative medical care settings. By putting the individual patient back at the center of the therapeutic equation, psychodynamic psychopharmacology, as outlined in this book, offers a model that moves beyond compliance and emphasizes instead the alliance between patient and prescriber. In doing so, it empowers patients to become more active contributors in their own recovery"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    What Is Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology?
    Why Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology?
    What Is Psychodynamic About Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology?
    Psychodynamics of Pharmacological Treatment Resistance
    Treatment Resistance to Medications
    Treatment Resistance From Medications
    The Prescriber's Contribution to Treatment Resistance
    Avoid a Mind-Body Split
    Know Who the Patient Is
    Attend to Patients' Ambivalence
    Cultivate the Pharmacotherapeutic Alliance
    Attend to Countertherapeutic Uses of Medications
    Identify, Contain, and Use Countertransference
    Who Is Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology For? Patient Characteristics
    Before Initiating Treatment
    The Engagement Phase
    The Maintenance Phase
    Split and Combined Treatments
    Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology and Integrated Care.
  • Digital
    Deborah L. Cabaniss and Sabrina Cherry, Carolyn J. Douglas, Anna Schwartz.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Barbara A. Dworetzky, Gaston C. Baslet.
    Contents:
    Ambulatory presentations in adults and children / by M. Angela O'Neal and Rochelle Caplan
    Emergency department and urgent care presentations / by Daniel Weisholtz and Barbara Dworetzky
    Psychiatric factors / by Kim Bullock and John Barry
    Neurologic and medical factors / by Victoria S.S. Wong and Martin Salinsky
    Mechanisms of possible neurocognitive dysfunction in psychogenic nonepileptic seizures / by Daniel L. Drane and Dona E.C. Locke
    The neurobiology of psychogenic nonepileptic seizures and other functional neurological symptoms / by David L. Perez and Valerie Voon
    Diagnostic challenges for the neurologist / by Jigar Rathod and Selim R. Benbadis
    Diagnostic challenges for the mental health team/psychiatrist / by Lorna Myers and John Barry
    Practical and diagnostic challenges for the neuropsychologist / by Kim Willment and David Loring
    Communicating the diagnosis / by Markus Reuber
    Clinician's response to the PNES diagnosis / by Sigita Plioplys, Shan Abbas, and Brien Smith
    Models of care for PNES / by Tyson Sawchuk, Joan K. Austin, and Debbie Terry
    Readiness to start treatment and obstacles to adherence / by Benjamin Tolchin and Gaston Baslet
    Evidence-based treatments for psychogenic nonepileptic seizures / by W. Curt LaFrance Jr and Laura H. Goldstein
    The role of the neurologist after the diagnosis of PNES / by Adriana Bermeo-Ovalle and Andres M. Kanner
    The roles of the patient and family in the diagnosis and treatment of PNES / by Julia Doss and Jeffrey Robbins
    Long-term outcome of psychogenic non epileptic seizures / by Roderick Duncan
    An integrated approach to other functional neurological symptoms and related disorders / by Jon Stone and Alan Carson
    Towards the integration of care / by Gaston Baslet and Barbara Dworetzky.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Riccardo Proietti, Gian Mauro Manzoni, Giada Pietrabissa, Gianluca Castelnuovo, editors.
    Summary: This book reveals aspects of the management of patients with implantable cardiac devices beyond the direct cardiovascular benefits. With approximately 600,000 new pacemakers implanted each year, electrical therapy of the heart has rapidly evolved over recent years. New technology is continuously introduced into the market for the treatment of electrical heart disease with optimized performance and implemented design. While much attention has mainly focused on the biomedical aspects of electrical therapy, the psychological, emotional, social and cognitive aspects of the implantable devices have been largely overlooked. Psychological, Emotional, Social and Cognitive Aspects of Implantable Cardiac Devices considers the impact that these devices have on quality of life (QoL) and psychological disorders, including anxiety and depression. It has collected, appraised and condensed the results of all empirical studies that have investigated, even marginally, the relationships between the implantable devices and any psychological, emotional, social and cognitive dimension and is thus a cornerstone for all involved in device utilization (physicians, nurses, technicians, industry representatives) that need to understand this topic.

    Contents:
    Cognitive function in patients with congestive heart failure
    Heart brain connection in patients with ischemic heart disease
    Neurovegetative system and congestive heart failure
    Cognitive performance in the elderly
    Evolution and principle of pacing devices
    Hemodynamic performance of cardiac devices
    Impact of cardiac devices on QoL
    Pacemakers and cognitive performance
    Anxiety, depression and QoL in patients with ICD
    Emotional impact of device recall
    Cognitive impact of CRT.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by O. Joseph Bienvenu, Christina Jones, Ramona O. Hopkins.
    Contents:
    Personal journeys through understanding the psychological and cognitive problems faced by critical illness survivors / Christina Jones, Peter Gibb, and Ramona O. Hopkins
    Delirium in critically ill patients / Mark van den Boogaard and Paul Rood
    Critical illness and long-term cognitive impairment / Ramona O. Hopkins, PhD, Maria E. Carlo, MD, James C. Jackson, PsyD
    Psychological impact of critical illness / O. Joseph Bienvenu and Christina Jones
    Rehabilitation psychology insights for the treatment of critical illness survivors / Jennifer E. Jutte, James C. Jackson, and Ramona O. Hopkins
    Prevention and treatment of posttraumatic stress and depressive phenomena in critical illness survivors / Christina Jones and O. Joseph Bienvenu
    Supporting pediatric patients and their families during and after intensive care treatment / Gillian Coville
    Family response to critical illness / Judy E. Davidson and Giroa Netzer.
    Digital Access Oxford [2017]
  • Digital
    Jennifer L. Steel, Brian I. Carr, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses the unmet needs of the medical community in dealing with the psychological problems, particularly anxiety and depression, of patients diagnosed with cancer. Providing a scholarly review of the impact of cancer diagnosis on patients emotional and psychological status, as well as the evidence that psychological factors impact cancer occurrence and biological behavior, this book explores the therapeutic implications of such converse dynamics. Chapters review financial toxicity, eHealth, palliative care, mindfulness, sleep and cancer, social support and cancer, cultural diversity, pediatric and adolescent oncology, and geriatric oncology. While intended primarily for the professional readership of oncologists, psychologists, psychiatrists, social workers, and palliative care physicians, a final chapter also provides practical information on available resources for patients. This fully updated and expanded new edition of Psychological Aspects of Cancer: A Guide to Emotional and Psychological Consequences of Cancer, Their Causes, and Their Management provides practitioners with cutting edge knowledge as well as practical information that translates into better care for patients with cancer. .

    Contents:
    Inflammation, Chronic Disease, and Cancer: Is Psychological Distress the Common Thread?
    Psychological Factors and Survivorship: A Focus on Post-Treatment Cancer Survivors
    Couple Relationships and Cancer
    The Impact of Cancer and Its Therapies on Body Image and Sexuality
    Use of the Classic Hallucinogen Psilocybin for Treatment of Existential Distress Associated with Cancer
    Meaning, Spirituality, and Perceived Growth Across the Cancer Continuum: A Positive Psychology Perspective
    Stress, Coping, and Hope
    Religiousness and Spirituality in Coping with Cancer
    Psychoneuroimmunology and Cancer: Mechanisms Explaining Incidence, Progression, and Quality of Life Difficulties
    Psychosocial Interventions in Cancer
    Altruism in Relation to Live Donor Liver Transplants for Liver Cancer
    New and Emerging Challenges in Advanced Cancer Care: Opportunities for Enhancing Patient-Centered Communication
    Complementary Mind-Body Therapies in Cancer
    The Intersection between Cancer and Caregiver Survivorship
    Controversies in Psycho-Oncology
    Resources for Cancer Patients
    Adolescent and Young Adult Cancer Survivors
    Cancer Fatalism: Attitudes Toward Screening and Car
    The Intersection between Cancer and Caregiver Survivorship
    Cancer and the Aging Population
    Mindfulness Based Interventions for Patients with Cancer
    Social Genomics and Cancer: Neural Regulation of the Cancer Genome
    Psychological Aspects of Hereditary Cancer Risk Counseling and Genetic Testing: Toward an Expanded and More Equitable View
    Meaning-Centered Psychotherapy
    Quality of Life
    Bringing It All Together.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Nancy A. Pachana, PhD, Victor Molinari, PhD, ABPP, Larry W. Thompson, PhD, ABPP, Dolores Gallagher-Thompson, PhD, ABPP.
    Summary: "Mental health practitioners are encountering an ever-growing number of older adults and so an up-to-date and comprehensive text addressing the special considerations that arise in the psychological assessment and treatment of this population is vital. This accessible handbook does just that by introducing the key topics that psychologists and other health professionals face when working with older adults. Each area is introduced and then the special considerations for older adults are explored, including specific ethical and healthcare system issues. The use of case examples brings the topics further to life. An important feature of the book is the interweaving of diversity issues (culture, race, sexuality, etc.) within the text to lend an inclusive, contemporary insight into these important practice components. The Pikes Peak Geropsychology Knowledge and Skill Assessment Tool is included in an appendix so readers can test their knowledge, which will be helpful for those aiming for board certification in geropsychology (ABGERO). This an ideal text for clinical psychologists and mental health professionals transitioning to work with older clients, for those wanting to improve their knowledge for their regular practice, and for trainees or young clinicians just starting out."-- Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC451.4.A5 P79 2021
    1
  • Print
    edited by Scott O. Lilienfeld, Irwin D. Waldman.
    Contents:
    Introduction: psychological science under scrutiny : recent challenges and proposed remedies / Scott O. Lilienfeld and Irwin D. Waldman
    Cross-cutting challenges to psychological science
    Maximizing the reproducibility of your research / Open Science Collaboration
    Powering reproducible research / atherine S. Button and Marcus R. Munaf
    Psychological science's aversion to the null and why many of the things you think are true, aren't / Christopher J. Ferguson and Moritz Heene
    False negatives / Klaus Fiedler and Malte Schott
    Toward transparent reporting of psychological science / Etienne P. LeBel and Leslie K. John
    Decline effects : types, mechanisms, and personal reflections / John Protzko and Jonathan W. Schooler
    Reverse inference / Joachim I. Krueger
    The need for bayesian hypothesis testing in psychological science / Eric-Jan Wagenmakers, Josine Verhagen, Alexander Ly, Dora Matzke, Helen Steingroever, Jeff N. Rouder, and Richard Morey
    Domain-specific challenges to psychological science
    The (partial but) real crisis in social psychology : a social influence analysis of the causes and solutions / Anthony R. Pratkanis
    Popularity as a poor proxy for utility : the case of implicit prejudice / Gregory Mitchell and Philip E. Tetlock
    Suspiciously high correlations in brain imaging research / Edward Vul and Harold Pashler
    Critical issues in genetic association studies / Elizabeth Prom-Wormley, Amy Adkins, Irwin D. Waldman, Danielle Dick
    Is the efficacy of?antidepressant? medications overrated? / Brett J. Deacon and Glen I. Spielmans
    Pitfalls in parapsychological research / Ray Hyman
    Psychological and institutional obstacles to high quality psychological science
    Blind analysis as a correction for confirmatory bias in physics and psychology / Robert J. MacCoun and Saul Perlmutter
    Allegiance effects in clinical psychology research and practice / Marcus T. Boccaccini. David Marcus, and Daniel C. Murrie
    We can do better than fads / Robert J. Sternberg
    Afterword: paul bloom
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Benjamin A. Bensadon.
    Contents:
    1. Goal-Oriented care
    2. Family caregiving
    3. Attitudes, beliefs, and behavior
    4. Communication
    5. Culture of medicine
    6. Psychology consult: when and why
    7. Managing safety and mobility needs of older drivers
    8. Person-centered suicide prevention
    9. End-of-life care
    10. Experiential learning and "selling" geriatrics
    11. Simulation education.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Gisli H. Gudjonsson.
    Contents:
    Part I. The Emerging Science and Practice
    1. An era of enquiry and development
    2. The impact of real-life cases on legal changes, police practice, and science
    3. Interrogative suggestibility
    4. The psychology of false confessions: the theories
    5. The development of the science: the evidence base
    Part II. The Gundmundur and Geirfinnur Cases
    6. Icelandic society in the 1970s
    7. The Keflavik investigation and the first confession
    8. The confessions in the Gudmundur Einarsson case
    9. The confessions in the Geirfinnur Eianrsson case
    10. Misguiding force
    11. The return of the Gudmundur and Geirfinnur cases
    12. The findings from the working group, special prosecutor, and Icelandic Court Cases Review Commission
    Part III. A Psychological Analysis of the Confessions of the Six Convicted Persons
    13. Did Saevar Ciesielski have undiagnosed ADHD?
    14. Erla Bolladottier- a vulnerable young woman
    15. Kristjan Vidarsson's memory distrust syndrome and confession
    16. Tryggvi Leifsson's memory distrust syndrome and confession
    17. Gudjon Skarphedinsson's memory distrust syndrome and confession
    18. Albert Skaftason's memory distrust syndrome and confession
    Appendix 1
    Appendix 2
    References
    Author Index
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Rod A. Martin, Thomas E. Ford.
    Summary: Most of us laugh at something funny multiple times during a typical day. Humor serves multiple purposes, and although there is a sizable and expanding research literature on the subject, the research is spread in a variety of disciplines. The Psychology of Humor, 2e reviews the literature, integrating research from across subdisciplines in psychology, as well as related fields such as anthropology, biology, computer science, linguistics, sociology, and more. This book begins by defining humor and presenting theories of humor. Later chapters cover cognitive processes involved in humor and the effects of humor on cognition. Individual differences in personality and humor are identified as well as the physiology of humor, the social functions of humor, and how humor develops and changes over the lifespan. This book concludes noting the association of humor with physical and mental health, and outlines applications of humor use in psychotherapy, education, and the workplace. In addition to being fully updated with recent research, the second edition includes a variety of new materials. More graphs, tables, and figures now illustrate concepts, processes, and theories. It provides new brief interviews with prominent humor scholars via text boxes. The end of each chapter now includes a list of key concepts, critical thinking questions, and a list of resources for further reading.

    Contents:
    Front-matter
    Copyright
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Chapter 1: Introduction to the Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 2: Classic Theories of Humor
    Chapter 3: Contemporary Theories of Humor
    Chapter 4: The Personality Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 5: The Cognitive Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 6: The Physiological Psychology of Humor and Laughter
    Chapter 7: The Developmental Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 8: The Social Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 9: The Clinical Psychology of Humor: Humor and Mental Health
    Chapter 10: The Health Psychology of Humor: Humor and Physical Health
    Chapter 11: Applications of Humor in Education and in the Workplace
    Bibliography
    Author Index
    Subject Index
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Clive R. Hollin.
    Contents:
    1. Interpersonal Violence
    2."Everyday" Violence
    3. Violence at Home
    4. Criminal Violence
    5. Sexual Violence
    6. Where To Next?
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Gordon L. Flett.
    Summary: The Psychology of Mattering: Understanding the Human Need to be Significant is the first comprehensive examination of mattering that is discussed in terms of associated motives, cognitions, emotions and behaviors. As mattering involves the self in relation to other people, the book tackles key relational themes of internal working models of attachment, transactional processes, and more. Extensive analysis from a conceptual perspective is balanced by a similar analysis of mattering from an applied perspective, specifically the relevance of mattering in clinical and counseling contexts, in assessment and treatment. The book is supported by recent empirical advances making it an authoritative text on the psychology of mattering that will heighten awareness of mattering by informing academic scholars and the general public.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Michael A. West.
    Summary: In the past 20 years meditation has grown in popularity across the world - practiced by the general public, as well as by an increasing number of psychologists within their daily clinical practice. This text explores the practice of meditation and mindfulness, providing accounts of the cognitive and emotional processes elicited in meditation.

    Contents:
    The practice of meditation / Michael A. West
    Meditation : practice and experience / Martine Batchelor
    How conscious experience comes about, and why meditation is helpful / Guy Claxton
    Fish discovering water : meditation as a process of recognition / James Carmody
    Psychology of meditation : philosophical perspectives / Loriliai Biernacki
    Traditional and secular views of psychotherapeutic applications of mindfulness and meditation / Lynn C. Waelde and Jason M. Thompson
    Meditation and the management of pain / Vidyamala Burch
    Addictive disorders / Sarah Bowen ... [et al.]
    Meditation and physical health / Linda E. Carlson
    The cognitive and affective neurosciences of meditation / Antonino Raffone
    Mindfulness and meditation in the workplace : an acceptance and commitment therapy approach / Frank W. Bond, Paul E. Flaxman, and Joda Lloyd
    Mindfulness in education / Katherine Weare
    Meditation : future theory and research / Peter Sedlmeier, Juliane Eberth, and Maika Puta
    How meditation changes lives : practice, research, and personal journeys / Michael A. West.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Dominic Upton, Penney Upton.
    Summary: This book addresses the psychological consequences of wounds and the psychological components of wound care, building on contemporary research evidence and presenting practical clinical guidelines. Particular emphasis is given to the psychological impact of both wounds and wound treatment. Implications for practice are discussed, making this book both educational and practical. Psychology of Wounds and Wound Care in Clinical Practice is aimed at clinicians, including GPs, vascular surgeons and physicians, nurses, especially tissue viability nurses, and podiatrists, and is also of interest to academic teachers and researchers.

    Contents:
    Psychosocial Consequences of Wounds
    Pain
    Stress
    Quality of Life and Well-Being
    Different wound type
    Treatment
    Concordance
    Family, friends and social support
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Barry Cripps.
    Contents:
    The History of Psychometrics / Craig Knight
    Ride the Horse Around the Course: Triangulating Nomothetic and Idiographic Approaches to Personality Assessment / Barry Cripps
    A Very Good Question? / Peter Saville and Rab Maciver
    Big Data and Predictive Analytics: Opportunity or Threat to the Future of Tests and Testing / Eugene Burke
    The Practical Application of Test User Knowledge and Skills / Gerry Duggan
    The Utility of Psychometric Tests for Small Organisations / Paul Barrett
    HR Applications of Psychometrics / Rob Bailey
    Defining and Assessing Leadership Talent: A Multi-layered Approach / Caroline Curtis
    Psychometrics: The Evaluation and Development of Team Performance / Stephen Benton
    Psychometrics in Sport: The Good, the Bad and the Ugly / Dave Collins and Andrew Cruickshank
    Using Psychometrics to Make Management Selection Decisions: A Practitioner Journey / Hugh McCredie
    Psychometrics in Clinical Settings / Hamilton Fairfax
    The Use and Misuse of Psychometrics in Clinical Settings / Susan van Scoyoc
    Measuring the Dark Side / Adrian Furnham
    Projective Measures and Occupational Assessment / Christopher Ridgeway
    Testing across Cultures: Translation, Adaptation and Indigenous: Test Development / Lina Daouk-Oyry and Pia Zeinoun
    Personality Testing in the Workplace: Can Internet Business Disruption Erode the Influence of Psychology Ethics? / Earon Kavanagh
    A Practitioner's Viewpoint: Limitations and Assumptions Implicit in Assessment / Jay Roseveare
    When Profit Comes In the Door, Does Science Go Out the Window? / Robert Forde
    The Future of Psychometric Testing / Robert McHenry.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Carina Coulacoglou, Donald H. Sklofske.
    Summary: Psychometrics and Psychological Assessment: Principles and Applications reports on contemporary perspectives and models on psychological assessment and their corresponding measures. It highlights topics relevant to clinical and neuropsychological domains, including cognitive abilities, adaptive behavior, temperament, and psychopathology.Moreover, the book examines a series of standard as well as novel methods and instruments, along with their psychometric properties, recent meta-analytic studies, and their cross-cultural applications.

    Contents:
    Recent advances in psychological assessment and test construction
    Classical test theory, generalizablity theory, and item response perspectives on reliability
    Validity
    Advances in latent variable measurement modeling
    Executive function, theory of mind, and adaptive behavior
    Metacognition, empathy, and cognitive biases in schizophrenia and OCD
    The role of temperament in development and psychopathology
    The assessment of family, parenting, and child outcomes
    Perspectives and advances in personality
    Measures of personality
    Advances in theoretical, developmental and cross-cultural perspectives of psychopathology
    Psychiatric taxonomies and corresponding measures
    Theoretical perspectives of criminal behaviors and developmental criminology
    General overview of violence risk assessment and corresponding measures
    The aggressive implications of suicide.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Ana Hategan, James A. Bourgeois, Azim S. Gangji, Tricia K.W. Woo, editors.
    Summary: The book focuses on pharmacological and non-pharmacological approaches of psychiatric syndromes that commonly occur in patients with kidney disease. It specifically reviews principles of psychotherapy and psychopharmacology with an emphasis on organ impairment and drug-drug interactions specific to nephrology. This book also covers issues with medication nonadherence in patients with chronic kidney disease and psychiatric comorbidity, as well as the associated issues in dialysis and renal transplantation. Additionally, chapters cover various other topics addressing an active stance towards health promotion in chronically ill patients, including the critical role of the diet and physical activity. Such advice is often complex and changing depending on the stage of chronic kidney disease and the individual needs of the patient. Written by specialists in the field, Psychonephrology: A Guide to Principles and Practice serves as a valuable reference and teaching tool that provides an opportunity for learning across a rapidly evolving medical field.

    Contents:
    Section I. Fundamentals of Psychonephrology
    Psychiatric examination in nephrology
    Psychometric assessment of neuropsychological function in kidney disease
    Current state, knowledge gaps, and management strategies of kidney disease for the psychiatrist
    Renal transplant essentials
    Overview of psychopharmacology principles in nephrology
    Renal toxicity of psychotropic medications
    Overview of psychotherapy principles for patients with kidney disease
    Decisional capacity determinations in psychonephrology
    Consultation-liaison psychiatry and collaborative care models of the patient with renal disease
    Section II. Common Psychiatric Presentations and their Management in the Patient with Kidney Disease
    Common psychiatric disorders in the renal patient
    Substance use disorders and the kidney
    Neurocognitive ramifications of renal disease
    Sexuality and sexual dysfunction in the renal patient
    Psychotoxicity of immunomodulators: corticosteroids, mycophenolate, tacrolimus, cyclophosphamide, and hydroxychloroquine
    Psychological aspects of adaptation to critical care nephrology, dialysis, and transplantation for the patient and the caregiver
    Palliative, end-of-life, and psychiatric care of patients with advanced renal disease
    Difficult patient encounters in nephrology
    Section III. Special Issues in Psychonephrology
    Chronic kidney disease and the aging population: Addressing unmet needs
    Physical activity and nutrition in chronic kidney disease
    Gender disparity and women's health in kidney disease
    Cultural considerations when caring for racial and ethnic minority patients with end-stage renal disease
    Occupation-related stress affecting physicians caring for patients with renal disease
    Modernizing continuing professional development using social media
    Psychonephrology of the future: A global psychiatry and nephrology inter-specialty curriculum for training the next generation of specialists.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Margarita Sáenz-Herrero.
    Summary: Gender has a fundamental influence on the human brain, not only by virtue of biological and hormonal differences between the sexes but also because of the impact of gender-specific cultural, social, anthropological, and environmental factors. Nevertheless, the relation of gender and psychopathology remains a largely neglected field. Gender perspective has been treated as a paradigm in this book on psychopathology because it determines the way in which a psychiatric symptom is defined, perceived, and understood. This conception of gender as being of key importance in the definition of psychiatric symptomatology is exceptional in the literature. The book opens by examining historical and cultural aspects of mental health in women worldwide and the relation of sex, brain, and gender, with coverage of both neurobiological and psychosocial aspects. The significance of gender with regard to specific aspects of psychopathology is then addressed in detail. A wide range of psychological disorders are considered, as well as hormonal influences and issues concerning body image, self identity, sexuality, and life instinct. It is hoped that this book will make a significant contribution in ensuring that gender perspective receives due attention within descriptive psychopathology.

    Contents:
    Historical and Cultural Aspects: Women and mental Health all over the world
    Sex, Brain and Gender: Neurobiology
    Sexual Differentiation of the Human Nervous System
    Psychosocial Aspects
    Specific Pathology in Women: Body Image, Corporality and Corporeality
    Body and corporality
    Concept and History of Body Image
    Body and Hysteria: Dissociated body
    Corporality and Trauma
    Dysmorphophobia: From Neuroticism to Psychoticism
    Self Identity and Gender differences
    Psychopathology of Eating Behavior
    Anorexia Nervosa
    Bulimia Nervosa
    Binge Eating Disorder
    Eating Disorder not otherwise specified
    Avoidant/ restrictive food intake disorders
    Psychopathology of Sexuality
    Psychopathology of Life Instinct
    Psychopathology associated to Hormonal Aspects: Relation of Estrogen, cycle phases and Psychopathology in Women
    Dysphoric Syndrome
    Depression during Pregnancy
    Postpartum and postnatal depression
    Puerperal Psychosis
    Menopause Depression
    Psychopathology and Gender in Psychiatric Syndromes and New Disorders: Mood Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders
    Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
    Schizophrenia
    Bipolar Disorder
    Personality Disorders and Gender Differences
    Borderline Personality Disorder
    Addiction
    Social and cultural differences
    Somatomorphic and Factitious Disorders
    Psychopathology Gender, Creativity, Body Art and Feminism
    Controversial Aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Margarita Saenz-Herrero, editor.
    Summary: This book examines sex and gender differences in the causes and expression of medical conditions, including mental health disorders. Sex differences are variations attributable to individual reproductive organs and the XX or XY chromosomal complement. Gender differences are variations that result from biological sex as well as individual self-representation which include psychological, behavioural, and social consequences of an individuals perceived gender. Gender is still a neglected field in psychopathology, and gender differences is often incorrectly used as a synonym of sex differences. A reconsideration of the definition of gender, as the term that subsumes masculinity and femininity, could shed some light on this misperception and could have an effect in the study of health and disease. This second edition of Psychopathology clarifies the anthropological, cultural and social aspects of gender and their impact on mental health disorders. It focuses on gender perspective as a paradigm not only in psychopathology but also in mental health disorders. As such it promotes open mindedness in the definition and perception of symptoms, as well as assumptions about those symptoms, and raises awareness of mental health.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; About the Editor; Introduction; Part I: General Aspects;
    1: Women Mental Health All over the World: Sociopolitical Aspects of Gender Discrimination and Violence: Immigration and Transnational Motherhood; 1.1 The Social Health Approach; 1.2 Gender Violence: A Public Health Problem Around the World; 1.2.1 Defining Poverty and Its Gender Distribution; 1.2.2 Human Trafficking; 1.2.3 Women in Armed Conflicts; 1.3 International Recommendations for the Prevention of Gender-Based Violence; 1.4 Prevention and Response; 1.5 The Feminization of Immigration 1.5.1 Transnational Motherhood1.6 The Empowerment of Women; References;
    2: What Is Human Resilience and Why Does It Matter?; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 The Many Definitions of Resilience and Related Terminology; 2.2.1 Origins of Resilience Research; 2.3 Resilience as a Complex and Dynamic 'Natural' Human Process; 2.4 Context Matters: Challenging Normative Stands in Definitions; 2.5 Going Beyond the Individual: The Structural Factors that Support, Enhance or Diminish Resilience Trajectories; 2.6 Gender Blindness: When Resilience Is About Rights and Equity; 2.7 Conclusion; References
    3: Intimate Partner Violence Against Women: Impact on Mental Health3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Explanatory Models; 3.2.1 Individual; 3.2.2 Microsystem; 3.2.3 Exosystem; 3.2.4 Macrosystem; 3.3 Vulnerability Factors: Attachment, Trauma, Resilience and Intimate Partner Violence Against Women; 3.4 Psychic Changes in People Exposed to Protracted Traumas; 3.4.1 Coercive Persuasion; 3.4.2 Domestic Stockholm Syndrome; 3.4.3 Paradoxical Adaptation to Domestic Violence Syndrome; 3.4.4 Cycle of Violence; 3.5 Specific Aspects of Mental Health Issues in Women Victims of Intimate Partner Violence Against Women 3.5.1 SMI and IPV Against Women3.5.2 Depression and Suicide; 3.5.3 PTSD; 3.5.4 Complex PTSD; 3.5.5 Substance Abuse; 3.5.6 Dissociative Disorders; 3.5.7 Psychosomatic Disorders; 3.5.8 Eating Disorders; 3.6 Final Thoughts About Intervention and Impact on Healthcare Professionals; 3.6.1 Impact of Working with IPV Victims on Professionals; References;
    4: Sexual Violence: Effects on Women's Identity and Mental Health; 4.1 The Roots of Sexual Violence; 4.1.1 Sexual Violence Throughout History; 4.1.2 Sexual Violence, Patriarchy and Desire; 4.2 Types of Sexual Violence and Their Context 4.2.1 Sexual Harassment4.2.2 Sexual Abuse; 4.2.3 Sexual Assault; 4.2.4 Other Sexual Violence Scenarios; 4.2.5 Sexual Violence in Childhood, Adolescence and in the Couple; 4.2.5.1 Sexual Abuse in Childhood; 4.2.5.2 Child Sexual Abuse Inside and Outside the Family; 4.2.5.3 Sexual Violence in Adolescents and the Use of Social Media; 4.2.5.4 Sexual Violence in the Couple; 4.2.6 Prostitution; 4.2.7 Human Trafficking; 4.2.8 Female Genital Mutilation; 4.3 Current Discussions on Sexual Violence; 4.4 Impact of Sexual Violence on Women's Mental Health; 4.4.1 The Starting Point
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Luca Malatesti, John McMillan, Predrag Šustar, editors.
    Summary: This book explains the ethical and conceptual tensions in the use of psychopathy in different countries, including America, Canada, the UK, Croatia, Australia, and New Zealand. It offers an extensive critical analysis of how psychopathy functions within institutional and social contexts. Inside, readers will find innovative interdisciplinary analysis, written by leading international experts. The chapters explore how different countries have used this diagnosis. A central concern is whether psychopathy is a mental disorder, and this has a bearing upon whether it should be used. The books case studies will help readers understand the problems associated with psychopathy. Academics and students working in the philosophy of psychiatry, bioethics, and moral psychology will find it a valuable resource. In addition, it will also appeal to mental health professionals working in forensic settings, psychologists with an interest in the ethical implications of the use of psychopathy as a construct and particularly those with a research interest in it.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the Volume
    Part I: Diagnosing Psychopathy. Practices, Case Studies, and Practical Concerns
    Chapter 1. Introductory Chapter
    Chapter 2. What it means to be Diagnosed as a Psychopath
    Chapter 3. The uses of the Construct of Psychopathy in the USA
    Chapter 4. The uses of the Construct of Psychopathy in UK
    Chapter 5. Antisocial Personality Disorders and Preventive Sentencing in New Zealand
    Chapter 6. The use of the Notion of Psychopathy within the Legal and Treatment Practice in Croatia
    Part II: The Plausibility of the Construct and the Validity of Psychopathy: Psychometric and Philosophical Issues
    Chapter 7
    Introductory Chapter
    Chapter 8. Psychopathy as a Scientific kind: Epistemic Usefulness, Metaphysical Underpinnings, and kind Construction
    Chapter 9. Capturing the Complexity of Psychopathic Personality Disorder: Recent Developments in the Assessment of the Disorder
    Chapter 10. The State of the Art of Neuropsychological Studies of Psychopathy
    Chapter 11. Psychopathy: Neuro-Hype and its Consequences
    Chapter 12. Psychopathy and the Issue of Existence
    Part III: Is Psychopathy a Mental Illness?
    Chapter 13. The Illness Status of Psychopathy: Between Biological Functions and Norms
    Chapter 14. The Medicalisation of Psychopathy
    Chapetr 15. Sameness in Darkness: Gender and Psychopathy
    Chapter 16. Psychopathy and Societal Values
    Chapter 17. Psychopathy and Public Values
    Conclusion of the Volume.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Grahame-Smith, David Grahame; Hippius, Hanns; Winokur, George.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC483 .P974
    1
  • Print
    Grahame-Smith, David Grahame; Hippius, Hanns; Winokur, George.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC483 .P975
    1
  • Digital
    David N. Osser
    Summary: "Algorithms are useful in the field of psychopharmacology as they can serve as guidelines for avoiding the biases and cognitive lapses that are common when treating conditions that rely on uncertain data. In spite of this, evidence-based practices in psychopharmacology often require years to become widely adopted. The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at Harvard's South Shore Medical Program is an effort to speed up the adoption of evidence-based research into the day-to-day treatment of patients"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    On the Value of Evidence-Based Psychopharmacology Algorithms / David N. Osser, Robert D. Patterson
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Unipolar Nonpsychotic Depression / Christoforos Iraklis Giakoumatos and David Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Bipolar Depression / Arash Ansari and David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Algorithm for Acute Mania / Othman Mohammad and David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : Update on Psychotic Depression / Michael Tang, David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Schizophrenia / David N. Osser, Mohsen Jalali Roudsari, and Theo Manschreck
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Algorithm for Generalized Anxiety Disorder / Harmony Raylen Abejuel, and David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at The Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Generalized Social Anxiety Disorder / David N. Osser and Lance R. Dunlop
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Posttraumatic Stress Disorder / Laura A. Bajor, Ana Nectara Ticlea, and David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An algorithm for adults with obsessive-compulsive disorder / Ashley M. Beaulieua, Edward Tabaskyb, David N. Osser
    Pharmacologic Approach to the Psychiatric Inpatient / Arash Ansari, David N. Osser, Leonard S. Lai, Paul M. Schoenfeld, and Kenneth C. Potts
    Guidelines, Algorithms, and Evidence-Based Psychopharmacology Training for Psychiatric Residents / David N. Osser, Robert D. Patterson, James J. Levitt
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    Megan Galbally, Martien Snellen, Andrew Lewis, editors.
    Summary: This book examines the role of psychopharmacological treatment in a range of disorders that may be encountered during pregnancy, including major depressive disorders, anxiety disorders, bipolar affective disorder, schizophrenia, eating disorders, and substance abuse. The natural history of each condition pre- and post-partum is analyzed, and the evidence for the efficacy of drug treatments, evaluated. Special attention is paid to the potential dangers of different treatment options for both mother and fetus, covering risks of malformation, pregnancy and obstetric risks, neonatal risks, and possible long-term consequences. The risks of not treating a particular condition are also analyzed. On the basis of the available evidence, management guidelines are provided that additionally take into account non-pharmacological options. Closing chapters consider the value of complementary and alternative medicine and ECT and explore future research directions.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Pharmacological Treatments of Mental Disorders in Pregnancy
    The Process of Obtaining Informed Consent When Prescribing Psychopharmacology in Pregnancy
    Critical Evaluation of the Literature: Understanding the Complexities of Observational Research
    Maternal and Fetal Factors That Influence Prenatal Exposure to Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitor Antidepressants
    Pharmacological Management of Major Depression in Pregnancy
    Anxiety and Sleep Disorders, Psychopharmacology, and Pregnancy
    Bipolar Disorder, Psychopharmacology, and Pregnancy
    Schizophrenia, Psychopharmacology, and Pregnancy
    Postpartum Psychosis
    Borderline Personality Disorder and the Eating Disorders in the Perinatal Period
    Management of Substance Abuse in Pregnancy: Maternal and Neonatal Aspects
    Complements and Alternatives to Psychopharmacology During Pregnancy
    Electroconvulsive Therapy in Pregnancy.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniel P. Greenfield.
    Summary: This unique, easy-to-read title offers a concise, practical guide to psychopharmacology and psychopharmacotherapy. Designed for a wide range of practitioners and trainees in general and mental healthcare, this invaluable primer provides foundational information for those who wish to cultivate a deeper understanding of the often-mysterious psychopharmacology medication family. Unlike other books on this topic, the primer positions psychopharmacology within the larger context of psychiatric and psychological treatment and also discusses the variety of therapeutic and somatic techniques available to providers and their patients. Further, since many patients with psychiatric conditions unfortunately find themselves interacting with the justice system, the author offers useful considerations related to the intersection of mental health and the law. The primer consists of 13 chapters and is organized in four parts: Part 1 covers essentials of pharmacology and psychopharmacology, outlining the basic principles of pharmacology, psychopharmacology, and psychopharmacotherapy. Part 2 addresses therapies that may involve psychopharmacology/ psychopharmacotherapy, providing a succinct overview of selected and representative types of psychotherapy and counseling in contemporary psychiatry and psychology. Part 3 discusses forensic and legal applications of psychopharmacology/ psychopharmacotherapy, drawing on the authors long experience in various aspects of forensic psychiatry. Part 4 consists of one final chapter, titled "Synthesis and Conclusions." This chapter pulls together the most salient points of the book to assist the reader in the practical psychopharmacotherapeutic treatment of patients/clients. A timely and invaluable contribution to the literature, Psychopharmacology for Non-Psychiatrists: A Primer will be of great benefit as a user-friendly resource for professionals or as an exam-preparation book for medical students and trainees in a wide range of mental health fields. Specifically, the primer will be of great interest to primary care physicians, nurse practitioners, physician assistants, counselors, therapists, non-psychiatric physicians and dentists whose practices involve psychopharmacotherapy, naturopaths, homeopaths, physical therapists, occupational therapists, and speech/language therapists. Legal professionals and others who are not themselves healthcare professionals, but who interact with healthcare professionals, also will find the primer a handy resource.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Epidemiologic Triangle Model, Diagnosis, Psychiatric Diagnosis, and Other Necessary Preliminaries
    Basic Principles of Pharmacology, Psychopharmacology, and Psychopharmacotherapy
    The Four Major Anti-s
    The Sixteen Minor Anti-s
    Illicit Substances and Drugs
    Botanicals, Herbals, Nutraceuticals and (Dietary) Supplements ("Natural Products")
    A Selective Overview of Therapies In Mental Health Care
    Psychotherapies and Counseling
    Somatic Therapies (Somatotherapies)
    Overview
    Selection and Use of Experts: Five Questions
    Evaluating Versus Treating Doctor/Therapist: A Word To The Wise
    Synthesis and Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Luigi Grassi, Michelle Riba, editors.
    Summary: This practical manual presents the main drugs and protocols currently used in the psychopharmacological treatment of psychiatric disorders in cancer and palliative care settings and explores the principal issues involved in such treatment. Significant clinical challenges encountered in the psychopharmacological management of various psychiatric conditions are discussed, covering aspects such as side-effects and drug-drug interactions. Attention is also paid to the emerging theme of adjuvant use of psychotropic drugs for the treatment of symptoms or syndromes not primarily related to psychiatric disorders (e.g. pain, hot flashes). In addition, practical suggestions are provided for dealing with special populations, including children, the elderly, and people affected by severe mental illness. The book is designed to be easy to read and to reference: information is clearly displayed in concise tables and boxes, accompanied by further detail within the text and clinical vignettes. The authors include some of the most renowned clinicians working in the field of psycho-oncology.

    Contents:
    Psychopharmacology in Oncology and Palliative Care: General Issues
    General Principles of Psychopharmacological Treatment in Psycho-Oncology
    Diagnostic Issues
    Psychological Assessment in Psychopharmacology
    Interpersonal Relationship Issues in Psychopharmacology
    Integration of Psychopharmacotherapy with Psychotherapy and Other Psychosocial Treatment
    Psychopharmacology and Complementary and Nonconventional Treatments in Oncology
    Treatment of Anxiety and Stress-Related Disorders
    Pharmacotherapy of Depression in Cancer Patients
    Treatment of Somatoform Disorders and Other Somatic Symptom Conditions (Pain, Fatigue, Hot Flashes, and Pruritus)
    Bipolar Disorder in the Cancer Patient
    Treatment of Delirium and Confusional States in Oncology and Palliative Care Settings
    Pharmacological Treatment of Psychotic Disorders
    Treatment of Sleep Disorders
    Substance Abuse in Oncology
    Treatment of Sexual Disorders Following Cancer Treatments
    Psychiatric Emergencies
    Psychopharmacology in Palliative Care and Oncology: Childhood and Adolescence
    Special Issues in Psychopharmacology: The Elderly
    Sedation for Psychological Distress at the End of Life
    Research Issues in Psychopharmacology in Oncology and Palliative Care Settings
    Ethics of Psychopharmacological and Biological Treatments in Psycho-oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Victor I. Reus, Daniel Lindqvist.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Elena Vittoria Longhi, Giorgio Franco, Fulvio Colombo.
    Summary: This book combines concise descriptions of the various andrological surgical interventions in the adolescent and adult with detailed analysis of the pre- and postoperative psychosexual counseling of the patient and his family that is appropriate to each procedure. It offers a multidisciplinary approach to the candidate for andrological surgery that reflects the everyday experiences of an andro-sexology team. Each chapter focuses on a particular surgical procedure. Succinct description of the disease and its epidemiology, diagnosis, and treatment is followed by extensive discussion of all aspects of psychosexual relevance and the required counseling. Topics addressed include, for example, the impact of diagnosis, body image issues, fears relating to the surgical procedure and its outcome, the risk of excessive expectations and consequent disillusionment, relationship issues and communication problems, and the role of the sexologist. The analysis and guidance offered in this book will be of particular value to the less experienced andrologist and will assist in achieving postoperative patient satisfaction.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Perry M. Nicassio, editor.
    Contents:
    1. The importance of the biopsychosocial model for understanding the adjustment to arthritis
    2. Mechanisms of arthritis pain
    3. Understanding and enhancing pain coping in patients with arthritis pain
    4. Psychological factors in arthritis: cause or consequence?
    5. Stress in arthritis
    6. Socioeconomic disparities in arthritis
    7. The heart of clinical relationships: doctor-patient communication in rheumatology
    8. Resilience to chronic arthritis pain is not about stopping pain that will not stop: development of a dynamic model of effecttive pain adaptation
    9. Sleep disturbance in rheumatic disease
    10. Disability, limitations, and function for people for arthritis
    11. Revisiting unequal treatment: disparities in access to and quality of care for arthritis
    12. Evaluation of psychological distress in the rheumatology clinic
    13. Physical activity and psychosocial aspects of arthritis
    14. Evidence-based complementary and alternative medical approaches for arthritis
    15. Enhancing clinical practice with community-based self-management support programs
    16. The nature, efficacy, and future of behavioral treatments for arthritis
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Kurt Fritzsche, Susan H. McDaniel, Michael Wirsching.
    Summary: Psychosocial problems appear within a medical context worldwide, and are a major burden to health. Psychosomatic Medicine: An International Primer for the Primary Care Setting takes a uniquely global approach in laying the foundations of biopsychosocial basic care (such as recognizing psychosocial and psychosomatic problems, basic counseling, and collaboration with mental health specialists) and provides relevant information about the most common mental and psychosomatic problems and disorders. The scope of the book is interculturalit addresses global cultures, subcultures living in a single country, and strengthening the care given by physicians working abroad. This clinically useful book outlines best practices for diagnosing the most common biopsychosocialproblems and mastering the most common communication challenges (e.g. doctor-patient conversation, breaking bad news, dealing with difficult patients, family and health systems communication and collaboration). Every chapter integrates basic theoretical background and practical skills and includes trans-culturally sensitive material, important for work with patients from different cultures. Psychosomatic Medicine: An International Primer for the Primary Care Setting serves as an excellent resource for clinicians hoping to gain and develop knowledge and skills in psychosomatic medicine.

    Contents:
    What is Psychosomatic Medicine?
    Psychosomatic Medicine in Primary Care
    Objectives of Training in Psychosomatic Medicine in Primary Care
    Traditional Medicine and Psychosomatic Medicine
    The Doctor-Patient Relationship
    Doctor Patient Communication
    Family Medicine
    Balint Group
    Depressive Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders
    Somatoform Disorders
    Psycho-Oncology
    Psycho-Cardiology
    Acute and Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)
    Addiction
    Systems Development of Behavioral Health in Primary Care
    The Development of Psychosomatic Medicine in China, Vietnam and LaosThe ASIA-LINK Program
    Psychosomatic Medicine and its Implementation in the Latin America Region
    Psychosomatic Medicine in Iran.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Marc Lévêque ; preface by Bart Nuttin ; afterword by Marwan Hariz.
    Summary: Psychosurgery, or the surgical treatment of mental disorders, has enjoyed a spectacular revival over the past ten years as new brain stimulation techniques have become available. Neuromodulation offers new possibilities for the treatment of psychiatric disorders such as depression, obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), addiction, eating disorders and autism. This work presents the history of this unique specialty and investigates current techniques and ethical challenges. With a wealth of illustrations and detailed anatomical diagrams, it provides essential information for medical practitioners, as well as anyone else interested in the fascinating advances being made in neuroscience today.

    Contents:
    A Controversial Past
    The Neuroanatomy of Emotions
    Psychosurgical Procedures
    Disorders for Which Psychosurgery Is Relevant Today
    Some Legitimate Ethical Questions
    What Is Next?
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jeffery Smith.
    Summary: This title combines the many schools of thought on psychotherapy into one reader-friendly guide that coaches psychotherapists through the various techniques needed as the field expands. Unlike any other book on the market, this text considers all of the simultaneous advances in the field, including the neurobiology of emotions, the importance of the therapeutic relationship, mindfulness meditation, and the role of the body in healing. Written with genuine respect for all traditions from CBT to psychodynamics, the book unifies views of psychopathology and cure based on the notion of the mind-brain as an organ of affect regulation. The book accounts for the tasks that characterize psychotherapist activity in all therapies, how they are performed, and how they result in therapeutic change. The book also reviews the various pathologies seen in general practice and guides the reader to the specific therapist-patient interactions needed for their resolution. With its big-picture focus on clinical practice, Psychotherapy: A Practical Guide is a concise resource for students, psychotherapists, psychologists, residents, and all who seek to integrate what is new in psychotherapy.

    Contents:
    Avoidance of affect, a basic human instinct operating throughout development
    How painful affects are detoxified in psychotherapy and in life
    Creating a safe and attuned context
    Bringing dreaded feelings into consciousness
    Challenging and inviting change of dysfunctional patterns of though, values and behavior
    Building a narrative framework to support change
    Seeking to understand what is observed
    Introduction: Critical periods in development and the problems they pose
    Group One: Schemas, nonverbal learned behavior patterns that increase pleasure and avoid pain
    Group Two: Dissociative patterns
    Group Three: Inborn avoidance mechanisms: Anxiety, depression, and obsessive-compulsive patterns.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Adam M. Brenner, Laura S. Howe-Martin.
    Summary: "Offering unique, essential coverage of the theoretical foundations and core techniques of a variety of psychotherapies, Psychotherapy: A Practical Introduction is a one-stop resource for psychiatry residents and psychiatrists beginning practice, as well as graduate trainees in psychology and clinical social work. This practical reference is an invaluable tool for understanding the common approaches fundamental to all therapies, exploring the most frequently used therapy approaches, learning evidence-based approaches for making treatment decisions, and engaging patients in safe and effective psychotherapies, regardless of treatment setting. For faculty instructors, brand new resource provides a readable, highly applicable core textbook for any introductory psychotherapy course or psychotherapy didactic series. Offers a straightforward entryway to learning the essentials of psychotherapeutic work, with synopses and basic instructions for all ACGME-required approaches to psychotherapy (supportive, cognitive-behavioral, and psychodynamic approaches) and a helpful comparison and discussion of what works across all therapies, as well as how to incorporate the patient's broader system and cultural background into treatment. Includes an overview of assessment and case conceptualization that includes taking a useful history, articulating goals of the potential treatment, evaluation of the patient's capacity to engage in talk-based treatment, and guidance on appropriate therapy selection. Contains a section on providing psychotherapy in different clinical settings, such as community mental health settings, inpatient psychiatric units, consultation-liaison medical settings, and emergency rooms and crisis centers. Discusses combining therapy with medication (from both the perspective of MDs and non-MDs partnering with a prescriber), as well as a final chapter that highlights how trainees can prepare to make the most of psychotherapy supervision"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Lay of the Land / Adam M. Brenner
    Case Conceptualization and Psychological Assessment in Psychotherapy / Laura S. Howe-Martin
    Fitting the Therapy and the Therapist to the Patient / Shirali Patel and Adam M. Brenner
    How to Begin : Empathy, Alliance, and Boundaries / Adam M. Brenner
    Supportive Psychotherapy / Randon S. Welton and Erin M. Crocker
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy / Donna M. Sudak and Prasad R. Joshi
    Psychodynamic Therapy / Larry Thornton
    Beyond the Therapy Dyad : The Importance of Systems and Culture / Mona A. Robbins and Laura S. Howe-Martin,
    Psychotherapy in the Community Mental Health Setting / Amy S. Brenner
    Psychotherapy Within Consultation-Liaison Settings / Lindsey Pershern and Ben Lippe
    Psychotherapy in the Emergency Room/Crisis Clinical Encounter / Alexander S. Kane, Alison E. Lenet, and Deborah L. Cabaniss
    Psychotherapy on Inpatient Psychiatric Units / Amy S. Brenner and Adam M. Brenner
    Integrating Medication and Therapy / Matan White and Heidi Koehler
    Using Psychotherapy Supervision in Training and Beyond / Sallie G. De Golia and Megan E. Tan.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2021
  • Digital
    edited by , María Reinares, Anabel Martínez-Arán, Eduard Vieta.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Sita Patel, Daryn Reicherter, editors.
    Contents:
    Immigrant youth life stressors
    Cognitive-behavioral therapy for immigrant youth: the essentials
    Family factors: immigrant families and intergenerational considerations
    School-based interventions
    Trauma and acculturative stress
    Combined psychotherapy with psychopharmacology
    Information systems and technology
    Treating forcibly displaced young people: global challenges in mental healthcare
    Immigrant youth and navigating unique systems that interact with treatment
    Cultural perspectives in the context of Western psychological mind-sets: the need for cultural sensitivity in the mental health of immigrant youth
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Adriana Roncella, Christian Pristipino, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Complex psychoneural processes in ischemic heart disease: evidences for a systems medicine framework
    2. Psychosocial risk factors and coronary artery disease
    3. Psychological stress, inflammation, immunity, and coagulation intertwining in ischemic heart disease
    4. The second brain and possible interactions with the heart
    5. Sleep and dreams in cardiovascular pathophysiology
    6. The role of gender in the mind-heart relationship
    7. Integrated approach for cardiac patients and psychological interventions
    8. Psycho-educational interventions and cardiac rehabilitation
    9. Psychiatric pharmacotherapy in coronary artery disease patients
    10. Evidence-based psychotherapy in ischemic heart disease: umbrella review and updated meta-analysis
    11. Cognitive and behavioral psychotherapy in coronary artery disease
    12. Mind-body practices for prevention and treatment of cardiovascular disease
    13. Short-term psychotherapy in patients with acute myocardial infarction
    14. Psychometric tests: epistemology, rationale, aims, and applicability in cardiology, open issues
    15. Projective tests: the six-drawings test in ischemic heart disease
    16. Verbal communication and effective communication: communication in the psychotherapeutic setting
    17. Nonverbal communication: the forgotten frame
    18. Psychotherapy for cardiac patients: selection of clinical cases, part I
    19. Psychotherapy for cardiac patients: selection of clinical cases, part II
    20. A model integrating psychotherapy into medical practices at San Filippo Neri Hospital in Rome, Italy
    21. Model to integrate psychology/psychotherapy with medical activities at the Hospital of Terni, Italy
    22. An integrative model of psychotherapy in medical practice according to GICR-IACPR.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Joel Paris.
    Contents:
    Psychiatry : mindless or brainless?
    The limits of neuroscience
    Prescribing and overprescribing
    Thinking interactively
    Paradigms and practice
    What psychiatrists don't know about psychotherapy
    Integrating psychotherapy into practice
    Epilogue : psychiatry and humanism.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Peter N. Novalis, Virginia Singer, Carol M. Novalis.
    Summary: "To practice psychotherapy in a correctional setting is to encounter a range of cultural issues reflecting the various ethnic, class, gender, and physical subgroups of the prison population-as well as to navigate the culture of the prison, staff, and justice system that underpins the patients' circumstances. Drawing on the authors' extensive professional experience, Psychotherapy in Corrections offers mental health professionals a comprehensive look at the most common situations they are likely to face and provides practical advice on dealing with them. Diagnostically oriented chapters cover core issues that include self-harm and substance use disorders, as well as mood and personality disorders. Specific supportive therapy techniques for addressing these issues, as well as special situations-including the experience of women in prison, behaviors that can disrupt care, and efforts to reduce recidivism-are illustrated by clinical vignettes. In tackling the social and developmental conditions that lead individuals to interact with the correctional system, Psychotherapy in Corrections also acknowledges the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic and the movement for social justice on society. Anyone who conducts psychotherapy in a prison setting will benefit from an approach centered on treating the human in front of them, regardless of the setting or their crime"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Supportive psychotherapy in the correctional environment
    The techniques of supportive psychotherapy
    Entering the institution
    Managing therapy
    Crisis, self-harm, and suicidal behavior
    Trauma
    Substance use disorders
    Serious mental illness
    Mood disorders
    (They've got) personality (disorder) : a challenge in corrections
    Women in prison
    Deception and disruption
    Special topics
    Time to say goodbye.
  • Print
    edited by Rajesh R. Tampi, Brandon Yarns, Kristina F. Zdanys, Deena J. Tampi.
    Summary: "Psychotherapy is underutilized in later life, although decades of evidence point to its effectiveness for older adults. Psychotherapy in Later Life, with chapters written by leaders in old-age mental health, aims to help the psychiatrist, trainee, or other interested clinician learn of the special issues in psychotherapy with older adults and initiate practice of the leading evidence-based approaches. First, the reader is introduced to the indications for psychotherapy in later life and instructions on choosing an appropriate modality. In four extended chapters, how-to guides with practical instructions, detailed case presentations, and resources are presented for evidence-based approaches in later life: cognitive behavioral therapy, problem-solving therapy, interpersonal therapy, and psychodynamic therapy. Finally, special topics are reviewed, including psychotherapy in patients with cognitive disorders, combined psychotherapy and medication management, psychotherapy with diverse older adults, individual versus group psychotherapy, and psychotherapy at the end of life. This accessible work, intended to be scholarly yet practical, aspires to be a key resource for clinicians"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to psychotherapy with older adults / Erica Garcia-Pittman, Victor Gonzalez, Anh-Thu Tran, Christine Dozier
    Indications for psychotherapy with older adults / Danielle Tolton, Tyler Durns, Sarah A. Nguyen, Neha Jain
    Choice of psychotherapy approach / Feyza Marouf
    Cognitive behavioral therapy / Patricia Bamonti, Lindsey Jacobs
    Problem-solving therapy / Brenna N. Renn, Brittany A. Mosser, Patrick J. Raue
    Interpersonal therapy / Mark D. Miller, Richard K. Morycz
    Short-term psychodynamic therapy / Patricia Coughlin, Brandon Yarns
    Other therapies / Renz Juaneza, Nery Diaz, Pallavi Joshi
    Psychotherapy and cognitive disorders / Cynthia Kraus-Schuman, Melissa Sanchez, Karen Benson, Ali Abbas Asghar-Ali
    Combined psychotherapy and medication management / Meera Balasubramaniam, Deepti Anbarasan, Paul Campion
    Psychotherapy with diverse older adults / Sarah A. Nguyen, Philip Blumenshine, Boski Patel
    Individual versus group psychotherapy / Paroma Mitra
    End of life issues / Sandra Swantek, James Gerhart.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Omar C.G. Gelo, Alfred Pritz, Bernd Rieken, editors.
    Summary: This book provides readers with essential information on the foundations of psychotherapy research, and on its applications to the study of both psychotherapy process and outcome. The aim is to stimulate a reflection on these issues in a way that will benefit researchers and clinicians, as well as undergraduate and graduate students, at different levels and from different perspectives. Accordingly, the book presents a balanced mix of chapters summarizing the state of the art in the field from different viewpoints and covering innovative topics and perspectives, reflecting some of the most established traditions and, at the same time, emerging approaches in the field in several countries. The contributors, who were invited from among the experts in our national and international professional networks, also represent a healthy mix of leading figures and young researchers. The first part of the book addresses a number of fundamental issues in psychotherapy research at a historical, philosophical, and theoretical level. The second part of the book is concerned with research on psychotherapy processes; in this regard, both quantitative and qualitative approaches are given equal consideration in order to reflect the growing relevance of the latter. The book's third and last part examines research on psychotherapy outcomes, primarily focusing on quantitative approaches. Offering a balanced mix of perspectives, approaches and topics, the book represents a valuable tool for anyone interested in psychotherapy research.

    Contents:
    Section I: Foundations of psychotherapy research:The Prehistory of Psychotherapy and Its Implications for Psychotherapy Science: Shamanism, Folk Medicine, Philosophy, and Religion
    Historical paths in psychotherapy Research.-The philosophy of psychotherapy science: Mainstream and alternative views
    Psychotherapia Academica Universitatis: A Philosophical Argument for the Academic Discipline of Psychotherapy
    Interpretation as a Cognitive Instrument. Psychotherapy Science as an Attempt to Pool Paradigm-based Systems of Interpretation
    Institutional parameters of psychotherapy education as a prerequisite for systematic psychotherapy research
    Theory-Building, Enriching, and Fact-Gathering: Alternative Purposes of Psychotherapy Research
    Section II. Psychotherapy process research: Introduction to psychotherapy process research
    Outlines of a general theory of the psychotherapy process. The clinical exchange as communicational field: Implications for theory and methodology.- The Relationship: How it Works.- Data analysis in psychotherapy research
    Quantitative approaches to treatment process, change process, and process-outcome research
    Current issues on group psychotherapy research: An overview.- The Process of Change in Psychotherapy: Common and Unique Factors
    Therapeutic alliance and alliance ruptures and resolutions: Theoretical definitions, assessment issues and research findings.- Positive emotions in psychotherapy: Conceptual propositions and research challenges
    Psychotherapeutic Process from the Psychotherapist's Perspective.- From a psychoanalytic narrative case study to quantitative single case research.- Qualitative methods in psychotherapy process research
    Applications of Qualitative and Mixed-Methods Counseling and Psychotherapy Research.- Interpretation-Driven Guidelines for Designing and Evaluating Grounded Theory Research: A Constructivist-Social Justice Approach.- Consensual Qualitative Research (CQR) Methods for Conducting Psychotherapy Process Research.- Conversation analysis and psychotherapy process research.- A pragmatic approach to the study of therapeutic interaction: Towards an observational science of psychotherapy process. Section III. Psychotherapy outcome research: Quantitative psychotherapy outcome research: Methodological issues
    Qualitative methods in psychotherapy outcome research
    Outcome Research on Disorder-Specific Treatments: The Case of Grief Therapy
    Outcome research: Methods for Improving Outcome in Routine Care.- Psychotherapy outcome research and neuroimaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Oliver Freudenreich.
    Contents:
    Forward Preface Acknowledgements Section I: INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOSIS 1. Psychotic signs and symptoms 2. Psychosis interview Section II: DIAGNOSIS AND DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS OF PSYCHOSIS 3. Delirium 4. Drug-induced psychosis 5. Secondary schizophrenia 6. Psychiatric differential diagnosis of psychosis 7. Schizophrenia-spectrum disorders 8. Diagnosing schizophrenia
    clinical approach Section III: TREATMENT OF PSYCHOTIC DISORDERS 9. Emergency management of acute psychosis 10. Phase-specific treatment of schizophrenia 11. Antipsychotics
    overview 12. Antipsychotics
    motor side effects 13. Antipsychotics
    non-motor side effects 14. Antipsychotics
    clinical effectiveness 15. Ancillary medications 16. Drug interactions 17. Polypharmacy 18. Psychological treatments
    the patient 19. Psychological treatments
    the family 20. Psychiatric rehabilitation Section IV: PROGNOSTIC CONSIDERATIONS FOR PSYCHOTIC DISORDERS 21. Medical morbidity and mortality 22. HIV/AIDS and serious mental illness 23. Dual diagnosis 24. Nicotine dependence 25. Refractory psychosis and clozapine 26. Negative symptoms 27. Cognition in schizophrenia 28. Depression and suicide 29. Illness insight and medication adherence 30. Forensic aspects of schizophrenia care 31. Social aspects of schizophrenia care APPENDICES A. Emergency Cards B. Assessment Cards C. Wellness Cards Suggested readings and citations Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    André Barciela Veras, Jeffrey Paul Kahn.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Print
    contributors, M. Ackenheil ... [et al.] ; editors, F. Hoffmeister, G. Stille.
    Contents:
    Part 1, Antipsychotics and antidepressants ; Part 2, Anxiolytics, gerontopsychopharmacological agents ; Part 3, Alcohol and psychotomimetics, psychotropic effects of central acting drugs ;
  • Digital
    edited by Imaine Sahed, Antony Chaufton.
    Summary: This book promotes the interaction between research and professional practices in the field of prevention and harm reduction. Through the scientific work and experience of human and social sciences researchers and medical social actors, research and action assist one another in illuminating the problems associated with the consumption of psychotropic drugs and in developing intervention strategies. Over the course of several chapters, contributed by attendees of the Psychotropics, Prevention and Harm Reduction Put to the Test By "Human and Social Sciences workshop, a range of varied themes are explored within the scope of drugs and their uses. Both the socio-historical context of drug uses and the construction of prevention and harm reduction public policies in light of scientific knowledge are covered, as well as the issue of release, mobilization and/or negotiation of prevention and harm reduction standards, both for professionals and drug users.

    Contents:
    1. Scientific data and political decision in the field of addictive behaviors
    2. Social sciences and practice renewal: from prevention, to identification, to early intervention
    3. The beautiful life with or without drugs: questions on emancipation
    4. Tobacco and alcoholic beverage consumption of European adolescents: subtitutes or complements? The value of an all-encompassing
    5. Animated images, words coming alive, reflection in motion
    6. Towards the addiction of adolescents under public protection: paradoxical contextualization
    7. Socio-anthropological contributions to the Senegalese Harm Reduction Program
    8. Promoting harm reduction personal strategies by means of drugs checking: its use in CAARUD
    9. Initiation to injection: a community challenge.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital/Print
    udgivet paa foranledning af Direktoratet for fængselsvæsenet ved George E. Schrøder ...
    Digital Access Google Books 1917-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L602 .S37
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Philip Kumanov, Ashok Agarwal.
    Contents:
    1. Maturation and physiology of hypothalamic regulation of the gonadal axis
    2. Genetics of puberty
    3. Hormonal changes in childhood and puberty
    4. Physical changes during pubertal transition
    5. Growth in childhood and puberty
    6. Bone development in children and adolescents
    7. Body weight and puberty
    8. The environmental factors and epigenetics of gametogenesis in puberty
    9. Timing of puberty and secular trend in human maturation
    10. Precocious puberty
    11. Constitutional delayed puberty
    12. Pubertal dysfunction: a disorder of GnRH pulsatility
    13. Pubertal gynecomastia
    14. Pubertal acne
    15. Adolescent varicocele
    16. Polycystic ovary syndrome in adolescent girls
    17. Growth hormone and steroid assays' problems in childhood and puberty
    18. Psychosocial development of adolescents with and without deviations
    19. Substance use in adolescence
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    volume editors, Jean-Pierre Bourguignon, Anne-Simone Parent.
    Contents:
    The emerging role of epigenetics in the regulation of female puberty / Lomniczi, A.; Ojeda, S.R
    Normal variation in pubertal timing : genetic determinants in relation to growth and adiposity / Willemsen, R.H.; Dunger, D.B
    Genetics of hypogonadotropic hypogonadism / Topaloglu, A.K.; Kotan, L.D
    Sexual precocity : genetic bases of central precocious puberty and autonomous gonadal activation / Macedo, D.B.; Silveira, L.F.G.; Bessa, D.S.; Brito, V.N.; Latronico, A.C
    Congenital hypogonadotropic hypogonadism : a trait shared by several complex neurodevelopmental disorders / de Roux, N.; Carel, J.-C.; Léger, J. (Paris)
    Animal modeling of early programming and disruption of pubertal maturation / Castellano, J.M.; Tena-Sempere, M
    Contemporary trends in onset and completion of puberty, gain in height and adiposity / Biro, F.M.; Kiess, W
    Consequences of early life programing by genetic and environmental influences : a synthesis regarding pubertal timing / Roth, C.L.; DiVall, S
    Nutritional disorders and pubertal disorders / Muñoz-Calvo, M.T.; Argente, J
    Current changes in pubertal timing : revised vision in relation with environmental factors including endocrine disruptors / Parent, A.-S.; Franssen, D.; Fudvoye, J.; Pinson, A.; Bourguignon, J.-P
    Sex steroid and gonadotropin treatment in male delayed puberty / Howard, S.; Dunkel, L
    Sex steroid replacement therapy in female hypogonadism from childhood to young adulthood / Norjavaara, E.; Ankarberg-Lindgren, C.; Kriström, B
    Gonadotropin-releasing hormone agonist treatment in sexual precocity / Pienkowski, C.; Tauber, M
    Treatment of peripheral precocious puberty / Schoelwer, M.; Eugster, E.A
    Consultation for disordered puberty : what do adolescent medicine patients teach us? / Michaud, P.-A.; Ambresin, A.-E.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Seung Jong Lee.
    Summary: We all strive for personal happiness in one way or another, but what about public happiness? What does public happiness mean and what role can governments and public policies play? The current COVID-19 pandemic has highlighted the inadequacies of old governance paradigms and even before this pandemic, increasing inequalities and frustration with the old GDP-centric growth paradigm have fueled dissatisfaction with and distrust of governments. This book suggests a new path towards public happiness as a potential solution. The book builds a theory of public happiness as a distinct concept from individual happiness, borrowing especially from Eastern philosophy. It provides an overview of the efforts so far to go "beyond GDP" -- including measurement and exploration of the determinants of happiness -- and how these efforts have fallen short of expectation. Lastly, the book sketches out what a public happiness policy might look like and identifies the factors of a successful happiness policy.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Paradigm of progress
    Chapter 2. Nature of public happiness
    Chapter 3. Efforts of international community
    Chapter 4. Trends in happiness research
    Chapter 5. Happiness-driven public policy
    Chapter 6. New paradigm for happiness-driven governance
    Chapter 7. National happiness policy around the world: overview
    Chapter 8. Case: Government 3.0 of Korea
    Chapter 9. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Robert B. Greifinger, editor ; foreword by David Satcher.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Md. Nazrul Islam, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Challenges to Health Service System in China: Institutional and financial reforms
    Food safety Challenges in China
    Challenge of Population Ageing on Health
    Integrating Chinese Medicine in public health: Contemporary trend and challenges
    State-Religion Partnership: Delivery of Eldercare in Asia
    Substance Abuse and Its Prevention and Treatment in Macao
    Development of Healthcare Social Work in China.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Joshua M. Sharfstein.
    Contents:
    Elixir sulfanilamide
    Thalidomide
    The swine flu of 1976
    HIV
    Recognizing a crisis
    Crisis management
    Communications and politics
    Preventing the next crisis
    Responsibility and blame
    Opportunity in crisis
    Supplementary materials : a closer look at crises.
  • Digital
    editors,Tanya Telfair LeBlanc, Robert J. Kim-Farley.
    Summary: "Simulations are a core element of training in medicine, surgery, clinical care, biomedical engineering and the medical sciences. They allow the practice of safety, prevention, containment, treatment, and procedure in a risk-free setting." "This book is a practical guide and reference to the technology, operations and opportunities of clinical simulation. It shows how to develop and make efficient use of resources and provides practical information to those creating and operating simulation facilities as well as the development and delivery of simulation-based education programs." -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Topic I. Why Simulate?
    1. From Primitive Cultures to Modern Day: Has Clinical Education Really Changed? / G. Allan Shemanko
    2. Undergraduate Medical Education is NOT Rocket Science: But that Does NOT Mean it's Easy! / Mark R. Adelman
    3. Guidance for the Leader-Manager / Robert C. Cox and Lance Acree
    Topic II. What's In It For Me
    4. Basing a Clinician's Career on Simulation: Development of a Critical Care Expert into a Clinical Simulation Expert / Lorena Beeman
    5. Basing a Nonclinician's Career upon Simulation: The Personal Experience of a Physicist / Guillaume Alinier
    6. Overcoming Operational Challenges: An Administrator's Perspective / Alice L. Acker
    Topic III. How to Fit in while Standing Out
    7. When Simulation should and should not be in the Curriculum / Ronnie J. Glavin
    8. To Simulate or not to Simulate: That is the Question / G. Allan Shemanko and Linn Jones
    9. Simulated Realism: Essential, Desired, Overkill / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    10. Realism and the Art of Simulation / Roger E. Chow and Viren N. Naik
    11. Integrating Simulation with Existing Clinical Educational Programs: Dream and Develop while Keeping the Focus on your Vision / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    Topic IV. Curriculum: Planning for Success
    12. Integration of Simulation with Existing Clinical Educational Programs / Lorena Beeman
    13. Incorporating Simulation into Graduate (Resident) Medical Education: With Special Reference to the Emergency Department / Mark E.A. Escott and Lawrence E. Kass
    14. Theory and Practice of Developing an Effective Simulation-based Clinical Curriculum / Valerity V. Kozmenko, Alan D. Kaye, Barbara Morgan and Charles W. Hilton
    15. Creating Effective Learning Environments
    Key Educational Concepts Applied to Simulation Training / Ian Curran
    Topic V. The Best Form Follows the Essential Functions
    16. Thought Thinking Itself Out: Anticipatory Design in Simulation Centers / Jane Lindsay Miller
    17. Simulation Facility Design 101: The Basics / Michael Seropian
    18. Creation of Structure-Function Relationships in the Design of a Simulation Center / Brian C. Brost, Kay M.B. Thiemann, Thomas E. Belda and William P. Dunn
    19. Evaluating, Prioritizing, and Selecting Simulators / Brian C. Brost, Kay M.B. Thiemann and William P. Dunn
    20. Choosing Full-function Patient Simulators, Creating and Using the Simulation Suite / David H. Stern
    21. Survival Guide to Successful Simulation When Located Far Away / Ramiro Pozzo
    22. Retrofitting Existing Space for Patient Simulation: From Student Lounge to Acute Care Patient Unit / Michael C. Foss
    Topic VI. Functional Forms at the Institutional Size
    23. The One-Room Schoolhouse for Simulation: Adapting to the Learning / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    24. All-in-one-room Schoolhouse: Clinical Simulation Stage, Control, Debrief, and Utilities All within a Single Room / Guillaume Alinier
    25. The Clinical Simulation Service at NIH: Our Journey / Jill Steiner Sanko and Amy Guillet Agrawal
    26. The Single, Dedicated Clinical Simulation Suite / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    27. The Patient Simulation Suite: A Single Dedicated Clinical Simulator Stage Surrounded by Dedicated Control, Observing/Debriefing, Utility, and Office Rooms / Guillaume Alinier
    28. Multiservice, Single Institution Simulation Center with Multiple Simulation Suites / Judith C.P. Hwang and Betsy Bentken
    29. Operations and Management at the VA Palo Alto/Stanford Simulation Center / Claudia Sun and Steven K. Howard
    30. Health Care Simulation with Patient Simulators and Standardized Patients / Michael S. Goodrow
    31. Educational Needs Dictating Learning Space: Factors Considered in the Identification and Planning of Appropriate Space for a Simulation Learning Complex / Eileen R. Wiley and W. Bosseau Murray
    Topic VII. Functional Forms at the State and Nation Size
    32. Designing and Developing a Multi-institutional, Multidisciplinary Regional Clinical Simulation Center / Neil Coker
    33. Partners in Simulation: Public Academic-Private Health Care Collaboration / Sharon M. Denning, Constance M. Jewett Johnson, Dan Johnson, Marilyn Loen, Carl Patow and Cathleen K. Brannen
    34. A National Simulation Program: Germany / Stefan Monk, Jochen Vollmer and Wolfgang Heinrichs
    35. Statewide and Large-scale Simulation Implementation: The Work of Many / Michael Seropian and Bonnie Driggers
    36. Implementing Military Health Simulation Operations: The Australian Defence Force / Fabian E. Purcell and Denis B. French
    37. A National Simulation Center Influences Teaching at a National Level: Scotland / Ronnie J. Glavin
    38. Clinical Simulation on a National Level: Israel / Amitai Ziv, David Erez and Haim Berkenstadt
    Topic VIII. The Big Picture: Sum of Many Smaller Views
    39. The Invisible Standardized Patient / Leonard Pott
    40. Prehospital and Tactical Simulation: More than Just a Mannequin / Craig Balbalian
    41. Value Added by Partial-task Trainers and Simulation / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    42. Implementing Partial-task Trainers in Simulation / Larry A. Cobb
    43. The Role of Patient Simulators in Pediatric Education / Edmundo P. Cortez
    44. Simulation Training for Pediatric Emergencies / Chris Chin
    45. Considerations of Pediatric Simulation / Paul N. Severin, Edmundo P. Cortez, Christopher A. McNeal and Jane E. Kramer
    46. Critical Care Simulation: A Nursing Perspective / Carol J. Vandrey
    47. Transporting a Patient: Interdisciplinary Simulation Exercises / Michael C. Foss
    Topic IX. Make Your Own
    48. Development and Implementation of a Low-budget Simulation Center for Clinical Emergencies (Ambulance in a Box) / Ramiro Pozzo and Alfredo Guillermo Pacheco
    49. Physiologic Modeling for Simulators: Get Real / N. Ty Smith
    Topic X. Buy from Others
    50. Success with Clinical Simulation = Assessment + Planning + Implementation / William E. Lewandowski
    51. Successful Simulation Center Operations: An Industry Perspective / Thomas J. Doyle, Ronald G. Carovano and John Anton
    Topic XI. Funding, Funding is What Makes Simulation Go On
    52. Prosperous Simulation Under an Institution's Threadbare Financial Blanket / Guillaume Alinier
    53. Creative Procurement for Your Simulation Program / John Gillespie
    Topic XII. Hybrid Vigor: The Simulation Professional
    54. The Simulation Professional: Gets Things Done and Attracts Opportunities / Guillaume Alinier, Ramiro Pozzo and Cynthia H. Shields
    Topic XIII. Good Answers Start from Good Questions
    55. Pitfalls to Avoid in Designing and Executing Research with Clinical Simulation / Guillaume Alinier
    56. Fundamentals of Educational Research Using Clinical Simulation / William C. McGahie, Carla M. Pugh and Diane Bronstein Wayne
    Topic XIV. Simulation Scenario: Telling the Story
    Discussing the Story
    57. Scenario Design and Execution / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    58. Simulation Scenario Building / Kristina Lee Stillsmoking
    59. Designing a Scenario as a Simulated Clinical Experience: The TuPASS Scenario Script / Peter Dieckmann and Marcus Rail
    Topic XV. Location, Location, Location
    60. Situated Simulation: Taking Simulation to the Clinicians / Derek J. LeBlanc
    61. On the Road with the Simulator / Christopher J. Gallagher, Riva R. Akerman, Daniel Castillo, Christina M. Matadial and Ilya Shekhter
    62. Mobile "In Situ" Simulation Crisis Resource Management Training / Marcus Rall, Eric Stricker, Silke Reddersen, Jorg Zieger and Peter Dieckmann
    Topic XVI. Move the Learning, Not the Learners
    63. Creation of a Combined Surgical Curriculum Using the Internet and Patient Simulation / Andreas H. Meier. 64. Distributed Simulation-based Clinical Training: Going Beyond the Obvious / Dag K.J.E. von Lubitz, Howard Levine, Frederic Patricelli and Simon Richir
    Topic XVII. We Teach in the Style that We Learn
    65. Staff Education for Simulation: Train-the-Trainer Concepts / Jochen Vollmer, Stefan Monk and Wolfgang Heinrichs
    66. Experiential Training for New Simulation Coordinators / Roger E. Chow and Viren N. Naik
    67. Becoming a Simulation Instructor and Learning to Facilitate: The Instructor and Facilitation Training (InFacT) Course / Peter Dieckmann and Marcus Rall
    Topic XVIII. Assessment: Why, What and How
    68. Simulation and High-stakes Testing / Carla M. Pugh
    69. Video-assisted Debriefing in Simulation-based Training of Crisis Resource Management / Peter Dieckmann, Silke Reddersen, Jorg Zieger and Marcus Rall
    70. Questionnaire Design and Use: How to Craft Tools to Determine How Well Your Simulation Program Objectives are Being Met / Guillaume Alinier
    71. Planning and Assessing Clinical Simulation using Task Analysis: A Suggested Approach and Framework for Trainers, Researchers, and Developers / Paul Williamson, Harry Owen and Valerie Follows
    Topic XIX. Tricks of the Trade
    72. Professional Stage Craft: How to Create Simulated Clinical Environments Out of Smoke and Mirrors / Guillaume Alinier
    73. Professional Audio/Video for Clinical Simulation / Michael S. Goodrow, Michael Seropian, Judith C.P. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    74. Simulation Audio/Video Requirements and Working with Audio/Video Installation Professionals / Guillaume Alinier
    Topic XX. Rehearsing is the Basis of All Learning
    75. An Approach for Professional Development: Triad Gaming Techniques in Simulation / Anthony Brand
    76. Learning Through Play: Simulation Scenario = Obstacle Course + Treasure Hunt / Guillaume Alinier
    77. Adult Education Methods and Processes / Ronnie J. Glavin
    78. Creating Effective, Interesting, and Engaging Learning Environments / Diane C. Seibert
    79. Adult Learning: Practical Hands-on Methods for Teaching a Hands-on Subject / Kristina Lee Stillsmoking
    80. How to Build a Successful Simulation Strategy: The Simulation Learning Pyramid / Hal Doerr and W. Bosseau Murray
    Topic XXI. Expect the Unexpected
    81. Managing a Simulation Session at a Congress, Away from Home Base / Kristina Lee Stillsmoking and W. Bosseau Murray
    Topic XXII. Borrow Success
    82. An Innovative Way to Think about Simulation Laboratory Core Administrative Functions: Comparing Managing a Simulation Laboratory to a Restaurant / Mary Katherine Krause and Margaret Faut-Callanan.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
  • Digital
    Daniel S. Goldberg.
    Summary: This resource places concepts of social determinants of health in the larger contexts of contemporary health ethics and the evolution of social reform. It provides needed analysis of the larger causes behind the immediate causes of illness and epidemics, particularly injustice, systemic inequities, and the cumulative effect of compound disadvantages. This moral approach to collective and individual responsibilities--on the part of practitioners as well as the public--supports a sound blueprint for finding answers to longstanding global and local concerns. Readers are challenged to recognize the critical role of social determinants to their perception of health issues, controversies, and possibilities.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Ethics, justice, and the social determinants of health
    Justice, compound disadvantage and health inequities
    Ethics, responsibility and social patterning of risk health behaviors
    The social determinants of health and public health practice.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Ovid
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Public health in action to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Sundeep Sahay, T. Sundararaman, Jørn Braa.
    Summary: Challenges in the design, development, and implementation of health information systems, particularly in low and middle income countries, and examines approaches to addressing these.

    Contents:
    Public health informatics : position within an informatic framework
    Understanding public health informatics in context of health in low and middle-income countries
    The "information-use problematic" in health information systems
    The challenge of integration : (in)adequacy of technical solutions to institutional challenges
    Decentralized information use : the the cloud and big data supporting this?
    Institutions as barriers and facilitators of health information systems reform
    Complexity and public health informatics in low and middle-income countries
    Measuring progress toward universal health coverage and post-2015 sustainable development goals : the informational challenges
    Health information systems governance and standard the challenges of implementation
    Strengthening healthcare systems and health information systems : building synergies.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    J.A. Magnuson, Paul C. Fu, Jr., editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Context for Public Health Informatics
    1. Introduction to Public Health Informatics / J.A. Magnuson and Patrick W. O'Carroll
    2. History and Significance of Information Systems and Public Health / John R. Lumpkin and J.A. Magnuson
    3. Context and Value of Biomedical and Health Informatics / William R. Hersh
    4. Governmental and Legislative Context of Informatics / Margo Edmunds
    Part II. The Science of Public Health Informatics
    5. Public Health Informatics Infrastructure / Brian E. Dixon and Shaun J. Grannis
    6. Information Architecture / Dina Dickerson and Patricia Yao
    7. Data Sources and Data Tools / Edward Mensah and Johanna L. Goderre
    8. Public Health Information Standards / J.A. Magnuson, Riki Merrick, and James T. Case
    9. Privacy, Confidentiality, and Security of Public Health Information / William A. Yasnoff
    10. Electronic Health Records / Stephen P. Julien
    11. Ethics, Information Technology, and Public Health: Duties and Challenges in Computational Epidemiology / Kenneth W. Goodman and Eric M. Meslin
    12. Project Management and Public Health Informatics / James Aspevig
    13. Evaluation for Public Health Informatics / Paul C. Fu, Jr., Herman Tolentino, and Laura H. Franzke
    Part III. Key Public Health Information Systems
    14. Informatics in Disease Prevention and Epidemiology / Richard S. Hopkins and J.A. Magnuson
    15. Informatics in Toxicology and Environmental Public Health / Edwin M. Kilbourne
    16. Public Health Laboratories / Riki Merrick, Steven H. Hinrichs, and Michelle Meigs
    17. The National Vital Statistics System / Charles J. Rothwell, Mary Anne Freedman, and James A. Weed
    18. Risk Factor Information Systems / Alan Tomines
    19. Setting national Policies and Standards for Immunization Information Systems / Nedra Y. Garrett
    Part IV. New Challenges and Emerging Solutions
    20. New Means of Data Collection and Accessibility / I. Charie Faught, James Aspevig, and Rita Spear
    21. Geographic Information Systems / Carol L. Hanchette
    22. Public Health Informatics and Health Information Exchange / J.A. Magnuson and Paul C. Fu, Jr.
    23. Decision Support and Expert Systems in Public Health / William A. Yasnoff and Perry L. Miller
    24. Delivery of Preventive Medicine in Primary Care / Paul C. Fu, Jr., Alan Tomines, and Larry L. Dickey
    25. Case-Based Learning in Public Health Informatics / Herman Tolentino, Sridhar R. Papagari Sangareddy, Catherine Pepper, and J.A. Magnuson
    Part V. Case Studies: Information Systems and the Strata of Public Health
    26. Local and Regional Public Health Informatics / Jeffrey M. Kriseman and Brian J. Labus
    27. Public Health Informatics in High Population States: New York and Ohio / Geraldine S. Johnson, Guthrie S. Birkhead, Rachel Block, Shannon Kelley, James Coates, Bob Campbell, and Brian Fowler
    28. State Public Health Informatics: Perspective from a Low Population State / James Aspevig
    29. National Public Health Informatics, United States / Seth Foldy
    30. Public Health Informatics in Canada / Lawrence E. Frisch, Elizabeth M. Borycki, Alyse Capron, Abla Mawudeku, and Ronald St. John
    31. Perspectives on Global Public Health Informatics / Janise Richards, Gerry Douglas, and Hamish S.F. Fraser
    Part VI. Epilogue
    32. Public Health Informatics: The Path Forward / J.A. Magnuson.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    J.A. Magnuson, Brian E. Dixon, editors.
    Summary: This 3rd edition of a classic textbook examines the context and background of public health informatics, explores the technology and science underlying the field, discusses challenges and emerging solutions, reviews many key public health information systems, and includes practical, case-based studies to guide the reader through the topic. The editors have expanded the text into new areas that have become important since publication of the previous two editions due to changing technologies and needs in the field, as well as updating and augmenting much of the core content. The book contains learning objectives, overviews, future directions, and review questions to assist readers to engage with this vast topic. The Editors and their team of well-known contributors have built upon the foundation established by the previous editions to provide the reader with a comprehensive and forward-looking review of public health informatics. The breadth of material in Public Health Informatics and Information Systems, 3rd edition makes it suitable for both undergraduate and graduate coursework in public health informatics, enabling instructors to select chapters that best fit their students needs.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    Part I: Context for Public Health Informatics
    1: Public Health Informatics: An Introduction
    Introduction to PH Informatics
    Public Health in the US
    Background
    Federal Level
    State Level
    Local Level
    Principles and Purpose
    Current State
    Public Health Informatics
    Background
    Underlying Principles
    Data Sources and Data Partners
    Output of PHI Efforts
    Principles and Purpose
    Current State
    Public Health Information Systems
    Background
    Principles and Purpose
    Current State Drivers of Change for Public Health Informatics and Information Systems
    Health Care Reform
    Precision Public Health
    mHealth and uHealth
    Public Health 3.0
    Summary
    References
    2: History of Public Health Information Systems and Informatics
    Introduction
    Data, Information, and Knowledge
    The Development of Counting and Counting Machines
    Development of Mechanical Counting Devices
    The Development of Modern Mechanical Measuring Devices
    Stages in Development of Public Health Information Management Systems
    The Age of Observation
    The Age of Analysis The Origin of Modern Public Health Informatics
    The Cholera Outbreaks in England
    Public Health Data Collection in the United States
    The Three Waves of Federal-State Systems Development in the US
    The First Wave: Independent Systems Development
    The Second Wave: Federal Funding of State-Level Systems
    The Third Wave: Integration of the Benefits of State-Level System Development with the Tools of Software Reuse
    Summary
    References
    3: Public Health Informatics in the Larger Context of Biomedical and Health Informatics
    Introduction
    The Sub-Disciplines of Informatics Major Applications of Informatics
    Electronic and Personal Health Records
    Information Retrieval (Search) Systems
    Consumer Health
    Telemedicine
    Bioinformatics
    Data Science and Analytics
    Big Data
    Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence
    The Value of Informatics
    Summary
    References
    4: Governmental and Legislative Context for Informatics
    Overview
    Introduction
    Legal and Regulatory Framework for Public Health Informatics
    Fundamentals of the Policy Process in the United States
    Organization and Authority of the Legislative Branch Organization and Authority of the Executive Branch
    Role of the Private Sector in Policy Development and Implementation
    The Policy Environment for Public Health Informatics
    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
    Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act
    Affordable Care Act (ACA)
    Food and Drug Administration Safety and Innovation Act (FDASIA)
    MACRA, MIPS, and APMs (Alternative Payment Models)
    Twenty-First Century Cures Act
    Future Policy Challenges
    Data Sharing and Health Information Exchange
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    American Nurses Association.
    Summary: "Public Health Nursing: Scope and Standards of Practice describes a competent level of nursing care at each level of public health nursing practice and provides comprehensive overviews of the dynamic and complex practice of the public health nursing specialty. Published by ANA, this book is informed by advances in health care and professional nursing practice. It contains national standards of practice and performance that define the who, what, where, when, why, and how of public health nursing practice and is a vital reference for: - Quality improvement initiatives - Certification and credentialing - Position descriptions and performance appraisals - Classroom teaching and in-service education programs - Boards of nursing members' orientation programs and regulatory decision-making activities Public Health Nursing: Scope and Standards of Practice is intended to guide nurses, as well as administrators, legislators, regulators, legal counsel, and other interprofessional colleagues"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Public health nursing scope of practice
    Standards of public health nursing practice
    Standards of practice
    Standards of professional performance
    Glossary
    References
    Appendic: Public health nursing : past, present, and future ; PHN workforce data by program area and job function ; Certifications relevant to public health nursing practice.
    Digital Access R2Library [2022]
  • Digital
    Donald J. Lollar, Willi Horner-Johnson, Katherine Froehlich-Grobe, editors.
    Summary: In this new edition, the editors and contributors update and expand on the educational framework that was introduced in the first edition for rethinking disability in public health study and practice and for attaining the competencies that should accompany this knowledge. The second edition highlights key areas of research that have emerged since the first edition was published. This edition includes new and updated chapters that have particular relevance for public health practice: - Disability, Intersectionality, and Inequity: Life in the Margins - Disability and Health Programs: Emerging Partners - Children with Special Healthcare Needs - Disasters and Disability: Rhetoric and Reality - Inter-relationship of Health Insurance and Employment for People with Disabilities - Public Health, Work, and Disability - Actions to Prepare a Competent Workforce Public Health Perspectives on Disability: Science, Social Justice, Ethics, and Beyond, 2nd Edition, is an essential resource for public health educators and practitioners as well as students in graduate schools of public health throughout the United States.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Epidemiology and Biostatistics
    Chapter 3. Social Determinants of Health and Disability
    Chapter 4. Disability, Intersectionality, and Inequity: Life in the Margins
    Chapter 5. Environmental Contexts Shaping Disability and Health
    Chapter 6. Public Health Ethics and Disability: Centering Disability Justice
    Chapter 7. International Public Health and Global Disability
    Chapter 8. Disability and Health Programs: Emerging Partners
    Chapter 9. Children with Special Healthcare Needs
    Chapter 10. Achieving Equity: Including Women with Disabilities in Maternal and Child Health Policies and Programs
    Chapter 11. Aging with a Disability
    Chapter 12. Disasters and Disability: Rhetoric and Reality
    Chapter 13. Law, Benefits, Disability Rights, and Public Health: A Sum Greater than the Parts?- Chapter 14. Inter-relationship of Health Insurance and Employment for People with Disabilities
    Chapter 15. Public Health, Work, and Disability
    Chapter 16. Actions to Prepare a Competent Workforce.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    1950-71.
    Incomplete, Search 'Related Title Browse' for additional holdings of this title.
    558
  • Print
    Pauling, Linus.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R111 .L761
    1
  • Digital
    Daniel W. Byrne.
    Contents:
    Overview : Twenty key principles
    PLANNING. Laying the groundwork
    The methodology
    Minimizing bias
    The data collection/case report form
    Reproducible eligibility criteria
    Randomization, blinding, and confidentiality
    End points and outcome
    Sample size and power
    Preparing for modern statistical analysis
    Avoiding common criticisms
    Preparing to write a publishable paper
    OBSERVING. Collecting data and handling missing data
    Analyzing data : statistical analysis for reproducible research
    Interpreting the data
    Univariate analysis
    Nonparametric tests
    Matching and propensity score analysis
    Multivariate analysis and model validation
    WRITING. Title page
    Abstract
    Introduction
    Methods
    Results
    Discussion
    References
    Industry publications
    EDITING. Preparing your manuscript for submission
    Small but significant points to consider
    Improving your writing
    Fixes for problematic terms
    REVISING. Revising the final draft
    The cover letter
    Responding to peer reviewers' comments.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Ian Peate, Jay Macleod.
    Summary: Contemporary and fully updated, the new edition of this accessible guide builds on the success of previous editions to bring together all the key principles of nursing care for surgical patients. Split into two sections, the first section explains the basis of surgical care. The second section has comprehensive coverage of all major areas of surgical practice, providing both a theoretical and practical understanding across a wide range of procedures. Written from a patient-centred perspective but with an added emphasis on safety and the role of the nurse in relation to current legislation, the new Pudner's Nursing the Surgical Patient offers all you need to provide the best care. Its user-friendly format will make it invaluable not only to nurses but to a range of health care practitioners. Easy-to-read, easy-to-understand approach Ultra-clear and simple line art Written by 20+ expert contributors from around the UK Patient-centred approach places the patient at the centre of all that is done Reflects the latest practice and retains the principles of care.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Digital
    Chen Qiu, Pu-Xuan Lu, Shi-Ping Wu, editors.
    Summary: This book provides state-of-the-art information on advances in the diagnosis and treatment of pulmonary aspergillosis to help specialists and clinical practitioners make appropriate decisions concerning the management of patients with this condition. The incidence of pulmonary aspergillosis has increased steadily due to the widespread use of broad-spectrum antibiotics, cytotoxic drugs, immunosuppressive agents and adrenal hormones, as well as the growing number of organ transplantations and AIDS patients. The book discusses various aspects of the disease, including its history, characteristics, laboratory examination, imaging features, clinical diagnosis, differential diagnosis and treatment principles, and also presents illustrated case studies. Focusing on different characteristics in imaging and pathology, and addressing diagnostic difficulties in-depth, this clinical reference work brings together recent clinical investigations to making it a valuable resource for practitioners in the fields of respiratory and infectious diseases, oncology, intensive care, diagnostic imaging, pathology and microbiology.

    Contents:
    The basic information and clinical manifestation of pulmonary aspergillosis
    Etiology
    Epidemiology
    Pathology and pathogenesis
    Clinical manifestation
    Diagnosis
    Clinical classification
    Treatment and follow-up
    Typical cases report of pulmonary aspergillosis
    Pulmonary aspergillosis with similarity to tuberculosis presentation
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for chest tightness and chest pain
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for fever
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for hemoptysis
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for anhelation
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for cough and expectoration
    Pulmonary aspergillosis with no symptom.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: This book examines a range of contemporary ideas and arguments concerning the core yet unsettled clinical issues. Important aspects of pulmonary disorders are tackled such as occupational and environmental respiratory health hazards, the role of vitamin D supplementation in airway allergy, or nutritional aspects of care for lung cancer patients. Metabolic disorders affecting the processes of atherogenesis and systemic inflammation also are tackled. Attention is directed to rare but severe pediatric disease entities. Articles give readers practice at analyzing clinical data. The practical insights emphasize the role of science in transforming biomedical knowledge and care. This volume will be essential reading for clinicians, researchers, and other healthcare professionals engaged in effective patient care and therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Anastassios C. Koumbourlis, Mary A. Nevin, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Yener S. Erozan, Ibrahim Ramzy.
    Summary: The Essentials in Cytopathology book series fulfills the need for an easy-to-use and authoritative synopsis of site specific topics in cytopathology. These guide books fit into the lab coat pocket and are ideal for portability and quick reference. Each volume is heavily illustrated with a full color art program, while the text follows a user-friendly outline format. This new edition of Pulmonary Cytopathology is fully updated and expanded providing more detailed discussion of the role of new techniques such as EUS needle biopsy and specific issues of adequacy assessment. The section on subclassification of poorly-differentiated non-small cell carcinomas has been expanded to include accuracy of diagnosis in small samples, the new classification of adenocarcinoma and NSCC, currently-used ancillary techniques; i.e., immunohistochemistry, molecular/genetic techniques and therapeutic applications. Molecular techniques have been added as needed for targeted therapy. The text and illustrations have been expanded throughout.

    Contents:
    1. Specimen Collection and Processing
    2. Normal Components
    3. Hyperplasia, Reactive Changes and Metaplasia
    4. Respiratory Infections
    5. Other Non-Neoplastic Conditions
    6. Benign Neoplasms
    7. Primary Epithelial Malignancies
    8. Primary Nonepithelial Malignancies
    9. Metastatic Tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Carol Farver, Subha Ghosh, Thomas Gildea, Charles D. Sturgis.
    Summary: This book covers neoplastic and non-neoplastic pulmonary diseases, supplying essential information for the most common pulmonary diseases as well as many of the rarer ones. Organized around disease entities and presented in outline form, this book provides easy access to the essential facts and is illustrated with plentiful figures. The essential pathology, radiology and bronchoscopic technologies are discussed, as well as the tools needed to facilitate the most specific diagnoses and thus the most appropriate therapies. Each chapter also provides a list of suggested readings to guide further study. Written for a broad audience of clinicians who encounter these diseases in their everyday practice, this book serves specialists in pulmonary medicine and internal medicine, as well as general surgical pathologists who encounter these diseases as pulmonary specimens and who use this information for definitive evaluation and diagnoses of these entities, especially in small biopsies and cytopathology specimens. Pulmonary Disease: Pathology, Radiology, Bronchoscopy brings together the essential clinical, radiologic and pathologic insights for the major diseases of the lung, emphasizing the diagnostic criteria needed to ensure accurate diagnoses from small specimens.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to present articles that are stimulating to read and inform readers with the most up-to-date clinical research. The articles incorporate the latest developments on a variety of topics in pulmonary medicine, therapy, and related mutlisystem disorders with varied manifestations. Emphasis is given to air quality and lung health, therapeutic management of airway reactivity and cough sensitivity linked to mucous clearance ability, ventilatory and cellular effects of hypoxia, influenza epidemics and persistently dismal vaccination coverage rate, disorders of mixed provenance and genetic background affecting lung parenchyma such as cystic fibrosis or Langerhans cell histiocytosis, and others. New diagnostic strategies and therapeutic management will hopefully serve to enhance the way patient care is delivered and thus clinical outcomes. Being a blend of medical research and practice the book addresses the needs of respiratory scientists and physicians, and allied health professionals.

    Contents:
    Acute and chronic effects of oral erdosteine on ciliary beat frequency, cough sensitivity and airway reactivity
    Inhalation exposure to PM-bound polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons released from barbecue grills powered by gas, lump charcoal, and charcoal briquettes
    Intensity of anxiety and depression in patients with lung cancer in relation to quality of life
    Oleic derivatives of dopamine and respiration
    Intermittent hypoxia and unsaturated aldehydes: effects on oral epithelial wound healing
    Body mass disorders in healthy short children and in children with growth hormone deficiency
    Survival of patients with cystic fibrosis depending on mutation type and nutritional status
    Lung function in pregnancy in langerhans cell histiocytosis
    Psychobehavioral effects of meditation
    Vaccine effectiveness against influenza in 2015/16 in hospital and ambulatory medical care facilities: Polish results of the European I-MOVE+ Multicenter Study.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Mieczyslaw Pokorski.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Adiponectin and Mortality in Smokers and Non-Smokers of the Ludwigshafen Risk and Cardiovascular Health (LURIC) Study, G.E. Delgado, R. Siekmeier, W. März, M.E. Kleber
    Chapter 2. Heart Rate Variability and Arrhythmic Burden in Pulmonary Hypertension, C. Witte, J.U. Meyer zur Heide genannt Meyer-Arend, R. Andrié, J.W. Schrickel, C. Hammerstingl, J.O. Schwab, G. Nickenig, D. Skowasch, C. Pizarro
    Chapter 3. Cardiac Vagal Control and Depressive Symptoms in Response to Negative Emotional Stress, I. Tonhajzerova, Z. Visnovcova, A. Mestanikova, A. Jurko, M. Mestanik
    Chapter 4. Effect of Simulated Microgravity and Lunar Gravity on Human Inspiratory Muscle Function: ?Selena-T? 2015 Study, M.O. Segizbaeva, N.P. Aleksandrova, Z.A. Donina, E.V. Baranova, V.P. Katuntsev, G.G. Tarasenkov, V.M. Baranov
    Chapter 5. Airway Evaluation with Multidetector Computed Tomography Post-Processing Methods in Asthmatic Patients, M. Patyk, A. Obojski , Ł. Gojny, B. Panaszek, U. Zaleska-Dorobisz
    Chapter 6. Genotyping of EGFR Mutations from Bronchial Cytological Specimens in Slovakian Lung Cancer Patients, K. Baluchova, M. Zahradnikova, P. Bakes, S. Trubacova, H. Novosadova, E. Halasova, I. Majer, P. Hlavcak
    Chapter 7. Antiinflammatory Effect of N-Acetylcysteine Combined with Exogenous Surfactant in Meconium-Induced Lung Injury, P. Mikolka, J. Kopincova, L. Tomcikova Mikusiakova, P. Kosutova, A. Calkovska, D. Mokra,- Chapter 8. Pertussis: History of the Disease and Current Prevention Failure, E. Kuchar, M. Karlikowska-Skwarnik, S. Han, A. Nitsch-Osuch
    Chapter 9. Awareness of Influenza and Attitude Toward Influenza Vaccination among Medical Students, A. Banaszkiewicz, E. Talarek, J. Śliwka, F. Kazubski, I. Małecka, J. Stryczyńska-Kazubska, W. Dziubak, E. Kuchar
    Chapter 10. Pathogens Causing Upper Respiratory Tract Infections in Outpatients, A. Jama-Kmiecik, M. Frej-Mądrzak, J. Sarowska, I. Choroszy-Król.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Eyal Herzog, editor.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive review of pulmonary embolism (PE) which, with deep vein thrombosis, is assigned to the term venous thromboembolism (VTE) and currently the third most frequent acute cardiovascular syndrome globally. In the past decade we have seen a remarkable improvement in new diagnostic tools as well as novel therapeutic options to manage patients with VTE and this book provides a thorough clinical discussion of the diagnosis and management of these patients. Pulmonary Embolism presents a comprehensive review of all aspects of the epidemiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis, risk assessment and therapeutic options to manage the patient with PE. To aid healthcare providers caring for patients with acute PE, it encapsulates a novel, comprehensive, yet simple, pathway for the management of patients with PE, which can be used in many health care systems around the globe. This pathway is at the core of the book and all chapters are related to this unique algorithm.

    Contents:
    Pathway for the diagnosis and management of Pulmonary Embolism
    Epidemiology, pathophysiology and predisposing factors of pulmonary embolism and Deep Vein Thrombosis
    Non-Imaging Diagnosis of pulmonary embolism
    Imaging modalities in PE: echocardiography
    Imaging Modalities in Venous-thromboembolism: Ultrasound for Lower Extremity Deep Venous Thrombosis
    Imaging modalities in PE
    Ventilation/Perfusion Scintigraphy for the Diagnosis of Pulmonary Embolism and Chronic Thromboembolic Pulmonary Hypertension
    Imaging modalities in PE: Pulmonary angiography
    Integrating clinical, imaging and laboratory data to assess risk and to Guide Treatment in PE
    Management of the High-Risk Pulmonary Embolism in the acute phase - Respiratory, Hemodynamic and Mechanical Support
    Pharmacologic treatment in Pulmonary Embolism
    Catheter Directed Thrombolytic Therapy in Pulmonary Embolism
    Surgical Treatment of Acute Pulmonary Embolism
    Pulmonary Embolism Response Team: A Multidisciplinary Approach to Improve Pulmonary Embolism Management
    Pulmonary embolism in pregnancy and the postpartum period
    Pulmonary embolism and cancer patients
    Chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension
    Pulmonary Embolism in the COVID 19
    Travel related Venous Thromboembolism
    Illustrative cases of multimodality imaging in the diagnosis and management of PE
    Pulmonary Embolism: Information for the patient and family.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Belinda Rivera-Lebron, Gustavo A. Heresi, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive guide to the diagnosis and management of all stages of pulmonary embolism, starting with acute and ending with chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension. Acute pulmonary embolism (PE) is responsible for 150-250,000 hospitalizations and 60-100,000 deaths each year in the United States, making it the third most common cause of cardiovascular death. Acute PE spans a wide spectrum of clinical outcomes mainly based on the right ventricles (RV) capacity to tolerate strain. There have been many recent advances in the field of PE, including guidelines on classification and risk stratification, anticoagulation, as well as evolving areas in treatment options and follow up. The text begins with a review of the epidemiology and risk factors for PE. Chapters then delve into reviewing the decision pathways based on PE severity and treatment options, including the use of oral anticoagulation, systemic and catheter-directed thrombolysis, mechanical and surgical thrombectomy, and hemodynamic support with extracorporeal membrane oxygenation. The text then focuses on post-PE complications such as post-PE syndrome, chronic thromboembolic disease, and chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension (CTEPH). This is an ideal guide for providers of lung health, including pulmonary and critical care physicians, cardiologists, thoracic and cardiovascular surgeons. Physician-trainees, physician assistants, nurses and respiratory therapists with interest in pulmonary disorders, cardiovascular disease, pulmonary embolism, critical care or pulmonary hypertension will also find great value in this comprehensive guide.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of Pulmonary Embolism
    PE Diagnosis
    Risk Stratification of Acute PE
    Bleeding Risk Considerations Prior to Initiation and Duration of Anticoagulation Therapy for the Treatment of Venous Thromboembolism
    Treatment for Pulmonary Embolism: Anticoagulation Selection and Duration
    Indications for systemic thrombolysis over anticoagulation
    Endovascular techniques in the treatment of acute PE
    Role of surgical embolectomy and ECMO in PE
    Inferior Vena Cava filters in Venous Thromboembolism
    Multidisciplinary PE response team (PERT) development and implementation
    Post-PE Management
    Epidemiology and Diagnosis of Chronic Thromboembolic Pulmonary Hypertension
    Medical, Endovascular and Surgical Treatment of CTEPH.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: The book discusses new concepts and findings in the field of pulmonary function. This function is notably associated with spirometry and gas exchange at the lungs. The technique of spirometry, its clinical meaning, and reference values have all been refined over decades of its use. Although spirometry remains ancillary in diagnosis-making, it seems hardly replaceable in monitoring of lung disease progression and treatment efficacy. Pulmonary function goes far beyond spirometry. It encompasses interactions with the cardiovascular system, sleep disordered breathing, etiological factors like occupational bio aerosol exposure or cigarette smoke related issues. Pulmonary function may crumple in any respiratory ailment, the case in point being all too often respiratory tract infections. Chapters contribute to the latest thinking on molecular mechanisms underpinning pulmonary function, on patient care and attempt to keep up-to-date with current clinical and research progress. The book will be of interest to both clinicians and biomedical researchers.

    Contents:
    Intermittent Hypoxia Impairs Endothelial Function in Early Pre atherosclerosis
    Mechanisms of Compensatory Responses of the Respiratory System to Simulated Central Hypervolemia in Normal Subjects
    Cellular and Soluble Inflammatory Markers in Induced Sputum of Composting Plant Workers.- The Influence of the Reference Values on the Interpretation of Lung Function in Children: Comparison of Global Lung Initiative 2012 and Polish 1998 Reference Values
    Variability of Transcutaneous Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Pressure due to Sensor Location
    Crosstalk between Co-Cultured A549 Cells and THP1 Cells Exposed to Cigarette Smoke
    Evaluation of Airway Inflammation in Compost Workers Exposed to Bio aerosols Using Exhaled Breath Condensate and Fractional Exhaled Nitric Oxide
    Plasma Fibrinolysis Parameters in Smokers and Non-smokers of the Ludwigshafen Risk and Cardiovascular Health (LURIC) Study
    Vertigo with a Vestibular Dysfunction in Children During Respiratory Tract Infections
    The Prevalence of Oral Inflammation Among Denture Wearing Patients with Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Antonio M. Esquinas, editor.
    Summary: This book comprehensively addresses the use of pulmonary function measurement for the evaluation, screening and timing of noninvasive mechanical ventilation (NIMV) from hospital to home care. To do so, it describes three clinical stages of NIMV support: before NIV, to detect early markers and determine whether NIV is appropriate; during NIV, to evaluate NIV response; and in long-term NIV support. Additionally, it assesses a range of complementary health care organizations (pulmonary function labs, pneumology wards, semi-intensive care units and home mechanical ventilation programs), techniques (chest physiotherapy/airway secretions, etc.) and applications. In closing, the book offers practical recommendations on how noninvasive ventilation and lung function measurement can improve outcomes and quality of life, making it a valuable resource for all specialists, e.g. intensivists and pneumologists, as well as anesthesiologists and therapists. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    David A. Kaminsky, Charles G. Irvin, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ali Altalag, Jeremy Road, Pearce Wilcox, Kewan Aboulhosn, editors.
    Summary: This review of pulmonary function tests in clinical practice provides a simplified approach to interpreting most diagnostic tests in the field of respiratory medicine. It contains more than 125 illustrated diagrams, 50 tables, and 30 illustrative examples.

    Contents:
    Intro; Pulmonary Function Tests in Clinical Practice; Copyright; Preface; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Spirometry; Definitions [1, 2]; Forced Vital Capacity (FVC); Forced Expiratory Volume in the First Second (FEV1); FEV1 /FVC Ratio; The Instantaneous Forced Expiratory Flow (FEF25, FEF50, FEF75) and the Maximum Mid-Expiratory Flow (MMEF or FEF25-75); Peak Expiratory Flow (PEF); Spirometric Curves; The Volume-Time Curve (The Spirogram); The Expiratory Flow-Volume Curve (FV Curve); The Maximal Flow-Volume Loop; Technique of Spirometry [1]; The American Thoracic Society (ATS) Guidelines [1, 2] Reference Values [10, 22-27]Grading of Severity; Office Spirometry and FEV6 to Identify Obstructive Lung Disease; Bronchodilator Response; Components of Spirometry; Spirometric Pattern of Common Disorders; Obstructive Disorders; Restrictive Disorders; Upper Airway Obstruction [55-59]; References;
    Chapter 2: Lung Volumes; Definitions; See Figure 2.1; Total Lung Capacity (TLC); Residual Volume (RV); Functional Residual Capacity (FRC); Expiratory Reserve Volume (ERV); Inspiratory Reserve Volume (IRV); Inspiratory Capacity (IC); Tidal Volume (VT); SVC or VC; The Terms: "Volume" and "Capacity" (Figure 2.1) [3]Correlation with the FV Curve; Methods for Measuring the Static Lung Volumes; Body Plethysmography (Body Box); Nitrogen Washout Method [1, 7]; Inert Gas Dilution Technique [1, 9, 10]; Radiographic Method (Planimetry or Geometry); Technique for Body Plethysmography; Correlating the Flow Volume Curve with Lung Volumes; Reference Values [1, 6, 18, 21-24]; Components of a Lung Volume Study; Clinical Significance of FRC; Disease Patterns; Defining Air Trapping and Hyperinflation in Obstructive Disorders; References;
    Chapter 3: Gas Transfer; Definitions Diffusing Capacity for Carbon Monoxide (DLCO)Alveolar Volume (VA); Single Breath DLCO Technique [1, 5]; Reference Values [11-14]; DLCO Adjustments; Causes of Abnormal DLCO; References;
    Chapter 4: Airway Dysfunction, Challenge Testing and Occupational Asthma; Definitions; Airway Dysfunction; Exercise Induced Asthma; Exercise Induced Bronchoconstriction; Occupational Asthma; Bronchial Challenge; Methacholine; PD20 or PC20; Background:  Asthmatic Bronchoconstriction; Technique; 2-Minute Tidal Breathing Test Using the EW Nebulizer; 5-Breath Dosimeter Test [3] Indications and Contraindications for Methacholine Bronchial ChallengeInterpretation; Exercise Induced Bronchoconstriction; Background; Exercise Induced Bronchoconstriction Testing; Technique: Eucapnic Voluntary Hyperventilation; Occupational Asthma (OA) Testing; Background; Technique [59, 60]; References;
    Chapter 5: Respiratory Muscle Function and Other Pulmonary Function Studies; Respiratory Muscle Function; Maximal Respiratory Pressures; Indications; Technique; Interpretation; Limitations; Sniff Tests; Transcutaneous Electrical Phrenic Nerve Stimulation; Cough Test
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Yoshiharu Ohno, Hiroto Hatabu, Hans-Ulrich Kauczor, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews the basics of pulmonary functional imaging using new CT and MR techniques and describes the clinical applications of these techniques in detail. The intention is to equip readers with a full understanding of pulmonary functional imaging that will allow optimal application of all relevant techniques in the assessment of a variety of diseases, including COPD, asthma, cystic fibrosis, pulmonary thromboembolism, pulmonary hypertension, lung cancer and pulmonary nodule. Pulmonary functional imaging has been promoted as a research and diagnostic tool that has the capability to overcome the limitations of morphological assessments as well as functional evaluation based on traditional nuclear medicine studies. The recent advances in CT and MRI and in medical image processing and analysis have given further impetus to pulmonary functional imaging and provide the basis for future expansion of its use in clinical applications. In documenting the utility of state-of-the-art pulmonary functional imaging in diagnostic radiology and pulmonary medicine, this book will be of high value for chest radiologists, pulmonologists, pulmonary surgeons, and radiation technologists.

    Contents:
    Anatomical Basis for Pulmonary Functional Imaging
    Pulmonary Function Tests
    Basics and Clinical Application of CT for Pulmonary Functional Evaluation
    Basics and Clinical Application of MR Assessment of Pulmonary Hemodynamics and Blood Flow
    Basics and Clinical Application of MR Assessment of Ventilation
    Principles and Clinical Applications of Respiratory Motion Assessment Using 4D Computed Tomography and Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    Pulmonary Functional Imaging, Basics and Clinical Application of Nuclear Medicine and Hybrid Imaging
    Functional Assessment of COPD
    Structure-Function Imaging of Asthma: Airway and Ventilation Biomarkers
    Functional Assessment of Cystic Fibrosis Lung Disease
    Functional Assessment of Pulmonary Venous Thromboembolism
    Multimodality Imaging of Pulmonary Hypertension: Prognostication of Therapeutic Outcomes
    Functional Assessment of Lung Cancer and Nodules
    Computational Approach Toward Pulmonary Functional Imaging
    Image-Based Phenotyping, Deep Learning (DL) and Artificial Intelligence (AI) Applications in Clinical and Research Radiology and Chest Imaging
    Future of Pulmonary Functional Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bradley A. Maron, Roham T. Zamanian, Aaron B. Waxman, editors.
    Contents:
    Historical Perspective on the Classification and Nomenclature of Pulmonary Hypertension
    The Defining Characteristics of Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Pulmonary Hypertension in Patients Without Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Epidemiology of Pulmonary Hypertension: From Quaternary Referral Centre to the Community
    The Effects of Chronic Hypoxia on Inflammation and Pulmonary Vascular Function
    Genetics of Pulmonary Vascular Disease
    Novel Mechanisms of Disease: Network Biology and MicroRNA Signaling in Pulmonary Hypertension
    Pulmonary Hypertension as a Metabolic Disease
    Renin-Angiotensin-Aldosterone and other Neurohumoral Factors in the Pathogenesis of Pulmonary Hypertension
    Animal Models of Pulmonary Hypertension
    The Cardiopulmonary Hemodynamic Evaluation of Pulmonary Hypertension
    Advanced Imaging in Pulmonary Hypertension
    Assessing Disease State in the Pulmonary Vasculature in Clinical Practice and Research
    Biomarkers and other Methods for Assessing Patient Progress
    Pulmonary Circulatory
    Right Ventricular Uncoupling: New Insights into Pulmonary Hypertension Pathophysiology
    Contemporary Pharmacotherapies Involving Nitric Oxide, Prostacyclin, and Endothelin Receptor Signaling Pathways
    Determining the Optimal Approach to Initiating Oral, Inhaled, and Intravenous Therapies in Clinical Practice: Sequential Goal-Directed Therapy is Best
    Counterpoint: Determining the optimal approach to initiating oral, inhaled, and intravenous therapies in clinical practice: Maximal upfront therapy is best
    Surgery, Devices, Transplantation and Other Interventional Options for the Treatment of Advanced Pulmonary Hypertension
    Patient Registries in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension: the Role of Survival Equations and Risk Calculators
    Support Care for the Pulmonary Hypertension Patient
    Special Considerations for the Pulmonary Hypertension Patient
    The Future of Pulmonary Hypertension.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    H. James Ford, Gustavo A. Heresi, Michael G. Risbano, editors.
    Summary: This book is a clinical guide to controversial and emerging topics in pulmonary hypertension. There are multiple challenges and unanswered questions encountered by clinicians that evaluate, diagnose and treat patients with suspected or confirmed pulmonary vascular disease. This book provides a deep dive into the diagnosis and therapeutics of pulmonary hypertension supported by the literature and balanced with personal clinical experience. Expert authors have chosen these specific topics to address issues where uncertainty and/or controversy exists as well as highlight areas that are just being incorporated into clinical practice. These topics include: exercise pulmonary hypertension, sickle cell disease and pulmonary hypertension, and sarcoid pulmonary hypertension, among many others. Chapters address the diagnostic and treatment dilemmas posed by these various clinical entities through literature review, sharing of expert opinion, and review of recent guidelines and their applicability to the multiple different nuanced presentations of pulmonary hypertension. This is an ideal guide for pulmonologists, cardiologists, and other specialty practitioners caring for patients with pulmonary hypertension.

    Contents:
    Exercise pulmonary hypertension
    Advanced Right Ventricular Assessment: Pulmonary Artery Compliance and RV:PA Coupling
    Beyond scleroderma: pulmonary arterial hypertension in patients with other connective tissue diseases
    Isolated Post-capillary and Combined Pre and Post-capillary Pulmonary Hypertension
    Current Approach to Chronic Thromboembolic Disease without Pulmonary Hypertension
    Pulmonary veno-occlusive disease and pulmonary capillary hemangiomatosis
    Controversies in the Management of Pulmonary Hypertension in the Setting of Lung Disease
    Pulmonary Hypertension in Sickle Cell Disease: Current Controversies and Clinical Practices
    Sarcoidosis-Associated Pulmonary Hypertension
    Parenteral Prostacyclin Use in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Pulmonary Hypertension in Chronic Kidney Disease and End Stage Renal Disease
    Gender and Race Disparities in Pulmonary Hypertension Diagnosis and Treatment .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Robert P. Baughman, Roberto G. Carbone, Steven D. Nathan, editors.
    Summary: The first edition of this book, published in 2009, was the only book of its kind dedicated exclusively to the diagnosis and management of pulmonary arterial hypertension (PAH) in patients with interstitial lung disease (ILD). Over the past few years, new diagnostic tests and treatments of pulmonary arterial hypertension have been developed and tested. Diagnostic testing has led to more frequent and specific diagnosis in PAH patients, leading to the more widespread use of effective treatment and improved quality of life and reduction of mortality for PAH patients. Pulmonary Hypertension and Interstitial Lung Disease: A Clinical Guide, Second Edition provides an updated and expanded state-of-the-art overview of the problems seen by physicians in the clinical management of ILDs. The first section of the book discusses general features and includes an overview of clinical features, diagnosis and pathology of ILD. The second part discusses specific disorders such as idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, sarcoidosis, and hypersensitivity pneumonia. Pulmonary Hypertension and Interstitial Lung Disease, Second Edition is an invaluable resource for all physicians whose practice involves the care and treatment of patients with interstitial lung disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Konstantinos Dimopoulos, Gerhard-Paul Diller, editors.
    Summary: This book is intended as a comprehensive, practically oriented reference on pulmonary hypertension within the context of adult congenital heart disease (ACHD). After an introductory chapter on pathophysiology, the various types of pulmonary hypertension that may be encountered in ACHD are discussed, highlighting the specifics observed within different patient categories. The diagnostic approach is then addressed in detail, and the last section of the book is devoted to management options, from conservative approaches to interventional treatment and the concept of treat and repair. Management in specific patient subjects, such as pregnant women, Fontan patients, and Down syndrome patients with Eisenmenger syndrome, is fully discussed, and guidance is also provided on palliative care. Pulmonary arterial hypertension related to congenital heart disease (PAH-CHD), despite significant similarities in lung pathohysiology, differs significantly from other types of PAH in terms of mechanism of onset, natural history and management. Mistakes and pitfalls in the management of patients with PAH-CHD are often related to a lack of knowledge or expertise in this condition. Pulmonary Hypertension in Adult Congenital Heart Disease will be a valuable resource and learning tool for all who care for patients with ACHD, both in tertiary practice and general cardiology.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Pathophysiology and Classification of Pulmonary Hypertension in Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    1. Congenital Heart Defects and Pulmonary Hypertension: The Heath Edwards Paradigm
    2. Definition and Classification of Pulmonary Hypertension in Congenital Heart Disease
    3. Eisenmenger Syndrome: Pathophysiology and Hematologic Effects
    4. PAH in Patients with Persistent Systemic-Pulmonary Shunts and PAH in Patients with Small Cardiac Defects
    5. Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension in Patients with Previous Reparative Surgery
    6. Segmental Pulmonary Hypertension
    7. Pulmonary Vascular Disease in Patients with Fontan-Type Circulation
    8. Post-Capillary Pulmonary Hypertension in ACHD
    Part 2: The Diagnosis of Pulmonary Hypertension in Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    9. Physical Examination and Electrocardiography in Patients with Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension due to Congenital Heart Disease: Initial Clinical Assessment
    10. The Role of Plain Chest Radiography and Computed Tomography
    11. Echocardiography in the Diagnosis and Follow-up of Patients with Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension Associated with Congenital Heart Disease
    12. Cardiovascular Magnetic Resonance
    13. Cardiopulmonary Exercise and Six-minute Walk Testing
    14. Cardiac Catheterization
    Part 3: Management of Pulmonary Hypertension in Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    15. Conservative Management and Recommendations for PAH-CHD
    16. Pulmonary Vasodilators in Patients with Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension Related to Congenital Heart Disease
    17. Perspectives on Shunts in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension: from Interventions to Create Shunts to the Concept of "Treat-and-Repair"
    18. Eisenmenger Syndrome in Patients with Down's Syndrome
    19. Pregnancy and Contraception
    20. Training and Recommendations for Exercise
    21. Prognostication in PAH-CHD
    22. Management of Fontan patients
    23. Palliative Care and End of Life Considerations in Patients with PAH-CHD
    24. PAH in ACHD: Research, Global Perspective and Future Prospects: An Epilogue. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: The respiratory tract is a frequent target of infections caused by a wide range of organisms. The book provides reader-friendly information on aspects of pulmonary infections, including comprehensive accounts of bacterial and viral diseases, therapeutic approaches, molecular and classical culture-related techniques of diagnosis, and explaining the basic cell biological mechanism. The role of oxidative stress, both helpful in fighting invading pathogens and detrimental in yielding to infection is detailed as it is often undervalued and needs focus. The chapters encompass latest developments and applications in bacteriology and virology, preventive and therapeutic tips, and raise attention to implementation of proper antibiotic policies by medical institutions to decrease resistance to antimicrobials. The perennial problem of low influenza vaccination coverage rate is rationalized. The volume will be of interest to both clinicians and biomedical researchers engaged in this exciting field.

    Contents:
    Evaluation of the Activity of Influenza and Influenza-like Viruses in the Epidemic Season 2013/2014
    Necrotizing Pneumonia and its Complications in Children
    Progress in the Diagnosis and Control of Ebola Disease
    Pathophysiology of Clinical Symptoms in Acute Viral Respiratory Tract Infections
    Stagnating Low Influenza Vaccine Coverage Rates in the Polish Elderly Population in 2008-2013
    Incidence of Circulating Antibodies against Hemagglutinin of Influenza Viruses in the Epidemic Season 2013/2014 in Poland
    Neutrophils
    the role of oxidative and nitrosative stress in health and disease
    The Incidence of Respiratory Tract Infections in Vertically HIV-Infected Children in Lower Silesia in Poland and the Approach to Infection Prevention
    Implementation of Hospital Antibiotic Policy Decreases Antimicrobial Use in the Pediatric Ward
    Detection of Chlamydophila Pneumoniae and Typical Bacteria in Patients with Chronic Cough
    Compliance with Vaccination Against Influenza Among the Elderly.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Prevalence of pulmonary infectins caused by atypical pathogens in non-HIV immunocompromised patients
    Effects of S-nitroso-N-acetyl-penicillamine (SNAP) on inflammation, lung tissue apoptosis and iNOS activity in a rabbit model of acute lung injury
    Combination therapy with budesonide and salmeterol in experimental allergic inflammation
    Monoclonal antibodies for the management of severe asthma
    Cough and arabinogalactan polysaccharide from the bark of Terminalia Arjuna
    Bronchodilator and anti-inflammatory action of theophylline in a model of ovalbumin-induced allergic inflammation
    Importance of social relationships in patients with chronic respiratory diseases
    The renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system in smokers and non-smokers of the Ludwigshafen risk and cardiovascular health (LURIC) study
    Electrodermal activity in adolescent depression
    Metagenomic analysis of cerebrospinal fluid from patients with multiple sclerosis
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Paul F. Dellaripa, Aryeh Fischer, Kevin R. Flaherty, editors.
    Summary: "The spectrum of systemic rheumatologic disease (often termed connective tissue disease) is characterized by autoimmune-mediated organ dysfunction, and the lungs are a frequent target. There are numerous pulmonary manifestations associated with connective tissue diseases, and all patients with rheumatologic disease are at risk of developing associated lung disease. Pulmonary Manifestations of Rheumatic Disease covers the comprehensive management of rheumatologic lung disease, which requires a multi-disciplinary approach and is optimized by active engagement by rheumatologists working closely with pulmonologists and other specialists. The book offers a practical reference using a case-based approach for practicing clinicians in the ongoing assessment and understanding of rheumatologic lung disease, and presents the science and pathophysiology underlying rheumatologic lung diseases. The first text of its kind specifically dedicated to describe diverse, commonplace, and challenging aspects of rheumatologic lung diseases, Pulmonary Manifestations of Rheumatic Disease serves as an invaluable tool for the practicing clinician."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    The lung in rheumatic diseases
    2. Evaluation of lung disease in patients
    3. Rheumatoid arthritis
    4. Interstitial lung disease in systemic sclerosis
    5. Inflammatory myopathy/anti synthetase syndrome
    6. Pulmonary manifestations of systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE)
    7. Pulmonary manifestations in mixed connective tissue disease
    8. Pulmonary manifestations of primary Sjogren's Syndrome
    9. Pulmonary manifestations of sarcoidosis
    10. Pulmonary manifestations of vasculitis
    11. Pulmonary hypertension associated with connective tissue disease
    12. Respiratory infections in the rheumatic disease patient
    13. Lung transplantation for connective tissue disease-associated lung disease
    14. Current and emerging treatment options in interstitial lung disease
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Dani S. Zander, Carol F. Farver.
    Contents:
    Normal anatomy, tissue artifacts, and incidental structures
    The uses and abuses of the lung biopsy
    A pattern-based approach to diagnosis
    Congenital, developmental, and inherited disorders
    Acquired and idiopathic disorders in neonates and young children
    Lung neoplasms in infants and children
    Vascular diseases
    Vasculitides and other causes of pulmonary hemorrhage
    Acute lung injury
    Bacterial diseases
    Mycobacterial diseases
    Fungal diseases
    Viral diseases
    Human parasitic pulmonary infections
    Chlamydial, mycoplasmal, rickettsial, and ehrlichial diseases
    Idiopathic interstitial pneumonias
    Other interstitial lung diseases
    Environmental- and toxin-induced lung diseases
    Drug reactions and other iatrogenic pulmonary diseases
    Emphysema and diseases of large airways
    Diseases of small airways
    Lymphoid lesions of the lung
    Uncommon histiocytic and dendritic cell proliferations
    Transplantation-related lung pathology
    Other nonneoplastic focal lesions, inclusions, and depositions
    Usual lung cancers
    Neuroendocrine neoplasms
    Unusual primary malignant lung neoplasms
    Pulmonary involvement by extrapulmonary neoplasms
    Precursors of malignancy
    Benign neoplasms of the lungs
    Primary pleural neoplasms
    Pleural involvement by extrapleural neoplasms
    Inflammatory and fibrosing pleural processes
    Pulmonary manifestations of systemic diseases
    Respiratory cytology.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    by Helmut Popper, Bruno Murer.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date overview of diagnostics in lung and pleura pathology. It helps surgical and clinical pathologist solve problem cases in lung and pleura tumor pathology as well as in other fields of pulmonary/pleura pathology such as interstitial lung disease, rare tumors, metabolic diseases, infectious pneumonias, pneumoconiosis, drug induced lung diseases, developmental and pediatric pulmonary pathology. Focusing on practical issues and providing numerous illustrated examples of typical and atypical cases, it guides residents as well as experienced pathologists through the problems and pitfalls in pulmonary and pleura pathology. References have been kept to a minimum.

    Contents:
    Carcinomas
    Sarcomas
    Lymphomas
    Benign Epithelial and Mesenchymal Tumors
    Preneoplasia Pneumonia
    Granulomatous Pneumonias
    Interstitial Pneumonia
    Eosinophilic Pneumonia
    Smoking Induced Lung Diseases
    Collagen Vascular Diseases
    Bronchitis Acute and Chronic
    Developmental Disorders
    Pneumoconiosis
    Systemic Vasculitis
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    Metabolic Disorders
    Emphysema
    Toxic Inhalation
    Drug Induced Lung Diseases
    Alveolar Hemorrhage
    Pleuritis
    Pleural Effusion
    Pleura Tumors
    Transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Philip T. Cagle ; associate editors, Timothy C. Allen [and 15 others].
    Summary: "In Pulmonary Pathology: An Atlas and Text, 3rd edition, a newly composed book, the general format of a user-friendly atlas that is highly illustrated, divided into readily accessible individual entities, and offering brief handy text with bullet points to expedite use is retained"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Sect. 1: Normal cytology and histology
    Sect. 2: Artifacts and age-related changes
    Sect. 3: Malignant neoplasms
    Sect. 4: Benign neoplasms
    Sect. 5: Pulmonary histiocytic proliferations
    Sect. 6: Benign and borderline lymphoid proliferations
    Sect. 7: Focal lesions
    Sect. 8: Granulomatous diseases
    Sect. 9: Diffuse pulmonary hemorrhage
    Sect. 10: Pulmonary hypertension and embolic disease
    Sect. 11: Large airways
    Sect. 12: Small airways
    Sect. 13: Alveolar infiltrates
    Sect. 14: Tobacco-related diseases
    Sect. 15: Diffuse interstitial lung diseases
    Sect. 16: Idiopathic interstitial pneumonias
    Sect. 17: Specific infectious agents
    Sect. 18: Transplant-related pathology
    Sect. 19: Lung pathology in collagen vascular diseases
    Sect. 20: Therapeutic drug reactions and radiation effects
    Sect. 21: Pneumoconioses
    Sect. 22: Metabolic disorders/storage diseases
    Sect. 23: Nonneoplastic lesions of the pleura
    Sect. 24: Pediatric pulmonary pathology.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    Philip T. Cagle, Keith M. Kerr, editors.
    Summary: This book covers the complete field of pulmonary pathology - neoplastic and non-neoplastic - from Acinic cell tumor in the lung to Wegener̀s Granulomatosis. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need. .

    Contents:
    Acinic cell tumor, lung
    Acute Fibrinous and Organizing Pneumonia
    Acute Interstitial Pneumonia
    Adenocarcinoma in situ
    Adenocarcinoma, lung
    Adenoid cystic carcinoma, lung
    Adenosquamous carcinoma, lung
    Allergic Bronchopulmonary Aspergillosis
    Alveolar adenoma
    Amyloidosis, Diffuse Alveolar-Septal.- Amyloidosis, Nodular.- Amyloidosis, Tracheobronchial
    Angiosarcomas, lung
    Anthrax and Related Organisms, Pulmonary
    Asbestosis
    Aspergillus, Pulmonary
    Atypical adenomatous hyperplasia, lung
    Atypical Mycobacteria, Pulmonary
    Bacterial Infections in Transplant Patients
    Basaloid carcinoma, lung
    Bronchial Associated Lymphoid Tissue Lymphoma
    Bronchiolitis, Constrictive.- Bronchiolitis, Follicular.- Bronchiolitis, Respiratory
    Carcinoid tumor, lung
    Carcinosarcoma, lung
    Chondroma, lung
    Chondrosarcoma, lung
    Churg-Strauss Syndrome, Pulmonary
    Clear cell tumor, lung
    Coal Worker̀s Pneumoconiosis
    Community Respiratory Viruses in Transplant Patients
    Cryptococcus, Pulmonary
    Cryptogenic Organizing Pneumonia
    Cytomegalovirus pneumonia in Transplant Patients
    Desmoid tumor, lung
    Desquamative Interstitial Pneumonia.- Desquamative Interstitial Pneumonia-like Pattern
    Diffuse Alveolar Damage
    Diffuse Alveolar Hemorrhage
    Diffuse idiopathic pulmonary neuroendocrine cell hyperplasia
    Diffuse Interstitial Lung Diseases
    Diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, lung
    Diffuse Panbronchiolitis and variants
    Eosinophilic Pneumonia, Acute
    Eosinophilic Pneumonia, Chronic
    Epithelial-myoepithelial carcinoma, lung
    Epithelioid heamangioendothelioma, lung
    Fibrous histiocytic tumors, incl. benign FH, MFH and cystic tumors of lung
    Ganglioneuroma, lung
    Germ cell tumors incl. choriocarcinoma, lung
    Giant Cell Interstitial Pneumonia/Hard Metal Pneumoconiosis
    Glandular papilloma, lung
    Glomus tumor, lung
    Granular cell tumor, lung
    Haemangioma, lung
    Haemangiomatosis, pulmonary
    Hamartoma, lung incl. mesenchymoma
    Histoplasma, Pulmonary
    Hodgkiǹs disease
    Hypersensitivity Pneumonitis
    Idiopathic Interstitial Pneumonias
    IgG4 Related Disease, Pulmonary
    Infectious Granulomas, pulmonary
    Inflammatory pseudotumors, lung
    Invasive and Colonizing Fungal Infections in Transplant Patients
    Kaposi sarcoma, lung
    Large cell carcinoma, lung
    Large cell neuroendocrine carcinoma, lung
    Leiomyoma, lung
    Leiomyomasarcoma, lung
    Lipoma, lung
    Liposarcoma, lung
    Lung Transplant, Acute Rejection
    Lung Transplant, Hyperacute Rejection
    Lymphangioleiomyomatosis
    Lymphangioma, lung
    Lymphangiomatosis, pulmonary
    Lymphoid Interstitial Pneumonia
    Lymphomatoid granulomatosis
    Melanoma, lung
    Meningioma, lung
    Mesenchymal cystic hamartoma
    Microcystic fibromyxoma, lung
    Minute meningothelial nodules, aka chemodectoma, lung
    Mixed squamous cell and glandular papilloma
    Mucinous cystadenoma, lung
    Mucoepidermoid carcinoma, lung
    Mucous gland adenoma, lung
    Multifocal micronodular pneumocyte hyperplasia
    Mycobacterial Disease in Transplant Patients
    Nerve sheath tumors incl. neurofibroma and neurilemmoma
    Nonspecific Interstitial Pneumonia
    Oncocytoma, lung
    Osteosarcoma, lung
    Papillary adenoma, lung
    Plasma cell tumors, lung shot
    Pleomorphic adenoma, lung
    Pneumocystis pneumonia in Transplant Patients
    Pneumonia, Aspiration
    Pneumonia, Cytomegalovirus.- Pneumonia, H1N1 (Swine Flu).- Pneumonia, Pneumocystis.- Pneumonia, Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome
    Pneumonia, Staphylococcus
    Primary leiomyosarcomas, lung
    Pulmonary Abscess
    Pulmonary Alveolar Microlithiasis.- Pulmonary Alveolar Proteinosis
    Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Pulmonary artery and vein sarcomas
    Pulmonary blastoma
    Pulmonary Capillary Hemangiomatosis
    Pulmonary Hyalinizing Granuloma
    Pulmonary Langerhans Cell Histiocytosis
    Pulmonary Thrombi and Emboli
    Radiation Pneumonitis
    Respiratory Bronchiolitis-Associated Interstitial Lung Disease
    Rhabdomyosarcomas, lung
    Sarcomatoid carcinomas, lung
    Sclerosing haemangioma, lung
    Silicosis
    Small cell carcinoma, lung
    Solitary fibrous tumor, lung
    Squamous carcinoma in situ
    Squamous cell carcinoma, lung.- Squamous cell papilloma, lung
    Squamous dysplasia, lung
    Synovial sarcoma, lung
    Thymoma, pulmonary
    Transplant-associated lymphoproliferative disorders
    Usual Interstitial Pneumonia
    Wegener̀s Granulomatosis, Pulmonary. .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Michael G. Levitzky.
    Contents:
    Function and structure of the respiratory system
    Mechanics of breathing
    Alveolar ventilation
    Blood flow to the lung
    Ventilation-perfusion relationships
    Diffusion of gases and interpretation of pulmonary function tests
    Transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide in the blood
    Acid-base balance
    Control of breathing
    Nonrespiratory functions of the lung
    The respiratory system under stress
    Clinical problem answers
    Appendices. Symbols used in respiratory physiology
    The laws governing the behavior of gases
    Frequently used equations
    Table of normal respiratory and circulatory values
    Common abbreviations.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2018
  • Digital
    Marc A. Judson, editor.
    Summary: Pulmonary Sarcoidosis: A Guide for the Practicing Clinician is a valuable resource for clinicians of varied disciplines concerning the care of the sarcoidosis patient. Sarcoidosis is a multi-system disorder and represents a major challenge to physicians. Although any organ may be involved with sarcoidosis, the lung is the most common organ affected. Chapters are written by distinguished authors who have extensive experience in caring for these patients. Detailed figures and tables are provided to guide the practicing clinician through all aspects of the condition, from clinical manifestations to treatment options. Pulmonary Sarcoidosis: A Guide for the Practicing Clinician is fully comprehensive and evidence-based and will be an essential addition to the bookshelves of all whose practice involves the care and treatment of patients with sarcoidosis.

    Contents:
    The Diagnosis of Sarcoidosis
    The Pulmonary Manifestations of Sarcoidosis
    The Treatment of Pulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Acute Pulmonary Exacerbation of Sarcoidosis: APES
    Advanced ("End-Stage") Pulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Sarcoidosis Associated Pulmonary Hypertension
    Monitoring Pulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Extrapulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Instructive Cases of Pulmonary Sarcoidosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Takefumi Saito, Masahiro Narita, Charles L. Daley, editors.
    Summary: Every year, 10 million people fall ill with tuberculosis (TB) in the world, and of those, 1.5 million people die even though it is a preventable and curable disease. As a result, TB remains the worlds leading infectious cause of death. On the other hand, in industrialized countries, the TB incidence has fallen to a historic low, and clinicians experience with TB diminished significantly in recent years. Additional challenges for clinicians include atypical presentation of TB in the immunocompromised, especially among the elderly, and an increasing number of patients with drug-resistant TB. Delayed diagnosis of TB leads to the spread of TB including nosocomial transmission because TB is an air-borne infectious disease, and suboptimal treatment can result in development of drug resistance. Furthermore, treatment of latent TB infection (LTBI) can prevent future TB cases but it has been under-utilized despite recent innovations in diagnosis and treatment regimens of LTBI. This book focuses on advances in diagnostic tools and treatment for both TB disease and latent TB infection. Each chapter/topic is written by one of the top TB experts in the field and the authors are from Japan and the US. Pulmonary Tuberculosis and its Prevention offers up-to-date information that can be incorporated into a busy practice of clinicians while they can appreciate broad international perspectives and gain in-depth knowledge on TB.

    Contents:
    Part I. Epidemiology and Pathogenesis
    Chapter 1. Epidemiology
    Chapter 2. Immunology
    Chapter 3. Impact of Biologic and JAK Inhibitor Therapies on TB: How do Biologic Therapies Affect the Presentation and Treatment Course of Pulmonary TB?
    Chapter 4. Advances in Mycobacterial Laboratories: What is the latest laboratory approach to diagnose and manage pulmonary tuberculosis?
    Part II Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    Chapter 5. Advances in Diagnostics of Pulmonary tuberculosis: What is the Latest Approach to Diagnose Pulmonary TB?
    Chapter 6. HRCT diagnosis of pulmonary tuberculosis: Microlesions
    Chapter 7. Advances in Treatment of Drug Resistant Pulmonary TB: What is the latest approach to treat drug-resistant pulmonary TB?
    Chapter 8. The Role of Surgical Interventions for Pulmonary TB: What is the Role of Surgical Intervention in Pulmonary TB?
    Part III Latent TB Infection: TB Prevention
    Chapter 9. Advances in Diagnosis of Latent TB Infection: What is the Latest Approach to Diagnose Latent TB Infection to Prevent TB?
    Chapter 10. Advances in Treatment of Latent TB Infection: What is the Latest Approach to Treat Latent TB Infection to Prevent Pulmonary TB?
    Part IV Research Areas
    Chapter 11. TB vaccines: What Type of TB Vaccines are Studied and will be Available in the Future?
    Chapter 12. Clinical Trials of Pulmonary TB: Challenges and Opportunities
    Chapter 13. Contributions of Japanese Scholars to Advances in Clinical Tuberculosis Management: In TB World, What Kind of Achievements are Accomplished by Japanese Researchers?.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Yong-Xiao Wang, editor.
    Contents:
    Adventitial fibroblast Nox4 expression and ROS signaling in pulmonary arterial hypertension
    Role of transcription factors in pulmonary artery smooth muscle cells: an important link to hypoxic pulmonary hypertension
    Molecular basis of nitrative stress in the pathogenesis of pulmonary hypertension
    Pentose shunt, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, NADPH redox, and stem cells in pulmonary hypertension
    Redox regulation of the superoxide dismutases SOD3 and SOD2 in the pulmonary circulation
    A brief overview of nitric oxide and reactive oxygen species signaling in hypoxia-induced pulmonary hypertension
    Altered redox balance in the development of chronic hypoxia-induced pulmonary hypertension
    ROS signaling in the pathogenesis of acute lung injury (ALI) and acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS)
    Redox-dependent calpain signaling in airway and pulmonary vascular remodeling in COPD
    Natural antioxidants as potential therapy, and a promising role for melatonin against pulmonary hypertension
    Effects of hyperoxia on the developing airway and pulmonary vasculature
    Lung ischaemia-reperfusion injury: the role of reactive oxygen species
    Redox mechanisms influencing cGMP signaling in pulmonary vascular physiology and pathophysiology
    Metabolic reprogramming and redox signaling in pulmonary hypertension
    Hydrogen sulfide as an O₂ sensor: a critical analysis
    Redox signaling and persistent pulmonary hypertension of the newborn
    Cross talk between mitochondrial reactive oxygen species and sarcoplasmic reticulum calcium in pulmonary arterial smooth muscle cells
    Endothelial cell reactive oxygen species and Ca²⁺ signaling in pulmonary hypertension
    Redox signaling in the right ventricle
    Hypoxia and local inflammation in pulmonary artery structure and function
    From physiological redox signalling to oxidant stress
    Emerging role of MicroRNAs and long noncoding RNAs in healthy and diseased lung
    Techniques for detecting reactive oxygen species in pulmonary vasculature redox signaling
    Mitochondrial and metabolic drivers of pulmonary vascular endothelial dysfunction in pulmonary hypertension
    Subcellular redox signalling
    Reactive oxygen species in COPD-related vascular remodeling
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: This book addresses several burning issues concerning diseases involving the lungs and respiratory tract. It discusses the epidemiology, mechanisms, prevention, and diagnosis of chest conditions such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, sleep apnea and respiratory infections. Further, it examines the intertwined connection between oxidative stress, cardiovascular disorders such as hypertension, and the occurrence and course of obstructive sleep apnea. It also provides pulmonologists with valuable information on the diagnosis and treatment of patients with severe airway obstruction or respiratory tract infections. Other topics covered include viral infections of the airways, such as influenza, particularly in high-risk groups like pediatric populations, as well as psychosocial aspects, e.g., quality of life in lung cancer patients. Combining basic science and clinical practice, the articles provide key insights and highlight the areas of still limited understanding of disease processes. Stimulating new directions in clinical practice, this collection of articles is intended for respiratory physicians, clinical experts, family practitioners, and all allied healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    Spirometry: a Need for Periodic Updates of National Reference Values
    Age at Menarche and Risk of Respiratory Diseases
    Effects of Osteopathic Manual Therapy on Hyperinflation in Patients with Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease: A Randomized Cross-over Study
    Oxidative Stress Markers and Severity of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Prevalence and Risk of Obstructive Sleep Apnea and Arterial Hypertension in the Adult Population in Poland: An Observational Subset of the International Prospective Urban Rural Epidemiology (PURE) Study
    Strategies of Coping with Pain: Differences Associated with the Histological Type of Lung Cancer
    Chest Radiography in Children Hospitalized with Bronchiolitis
    Evaluation of the 2017/18 Influenza Epidemic Season in Poland Based on the SENTINEL Surveillance System
    Occurrence of Influenza Hemagglutinin Antibodies in the Polish Population during the Epidemic Season 2017/18
    Respiratory Virus Infections in People over 14 Years of Age in Poland in the Epidemic Season of 2017/18.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Paolo Salvi.
    Summary: This new, revised and updated edition takes into account the most recent advances in the understanding of human pathophysiology. The book presents the complex basic principles of vascular hemodynamics and its pathophysiology in a direct and effective way, stressing the importance of the mechanical properties of large arteries in the origin of blood pressure. The readily understandable text, supported by helpful images, describes the elements that define blood pressure and explains such important concepts as pulse wave velocity, central blood pressure, reflected waves, and pulse pressure amplification. Entirely new chapters are included on the sympathetic nervous system and arterial stiffness and on the role played by arterial stiffness in influencing blood pressure variability. The book will enable the physician to answer some of the key questions encountered when addressing the problem of arterial hypertension in everyday clinical practice: How is blood pressure generated? How should blood pressure values be interpreted? Is systolic blood pressure of greater importance than diastolic blood pressure?

    Contents:
    1 Blood Pressure and Vascular Hemodynamics
    2 Pulse Wave Velocity and Arterial Stiffness Assessment
    3 Arterial Stiffness and Blood Pressure Variability
    4 Central Blood Pressure: Part 1, pathophysiology
    5 Central Blood Pressure: Part 2, Pulse Wave Analysis
    6 Aortic Stiffness and Myocardial Ischemia
    7 Arterial Stiffness in Chronic Kidney Disease
    8 Pulse Wave Velocity and Pulse Wave Analysis in Experimental Animals.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    A. Manickavasagan, Praveena Thirunathan, editors.
    Summary: World health authorities recommend people maximize their protein intake through vegetable sources (such as pulses), and reduce protein intake from animal sources. Increasing vegetable protein intake has been shown to be positively associated with the reduction of both cardiovascular-disease-related mortality and all-cause mortality. Pulse consumption has been shown to improve satiety and metabolism of glucose and lipids, due to their high protein and fiber content, which makes their consumption ideal for preventing and managing obesity. In recent years, there has been increasing demand for pulses and pulse-based products in developed countries. Several large-scale collaborative research projects on pulse products have been initiated by government agencies. Similarly, established multinational food companies have developed pulse product units. Pulses: Processing and Product Development fulfills the need for a comprehensive book on processing and products of pulses. The book addresses a specific pulse with each chapter to meet a wide range of audiences from undergraduate students to consumers.

    Contents:
    Adzuki bean
    Bambara groundnut
    Broad bean
    Chickpea
    Common bean
    Cowpea
    Hyacinth bean
    Lentil
    Lima bean
    Lupines
    Moth bean
    Mung bean
    Mungo bean
    Pea
    Pigeon pea
    Rice bean
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ricardo Gattas, Juliana G.M. Soares, Bruss Lima.
    Summary: This book discusses the hypothesis that the primate pulvinar contains an original scaffold which is derived from cytoarchitectural markers and specific protein distributions. Thereafter, along primate evolution, different selective pressures acted in order to shape and fine-tune the connectivity of the pulvinar with specific regions of the neocortex. This divergence created, among other things, the different sets of retinotopic map representations in the pulvinar nucleus depending on functional and behavioral requirements of each species. The pulvinar, the largest nucleus of the primate thalamus, has extensive and reciprocal connections with several areas of the neocortex. These input-output loops suggest that the pulvinar may regulate the flow of information within and between cortical areas in a highly dynamic fashion. Therefore, understanding the anatomical subdivisions within the pulvinar, and its connectivity with the cortex, is paramount to understanding pulvinar physiological function. However, there is a stark contrast regarding the way that the pulvinar is subdivided depending on the technique employed. Cytoarchitectural and immunohistochemical methods reveal a very similar pattern of pulvinar subdivision across Old- and New-World monkeys. On the other hand, electrophysiological and connectivity studies expose clear discrepancies in pulvinar organization across primate evolution.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Cytoarchitecture and myeloarchitecture of the pulvinar
    Chapter 3: Chemoarchitecture of the pulvinar
    Chapter 4: Visual map representations in the primate pulvinar
    Chapter 5: Connectivity of the pulvinar
    Chapter 6: Reestablishing the chemoarchitectural borders based on electrophysiological and connectivity data
    Chapter 7: Visual topography of the pulvinar projection zones
    Chapter 8: Comparative pulvinar organization across different primate species
    Chapter 9: Response properties of pulvinar neurons studied with single unit electrophysiological recordings
    Chapter 10: Modulation of pulvinar neuronal activity by arousal
    Chapter 11: Gaba inactivation of the pulvinar
    Chapter 12: The role of the pulvinar in spatial visual attention.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Joachim P. Sturmberg, editor.
    Summary: This idea-packed resource takes systems and complexity sciences out of blue-sky territory and into the concrete world of contemporary healthcare practice. Beginning with a new reframing of health and illness, its chapters redesign traditional disease-centered models of care into modern, health-centered -- and patient-centered -- health service systems. The approaches shown here combine innovation and common sense to recognize and attend to patients' needs across areas including health education and training, information accessibility, health service organization and delivery, and disease in individual context. The variety of solutions applied to this wide spectrum of issues shows the suitability of systems, complexity, and adaptive thinking to the ongoing objectives of making health services more responsive, effective, and equitable. Highlights of the coverage: Healthy smoker: an oxymoron? Maybe, but it is more complicated than thatTransforming monitoring and improving care with variability-derived clinical decision supportLinking Gulf War illness to genome instability, somatic evolution, and complex adaptive systemsComplexity of knowledge in primary care: understanding the discipline's requisite knowledge: a bibliometric studyNew ways of knowing and researching: integrating complexity into a translational health sciences program Understanding the emergency department ecosystem using agent-based modelling Putting Systems and Complexity Sciences into Practice is an inspiring idea book that sill interest health policymakers, health financiers, organizational leaders, healthcare administrators, clinicians, researchers, students, and interested lay readers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ajay Ohri.
    Summary: Short on theory and long on actionable analytics, this definitive guide provides readers with a detailed comparative introduction and overview of both languages and features concise tutorials with command-by-command translations of R to Python and Python to R. -- Edited summary from book.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Python R and data science
    Data input
    Data inspection and manipulation
    Exploratory data analysis
    Statistical modeling
    Data visualization
    Machine learning and data mining.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Lane Library Bookmarklet

To install, drag this button to your browser bookmarks or tools bar.

What is it?

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Bookmark on Other Websites

Bookmark on Lane

  • To Install, Right Click this Button.
  • Select "Add to Favorites" (click “Continue” if you see a security alert)
  • From the "Create in" menu, select “Favorites Bar” (IE8, IE9) to install
  • Once installed it will look like this
  • Click "Bookmark on Lane" to bookmark any webpage
  • Your saved bookmark will appear on this page
To Install, Right Click this Button.

What is it?

Beyond Stanford

Derived from Current Medical Diagnosis & Treatment, AccessMedicine's Quick Medical Diagnosis & Treatment provides topic reviews with key diagnostic and treatment features for more than 500 diseases.

A repository of medical knowledge from internal medicine, cardiology, genetics, pharmacy, diagnosis and management, basic sciences, patient care, and more.

Continuously expanding, all databases in the repository contain the latest editions of selected medical titles.

MicroMedex: Premier pharmaceutical information source containing multiple databases and drug reference tools. Of particular value is DRUGDEX Evaluations, one of the most comprehensive drug sources available. DynaMed is a clinical information resource used to answer questions quickly at the point-of-care. Easy-to-interpret Levels of Evidence help clinicians rapidly determine the quality of the available evidence.

Biomedical and pharmacological abstracting and indexing database of published literature, by Elsevier. Embase® contains over 32 million records from over 8,500 currently published journals (1947-present) and is noteworthy for its extensive coverage of the international pharmaceutical and alternative/complementary medicine literature.

Scopus is the largest abstract and citation database of peer-reviewed literature: scientific journals, books and conference proceedings. A drug information resource containing: American Hospital Formulary System (AHFS), drug formulary for Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH) and Stanford Hospital & Clinics (SHC), Lexi-Drugs (adverse reactions, dosage and administration, mechanism of action, storage, use, and administration information), Lexi-Calc, Lexi-ID, Lexi-I.V. Compatibility (King Guide), Lexi-Interact, and Lexi-PALS. Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature (CINAHL) contains coverage of nursing and allied health literature. A knowledge database that provides access to topic reviews based on over 6000 clinically relevant articles. The evidence-based content, updated regularly, provides the latest practice guidelines in 59 medical specialties. Provides critical assessments of systematic reviews compiled from a variety of medical journals. Selects from the biomedical literature original studies and systematic reviews that are immediately clinically relevant and then summarizes these articles in an enhanced abstract with expert commentary.

Multidisciplinary coverage of over 10,000 high-impact journals in the sciences, social sciences, and arts and humanities, as well as international proceedings coverage for over 120,000 conferences.

Includes cited reference searching, citation maps, and an analyze tool.

Features systematic reviews that summarize the effects of interventions and makes a determination whether the intervention is efficacious or not.

Cochrane reviews are created through a strict process of compiling and analyzing data from multiple randomized control trials to ensure comprehensiveness and reliability.

Provides systematic coverage of the psychological literature from the 1800s to the present through articles, book chapters and dissertations. PIER (Physicians' Information and Education Resource) is a Web-based decision-support tool designed for rapid point-of-care delivery of up-to-date, evidence-based guidance for primary care physicians. Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) provides access to 300,000 controlled trials that have been identified the Cochrane Collaboration. Provides drug information targeted for patients. A continually updating drug monograph. ECRI Guidelines Trust: A comprehensive database of evidence-based clinical practice guidelines and related documents. MedlinePlus: A repository of health information from the National Library of Medicine. Links are from trusted sites. No advertising, no endorsement of commercial companies or products LPCH CareNotes via MicroMedex: Patient education handouts customized by LPCH clinical staff Micromedex Lab Advisor: Evidence based laboratory test information Provides patient handouts from the American Academy of Family Physician.

Largest, broadest eBook package; covers all sciences, as well as technology (including software), medicine, and humanities.

In addition to covering Wiley and Springer, MyiLibrary is also the only provider for Oxford and Cambridge University Press titles. No seat restrictions.

A collection of biomedical books that can be searched directly by concept, and linked to terms in PubMed abstracts.

A web-based, decision support system for infectious diseases, epidemiology, microbiology and antimicrobial chemotherapy. The database, updated weekly, currently includes 337 diseases, 224 countries, 1,147 microbial taxa and 306 antibacterial (-fungal, -parasitic, -viral) agents and vaccines.

Over 10,000 notes outline the status of specific infections within each country.

Large number of high quality software and database programming titles from O'Reilly. Other software titles are also available from Sams and Prentice Hall. Limited to 7 concurrent users. Includes peer-reviewed life science and biomedical research protocols compiled from Methods in Molecular Biology, Methods in Molecular Medicine, Methods in Biotechnology, Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology, Neuromethods, the Biomethods Handbook, the Proteomics Handbook, and Springer Laboratory Manuals. Contains full text access to selected biomedical and nursing books.

Provides online, full-text access to Springer's journal titles as well as journals from other publishers.

Subjects include: life sciences, chemical sciences, environmental sciences, geosciences, computer science, mathematics, medicine, physics and astronomy, engineering and economics. Also includes eBooks.

Collection of over 8 thousand fulltext titles in engineering, math, and basic and applied biomedical research. Coverage is from 1967 to the present. A library of ebooks on a wide array of topics, digitized and made available online in conjunction with the original publishers.